Manual Arco en C Traumato

e Medical Systems
Stenoscop Technical Supplement
HOME
GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series
Technical Supplement
REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-1 Day One - Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-2 Day Two - Tuesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-3 Day Three - Wednesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-4 Day Four - Thursday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-5 Day Five - Friday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5 HAZCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
i
REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 DSM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-1 DSM 200 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-2 Light & Sound Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-4 Types of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-5 Image Managment Controls - Groups 1 & Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-1-6 Memory Management - Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-1-7 Image Processing Functions - Group 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-1 Pulsed Fluoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-2 Electronic Radiography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-3 Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-4 Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-5 Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-6 Stand Alone - DSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
SECTION 7 - THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3 HV CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6 3A19 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-12-1 Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-12-2 Rad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-14 FLUORO TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
ii
REV 3
SECTION PAGE
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-3 Circular Collimators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-16 3A3 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-18 3A5 TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-19 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7-20 TV CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-23 IRIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7-25 1010 FORMATTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-1 Smoothing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-2 V Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-3 H Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-4 CRT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-5 Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
FUSES REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
PWB SWITCHES JOB CARDS RG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
TIME COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
RG 21 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
iii
REV 3
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
iv
REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-2 STENOSCOP LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12-9 SN 4011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12-10 SN 4018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12-11 SN 4024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13-1 SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16-1 DSM 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-1-1 Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16-3 DSM 200 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16-4 DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16-7 DSM 600 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-79
i
REV 1
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
ii
REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
i
REV 1
This page intentionally left blank.
ii
REV 1
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-1 Day One - Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-2 Day Two - Tuesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-3 Day Three - Wednesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-4 Day Four - Thursday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5-5 Day Five - Friday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-1
REV 1
1-2
REV 1
1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION
I,_________________________________________, hereby acknowledge the following with respect to my

(please print)
possession of the GENERAL ELECTRIC PROPRIETARY and/or RESTRICTED SERVICE MATERIALS and I
agree that:
1. Proprietary materials shall at all times remain the property of the GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
and shall be returned by me to the GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY upon termination of my emĆ
ployment with the company or upon the Company's earlier request for the return of this material.
2. My possession and use of these materials are governed by the terms of my employment agreement
with the Company.
The undersigned employee has received the indicated proprietary service manual(s) while attending the
XR012 STENOSCOP II Series class on _____________________.
(date)
Please add these item(s) to your local records of proprietary materials held by this employee.
P/N or Identifier Proprietary Course Material Description
XR012 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series Technical Supplement
I hereby acknowledge receipt of the above item(s) considered proprietary to GE or its vendors.
Student Signature _______________________________________________ Date _____________
(SSAN where appropriate) (Employee Number) (Pouch Mail Code)
....................................................................
Signed this ____________ day of _______________, 19_______.
______________________________________ ___________________________________
EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE MANAGER SIGNATURE
REGION/COUNTRY
______________________________________ ___________________________________
SERVICE ENGINEERING SIGNATURE International, Only,
(for Tab Distribution Authorization) COUNTRY:_________________________
1-3
REV 1
1-4
REV 1
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION
PLEASE FILL IN ALL APPLICABLE BLANKS
Please print name as you wish it to appear on your certificate.
CLASS IN WHICH YOU ARE ENROLLED:
DATE OF COURSE:
1-5
REV 1
1-6
REV 1
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES
GEMS WORKPLACE
VALUING DIVERSITY"
HARASSMENT RECOGNITION
and
PREVENTION
GEMS COMMITMENT
GE Medical Systems is committed to providing a work environment where all employees can reach their
maximum potential. To achieve this, every employee is required to uphold standards of mutual respect and take
responsibility for workplace behavior.
SEXUAL HARASSMENT DEFINED

Unwelcome behavior of a sexual nature constitutes harassment when:
S Submission to such conduct is made, either explicitly or implicitly, a term or condition of an individual's emĆ
ployment.
S Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for employment decisions
affecting such individual.
S Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual's work performance or
creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive working environment.
EXAMPLES OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT
VERBAL
S Referring to an adult as a girl, hunk, doll, babe or honey.
S Whistling at someone, cat calls.
S Making sexual comments or innuendos.
S Telling sexual jokes or stories.
S Asking personal questions about social or sexual life.
S Repeatedly asking out a person who is not interested.
NONVERBAL
S Looking a person up and down (elevator eyes).
S Staring at someone.
S Displaying sexually suggestive visuals.
S Making sexual gestures with hands or body movements.
PHYSICAL
S Touching a person's clothing, hair or body.
S Giving a massage around the neck.
S Standing close or brushing up against a person.
S Grabbing
S Pinching
S Caressing
1-7
REV 1
INTENT vs. IMPACT"

S I didn't mean to offend..." is not an excuse for any form of harassment.
S The intent of the behavior is not the issue.
S We must anticipate the impact a certain behavior will have on a co-worker.
OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT WILL NOT BE TOLERATED

S Any forms of harassment involving race, religion, ethnic background, lifestyle, age, etc. will not be tolerated.
S Every employee is entitled to a hostile free" work environment.
EXAMPLES OF OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT

S Displaying or circulating racial or ethnic jokes.
S Telling jokes or making comments that are derogatory to a particular group.
S Excluding certain employees from work related functions based on race, religion, lifestyle, etc.
ADDRESSING HARASSMENT
If you believe you are the victim of harassment, you are encouraged to come forward without fear of reprisal by:
S Telling Your Manager or Any Member of Management.

S Discuss the incident(s) with any supervisor or manager to strategize a course of action to include the Manager
of Cultural Diversity.
S Telling Your Human Resources Manager and/or the Manager of Cultural Diversity.
S These individuals are trained in dealing with harassment complaints.
S We will work to ensure confidentiality as much as possible.
S After a complete investigation, individuals found to be engaging in any form of harassment will be disciplined.
If you have any questions about work place harassment, please reference GEMS Policy 2.5 and 2.6 or call GEMS
Manager of Cultural Diversity.
1-8
REV 1
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION
COURSE TITLE: XR012 STENOSCOP II Series
DURATION: 5.0
UNIT OF MEASURE: Days
COURSE OWNER: Richard Fillet - GEMS Education Center

PHONE NO. 1-414-574-8780
SUMMARY: A field based course to present the basic operation and theory of the
Stenoscop System. This will include information on the Stenoscop II and the
differents in the 6000/9000 family of products.
COURSEWARE FURNISHED: Technical Supplement Rev. 1

Instructor Guide Rev. 0
Video Tape - XR012 Stenoscop Technologist Training
WHO SHOULD ATTEND: Any FE
TOPICS: Imageur
Stenoscop Generator
Image Quality Tests
PREREQUISITES: In order for this course to be meaningful to you and to fully comprehend the
new concepts presented , you should be:
Number: 01
Thoroughly familiar with the principles of solid state electronics and
microcomputers by having completed MSI courses IC03 and IC35 or having
equivalent technical training.
Number: 02
Familiar with, and having a working knowledge of, single phase x-ray
generators by having completed MSI Course FC17A or having equivalent field
experience.
Number: 03
Familiar with, and have working experience on, x-ray image intensifiers and
image system film recording by having completed MSI course FC-78 or
having equivalent field experience.
Number: 04
Knowledgeable on closed circuit x-ray TV cameras, monitors and associated
optics by having completed MSI course FC-78 or having equivalent field
experience.
1-9
REV 1
COMPETENCIES: Completion of the Stenoscop II Field Training Course should enable you to :
Number: 01
Successfully demonstrate operation of the Stenoscop and its associated DMS
units to your customers' satisfaction as well as achieving quality performance
which meets system expectations.
Number: 02
Describe the major generator operations including: kV, mA, mAs control,
exposure timing & resonant type HV power generation on the Stenoscop and
image processing on the DMS. This will be accomplished by:
⇒ performing the class lab exercises.

⇒ demonstrating how the block diagram functions relate to the actual
schematics.
Show how well you can do routine and periodic maintenance by:
⇒ completing all mechanical and electrical adjustments described in the

Service Manuals.
⇒ the satisfactory completion of a system Functional Check to demonstrate
overall performance meeting the design specifications.
Number: 03
Demonstrate your ability to troubleshoot the Stenoscop by completing with
80% success the troubleshooting bug" exercises assigned by your instructor.
Number: 04
Show the overall comprehension and ability to communicate technical data on
the Stenoscop by correctly answering technical questions raised by your
instructor during the classroom presentations and the successful completion
of any written test presented by your instructor.
1-10
REV 1
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE

1-5-1 Day One - Monday
Morning Review Course Objectives and Pre-Req's

General Introductory information on Stenoscop
Installation: Review Mechanical and Electrical Specs
Power Requirements
Space Requirements
Afternoon Lab Exercise:

Removal of Covers
Functional Check
1-5-2 Day Two - Tuesday
Morning Operation:
Mechanical Controls
Console Controls on Stenoscop, DSM and Matrix 1010
Operating Modes FL, Rad, ER, HLC, SP

Operation Stenoscop, DSM, Matrix 1010
(Optional)
Theory
Block Diagram Analysis
Module 9, 4 and HV Circuits
1-5-3 Day Three - Wednesday
Morning Theory (continued)

3A12, 3A19, ABC Hysteresis and Timer
Display Boards
Afternoon Theory (continued)

3A7, 3A9, 3A26 Boards
1-5-4 Day Four - Thursday

3A3, 1A1, 3A5, 3A1, TV Camera and Imager
Afternoon Theory (continued)
TV Camera, Iris, DSM
Lab Exercises:
All mechanical and electrical adjustments
required for board replacement
1-5-5 Day Five - Friday

DSM Monitors, Matrix 1010
DSM Diagnostics
Visiplex
Distar Monitor
DSM Operation
DSM Diagnostics
Troubleshooting Exercises
1-11
REV 1
1-12
REV 1
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM
NAME/ PAY#: COURSE: XR012 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000

Series
REGION/COUNTRY: INSTRUCTOR(S):
SERVICE MANAGER: COURSE DATE:
Your employee has been evaluated by the instructor(s) on the competencies listed below. An X" in the YES"
column indicates the instructor observed the student completing the competency to his/her satisfaction either
individually or as part of a lab group. An X" in the NO" column indicates the competency was not achieved.
Comments are provided for each competency to provide additional explanations where needed. All NO" answers
require an explanation.
COMPETENCIES YES NO COMMENTS

01 Successfully demonstrate
operation of the Stenoscop and its
associated DMS units to your
customers' satisfaction as well as
achieving quality performance
which meets system expectations.
02 Describe the major generator

operations including: kV, mA, mAs
control, exposure timing &
resonant type HV power
generation on the Stenoscop and
image processing on the DMS.
Perform routine and periodic
maintenance.
03 Demonstrate your ability to

troubleshoot the Stenoscop by
completing with 80% success the
troubleshooting bug" exercises
assigned by your instructor.
04 Show the overall comprehension

and ability to communicate
technical data on the Stenoscop
by correctly answering technical
questions raised by your instructor
during the classroom
presentations and the successful
completion of any written test
presented by your instructor.
1-13
REV 1
1-14
REV 1
1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM

COURSE START DATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YOUR NAME
MONTH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DAY 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 INSTRUCTOR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
YEAR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LOCATION
REGION / COUNTRY CODE

CM = CROSS MODALITY
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CT = COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MG = MANAGEMENT
MR = MAGNETIC RESONANCE
COURSE ID# NU - NUCLEAR
RO = RADIATION ONCOLOGY
CM CT MG MR NU RO SS US XR SS = SOFT SKILLS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 US = ULTRASOUND
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 XR = X-RAY
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Please use this scale in your

answer to the questions listed:
unsatisfactory 1
needs improvement 2
meets expectations 3
exceeds expectations 4
superior 5
COURSE FEEDBACK
1. 1 2 3 4 5 Did the course teach the competencies described in the course

description? Comments:
2. 1 2 3 4 5 I can perform with minimal assistance the competencies taught in this course
Comments:
3. 1 2 3 4 5 How do you rate you instructor's overall performance? Comments:
4. 1 2 3 4 5 Was your instructor helpful in providing answers to your

questions? Comments:
5. 1 2 3 4 5 Did your instructor appear technically competent? Comments:
6. 1 2 3 4 5 All things considered, how do you rate this course? Comments
What did you especially like about this course?
In what way would you improve this course?

1-15
REV 1
1-16
REV 1
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5 HAZCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-1
REV 1
2-2
REV 1
2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY

X-RAY MODALITY - REVISED 11/19/91
PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to ensure that each member of the staff of the GEMS Education Center and that
each student in attendance at GEMS Education Center, be made knowledgeable of the x-radiation requirements
set forth herein. These requirements shall be binding upon all users of x-ray generating devices housed at the
GEMS Education Center.
DEFINITIONS
APRON, PROTECTIVE:
Apron made of radiation absorbing materials, used to reduce ionizing radiation exposure.
ATTENUATION:
The reduction of exposure rate upon passage of radiation through matter.
GLOVE, PROTECTIVE:
A glove made of radiation absorbing materials, used to reduce radiation exposure.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE EQUIVALENT (MPD):
The maximum dose equivalent that a person, or specified parts of a person, shall receive in a stated period
of time.
RADIATION:
Energy propagated through space; in this document, x-rays.
RADIATION INSTALLATION:
Radiation sources, with associated equipment, and the space in which it is located.
RADIATION, SCATTERED:
Radiation that, in it's passage through matter, has been deviated in direction.
RADIATION, SECONDARY:
Radiation emitted by an irradiated material.
REM:
The unit of dose equivalent. For this document, the number of rems may be considered equal to the number
of roentgens.
ROENTGEN:
The special unit of exposure; the exposure required to produce in air 2.58 x 10-4 coulombs of ions of either
sign per kilogram of air.
SHIELDING, PORTABLE:
A moveable screen, or similar device, constructed of radiation absorbing material used to reduce radiation
exposure.
SHIELDING, STRUCTURAL:
The radiation absorbing qualities of the materials used in the construction of the various parts of a building.
USEFUL BEAM (PRIMARY BEAM):
Radiation which passes through the window, aperture, cone or other collimating device of the source
housing; sometimes referred to as the primary beam".
GENERAL STATEMENT
The generation of x-rays will be made by all persons at GEMS Education Center:
at the lowest KVP,
at the lowest MA,
for the shortest time,
the fewest number of times,
providing the greatest person-to-tube distance,
utilizing the most radiation protection possible,
consistent with the tasks at hand.
The instructors at the GEMS Education Center will ensure that x-rays will be directed at the floor or at the ceiling of a
room, NEVER at a room wall.
2-3
REV 1
GEMS EDUCATION CENTER LICENSE

The license granted by the State of Wisconsin allowing the GEMS Education Center to function as a radiation
installation is an INDUSTRIAL LICENSE. This license does not provide for the application of x-rays to any part of
any person. Therefore, taking x-rays of any part of a person is ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.
BADGING
The staff and students at GEMS Education Center shall wear radiation badges which are monitored at regular
intervals. The badge is to worn at the neck level. A badge must be supplied to any student who has not brought their
personal badge. The badges monitor Occupational exposure not Medical exposure. Consequently the badge is
removed when x-rays prescribed by your doctor are taken.
SHIELDING
Lead shielding is provided, where needed, in the walls of the x-ray rooms at the GEMS Education Center. In normal
use, consistent with the directives contained herein, occupants of rooms adjoining x-ray rooms are adequately
protected from secondary radiation and scatter.
Protective aprons and gloves are provided in x-ray rooms and will be worn during fluoroscopic or image intensified
observations when the operator is not protected by screens or other shielding.
Some equipment has protective devices built in, such as the longitudinal shield in the RFX table. This additional
protection and any other such protection devices provided on the equipment, will be utilized when possible.
CRITICAL CONTROL
When making x-rays, an indication (can be audio or visual, for example, a sonalert, sign, light, etc) must be present
to warn visitors that x-rays are being made.
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT OPERATION

Portable x-ray equipment, such as the AMX will be operated only in areas designated by the Instructor. Adequate
shielding must be provided.
X-RAY BEAM ATTENUATION

During adjustment procedures or demonstrations, it may be necessary to energize an x-ray tube with no intention
of actually making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume that x-ray will be generated anyway and therefore
attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator blades when provided on the equipment. If such attenuating
devices are not present, lead aperture caps made of 1/8" lead sheets will be used to absorb the primary beams.
UNATTENDED GENERATORS
The nature of instruction at the GEMS Education Center allows a student to apply power to a generator, perform his
tasks, then leave the generator power on for the next person in line, and so on. It is therefore, impractical to require
the person who turns a generator on to also turn it off, as normal practices usually require. At GEMS Education
Center, the last person using the equipment must turn it off. Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as
required.
CONCLUSION
Each staff member and student at the GEMS Education Center, is required to read this document and is further
asked to sign their name to the form provided, attesting to the fact that they have read and understand this direction.
Routine unscheduled audits will be made by GEMS safety/managerial personnel.
2-4
REV 1
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD
THE RULES FOR TOTAL CONTROL:

1. TRANSPORT ALL STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS IN STATIC SHIELDING CONTAINERS.
2. HANDLE STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AT A STATIC SAFEGUARDED WORK AREA.
3. CONNECT WRIST STRAP AND ESD MAT TO EQUIPMENT GROUND POTENTIAL.
4. TREAT DAMAGED BOARDS WITH THE SAME ESD PRECAUTIONS AS WITH NEW BOARDS.
DEFINITIONS
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) - the rapid movement of electrons which occurs when an electrically charged object
comes near, or in contact with, another object which has the capacitance to accept or give off electrons.
ESD Susceptible Devices - components or assemblies that contain: semiconductors such as IC's, transistors,
diodes, precision resistor networks, etc ... that may be damaged or degraded by electrostatic discharge.
ESD Damage - the immediate failure or long term degradation of electronic components such as chips.
ESD Protective Bag - is a static shielding bag such as the metalized" layer type. Pink or blue anti-static wrapping
materials are not acceptable.
ESD Work Environment - an established ESD area which includes a conductive attachment to connect the F.E. and
the work mat, to the ground potential of the equipment being serviced.
REMEMBER ! YOU CAN'T:

Feel a static discharge until 3,000 volts
Hear a static discharge until 5,000 volts
See a static discharge until 10,000 volts
EQUIPMENT VERIFICATION:
The current plan is to replace all wrist straps and cords annually.
Wrist strap cords shall have the small tags installed with date of first use visible on it.
The ESD mats contained in the ESD kit will only be replaced when damaged.
The only check for the ESD mat is to visually check for damage and cleanliness, and to ohm out the connecting lead
from the alligator clip to the button on the mat (checking for approximately 1 to 2 Meg ohms). This can be done with
each use, with the minimum requirement being quarterly.
The large ESD kit verification stickers shall be placed on an out of the way area of the mat, and the information
entered on it at the time of each check.
More information on ESD procedures can be found in FSP14.
PART NUMBERS:
ESD Kit (includes mat) 46-194427P231
Wrist Grounding Strap 46-198094P1
Service Vacuum w/wrist strap receptacle 46-194427P278
Floor mat for permanent installation under consoles TC400136
Sticker for ESD mat verification F4898X
2-5
REV 1
2-6
REV 1
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS
April 26, 1993
To: All Milwaukee Area Employees
Subject: Spill of Blood/Bodily Fluids
In the event of a spill of blood or other bodily fluid, please:
1. Do not touch or attempt to clean the area unless you have received
specific training on cleaning up this type of spill.
2. Notify the health clinic or facility safety/maintenance personnel so the

area can be isolated to prevent tracking the material to other areas.
3. If possible, prevent other employees from touching the fluid until

safety/maintenance personnel arrive to secure the area.
Following these simple procedures is essential to the health and safety of all GEMS
employees. Please be aware of their importance.
Sincerely,
R. S. Monk, M.D.
Medical Director
NOTIFY FRONT OFFICE ABOUT SPILL OF BLOOD/BODILY FLUIDS
2-7
REV 1
2-8
REV 1
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER
Purpose To raise the level of sensitivity and awareness concerning electrical safety.
How Use LOTO tools as dictated by the conditions encountered during all lab exercises. If a system
is to be locked out and there are three members on the lab team there will be three locks installed.
Tools Do you have your tools with you? You will need
> Lock
> Multiple lockout device
> Red warning tag
2-9
REV 1
2-10
REV 1
2-5 HAZCOM
S Locations of Right to Know" holders.
DETAILS WILL BE PROVIDED IN CLASS
2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL
S Aluminum Cans
Please put empty Aluminum cans in the containers set aside for recycling the Aluminum cans.
S Paper
Containers for recycling writing paper, etc., are available in the classrooms. When you discard this type
of paper, please put it in the classroom paper recycling container. Plastic 3 ring binders are also
recycled. The instructor will put the binder in the recycling bin located on the dock.
S Cardboard
Cardboard boxes are left outside the classroom door for pick up by the cleaners. Please put empty
cardboard containers outside the classroom door.
S Heavy Metals
All metal (other than Aluminum Cans), circuit boards, wire, etc., should be given to the instructor, who
will put the items in the recycling bin located on the dock. Films contain heavy metals and a recycle bin
for films is located by each film processor.
S Trash
Please use the waste baskets for the biodegradable items. Plastic soda bottles can be put in the waste
basket.
2-11
REV 1
2-12
REV 1
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES
GENERAL
D There must be at least two (2) people present during a.m. and p.m. lab exercises.
D When connecting test equipment, power MUST be turned off.
D Never hold meters in hand when measuring (see LFX Power Unit in lab).
D Make sure test equipment is of the proper type, and properly set-up prior to making any measurements.
D Jewelry should be removed or taped before working on any equipment.
D Radiation Badges
1. Wear on the collar
2. Will be worn at all times
D Recreational Activities
1. Type activities
2. Warmup
3. Cool down
COURSE SPECIFIC
2-13
REV 1
2-14
REV 1
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-1
REV 1
3-2
REV 1
3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION
The Stenoscop II Series line of mobile intra-operative x-ray systems are designed for the widest range of surgical
procedures requiring fluoroscopy, including general surgery, orthopedics and trauma. Available with the latest
advancements in digital processing, the Stenoscop offers the great flexibility in live and digitally stored imaging
along with dose reduction through display of stored images.
Basically the Stenoscop II Series consist of an X-ray Generator, an Image Intensifier System with closed circuit TV
all mounted on a mobile support. Two TV monitors along with a Digital Processor (for processing and storage of up
to 200 images) are supported on a separate mobile cart. The mobile cart can also house Imagers (Format Cameras
- either film and/or paper copy) and a Video Tape Recorder.
The Stenoscop II Series is capable of producing manual or Auto Fluoro Imaging, Standard Radiographic, Electronic
Radiographic, and Pulsed Fluoro Imaging.
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP
For moving the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
- vertical C-Arm" - amplifier upwards

- zigzag movement centered
- C-Arm retracted as far as possible toward the console
- column low position
- movements locked
- blocking system of side wheels in free" position
- foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES. FOR DISPLACEMENT ON A
SLOPE, THE OPERATOR MUST GO IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND
MUST GET A SECOND PERSON TO HELP HIM.
3-3
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 3.2
3-4
NUMEROS
POS COMPOSANTS TYPE MODELE (USA)
A FRAME – CONTROL CONSOLE 828 490 ZF0XCST2

B X R HEAD 828 520 ZH0HTST2
C COLLIMATOR for IMAGER 16 cm (6”) 828 751 G 015 Z0A16ST2
22 cm (9”) 828 752 G 015 Z0A22ST2
D CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 16 cm (6”)
24 x 30 cm 830 534 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 535 G 015 Z0L16ST2
CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 22 cm (9”)
24 x 30 cm 830 536 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 537 G 015 Z0L22ST2
E IMAGER 16 cm (6”) 860 926 P 015 ZI016ST2
22 cm (9”) 860 926 P 025 ZI022ST2
16cm (6”) CDRH 860 926 P 035 ZI016ST2
22cm (9”) CDRH 860 926 P 045 ZI022ST2
F MONITORS CART
3–1–4 Travel conditions
To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
– vertical ”C–Arm” – imager upwards
– ”wigwag” movement centered
– C–Arm retracted as far as possible toward the consol
– column low position
– movements locked
– blocking system of side wheels in ”free” position
– foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.
FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND
THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.
3-5
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 828 978 G025
3-6
3–2 CONNECTION THE SUPPLY
The mobile is factory wired for :

228V/50Hz single – phase networks (Europe)
OR 208V/60Hz single – phase networks (U.S.A.)
A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitor
For the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.
3–2–1 NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE
3–2–1–1 9TR1 TRANSFORMER
The network adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 1–10)

Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to the
mains voltage and frequency.
RESEAU – MAINS SUPPLY

Fil marqué FREQ
240V 228 V 220 V 208 V 200 V
* * *
120V 108 V 100V
Marqued wire
BORNES 9TR1 – 9TR1 TERMINALS
Adaptation 50Hz 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Frequence A
Frequency 60Hz 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Adaptation
Adaptation B 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 3
Tension
Voltage Pontage C 4–5 4–6 4–7 4–6 4–7 4–8 4–8 4–8
Adaptation Jumper C
Pontage D 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 1–5 2–6 3–7
Jumper D
*For the networks 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.
The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B (2–7)
(diagram 117F)
S133.B OFF Normal power
S133.B ON Reduced power
*For the networks 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additional resis-
tor 9R2, see diagram 1–10b–2A
Connect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.
Réseau 220V à 240V Réseau 100V à 120V

220V to 240V Mains 100V to 120V Mains
1 9R1 2 1 9R1 2
Pontage Pontage
1 9R1 2 Jumper 1 9R1 2 Jumper
3-7
Locking rood
9Sm1
ON / OFF
9PL1
3-8
3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE
For the mobile units wired for 208V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.
For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.
According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :
blue wire : 228V
brown wire : 228V
yellow/green wire : earth
3–3 INTERCONNECTION
– Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.
Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.
– Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).
– Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.
3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.
3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN
For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheath
situated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.
The bar must be removed to allow the column to move.
To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.
This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.
ATTENTION!
It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported.
To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).
3-9
REV 1
3-10
REV 1
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1
REV 1
4-2
Module 8
Module 2
Module 3
Module 7
Module 4
Module 6 Module 5
Module 1
Module 9
9TR1
4-3
REV 1 Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5-ii
ILLUSTRATION 11
E–G
B D
F
Position de transport Dictionnaire de traduction française des plaques

signalétiques
Driving position
Classification A – PLAQUES D’IDENTIFICATION PRODUIT
MANUFACTURED DATE DE FABRICATION
Appareil de type B ayant un degré approprié de
protection contre les chocs électriques, en ce LOCATION LIEU DE FABRICATION
qui concerne notamment TYPE TYPE
. Les courants de fuites admissibles (<2 mA) S.N MATRICULE
. La fiabilité de la liaison de terre de protection B – PLAQUE DE SPECIFICATION GAINE / TUBE
Type B equipment providing an adequate de- HOUSING GAINE
gree of protection against electric shock partic- NOM. VOLTAGE TENSION NOM.
ulary regarding
INH. FILTR. FILTR. INHERENTE
. Allowable leakage current (< 2mA) ADD. FILTR. FILTR. ADDITION
. Reliability of the protective earth connection INSERT TUBE
Précautions avant usage FOCAL SPOT FOYERS
C – PLAQUE DE SPECIFICATION GENERATEUR
voir avertissement en tête de ce manuel
AMP MOMENTARY AMP INSTANTANE
Precautions before operation AMP LONG TERM AMP NOMINAL
see the ”warning” front page of this manual CONFORMITE AUX NORMES
L’arceau, le bloc radiogène et l’imageur sont STENOSCOP 828490 CEI 601–2–7/1986
certifiés ”AP” Complies with DHHS radiation performance standards
Ceci signifie que seuls ces éléments de l’équi- 21 CFR subchapter J (north american)
pement peuvent être utilisés entre 5 et 25 cm UL – CSA (north american)
NF 74–100–102–111 CEI 601–2–7
d’une enceinte gazeuse fermée à usage médi-
cal. Courant de fuite à la terre
The C–Arm, the X–Ray tube head and the
imager are ”AP” certified. This means that Conforme avec les normes IEC 601–2–7
only these parts of the equipment can be uti- (Classe 1 – Type B) et NFPA (US)
lized between 5 and 25 cm of an inclosed med- Earth Leakage Current
ical gaz system
Complies with Norms IEC 601–2–7
Terre de protection – Safety ground (Class I – Type B) and NFPA (US)
4-4
REV 1 Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5-1
5. CHARACTERISTICS
5.1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1.1 Certification and identification labels

(see illustration 11)
A Tube housing assembly
B Image intensifier
C X–ray control
D Cassette holder.
E F G Classification, certification, caution : illustration 11
5.1.2 Mobile Unit

Length : 249 cm (98”) with full extension of C–arm holder.
– transit position
Width : 80.4 cm (31.7”).
Height : 176 cm (69.4”) with 16 cm (6”) II (transit position)
178 cm (70”) with 22 cm (9”) II (transit position)
Rear wheels locking footswitch : – complete lock

– free wheels
– transverse lock
Front steerable wheel : rotate + /– 90o.
The unit weighs 209 kg (461 Lbs) standard
239 kg (528 Lbs) US version
4-5
5.1.3 X–Ray tube head and collimator
The X–ray tube HD 281 is in a STENIX housing of the following dimensions:
Width : 16.5 cm (6.5”).
Height : 42.5 cm (16.7”) with 22 cm skin guard
52.5 cm (20.7”) with 32 cm skin guard (USA and CANADA)
Length : 39.8 cm (15.7”).
The tube has a double focus, 0.5 x 0.5 mm and 1.8 x 1.8 mm and a stationary anode.
The 0.5 mm focus is selected to provide the best possible resolution in fluoroscopy.
The 1.8 mm focus provides good radiographic resolution
The red point on the X–ray tube head shows the localization of the focus.
Leakage technique factor : 110 kVp – 1 mA.
Filtration : HVL = 2.65 mm Al minimum at 71 KV
( ~ equal to 3 mm Al. minimum)
A removable skin guard is provided to increase minimum focal spot to skin distance to 30 cm (available in
some countries.)
5.1.4 Motor–driven vertical travel of the C–Arm

Total travel : 46.4 cm (18.3 ”) with 16 cm (6”) I.I.
Automatic stop at lower and upper limits.
5.1.5 Wigwag of C–Arm assembly

Travel : 2 x 12,5 degrees; manual lock.
5.1.6 In–Out motion of C–Arm assembly

Travel : 20 cm + /– 1 cm (7.9” + /– 0.4”); manual lock
5.1.7 C–Arm
The C–arm has a depth of 58.4 cm (23”) from the primary beam to the arc and a free space opening of 70 cm
(27.6”) from the patient guard to the image intensifier.
4-6
5.1.8 C–Arm rotation about the horizontal axis

Rotation viewed from control console side : 290o clock wise.
120o counterclock wise
Manual lock.
5.1.9 Orbital rotation of C–Arm

Image Intensifier 16 cm (6”) and Stenoscop L E
Motion: 115o (25o beyond vertical); manual lock.
Image Intensifier 22 cm (9”)

Motion : 105o (15o beyond vertical); manual lock
5.1.10 Dimensions and weight of the TV monitor

45.7 cm (18”) width x 36.8 cm (14.5”) high x 35.6 cm (14”) depth – screen diagonal 48 cm (19”)
– 20 kg (44 lbs)
5.1.11 Radiographic cassette holder and grid

4 types are available, for all combinations
16 or 22 cm I.I. and for 24 x 30 cm or 9.5” x 9.5” cassettes.
Rem : In some countries, the cassette holder is delivered as an option.
A radiographic grid can be delivered as an option :
For 24 x 30 cm cassettes : ration 8:1, 70 lpi

For 9.5” x 9.5” cassettes : ratio 10:1, 112 lpi
Warning : CDRH compliance requires the use of cassettes 9.5” x 9.5” in the US.
Remark :
The cassette holders are compatible with cassette in compliance with IEC 406 norm.
4-7
5.1.12 Environmental specification :

complete unit, all options included
– Operating temperature : 10oC to 40oC non condensing
– Operating temperature variation : up to 10oC/HR permissible.
– Storage temperature : – 10oC to 70oC non condensing
– Transportation temperature : – 10oC to 70oC non condensing
– Pressure : in operation : 700 to 1060 mB
– Storage and transportation : 500 to 1060 mB
5.1.13 Heat dissipation:

maximum heat dissipation into the surrounding air.
For unit with two TV monitors and a video imager.

– Standby : 475W
– In fluoroscopy : (110 kV – 4.5 mA) – 1250W
– In radiography : 5800 W
5.1.14 Transport on inclines
In the most unfavorable conditions of utilization, the mobile surgical unit becomes unstable on inclines
greater than 5o.
4-8
5.2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.1 Generalities.
The power supply requirements are 100, 108, 120, 200, 208, 220, 228, 240V (switched at installation).
Tolerance +/– 10%, 50/60 Hz – single phase.
MAXIMUM LINE IMPEDANCE
100 108 120 200 208 220 228 240 Volts

0.14 0.16 0.20 0.33 0.36 0.40 0.44 0.48 Ohms
Automatic line voltage compensation.
Typical line current for different conditions of use are as follows (tolerances are in the range of +/– 20%).
Currents listed below are for the basic generator unit equipped with two TV monitors, one memory and a
video imager.
Line current
A) For 208 V, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.36 Ohm (6% line regulation) – 20 A
type TT fuses (slow blow).
Fluoro 90 kV/5.5 mA line I = 8 Amp max
Rad 49 kV/60 mA line I = 38 Amp max
B) For 120 V, 50 or 60 Hz (reduced power, see para. 5.4.2)
line regulation 6%
line resistance 0.20 Ohm – 20 A fuses Type TT(slow blow).
Fluoro 90 kV/5.5 mA line I = 12 Amp max
4-9
C) For 100V and 108V – 25 A fuses Type TT (slow blow)
The earth leakage current, is in accordance with standard IEC 601–2–7, (class 1, type B).
In the US, earth leakage current complies with 60 NFPA requirements.

Limits of utilization – see § 5.4.2
Note : Fuses of a rating higher than recommanded above may be required in some countries.
The unit is furnished with a power cable of adequate length.

CAUTION The replacement of this cable by a longer cable may produce a non compliance
with standard and increase the earth leakage current.
The use of an extension cable is not recommended : if one must be provisionally
used, the section of wires be 2.5 mm2 minimum and an earth ground wire is
mandatory.
The specified impedance line correspond to the end of the extension cable (female
plug).
Protection fuses
All protection fuses are only accessible by service engineer. See Service manual.
4-10
5.2.2 Image intensifier

The power supply is a high stability solid state model.
Single field dual field
Specification 6” Normal 9” Magn 6”
Typical conversion factor cdń(m) 2 150 180

mRńs
Typical contrast ratio 20/1 21/1 22/1
Input field diameter 15 cm 22 cm 16 cm
Typical central resolution 44 lp/cm 44 lp/cm

51 lp/cm
Built–in grid 90L/inch 90 L/inch

8:1 10:1
Radiation safety fully shielded
Anode voltage 30 kV
5.2.3 TV Camera
Scan rate 525/625 lines (50/60 Hz)
Interlace 2:1
Bandwidth 50 Hz to 7 MHz +/– 1 dB
10 MHz +/– 3 dB
Blanking Circular
Video output 1 Volt, 75 Ohms, peak–to–peak
4-11
5.2.4 TV monitor
Horizontal scan 525/625 lines (60/50 Hz)
Vertical scan 100/120Hz (50/60Hz)
Interlace 2:1 (50.8 cm)
Image tube 19” diagonal
Brightness and contrast controls on rear panel of monitor
Caution :
The ”video outputs” of the unit or options must not be considered as output signals.
It is strictly prohibited to use them for any purposes other that those designed by the manufacturer.
5.2.5 DSM Memory
– DSM Processor equipped with storage capacity of 8 (volatile) images or 600 images according
to option.
Power supply (internally provided).
Processing in 12 bits
Analog/digital converter 14.75 MHz
Storage capacity : eight 576 x 576 volatile images
two held images and six stored images
Mass memory : 600 images (optional) on hard disk.
TV Monitor output : 100Hz / 120Hz
4-12
5.3 MAXIMUM DEVIATION DATA

DEVIATION DATA OF THIS PARAGRAPH ARE PROVIDED FOR COMPLIANCE TO SOME
STANDARDS
Factor Range Deviation Measurements Basis
Rad kVp 40–55 kV +/ 20% Direct kVp measurement is not

–
55–110 kVp +/ 10% possible. See 5.3.2
–
Rad mAs 0.16 to 160 mAs +/

– (10% + 0.2 mAs) mAs meter. See 5.3.2
Fluoro kVp 40 –50 kV +/ 20% Direct measurement of kV is not

55–110 kVp +/
– 10% possible. See 5.3.2
Fluoro mA 0.1–6 mA +/
– (10% + 0.2 mA) mA meter. See 5.3.2
Fluoro time 4 min.30 +/

– 15 s Stop watch.
In the radiographic mode, all mA values are typical.
The tolerance is +/– 20% after an initial transient period of less than 0.2 s.
5.3.1 Conditions for accurate measurement

1.Unit switched on for 15 minutes.
2.Line voltage: see section 5.2.1
3.Unit installed and adjusted in accordance with Service Manual.
4.Preventive maintenance carried out by the owner as specified.
5.3.2 Measurement base
High Voltage : Measurement is carried out with a non invasive kVp meter based on the X–ray radiation
wavelength distribution. See service manual.
X–Ray tube current : Obtained by measuring the rectified secondary current in the high voltage
transformer in the tube head. See service manual.
In fluoroscopy, this current is indicated by the panel milliammeter. In radiography, this current
is used inclosed regulation loop to control tube filament power. Calibration is checked with an
external meter. Measurements must be corrected by applying the procedure in the Service
Manual.
4-13
Product of exposure time x current (mAs) : The product of exposure time x current is measured by means of
an mAs meter connected in the secondary circuit of the HV transformer.
A correction must be done to take the high voltage capacitor charge into account (See
service manual).
Fluoro time : the time of a continuous fluoro exposure, between timer reset, until the buzzer switches on.
4-14
5.4 GENERAL RATINGS
5.4.1 Radiographic mAs meter
0.16 – 0.2 – 0.25 – 0.32 – 0.4 – 0.5 – 0.63 – 0.8 – 1 – 1.3 – 1.6 – 2 – 2.5 – 3.2 – 4 – 5 – 6.3 – 8 –
10 – 13 – 16 – 20 – 25 – 32 – 40 – 50 – 63 – 80 – 100 – 130 – 160 mAs.
5.4.2 Radiographic kVp and mA
A. At full power (line voltage as in § 5.2.1 )
Nominal power 3 kW (100 kV – 30 mA – 0,1s)
40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
mA linked to kVp in six steps as follows:
40 to 49 kVp : 60 mA
50 to 59 kVp : 55 mA
60 to 69 kVp : 47 mA
70 to 79 kVp : 41 mA
80 to 99 kVp : 33 mA
100 to 110 kVp : 30 mA
B. At reduced power (line voltage as in paragraph 5.2.1 B and 5.2.1 C)
40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
mA linked to kVp in six steps as follows:
40 to 49 kVp : 37 mA
50 to 59 kVp : 34 mA
60 to 69 kVp : 29 mA
70 to 79 kVp : 25 mA
80 to 99 kVp : 20 mA
100 to 110 kVp : 18.5 mA
4-15
C. Reference current time products (mAs)
4 mAs 70 kV 41 mA 0.0975s
3.2 mAs 100 kV 30 mA 0.1067s
3.2 mAs 110 kV 30 mA 0.1067s
N.B. the loading is determined as the result of the mAs product integration.
4-16
ILLUSTRATION 12 COURBES kV – mA
kV – mA CURVES
7.0 mA
6.0
5.0
4.0 3.9
3.85
3.0
2.
7
2.0 2.3
1.4
1.0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 kV
Note: in normal mode the curves 3 – 4 – 6 are references.

The other curves are rules giving relation between kV and mA
LEGENDES DES COURBES
COURBES MODE POUR / FOR PUISSANCE MAX

CURVES STENOSCOP 2 MAX POWER
1 Scopie Auto Mode Normal D6 + D9 253 W

Auto Fluoro Normal Mode 6000 + 9000
2 Scopie Auto Mode Haute Qualité D6 +D9 500 W

Auto Fluoro High Quality Mode 6000 + 9000
3 Scopie Mode Manuel D6 + D9 500 W

Fluoro Man. Mode 6000 + 9000
4 Scopie Sécur. Thermique D6 + D9 154 W

Fluoro Thermal Safety 6000 + 9000
5 Scopie Auto LE 300 W

Auto Fluoro
6 Scopie Mode Manuel LE 300 W

Fluoro Man. Mode
4-17
Limits of utilization with a 100V mains
If the Stenoscop is configured for a 100 Volts power line, the mains circuit breaker may open during
radiography if technique factors above the following are preset :
110 kV 80 mAs
88 kV 100 mAs
70 kV 125 mAs
50 kV 160 mAs
If technique factors higher than above are required, the unit must be connected to a supply voltage of
120V (at reduced radiographic power) or 200–220–240V, at nominal power.
5.4.3 Fluoroscopy kVp
Manual : 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
Automatic : Continuously variable between 40 and 110 kVp.
kVp linked to mA according to the curves shown on illustration 12 controlled by the amplitude of the
video level from the TV camera.
The video signal is measured in a circular window having a factory–adjusted diameter.
Two mA levels can be selected, one for normal fluoro, one for high quality fluoro.
Residual ripple : The X–ray generator has constant potential residual ripple below 4%, at 100 kVp in
fluoro, at nominal power supply.
5.4.4 mA Fluoroscopy
Manual: in manual mode, the complete ranges of kV and mA values can be selected independently
and are limited independently by the curve 3.
At high kVp, the mA are adapted automatically so as to keep the maximum dose output below
10R/min, and the power below to 500W.
The selection of ”NORMAL DOSE” or ”HIGH QUALITY” mode is often a compromise between the
imager input dose and the background noise. When the ”HIGH QUALITY” mode is selected or
”deselected”, the kV and mA parameters must be readjusted.
4-18
Automatic: The mA values are connected to the kVp values according to the curve in illustration 12.
The selection ”HIGH QUALITY” or ”NORMAL DOSE” has a twofold purpose; it selects the I.I.
entrance dose and switches over the parameters from curve 1 to curve 2.
In the ”HIGH QUALITY” mode, the mA are limited in the same way as in ”MANUAL”mode.
When in automatic or manual modes, the technique factors are restricted as shown on the curve 4, if the
temperature limit is reached at.
5.4.5 Fluoroscopic Timer
The fluoro timer is a 0–5 minute electronic timer with an audible termination signal and reset key.
4-19
COURBES D’ECHAUFFEMENT ET DE REFROIDISSEMENT DE L’ANODE

ILLUSTRATION 13 HEATING AND COOLING CURVES
K Joules
56
48
40
32
24
16
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Temps en minutes
Time in minutes
ILLUSTRATION 14
Joules
ECHAUFFEMENT / REFROIDISSEMENT CUVE
800 HEATING COOLING CURVE X RAY HEAD
000
640
000
480
000
320
000
160
000
0
Temps en minutes
Times in minutes
0 25 50 75 100
4-20
5.5 GENERATOR RATING AND DUTY CYCLE

– illustrations 13 and 14
500W maximum in fluoroscopy, up to maximum tubehead temperature interlock, 150W until bellows
compensation safety.
3.600 mAs per hour at 110 kV maximum allowable rating with 30 sec rest between rad exposures.
Depending on ambient temperature, tubehead position, and sterile drapes, thermal interlock may occur
at this rating.
4-21
ILLUSTRATION 4 ILLUSTRATION 5
1
6 9
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
4-22
1.3 TV MONITORS AND MOBILE CART

(See ”Caution” § 2.2)
The TV monitors are mounted on the mobile cart.

1 X–Ray emission control lamp.
2 DSM image processor.
3 Hand held infrared remote control secured on the unit (on a magnetic slide).
4 Infrared detector.
5 Alphanumeric keyboard (DSM controls).
6 VTR (option).
7 Video imager (option).
8 Video imager (paper) (option).
9 ”ON”/”OFF” power switch (on the rear side of the mobile cart).
1.4 CONNECTING CABLES

10 The power supply cable connects the monitor cart to the main power. When not in use, wind the cable
around the drum provided on the back of the cart.
11 The main cable links the monitor cart to the mobile. When not in use wind the cable on the support
secured on the cart.
12 This plug may be used with stand alone TV monitor cart, to review images when hard disk option or
video recorder are present.
13 Additional earth conductor provided for IEC compliance : check local regulations requirements.
1.5 STERILE DRAPES
The interior of the C–arm, the X–ray head and image intensifier can be covered with sterile drapes. The C
arm drapes are fixed with clamping springs.
4-23
REV 1
4-24
REV 1 Source: Direction dtp 2103663-102., HD281, Rev. 0, Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1 – X-RAY TUBE HD281
SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
1–1 General
The HD281 x-ray tube is fitted with x–ray tube head for Stenoscop II.
The mains characteristics of this tube are given below.
4-25
1–2 Characteristics
Reference
Subject Specifications
Standards (1)
Nominal anode input power 5 kW and 1 kW IEC 613/1989
Maximum anode heat content 50 000 Joules IEC 613/1989
Anode heating and cooling curves See Para 2–4 IEC 613/1989
Single load rating See Para 2–2 IEC 613/1989

Serial load rating Not applicable IEC 613/1989
Target material Tungsten IEC 601–2–28/1993
Reference axis See Para 1–3 IEC 601–2–28/1993

Target angle with respect to the specified reference axis 12o IEC 601–2–28/1993
Nominal focal spot values 0.5 and 1.8 IEC 336/1982

Modulation transfer function See Para 2–3 IEC 336/1982
Filtration of equivalent quality (2) 0.9 mm Al

equivalent to 80 kV
Nominal high voltage 110 kV IEC 613/1989
Anode Stationary
Maximum current filament 5.5 A IEC 613/1989

Electron emission curves See Para 2–1 IEC 613/1989
Covered field at 1 m from focal spot Ø 370 mm –
Weight 0.65 kg "0.1
1. Reference standard means that compliance with this standard is stated.

2. Determined according theorical method of calculating from BIRCH and MARSHALL.
4-26
1–3 Dimensions
Reference axis
F = Center of focal spots Dimensions in mm
1–4 Connections
A – Small focal spot

B – Seal off
C – Common
D – Large focal spot
4-27
SECTION 2
CURVES – CHARTS
2–1 Electron emission curves
Focal spot : 0.5 Voltage

mA
V
Anode input intensity
A
Heating intensity
Focal spot : 1.8

mA
V
Anode input intensity
A
Heating intensity
4-28
2–2 Single load rating
Focal spot : 0.5 Voltage

Watts
Exposure time
Focal spot : 1.8

Watts
Exposure time
4-29
2–3 Modulation transfer function
These curves show typical performances.

To get minimum values (according to IEC Standard 336/1982), multiply the frequency by
0.9 (width) or 0.85 (length).
Standard magnification : 2
Focal spot : 0.5
1
F.T.M.
.8 Width
.6
.4
.2
0 1 2 3 4 5
Spatial frequency (lp/mm)
1
F.T.M.
.8 Length
.6
.4
.2
0
1 2 3 4 5
4-30
To get minimum values (according to IEC standard 336/1982), multiply the frequency by
0.95 (width and length).
Standard magnification : 1.3
Focal spot : 1.8
1
F.T.M.
.8 Width
.6
.4
.2
0 1 2 3 4 5
1
F.T.M.
.8 Length
.6
.4
.2
0
1 2 3 4 5
4-31
2–4 Anode Heating and cooling curves
k joules
Stored energy
Time in min
Note: X–ray performances can be limited by associated systems.
4-32
REV 1
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-1
REV 1
5-2
ILLUSTRATION 1
4 10
15
1
9
2
11
13
5
2
7
14
12
5-3
Please note the original version of this manual was written in French.
1. DESCRIPTION
1.1 MECHANICAL STRUCTURE

– see illustration 1
1 X–ray head assembly

Comprises the X–ray tube, the high frequency X–ray generator, a motorized collimator and a patient
guard of clear plastic.
2 C–arm orbital movement brake.
3 C–arm slide handles.
4 C–arm rotation brake
5 Horizontal movement brake.
6 Wigwag movement brake
Note: THIS APLLIES TO ALL BRAKES.

To brake, push the brake handles forward ( toward the C–Arm); to release, draw the brake handles
backward (to the operating console).
7 Steering handle of the mobile
8 Front wheel steering handle. Steers the front wheels
9 Fluoro footswitch with hooks to attach the cable.
10 Image Receptor System.

Image intensifier with TV camera, 16 cm or 22 cm diameter fields (6” or 9”).
A cassette holder fits on the top of the image intensifier.
11 Front wheels.
12 Rear wheels.
5-4
13 Rear wheels locking footswitch : see illustration 2
Position A. Rear wheel brakes locked.
Position B. Rear wheels moving freely.
Position C. Rear wheels locked for lateral movement.

Also turn steering handle (8) 90o.
14 Interconnecting cable between mobile unit and monitor cart, wound on its support. The plug fits on a
hook under the cable support.
15 Rad – Fluoroscopy handswitch.
ILLUSTRATION 2
ILLUSTRATION 3
Position A
Position B
Position C
5-5
REV 1 Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page A-1
ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
1 5 5 1
3 A 3
2 44 4 2
6 8 D 21
7
22
9 B 23
14
20
10 24
15
11 C
12
16
13
17 18
5-6
1.2 CONTROL CONSOLE

illustration 3 – back of manual
The controls are ordered logically as follows :

A) Fluoro and Rad controls (these controls are repeated on both sides of the unit) and
”C ARM” UP/DOWN motion.
Footswitch and handswitch located on the right hand side of the unit can also be used.
B) Image system (collimator, camera, TV monitors).
C) Modes of operation and X–ray parameter selection
D) Fluoro timer and X–ray elapsed time totalizator
For detailed description of the controls, see following pages
1.2.1 FLUORO AND RAD CONTROLS

– illustration 3
(1) X–ray exposure control .

Fluoroscopy is initiated by pressing this key when a fluoro mode has been selected.
A radiographic exposure is initiated by pressing this key when the radiographic mode has been
selected.
During X–ray emission, the key lights up.
A buzzer sounds during radiographic exposure and during ”high Quality” fluoro.
Releasing the key interrupts X–ray emission, except in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiogra-
phy, where the last pulse is maintained until completion. (USA only)
(2) X–ray tube over–heating indicator
This indicator does not automatically interrupt X–Ray emission
(3) C–arm elevator
Controls the motorized up and down movements of the C–arm
(4) Green light
Power ON
(5) Switching OFF control
Can be used to turn off the unit or as emergency stop
5-7
1.2.2 MONITOR AND COLLIMATOR

– illustration 3
Note on collimator operation.

In the radiographic mode, the X–ray field is limited by a round aperture of either 9.5” or 30 cm, depending
on local regulations.
In the fluoroscopic mode, the X–Ray field is limited by a round aperture of a size corresponding to the field
of the image intensifier.
Two pairs of rotatable and separately adjustable shutters, one of them semitransparent, are provided.
These shutters are active both in fluoro and in radiography.
WARNING!
With 16cm image field :

Switching from Fluoro to Rad does not change the position of the collimator shutters but the
keys ”collimator open” (22 and 23) start blinking to warn the user.
Touching these commands will open the collimator immediately to the full cassette size and the
keys light up permanently.
With 22cm image field :

Operation is identical, but the keys ”collimator open” should be kept pressed until full opening
of the shutters as intermediate field coverage is authorized.
Commands :
20 Motorized TV image rotation.

Independent controls for two TV monitors.
Not available in 2 images Mode.
21 Stenoscop Serie 9000 : Zoom selection of the 16 cm field with a 22 cm I.I.

22 Control of opaque collimator shutters.
23 Control of the semitransparent collimator shutters.
24 Shutters rotate both clockwise and counter–clockwise.
5-8
1.2.3 MODES OF OPERATION AND X–RAY PARAMETER SELECTION

– illustration 3
Modes of operation
9 Standard radiography
10 Single–pulse fluoroscopy .
Only one X–Ray pulse is generated, the duration of which is controlled by the acquisition time
and image processing of the memory.
11 High quality FLUOROSCOPY.
This operating mode can be used simultaneously with modes 10, 12 or 13 for passing from
”NORMAL DOSE” fluoroscopy to ”HIGH QUALITY” fluoroscopy.
This operating mode is active when the push button is lit up.
12 Pulsed fluoroscopy.
13 Standard fluoroscopy.
18 Fluoro manual
Key lit : manual kV/mA selection
Key unlit : automatic kV/mA selection.
When going from automatic to manual fluoro mode, the last kV and mA values in automatic
mode are carried over to manual mode.
X–ray parameter selection
17 mA or mAs selection : (keys and )
. In RADIOGRAPHIC mode : mAs selection in 31 steps.
. In FLUORO mode : mA selection
. These keys are inactive in AUTOMATIC FLUORO MODE
15 kVp selection : (keys and )
. Selection in both radiographic and fluoro modes.
. These keys are inactive in automatic fluoro mode.
If FLUORO and RAD exposures are alternated, a memory retains the values of the previously
selected kVp and mA for FLUORO and kVp and mAs for RAD.
1.2.4 TIMER AND X–RAY TOTALIZATOR
7 X–ray time totalizator
X–ray emission time is shown in minutes and seconds up to a maximum of 99 minutes. In the
pulsed fluoroscopy mode and rad mode, only the actual elapsed X–ray emission time is shown.
6 Fluoro timer 5 min reset
Will flash (with buzzer) to indicate that a fluoro period of 4 minutes and 30 seconds has
elapsed. The timer is reset by pressing the key. If the timer is not reset, fluoro is interrupted
after 5 minutes.
8 X–Ray totalizator reset
X–ray total time reset. Automatically reset when unit is switched ON.
5-9
1
6 9
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
5-10


6 VTR (option).

1.5 STERILE DRAPES
5-11
ILLUSTRATION 9 TELECOMMANDE DSM
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
MODULE 1 10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17 18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM
MODULE 4 MODULE 3
1 2
11 A 12 B 13 14
3
4 5
MODULE 2
5-12
REV 1
SECTION 6 - OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 6 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 DSM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-1 DSM 200 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-2 Light & Sound Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-4 Types of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-1-5 Image Managment Controls - Groups 1 & Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-1-6 Memory Management - Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-1-7 Image Processing Functions - Group 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-1 Pulsed Fluoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-2 Electronic Radiography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-3 Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-4 Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-5 Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-2-6 Stand Alone - DSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-1
REV 1
6-2
1
6 9
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
6-3


6 VTR (option).

1.5 STERILE DRAPES
6-4
ILLUSTRATION 7
ILLUSTRATION 8
6-5
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 TRANSPORT POSITION

– See illustration 7
When moving the unit to or from a room, place the unit in the following position :
X–ray axis vertical, with the Image Intensifier up.

Center wigwag movement
Retract the C–arm fully toward the console
Bring the C–arm to the lowest position (this movement must be accomplished before turning the
power off).
Lock all movements
Turn power off (before disconnecting cables)
Disconnect cables and wind them on their supports
Set rear wheels locking footswich in the free position (pedal horizontal).
WARNING !
This unit weighs approximately 500 lbs.
Care must be used when transporting from one area of use to another. Failure to follow these precautions
could result in uncontrolled motion and injury to the operator or others.
ALWAYS :
1 Be sure the pathway is clear.
2 Limit the movement to a slow careful walk.
3 Don’t do it alone when moving on inclines.
2.2 PREPARING THE UNIT FOR USE

– Insert the rectangular plug of cable number 11 (illustration 6) into the socket on the back of the
monitor cart.
Turn the red screw fully clockwise (approx. 7 turns)

IMPORTANT The plug may suffer abnomal wear when this screw is not turned tight.
The cable outlet should be facing the floor.
– Additional equipotential conductor (I.E.C.).

This conductor must be connected between the additional protective earth terminal and an
external protective system (illustration 6.13).
6-6
THE MONITOR CARTS OF STENOSCOPS OF THE 6000 AND 9000 SERIES

WARNING ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THOSE OF THE STENOSCOP LE.
IN CASE OF INTERCHANGE OF MOBILE CARTS (POSSIBLE IF TWO
DIFFERENT UNITS WERE ON THE SAME SITE), NO DAMAGE WILL
OCCUR, BUT IT WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE TO SWITCH THE UNIT ON.
– Plug mains supply cable no 10 (illustration 5) from monitor cart into suitable mains outlet.
– Press the power ”ON” switch on the TV monitor cart (item 9 illustration 5).
The green READY indicator light comes on showing that power is on (item 4 illustration 3).
REMARKS : PREHEATING TIME
When the unit is powered ON, a delay of about 1 minute is required by the memory to execute its boot
sequence.
During this delay, X–Ray emission is not possible.
The monitors also require a delay of about 1 minute in order to display a workable image.
The video imager preheating delay is about 1 minute during which time making a hard copy is not possible.
A buzzer is actuated at the end of this delay.

Generally, a warm up time of 15 minutes provides maximum system performance.
– Raise C–arm as required (illustration 7).

– Rotate C–arm as required for the examination, either tube in down position, or tube in up
position.
– Position the unit as required using steering handle.
– Attach sterile drapes as required.
– If a radiographic exposure is required during the examination : fix the cassette holder on the
image intensifier. (illustration 8) The cassette holder can be fixed directly on the Image
Intensifier or above sterile drapes.
AVOID ANY CONTACT OF A PATIENT IN NARCOSIS WITH THE X–RAY

WARNING TUBE HEAD, THE TEMPERATURE OF THE X–RAY TUBE HEAD CAN
REACH A VALUE OF 60O C.
6-7
ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
1 5 5 1
3 A 3
2 44 4 2
6 8 D 21
7
22
9 B 23
14
20
10 24
15
11 C
12
16
13
17 18
6-8
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
MODULE 1 10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17 18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM
MODULE 4 MODULE 3
1 2
11 A 12 B 13 14
3
4 5
MODULE 2
6-9
2.3 FLUOROSCOPIC MODES OF OPERATION

2.3.1 FLUOROSCOPY WITH AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
– See illustration 3 – end of manual
– Personnel should wear protective lead aprons and gloves, and should remain, as much as
possible, behind suitably positioned mobile lead protective screens during the examination.
– Select fluoro mode (illustration 3 key 13). The key lights up.
– Check that the manual fluoro selector is released. (illustration 3 key 18 is off).
– Fluoroscopy can be initiated in 3 different ways :
– press the fluoroscopy footswitch
– press X–Ray control keys on the control console (illustration 3 key no 1)
– press X–Ray handswitch.
– An orange coloured lamp secured on the monitor cart comes on during X–Ray emission.
kV and mA are adjusted automatically for consistent image quality.
Releasing the control key interrupts the fluoro sequence. The last image remains on the TV screen.
mA and kV are permanently displayed on the operator console.
The last mA and kV parameters remain displayed when fluoroscopy is interrupted and are retained.
– If required, collimate the image by pressing the opaque and semitransparent shutters control
(illustration 3 keys 22 and 23), .
– Rotate the collimator shutters to align them with the object to be examined (illustration 3 key
24).
– Invert the image on the TV screen, ”up–down” or ”left–right”, if required either on the infrared
pad
or or on the DSM operating console (illustration 10)
– Press key 20 illustration 3 to rotate the Image on the TV screen. Both TV monitors have
independent image rotation controls.
– Reset the fluoro timer control (illustration 3 key 6) to zero after 5 minutes of fluoroscopy.
Flashing light and buzzer warns the user 30 sec. before the end of 5 minutes of X ray fluoro
emission. Fluoro is interrupted after 5 minutes if the timer is not reset.
– A red light flashes when the heat capacity of the tube housing is about to be reached.
NORMAL DOSE fluoroscopy is still permitted till the tube housing safety be activated.
– Total X–ray emission time is displayed permanently (illustration 3 display 7).
Reset by pressing key 8.
– In case of emergency or to cut off power, press the OFF key (illustration 3 key 5).
The ON/OFF switch on the TV monitor cart also serve as an emergency stop.
6-10
ILLUSTRATION 9ILLUSTRATION 10
2.3.2 FLUOROSCOPY WITH MANUAL kV/mA CONTROL

See illustration 3
– Select the fluoro mode of operation (illustration 3 key 13); the key lights up.
– Press MANUAL (illustration 3 key 18); the key lights up
– Reset fluoro timer (illustration 3 key 6) to zero.
– Select kV (illustration 3 key 15). kV is displayed on the console.
– Select mA illustration 3 (key 17). mA is displayed on the console.
– Start fluoroscopy with key no 1, with footswitch or with handswitch and adjust kV and mA to
obtain the best image.
– Follow the procedure outlined in the previous paragraph for the rest of the operation.
– To return to the automatic brightness control mode, again press the manual selector key.
– In manual mode, the camera’s automatic gain control does not operate.
The manual mode may thus not be appropriate to view very large objects with heavy X–ray
attenuation.
6-11
2.4 RAD
BEFORE USING THE STENOSCOP IN THE RADIOGRAPHIC MODE OF
WARNING OPERATION, THE OPERATOR SHOULD VERIFY :
1. That the cassette holder be correctly attached.

2. That there is a film present in the cassette, appropriate to the intended use.
3. That the cassette be appropriate to the intended use and inserted into the
cassette holder before the exposure.
See illustration 3
– Fix the cassette holder to the face plate of the image intensifier (with or without grid).
See illustration 8.
– Introduce a cassette with film in the cassette holder.
– Select the RAD mode of operation illustration 3 – key 9.
The mAS display lights up.
– Select kV (illustration 3 key 15).

– Select mAs (illustration 3 key 17).
– Open the collimator shutters completely by pressing the flashing keys (illustration 3 keys 22
and 23) until they stay ON.
Exposure is not inhibited when the collimator is not fully open.
– Press X–ray control (key 1, footswitch or handswitch).

– Hold the exposure switch until the end of the exposure (signalled by the extinction of key 1
illustration 3).
6-12
REV 1
6-1 DSM OPERATION
6-1-1 DSM 200 Console

The Stenoscop Console enables the operator to select the desired acquisition mode - radiography, standard
fluoro, high quality fluoro, pulsed fluoro & electronic radiography (ER). (Illustration 6-1)
Refer to Illustration 6-2 and Illustration 6-3.
The DMS Console allows the operator access to all the DMS Memory functions. (Illustration 6-3)
The Infra-red remote control permits the operator to select many of the major DMS Console functions.
(Illustration 6-2)
6-1-2 Light & Sound Signals

When a function key on the DMS is lit this indicates an active mode.
A flashing function key indicates either a question or information request to the operator.
An operating error is signaled by a buzzer.
6-1-3 Restrictions
X-ray emission is not permitted:
During the start-up initializing phase
If a key is flashing
When in the film hard copy formatter mode
In the maintenance mode, except for (QI) image quality
During x-ray emission, all further operator requests will not be validated except for Keys B + (13-16) and
image reversal Keys (5&6). Image acquisition has priority. The requests will activate a buzzer and will be
memorized and processed at the end of the exposure interval.
6-1-4 Types of Images

A dynamic image is that which is visualized during x-ray emission and displayed on Monitor A. It can be stored and
displayed on Monitor B. When the memory is empty it will be observed on both Monitors A & B.
A frozen image is produced on Monitor A at the end of the x-ray exposure and identified by an open eye" symbol.
The image can be displayed on Monitor B. A second type of frozen image is that which is automatically transferred
to Monitor B and is identified by a closed eye" symbol. The image can be obliterated by pressing Key B-(16).
(Illustration 6-2)
All stored images are assigned a file or identifying number. These can be displayed on Monitors A or B.
A x2 enlargement Zoom Image" can be visualized on Monitor A. The image cannot be stored but can be
photocopied on the Formatter.
6-13
REV 1
6-1-5 IMAGE MANAGEMENT CONTROLS - GROUP 1 & GROUP 2 (Illustration 6-2 & 6-3)
GAMMA CORRECTION
Key 1 Selects the GAMMA correction mode:
2-3 The keys GAMMA - and GAMMA + enable changing the gamma correction accordingly.
4 ANTI-BLOOMING
This function lowers the level of white saturation outside the useful field. The correction can be
combined with the gamma corrections.
5-6 IMAGE REVERSAL

Key 5 enables vertical image reversal while Key 6 permits horizontal reversal. They can be activated at
any time.
7 FILTER (Noise Reduction)

The nature of the filter chosen depends on the acquisition mode:
• In fluoro, recursive filtering is used.
• In pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography, filtering is by integration.
• The operator has 5 possible filter coefficient selections. (Group 2, Illustration 6-3)
• Coefficient 1 - key 7 lit. (Group 1, Illustration 6-2)
• Coefficients 2, 4, 8 or 16 selected by keys N2, N4, N8 or N16 in (group 2) of the memory console.
The higher coefficient results in more image noise reduction, but motion blurring also increases.
8-9 IMAGE SHIFT

This function makes it possible to transfer a frozen or stored image from monitor A to monitor B. The
transfer can be made MANUALLY (key 9) or AUTOMATICALLY (key 8).
When the transfer of a frozen image is made manually, the image is memorized.
10 SPLIT SCREEN MODE

The left part of the screen corresponds to monitor A, the right part to monitor B. The images visualized
are part-images," i.e., half the image centered horizontally. During the emission of X-rays, the
dynamic image is visualized full screen.
11 ZOOM
The zoom is a mode of visualization on monitor A. This function enlarges x 2 the central part of the
image. This enlargement can be photocopied, but not memorized.
The selection ZOOM is temporarily deactivated during x-ray emission.
12 FORMATTER (PHOTOCOPY)
The Formatter mode transfers the image from monitor A to Formatter (Video Imager 1010) with the
corrections of the Gamma and anti-blooming functions.
During the Imager sequence, all the other functions are inactive.
13-16 SCROLLING OF IMAGES MONITOR A

MONITOR B
This functions makes it possible to search and visualize a frozen or stored image. A stored image
automatically transferred to monitor B is obliterated by a scrolling of images on monitor B.
6-14
REV 1
18 INSTANTANEOUS MEMORIZATION
If key number 18 is pressed during fluoro or pulsed fluoro, it is possible to save a dynamic image. The
image present on monitor A during fluoro or pulsed fluoro is memorized and visualized on monitor B
with a number. Numbering depends on the memory capacity and the mode of memory management.
15-18 SAVING THE FROZEN IMAGE

AUTOMATIC mode - key 15 lit
MANUAL mode - key 18 lit
MANUAL mode
The image present on monitor A is saved by key 18 for INSTANTANEOUS MEMORIZATION.
AUTOMATIC mode
The image present on monitor A is saved automatically at the end of the x-ray emission. The
memorized image is numbered on monitor A.
6-1-6 MEMORY MANAGEMENT - GROUP 3

12A AUTO DELETE ACTIVE: key 12-A lit.
If the memory is full, the oldest image is automatically obliterated and replaced by the new frozen image
which takes its number.
AUTO DELETE INACTIVE: key 12-A not lit.
If the memory is full, a buzzer sounds and the following keys blink: AUTO DELETE (12A), DELETE
MANUAL (KEY 12B), ALL (13) and MEMORY KEY15 OR 18 (Group 1).
• If key 15 or 18 (Group 1) is pressed, the request for MEMORIZATION is canceled.
• If the key AUTO DELETE (12A) is pressed, the oldest image is obliterated and replaced by the new
image.
12B To memorize a new image in the DELETE MANUAL mode the operator must obliterate at least one
image in memory. To do this select the image to be obliterated using Keys A" (14&17) and press
IMAGE DELETE MAN Key 12B. The new image replaces the old image deleted.
• If the key ALL (13) is pressed, the stored 6 images are deleted and the image frozen on monitor A is
memorized.
13 OPERATOR ALL
This function makes it possible to wipe out the whole of the memory. This is a function which must be
confirmed before being carried out, VAL key 11 (Illustration 6-3) blinks and asks the operator for
confirmation.
After the function is completed, the configuration of the memory system is the same as after switching
ON.
ANNOTATIONS
The annotations make it possible to identify the images on monitor A, but they are not memorized. They
appear on the film in the Video Imager (Formatter) mode only if they are visualized on Monitor A.
Two ACQUISITION ZONES are provided either side of the image at the bottom of the screen. Each zone
consists of two lines of 35 characters.
6-15
REV 1
8 CURSOR
Entry into MESSAGE ACQUISITION MODE is made by pressing the CURSOR key 8.
Keys 8, 9, 10 and 11 blink.

The cursor is displayed on Monitor A on the lower right hand part.
If annotations are already present in the memory, they are visualized.
The display is made character by character during the acquisition.
14 The cursor position is managed by keys 14.

The insert mode does not exist, the system works in typeover" mode.
Passage from one acquisition zone to the other is made by pressing the CURSOR key (8).
11 CONFIRMATION
When the message acquisition has been carried out, press key 11 and the annotations are confirmed in
the memory.
9 DELETION OF ANNOTATIONS
This key removes all annotations on Monitor A.
10 OBLITERATION OF ANNOTATIONS
Erasing annotations in the memory and passing automatically to the acquisition mode.
6-1-7 IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS -GROUP 4

The functions defined below are available only with the disk options and the IP module.
1 EDGE ENHANCEMENT
Is used to improve the visibility of small structures and reduce the visibility of large structures.
It acts on monitor A.
Edge enhancement information is not memorized and acts on the dynamic images.
2 PROGRAMMED SEQUENCE
The programmed sequence makes it possible to acquire 26 images in a time controlled by the memory.
The programmed sequence is valid only in the fluoro mode.
These images are automatically memorized.
3 REAL TIME IMAGE SUBTRACTION

This process makes it possible to highlight areas where a contrast medium has been introduced.
The mode is active only in the fluoro mode.
Dynamic images can be recursive filtered (according to the filter coefficient chosen)and then subtracted from
the mask.
Acquisition of the mask is made automatically at the start of the fluoro sequence.
6-16
REV 1
4 PEAK OPACIFICATION
This mode makes it possible to visualize the injected vessel at its peak opacification.
It can be activated only in the fluoro mode and with Image Post Processing.
The PEAK OPACIFICATION mode is not active in ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY and PULSED FLUORO.
This mode can be combined with the SUBTRACTION mode.
5 ROADMAPPING
This mode is used in fluoro with Image Post Processing for following the positioning of a probe or catheter
inside a circulatory vessel.
ROADMAPPING is always associated with the active subtraction mode.
ROADMAPPING is carried out following sequences in fluoro and in association with the SUBTRACTION mode
for the suppression of undesired structures. It cannot be used in ER (Electronic Radiography) or Pulsed
Fluoro.
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS
6-2-1 Pulsed Fluoro

Permits visualization of the recorded image at the end of each exposure pulse.
The sequence is as follows:
1st Exposure pulse

Minimum duration, sufficent to insure stable automatic exposure level in fluoro and memorization at the
termination of the pulse. The image is retained until the end of the next pulse.
2nd and additional x-ray pulses

X-ray pulses remain at the same exposure factors established for the first pulse. The x-ray image is
memorized and visualized at the end of each pulse, until the end of the following pulse.
6-2-2 Electronic Radiography

This operating mode consists of a single pulse x-ray exposure of approximately 1.2 sec. X-ray termination is
automatic and the image is memorized.
Select Electronic Radiography mode by pressing Key 10. Select auto fluoro" with Key 18. Initiate an x-ray
exposure either by Key 1, the fluoro footswitch or the exposure handswitch (if available). Hold, for at least 1 sec. The
action triggers an exposure for 1.2 sec. The image is stored and displayed at the end of the x-ray exposure.
Repeat, to refresh or renew the image.
6-17
REV 1
6-2-3 Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer

A Video Imager (Formatter) can be used to transfer stored images on radiography film. The Imager is an optional
item. On the Stenoscop D6/D9 a request for a film exposure can be initiated on the DSM keyboard or on the Remote
Control Panel (Key 12). Refer to the manual (on the Video Imager for complete operating details).
6-2-4 Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager
A paper Video Imager can be added to the system as an optional item. The request for a paper copy may be made
from the DMS keyboard ( Exp Key 12) or the Remote Control. Refer to the Imager Manual for complete operating
details.
6-2-5 Video Recorder

The DSM has facilities for controlling a VCR. The VCR is an optional item. refer to the VCR Manual for complete
operating details.
6-2-6 Stand Alone - DSM

On the Stenoscop D6/D9 units a special plug is provided to permit operating the DSM and Monitors without the
Stenoscop. The special plug when connected to the cable connector, at the rear of the Monitor Cart, in place of the
cable from the Stenoscop enables examining recorded images from the hard disk, VCR (if used) or the Video
Imagers.
6-18
REV 1
Stenoscop II Console
Illustration 6-1
6-19
ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
1 5 5 1
3 A 3
2 44 4 2
6 8 D 21
7
22
9 B 23
14
20
10 24
15
11 C
12
16
13
17 18
6-20
REV 1
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR
The DSM-200 is a new generation video image processor especially designed for imaging in the operating room
and in radiology applications. It provides for the storage of up to 200 video images.
6-21
REV 1
STENOSCOP II
ONLY
Group 1
Remote Control Keypad

Illustration 6-2
Group 1 Group 4 Group 3
Group 2
DSM Keyboard
Illustration 6-3
6-22
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
MODULE 1 10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17 18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM
MODULE 4 MODULE 3
1 2
11 A 12 B 13 14
3
4 5
MODULE 2
6-23
REV 1
6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will introduce the student to the functions of the Stenoscop System.
S X-ray Subsystem
S DSM
S Film Camera
S VTR
S Video System
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement
Operator Manual supplies with the system (OM 826931P365)
COMPETENCIES:
On completion of exercise the student will be able to demonstrate all functions and options of the Stenoscop
System.
PROCEDURE TIME: 1.0 to 2.0 hr
SAFETY:
Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation
Safety Policy.
6-24
REV 1
PROCEDURE:
Have each student perform the following tasks, using the information discussed under Installation & Operations.
• Connect up the Stenoscop & DSM to a power source

• Operate manual kV mA, & Timer controls
• Operate the unit in fluoro manual
• Operate the unit in Rad
• Operate the unit in fluoro ABC
• Make an exposure using the HLC (HQ) function
• Use pulse fluoro functions
• Use the Electronic Rad functions
Refer to the DSM Operation and do the following:
• Gamma function
• Integration (noise reduction)
• Image enlargement
• Image Transfer
• Anti Blooming
• Split Screen
• Subtraction
Student operate all function of Stenoscop System and gain a understanding of how the function interact. The
student will perform simulated procedures with the system for the following:
• Fluoro (low and high level)

• Pulse Fluoro
• ER Mode
• Radiography Mode
• Image Management Control
• Memory Management
• Image Processing Function
• Stand Alone Mode for Monitor Cart
• Filming
• VTR Recording
• Remote Control
6-25
REV 1
6-26
REV 1
SECTION 7 - THEORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 7 - THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3 HV CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6 3A19 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-12-1 Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-12-2 Rad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-14 FLUORO TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-3 Circular Collimators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-16 3A3 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-18 3A5 TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-19 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7-20 TV CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-23 IRIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7-25 1010 FORMATTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-1 Smoothing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-2 V Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-3 H Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-4 CRT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-26-5 Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7-1
REV 1
M
K1 9 PL1
Delay 220V to Monitors & DSM
R1 and R2
Power on
275V
230/120
AC Module 4
Converter
9Sm1
Line Transformer
9TR1
5TR1
Module 3 To LV PS
(Console Panel 1
stop + 12v, +5v
K3 buttons)
X-ray Tube
Filaments
C Arm
K1 Motor
Safety
Interlock (9PL1)
K5
Image
System
9 A4
Module 5
MSI XR 0348
Module 9, Power Circuits (Monitor Cart)

Illustration 7-1
7-2
REV 1
7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART)
Refer to Illustration 7-1.
Line Transformer 9TR1, input tapped for either 120 or 230v AC, 60Hz operation.
9TR1 supplies 275VAC to the converter on Module 4 and 5TRI on Module 5
5TR1 supplies power to the ± 12 v and + 5v DC supplies on Panel 1, the x-ray tube filament circuits, C-Arm drive
motor and the image system.
9TR1 also provides power for the TV Monitors and the Memory System.
Power to 9TR1 is applied by depressing the 9Sm1 Power ON button (back side of Memory Display Cart).
9Sml is released by actuating the Console Stop buttons energizing relay K3 and the auxiliary coil of 9Sml.
On power-up," Line Transformer 9TR1 is energized through R1 and R2 (current limiting) and then through K1 after
the delay M. (R2 used only on 120 VAC operation)
If the interconnecting cable plug, 9PL1, to the Memory Display is removed, relay K5 will be energized and will open
9Sml by energizing its auxiliary coil.
7-3
REV 1
CR1
C C V1 CR2
Rectifier 1 2 VL L1
275V AC & VA 4TR1
from Filter CR5
HV L3
C3 C4 V2
9TR1 Load CR6
4CR7
4TR1- TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER
TR2- H.V. TRANSFORMER
LOAD- HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIERS, VOLTAGE DOUBLER, FILTER AND X-RAY TUBE.
3A19 3PL3
C
1R3 2 a17
1 36B B
a16
MODULE 4 1 2 4Tbl
CONVERTER
4DS1 4TR2
4A2
PL2
4CR2 5
4R2 4C1 4C2 6
1
4CR3 4A1
4E10 - + L1 4TR1
-1 + 1 + E1
4C6 4CR7 4C5 4
4CR4 H.V.
2
- -- - Transfor.
L3
4Tb1-8 2 4CR5 CR7 Pri.
5B 7
4C4 4C3 4E 7
4R 3 4A2
PL2
4A2 1 4CR6
4R4
6 5 PL2 R10 2
6 4A2
4A1
PL1 1
SELECT. CAPA
2
AUX.
16
CAPA PREPO 15
7
MAIN SCR
6
MAIN SCR
11
3A19
10
COMMANDE SCR MSI XR 0349
Module 4
Illustration 7-2
7-4
REV 1
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4
Refer to drawing top of Illustration 7-2.
At T=0 assume CR1 is turned on in the RAD mode. Capacitors C1 and C2 discharge through CR1, 4TR1 and HV.
At the same time C3 and C4 are charging up.
When C1 and C2 are discharged CR1 turns off.
Next CR6 is triggered ON. Now C3 and C4 discharge through HV, 4TR1 and CR6.
Current flow through HV primary produces the high voltage in its secondary to the transformer load consisting of
voltage doublers and the X-ray tube.
When C3 and C4 are discharged CR6 turns off and the process is repeated.
Power to the input of HV is proportional to the value of C, the voltage Va and the pulse frequency, or the rate at which
CR1 and CR6 are triggered. Refer to the actual Converter Schematic (lower drawing Illustration 2), minimum
triggering between CR1 and CR6 is 30 µsec; and established by the SCR command Board 3A19.
3A19 Board enables selecting capacitors C1 and C4 in the RAD mode by turning on CR4.
3A19 Board enables controlling CR7 to permit presetting capacitors C3 and C4.
4TR1 is used to sense CR1 and CR6 conduction current. The current flow data is used on board 3A19.
In fluoro, only capacitors C2 and C3 are used.
7-5
REV 1
7-6
REV 1
6A1
CI DIVISEUR
8 24 428 G15
PCB Presence Safety

Illustration 7-3
7-7
REV 1
Doubler 6A1
1000 / 1
From H. V. Divider Kv Measured Kv
Converter LS SS
Transformer Measuring to 3A12
Module 4 Ckt
Doubler
Measured mA Sc
(FL)
6A1
MA / MAS
MEASURING CKT Measured mA Gr
Rad (+) (Rad)
Fil.
5A1 Trans
FL (–)
3A19 Open 6 Sa1
stops converter
Open at 70_C 6 Sa1
+12V
Open at 50_C 6 SaTH2
3A3 TH
3A7
MSI XR 0347
HV Circuits
Illustration 7-4
7-8
REV 1
7-3 HV CIRCUITS
Board Interlock Circuit.
The HV Transformer derives its input power from the converter on Module 4
The secondary of the HV Transformer is fed to doubler circuits, the output of which is applied to the x-ray tube.
The 2000/1 divider furnishes the actual measured kV to 3A12.
The MA/MAS measuring circuit provides an indication of the actual MA/MAS during fluoro and rad operation.
If the x-ray Tube Head temperature reaches 70°C, 6Sa1 opens and stops the converter.
6SaTH2 opens at 50°C head temperature to develop the TH signal used on 3A7. It reduces the fluoro power to
154W, and actuates the temperature indicator on the Console Display. A positive pulsed filament transformer output
energizes the x-ray tube large focal spot for rad operation
A negative pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube small focal spot for fluoro operation.
7-9
REV 1
FL Timer
3A19
SEXP Op 55, G32, 3A3
G33 PRX
a5 3A19
Arc Det Op46 TROU CLQ
3A19
OX Monostable G32, 3A19
G30 ,Counter (Shuts down
G31 Converter
Indicates after 4
shutdown arcs)
CR4
3A19 OSC G79 INT4 CLQ
PRI
Integrator Op 97
3A19 KV* = ( KV –1 ) 1.1
Clock Compare
20 20
3A9 Selected Kv/20
Op102 Op114
KV Error Op122 3A19
6A1
Op180 Op132 Demx
Measured
C137 Compare
Kv Adder
Select KV/20 Op114
R232
KV Composite
6A1 Op160 3A26 KV85%
Measured mA SC Op168 3A19
(FL) 120KV
6A1 Op 152, 192, 203

Measured mA Gr (Followers) 3A26
(Rad)
Measured mASc
Measured mAGr
MSI XR 0353
Board 3A12 kV/mA

Illustration 7-5
7-10
REV 1
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA
SEXP from 3A19 generates x-ray ON. It is used to produce the PRX signal to 3A3. PRX increments the fluoro time
counter and the total x-ray exposure time counter on 3A3.
Op46 detects arcing in the HV system. A large voltage drop in the high voltage system is considered due to arcing.
Counter G31 after counting four arcs, interrupts x-ray. LED CR4 indicates the x-ray shutdown. The signal indicatĆ
ing any arcing on A5 is used by the hysteresis safety circuit on 3A19.
kV measured and MA fluoro measured are combined to produce the kV composite signal. MA measured corrects
for HV system bleeder current.
The kV composite is stored on capacitor C137 and fed to the comparator Op102. Op102 compares this signal with
the kV/20 selected value. The clock input resets C137 to update the information to the comparator.
Op97 integrates the error output from Op102. G79 activates the integrator Op97 when it is triggered by the PR1
signal . When the exposure starts, the converter is running at maximum frequency to rapidly increase the kV. During
this time the DEMX is present to 3A19. When the kV/20 composite reaches the kV/20* reference at the input to
comparator OP122, the converter frequency is changed to now correct for any OP97 integrator error output. Each
error correction again requires developing the DEMX signal.
PRI monitors the main SCR's current and is used to trigger the monostable osc G79.
Op160 compares the kV/20 Composite with its reference kV/20 selected input. It produces the kV 85 output when
the kV/20 composite reaches 85 of the selected kV/20 level.
Op 168 produces the 120kV output when the kV/20 composite exceeds its reference input.
7-11
REV 1
Signal through Bistable SEXP 3A12, 3A5, 3A3

Closed if Flip–Flop
memory OX S76A memory PRE 3A26
Interface interface G114, G117
is not used. G115, G155 SYXSC 3A26
X–ray Button Q235 TR248
Q238 To converter
BPCL G112, 116,118
FS 4CR7 (Preset C3 & C4)
Logic
Rad
Rad
Sec Bellows To converter 4CR4
G118, 113, 117, TR313 (Select all
(3A26) Stop MAS G128 Q303
115 Logic Q300 capacitors in
(3A12) INT4 CLQ 555 Clock Timer
(Rad)
(3A12) 120 Kv Clock
Clock
SEXP Q256 TR269 To converter 4CR6
Q Q259
Main SCR
PRI G119, 120 G122D
Logic G121A
3A12 TROU CLQ _
3A12 DEMX Q Q281 TR291 To converter 4CR1
G122A Q278
Main SCR
3A26 +12V G216, G113,
To Q181, Q259, Q303, Q238
& SX Q189, Q178
MSI XR 0354
3A19 SCR Command

Illustration 7-6
7-12
REV 1
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND
The signal OX (command X-ray) is developed by any of the following to the logic circuits:
a) BPCL - Console X-ray button
b) FS - Foot Switch fluoro
c) FS - Foot Switch Rad
OX signal is passed through the Memory System and returned. If Memory is not used, S76A must be closed and
board 3A1 must be removed. OX flips the bi-stable Flip-Flop to momentarily turn on Q238 and Q235 and switch
ON converter SCR CR7. This enables discharging converter capacitors C3 in fluror, and C3 and C4 in RAD.
The action takes place provided:

Sec Bellows = 1 (x-ray head temperature less than 70°C)
Int 4 CLQ = 1 (no arcing)
Stop MAS = 1 (not end of Rad exposure)
120kV =1 (not at 120kV)
The OX signal also enables developing the SEXP, PRE (Rad) and SYX SC (FL) signals.
When SEXP =1 to flip-flop G119Band 120B) , G121A latch Q and Q outputs alternately enable the drive circuits to
TR269 and TR291. Converter SCR's CR6 and CR1 thus cannot be switched ON simultaneously. They will be driven
alternately by the G128 clock output.
The clock G128 is triggered by PRI = 1 and the following input signals:
DEMX = 0
TROU CLQ =1 (no HV leakage )
SEXP = 1
In RAD operation TR313 will switch ON converter SCR CR4. This enables selecting additional converter capacitors.
All drivers Q181, Q259, Q303 and Q238 will be locked out if SX is not present or +12V supply drops below 6.2V.
7-13
REV 1
+12V + 6V
Converter
SCR’S 1 & 6
R123 E172
D29 Rect. _
D133
and
G115 A137 PRI 3A12
Comparator
A135 +
4TR1
E125
GR G115 Rad
3A7
G115 Rad
3A19 Current Detector

Illustration 7-7
7-14
REV 1
7-6 3A19 BOARD
4TR1 senses the Converter current through the main SCR's CR1 and CR6.
The secondary of 4TR1 is rectified and drives the comparator A135. A135 compares the level from 4TR1 with that on
its positive input.
The output of the G115 inverts the A135 output during the SCR conduction interval and switches the input to A137.
This produces the PRI signal to 3A12 to trigger the G79 Timer on 3A12 and G128 on 3A19.
PRI indicates SCR current present.
R123 sets the threshold level for switching A137.
A137 acts as a low pass filter and prevents false triggering due to noise.
GR input develops the RAD and RAD signals.
7-15
REV 1
RX Sample & Hold Gain

(From TV A71 , 82 R66 A74B KV/20 Auto
camera)
(To 3A7)
+V
Integrator A73
A121
+V Comparators
Ref. R65
R67
Threshold
(3A12) PRX CP Counters G143, 144 Decoders G184,

(50 Hz) 158, 159, 160, 161 185, 186, 187 Displays
DS 15 (.01)
DS 16 (.1)
DS 17 (1.0)
DS 18 (10.0)
Sm 19
2A1 Module G
3A7
Console Reset
Counts to 99.99
Timer
Module G
MSI XR 0350
ABC Hysteresis
Illustration 7-8
7-16
REV 1
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS
The purpose of this circuit is to provide a kV/20 reference in the auto mode using the RX control signal from the TV
Camera. This assures correct kV's for an optimum TV image.
The RX signal from the TV Camera is fed to the input sample and hold circuit involving amplifiers A71 and A82. A82
acts as a comparator with a reference set by R65.
The output of A82 is fed through a system gain adjust R66 to integrator A73.
A74B will not pass the RX output of A82 unless it is greater than or less than the threshold determined by hysteresis
adjustment R67.
When the RX signal is not present the output will provide a kV/20 of 2V, equal to 40 RV reference.
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY
PRX CP clock signal of 50Hz is fed to counters G143 and G144 and divided by 50.
G144 drives the 4 bit counter G158.
The output is decoded on G184 which drives the 7 segment DS15 1/100 sec display.
After 10 sec. the Q3 output of G158 drives counter and decoder G159 and G185 to display 1/10 second on DS16.
G159 counts 6 and drives G160 to display minutes on DS17.
Finally G161 receives a pulse from G160 to display tens of minutes on DS18 display.
SM19 on the Console enables resetting the counters and displays.
7-17
REV 1
1KHz
(3A19) OJC G148
WR
OX A>B A>B 4 bit comparators A/D
G108, 126 G90
Analog
Auto= closed KV/20
Sm49 from 3A5
Up–down Latch G69 & TV Camera
Logic Ckts
Controls FL
& Latch
G48, 31
G70
Sm31, 32 300 KHz
Kv(Up–down) To G150
SC
(3A5) Clock To 3A9
Hold Kv
(3A9) 40–110Kv Latch G97
Limits Clock SC Rad
SC
(3A9)
3Hz & 30 Hz Up–down
OSC & Counters
2Sec delay G138, 125
MSI XR 0352
3A7 AD-kV
Illustration 7-9
7-18
REV 1
7-9 3A7 AD-kV BOARD
The major function of this board is to generate the kV reference in both the auto & manual modes.
Operating mode is selected by console switch SM49. Console buttons SM31 & SM32 increment and decrement
respectively the up-down counters G48 & G31 and set the Latch G69 in fluoro manual.
Counters G138 & G125 and Latch G97 are incremented or decremented in the Rad mode.
The 8 bit Latch output data G69 (fluoro) or G97 (Rad) is transmitted on the kV Bus to 3A9 for kV reference.
If either 40 or 110 kV is reached FC40 or FC110 signals from 3A9 will stop the counters.
In either fluoro or Rad manual, the clock inputs to the counters are driven by the 3Hz & 30Hz oscillators which
provide, first a 2 sec 3Hz slow drive, followed by the 30 Hz fast drive.
Pressing SM49 to select the TV auto mode deactivates SM31 & SM32. kV reference is now generated using the TV
camera RX signal.
In the auto mode the TV Camera analog signal is converted to digital by A/D G90. The G90 digital output is
compared with the kV bus by the digital comparators G108 & G126. The comparators output A>B or A<B activates
the G48 & G31 counters at the frequency of 1 kHz until the TV kV reference & kV bus data agree (A=B).
7-19
REV 1
PL1 PL1 +5V
+5V
Rad 13 16
45A Gr SC Clock
10 Inhibit 14
+5V Sm26 2 300 kHz from G90
4
G150
7
+5V
ER
3 +
Reset
Sm33
8 15
HLC
+12V
G137 A to F
Sm35
GR
+12V
Pulsed FL 3A3, 3A1
+12V ER
Sm48
+12V
FL
Sm52 3A1
SP
+12V
FL
D536 “S”
+12V
+5V
3A19 Gr
mA(S) +
BP mA(s)
Up
Sm50 3A9
mA(S) –
G139 A to F
3A9
Sm51 BP mA(s)
1.2 & 12Hz 3A9 Clock 1 Down
OSC
G47 3A9 Clock 2
2A1 MODULE G
3A7 AD/kV Board

Illustration 7-10
MSI XR 0344
7-20
REV 1
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD
The circuit enables selection of the operating mode through activation of counter G150.
When power is switched ON, Fluoro mode is automatically selected G150 pins 1 to 9 = 0, except pin 3 = 1,
pin 13 = 1.
When another operating mode is selected, G150 pin 13 = 0 counter counts clock input pulses on pin 14 until the
selected mode output of G150 equals a logic 1.
Counter now locks on selected mode, until another mode is selected.
Counter output turns on the selected mode LED through G139.
Counter indicates the operating mode signal through G137.
Output signals are as follows:

A. ER & SP to Memory Interface
B. + mAs to kV/mA board 3A9
C. Gr to SCR control 3A19
Two clock signals enable changing mA/mAs at two different speeds.
7-21
REV 1
3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA
Sm35 S140B
+5v Logic Ckts To Module 8
G122, Q141 TVCamera aperture
FC110
REFERENCE VOLT.
G21 G68 kV/20
G20 DAC 3A12
3A7 Lim.110 kV/mA
Logic Ckts
FC40 BCD to 7 Segm. DECODER U 2A1
EPROM G138 MODULE
G18 G172 G
G67 D
G19
Lim.40 888
Dis.kV BCD to DECIMAL DECODER
C
Comparators G22 kV
REFERENCE VOLT.
mA Rad
3A26
REFERENCE VOLT.
G94 mA FL
DAC 3A26 FIL
EPROM
G120 G136 2A1

EPROM COUNTER G137 MODULE
3A7 K/20 Bus G89 G
G66
G90 EPROM 888
kV/mA mA– mAs
G121
FL 3A26
BIN
ER HLC TH FCO
SC
Clk
DEC FC01
FCGR
Sm35 EPROM
Mod.G HLC mA (s)Up
3A7 ER Logic G118 G119 G132
Mod.8 G133 3A26 FIL
Ther mal Sw. TH Ckt TV Lens Cons. DAC
(3A7) + MA, SC, CLOCK mA.mAs Aperture Latch Latch mAs
EPROM G87 SC SC
G65 G88 (3A7)
G134
5R B A mA(s) Up
G135
500W Clock
ER HLC TH
Comparators mA–mAs COUNTER
MSI XR 0357
3A9 kV/mA
Illustration 7-11
7-22
REV 1
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode

The kV/20 bus addresses EPROM G66. G66 on its output bus sets an optimum mA value for each kV input. The mA
level depends on the operating mode selected and equipment safety.
Auto Mode
HLC (High Dose Fluoro)
ER (Electronic Radiography)
TH (X-ray tube head safety)
Digital counters G89 and G90 output data is converted to analog by G94. This sets the reference mA level for the
X-ray tube filament control circuits on 3A26.
7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode

The counters G89 and G90 start from the EPROM memory data previously established before manual mode
selection.
The counters are then incremented or decremented by the +/- mA input to the value manually selected. The clock
1 & 2 inputs from 3A7, determines the mA change speed.
Counters G89 and G90 outputs are fed to D/A G94 and Latch G118 as in the auto mode.
G87 and G88 compare the EPROM G65 output data with the G89 and G90 counter outputs to set the counters for
A=B. The counters input to the Latch G118 to display the mA level on 2A1, through EPROM G120 and decoders
G136 and G137. Latch G118 is set by the sc input.
G65 output data depends on the operating mode.
Fluoro - MA x 5R (154W)
ER & HLC - MA x 15R (500W)
TH - Reduce Power Operation
When the G65 output data equals the G89, and G90 counters the mA UP counting sequence stops. Counting down
is automatic if A>B.
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference

The mAs (up) data from 3A7 (up-down) 4 bit counters G134 and G135. The counters address EPROM G132
varying from .16 to 160 mAs in 31 steps.
The digital data drives the D/A converted G133 to provide the analog mAs reference to the x-ray tube filament
circuits on 3A26 in the Rad mode.
7-23
REV 1
7-24
REV 1
The counter G134,G135 outputs also drive the EPROM G120 and G121 through the latch G119. The latch is set by
the SC input in Rad.
G120 provides data for the 2A1 display through Decoders G136 and G137.
G121 outputs the following:
Information for the 2A1 Display

Logic signals to select the high or low integrators on 3A26
FC01 - Fluoro min mA value (.1 mA)
FC0 - Rad mAs min (.16 mAs)
FCGR - Rad mAs max ( 160 mAs)
kV/20 bus data is fed to the upper & lower kV limit comparators G20 and G21, and G18 and G19 respectively.
At limits the FC40 or FC110 comparator output is fed to the logic circuits on 3A7.
kV/20 bus data is converted to analog by G68 which provides the kV reference signal to 3A12.
Finally the kV/20 bus data addresses the EPROM G67, the output of which is decoded by G138 and G172 to drive
the 2A1 kV Display. BCD to Decimal Decoder G22 outputs additional information to the 2A1 Display and provides
data to the Rad, mA circuits on 3A26 to taper the mA over the kV range of 40 to 110 kV.
When HLC is selected by closing SM35, the logic circuits G122 & Q141 drive the TV camera aperture. The action
closes down the TV camera lens aperture to force increasing the radiation input to the Image Tube to the required
HLC level. S140B must be closed to enable driving the aperture.
7-25
REV 1
Pre heat
3A3 Power S133B (Reduced Power)
Q216 (Rad)
reduction RP
KV/MA Tapes
(Closed)
Q108, 110
3A9 Adder Amp Fil.
KV/MA A152 A214 Ret
from G22 Q287A 85%KV
& PRE
A138 A180 G188,

3A12 A284 184, 3A19
Measured MA Amp Integrator Compare
187 Stop mAs
(Rad)
3A9 Integ. Gain

0= .16 to 5mAs Q83, Q217
1= 5 to 160 mAs
mAs Ret 3A9
Pre Safety Delay (Rad)

Q193, 194, 197,
RP G184, 187
Pre heat
R3
R7 R8 Q26 (FL)
MEASURED mA
(FL) 3A12 A220 Compare
A222 Low Pass

R9 Filter
Q287B (FL)
SYX (FL) 3A19
MSI XR 0360
3A26 Filament Circuits

Illustration 7-12
7-26
REV 1
7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS
7-12-1 Fluoro Mode

A220 compares the measured (actual) mA from 3A12 and the reference mA from 3A9. Fluoro rate is set by R9.
The output of A220 is fed through low-pass filter A222 and drives amplifier A214 through FET Q287.
Q287 is ON in fluoro because of the SYX SC to its gate.
R3 also drives A214 through Q216B for pre-heating the x-ray tube filament. Q216B is on in fluoro.
7-12-2 Rad Mode

The Rad mA measured signal from 3A12 through A284 is added to the mA Gr reference at the input of A152. The
reference is selected by the FET's Q108 and Q110. These are switched to taper the Rad mA in six steps over the
range from 40 to 110 kV. The gate signals to the FET'S come from G22 on 3A9.
S133B enables changing the reference mA values for reduced x-ray tube power consumption. S133B must be
closed when the Stenoscop is operated from 120V AC power source (reduced power).
A152 drives A214 to develop the filament reference signal in the Rad mode. Q287 is ON if the 85 kV and PRE signals
are present on its gate.
R4 enables setting the x-ray tube pre-heat level for the Rad mode. It is switched by Q216A
Integrator A138 calculates the mAs. The integrator has two speeds because of the wide range of mAs (.16 to 160
mAs).
Integrator gain is set by Q83 and Q217 using the logic signals from 3A9. (0 = .16 to 5 mAs, 1 = 6 to 160 mAs).
A180 compares the integrator for A138 output with the mAs reference signal. When these are equal, the stop mAs
output to 3A19 is developed. On 3A19, the signal prevents sending trigger pulses to the main SCR's on the
converter, stopping the Rad exposure.
Maximum Rad exposures are limited to two different times, depending on whether reduced power operation is or is
not selected by S133B.
If reduced power is selected ( S133B is closed), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 11 seconds. RP is a logic
0. R8 enables setting the Rad safety delay in this mode.
When reduced power is not selected ( S133B open), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 7 seconds. RP is a
logic 1 and R7 enables adjusting the safety delay.
When the safety delay time elapses and the exposure is not complete the stop mAs is generated, terminating x-ray
emission.
7-27
REV 1
Rad Rad
Rad
5A1
G155 Selector Drivers
Pre amp & Amp Limiters
180 Hz Q206 Logic Q21, 20,
Q176, 129, Q125, 128 To X–ray
OSC G182,183 15, 11
162, 122 Q123, 121 head
Q124
Fil. Trans.
Current
FL Sense
Integrator Low Pass FL/Rad
A234, n2 n
Filter A282 Selector Voltage
Q265 & Multiplier Q213 A & B Source
Q266 A278 5TR1, 5CR3,
RMS C3 & C4
Compare
A237 Fil Ref +V
(A214) +
Voltage
Q20 Source
C3 5TR1
5CR3
–
C4
.5 1.8
Q11
MSI XR 0364
–V
3A26 Filament Circuits
Illustration 7-13
7-28
REV 1
7-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS
Oscillator G155 generates a positive going 180 Hz square wave pulse.
Q206 inverts the G155 output and drives the selector logic circuit. The pulse output of the selector logic is negative
going in fluoro and positive in Rad depending on the Rad or Rad input.
The selector logic output drives the push-pull complementary amplifier consisting of Q176, Q129, Q162 and Q122.
The amplifier output is finally applied to the x-ray tube filament transformer input drivers on 5A1 consisting of Q11,
15, 20 & 21.
The limiters (Q121, 123, 125, & 128) sense the 5A1 driver outputs. If an overdrive condition is measured, the limiters
ground the push-pull amplifier output at R133.
The RMS current in the 5A1 final driver outputs is measured by A282 through FET'S Q213A in the Rad mode and
Q213B in fluoro. A282 acts as a low-pass filter and drives the multiplier A278. The RMS2 output is now integrated
by A234. The signal output of Q206 is used to reset the integrator through Q266 and Q265.
Finally the integrator output is compared with the filament reference from A124. If the integrator RMS level exceeds
the reference value, A124 inhibits the pulses at Q206.
Referring to the simplified 5A1 output driver circuit, operation is as follows:
C3 charges up to +175V approximate, furnished by the floating DC supply consisting of 5CR3 and 5TR1.
During Rad positive drive pulses to Q20 cause it to conduct and discharge C3 through Q20, and the
filament transformer primary and charging C4.
During fluoro operation positive drive pulses turn ON Q11, allowing C4 to discharge through the filament
transformer and Q11.
Switching the polarity of the current pulses through the filament transformer primary enables selecting the small
focal spot of the x-ray tube in fluoro and the large focal spot in Rad. The energy input to the transformer is controlled
by varying the pulse width.
7-29
REV 1
2Hz OSC
(3A5) PRX–CP G35
Timer Display
G69 Counters Logic 4’ 57”

50Hz G38, 37 Ckts (3A19)
OSC G36 Stop Convt
R217 SCR’S
G35
PRX
Sm14
Timer
Reset 4’ 26” LED FLASH
Module G
2A1 Sm 7 PRX Logic
Ckts
G74,75
DS175
X–ray Buzzer
Exposure BPCL G39
Sm26 (3A19)
RAD
3A12
Module D
2A3 MSI EX 0363
Fluoro Timer/X-ray On Lamp

Illustration 7-14
7-30
REV 1
7-14 FLUORO TIMER
Depressing the exposure buttons, either SM7 or SM26, produces the BPCL signal to 3A19. This initiates the
exposure by switching ON the converter main SCR's.
BPCL is further processed on 3A19 to produce the SEXP logic signal to 3A12. 3A12 then develops the PRX signal to
trigger the oscillator G69 and G39.
After the counters G37,38 count 4'57'' the 4’57” signal goes to 3A19 board to stop the converter SCR's.
At a count of 4'26'' the 2Hz oscillator G35 begins to flash the SM14 Timer reset LED.
PRX also triggers the monostable G39 which enables energizing the DS175 buzzer for .25 seconds, after releasing
the exposure button.
G74 energizes the x-ray exposure buttons LED.
Depressing SM14 resets the timer counters.
Stenoscop 6000/9000 monitor cart x-ray on lamp.
7-31
REV 1
Sm11 (CCW)
–12V
7M1 Collimator
+12V Rotation
Sm12 (CW)
FC GR1
Sm15
(Close) G168, 157,
169, Q218
160, 159, Q211 7M3 Opaque
Sm16 (Open) 164, 156 Collimators
Logic Ckts
Rad
FC Sc1
Sm13
(Open) G180, 163
181, 179, Q249 Semi–transparent
Q241 7M2 Collimators
164, 166, 158
Sm14 (Close) Logic Ckts
FC GR2
Circular Coll
Q189 9” Tube
7M5
Q190
Rad only
Sm17 G165 Latch

G155 Monostable Q191 Circular Coll
7M4
Logic Ckts Q192 6” or 9” Tubes
Zoom
Rad Z=0= Not zoom

S501A & B
Open for 6” tube
MSI XR 0362
3A3 Collimators
Illustration 7-15
7-32
REV 1
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS
Refer to Ilustration 7-15.

Motor 7M1 rotates the collimator. Depressing Sm11 or 12 energizes the motor for desired direction of rotation.
Either a 6" or dual field 6"-9" image tube can be use on the Stenoscop.
7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube

7M3 moves the upper opaque collimator blades. These are controlled by Sm15 and Sm16. Q218 and Q211 enable
reversing the voltage to 7M3 to open or close the blades.
The collimator blades can be moved provided that:
Maximum opening limit switches are not actuated, FC SC1 (Fluoro) FCGR1 (Rad) console settings are com-
patible with operating mode selected (Fluoro or Rad).
7M2 drives the lower semi-transparent collimator blades. These are controlled by SM13 and Sm14. Q249 and
Q241 enable reversing power to 7M2 to open and close the blades.
Collimator drive is enabled provided that the maximum opening switches are not activated FCSC2 (Fluoro) FCGR2
(Rad).
When the operating mode is switched from Rad to Fluoro all the collimator blades are automatically driven to limit
x-ray emission to the input field size of the image tube 6", (16cm) FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated.
When changing from Fluoro to Rad, the collimator blades must be manually positioned. LED's for SM14 and SM16
will be flashing. Repositioning the blades for Rad mode stops the flashing.
7M5 is not used with the 6" Image Tube.
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube

Sm17 Console button enables selecting the desired field size. S501 A&B must be closed.
Opening and closing of the collimator blades is the same as for the 6" Image Tube.
In the 9" mode, the Z signal =0. This changes the limit switch selection for the collimator blades. The maximum
opening now depends on FCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of FCSC1 and FCSC2 in Fluoro.
In the 6" mode, the Z signal = 1. Collimator blades will now be automatically set to the FCSC1 and FCSC2 limit
positions.
Flashing of the control switch LED's is identical to that for the 6" Image Tube.
7-15-3 Circular Collimators

These are driven by 7M5 and 7M4. They function to confine the x-ray beam emission.
In the Rad mode both circular collimators are moved out of the x-ray beam.
In the Fluoro 6" mode 7M5 moves the 6" circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit x-ray emission to the 6" input
field size of the image tube.
In the Fluoro 9" mode 7M4 moves the 9" circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit emission to the 9" Image Tube
input view field.
With a single field 6" image tube, 7M4 is used to move the 6" circular collimator to limit input field size.
7-33
REV 1
Module 8 TV Camera
Q145
(3A7) Auto Gain Control (CAG)
Auto
(3A7) Delay
ER Logic Ckts
G161, 162, Q148
(3A5)
170, 171 R239
Sexp
C235
(3A7) S133A
F110
S133D
Syx Sc
(3A19) G166 G166 Q512 Video Blank
S133C
Q132 Beam (Max)
+24v
Zoom (Mag mode)

Zoom Z1 Q149
Q146
9Sml
2A3 Sm21 Aux Coil
G163
Module D
Q152
2A1
Module G
Sm 4
+5V
Time Time
PRX Counter Counter
(3A12) Q209 K233 K510
SYXSC
OX Logic Ckts OX HLC

(3A19) G162, 176, 177 (3A9)
RAD
MSI XR 0361
3A3 Board
Illustration 7-16
7-34
REV 1
7-16 3A3 BOARD
TV Camera Automatic Gain Control (CAG) operates during:
Auto Fluoro or Electronic Rad (ER)
During x-ray ON (SEXP)
KV at upper limit (F110 )
S133A permits activating the AGC without the above signals (closed).
The delay circuit inhibits CAG at the start to enable TV camera reaching stability.
S133D enables unblanking the TV camera without x-ray Syx Sc.
S133C enables setting TV vidicon beam current to low beam during x-ray emission Syx Sc.
Depressing either Sm21 or Sm4 energizes the auxiliary coil of 95ml switching the unit OFF.
In High Dose Fluoro (HLC), the OX logic signal generates the OX HLC to 3A9 to close down the TV aperture (iris) in
the HLC mode. The Syx Sc holds the HLC during pulsed Fluoro. OX HLC is defeated in the Rad mode.
With a dual field tube, in the 6" mode Z1 logic signal enables switching the image tube electron optics for the magnify
mode.
PRX logic (x-ray on) activates Time Counter K233 to record x-ray on time. Time Counter K510 is active as soon as
power is turned ON. Therefore it records the total ON time of the Stenoscop.
7-35
REV 1
Mod D (2A3) 3A5

1A1 Board
Sm22
Sm23
Drivers
Logic Ckts Q28
G16, Q17 K34
Q25, Q30
Mod G (2A1) 3A7 Q33
K44
Sm5
Sm9
K6 K34, K44
Trans Polarity Up/Down
5TR1 1M1
Power Reverse Drive Motor
Supply
+24V
To Module 8
MSI XR 0359
C-Arm Motor Drive
Illustration 7-17
7-36
REV 1
7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE
Up/down motion of the C-Arm is performed by the 1M1 motor.
Depressing either Sm23 or Sm5 produces UP drive.
Depressing either Sm22 or Sm9 produces Down motion.
Depressing any of the above console buttons energizes K6 to enable applying power to the 1M1 motor.
The power supply also furnishes +24v DC to Module 8 (Image Tube and TV Camera).
7-37
REV 1
Q195
G140A +24V
H Sweep
G140D 24
Sm10 Q Q55
G106 To Module 8
Sm9 TV Camera
G140E
Q 23
Q57
V Sweep
Q194 +24V
G140F
Sm8 G163B
Q151
K7 Monitor 1
Sm7 12V
G163C
Q156
K5 9A1
12V
Sm6 G163D
Q171
K7 Monitor 2
Sm5 12V
G163E
Q176
K5 9A2
12V
MSI XR 0368
3A5 Timer
Illustration 7-18
7-38
REV 1
7-18 3A5 TIMER
Added to the Timer Board functions already covered, the Board performs the following additional functions:
TV Camera Sweep reversal
Camera sweep reversal is controlled by Sm9 and Sm10 buttons on the control console. Sm9 enables horizontal
image reversal while Sm10 permits vertical reversal of the TV Camera image.
Depressing the console buttons flips the G106 dual bistable. The bistable outputs drive opto couplers Q55 and 57 to
switch +24V to the TV Camera H and V sweep circuits. The Q outputs of G106 also drive transistors Q195 and Q194
to energize the selected button LED'S.
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation

Console buttons Sm7 and Sm8 switch ON transistors Q156 and Q151 respectively to drive the sweep rotation coil
relays K5 and K7 for Monitor 1. The relays energize the motor drive circuit for image rotation on Monitor 1.
Console buttons Sm5 and Sm6 switch transistors Q176 and Q171 to energize Monitor 2 sweep rotation relays K5
and K7 for Monitor 2.
The 3A5 Board also contains circuitry for Monitor brightness control. The circuits, however, are not used.
7-39
REV 1
7-40
REV 1
7-19 LAB EXERCISE
Refer to Stenoscop 2 Manual Part 1, Section 5.
Have the students do the following Lab Exercises as outlined in the above:
Guide Wheel/Adjustment
Handle Position
C-Arm Rotation Brake
Travel Safety
Fluoro mA
Fluoro Pre Heating
Fluoro Timer
Rad Safety
Rad Pre Heating
FL/Rad Switch Verification
mAs Integrators
Auto Fluoro Systems
7-41
REV 1
TP2
24V. VRI +18V
R1
TP7
AGC Delay
AGC (On/Off)
MNI
To Camera Video Amp
TP9
R9
–15V
DS3
+24V GI 15V
TP8
VR2
+10V
TP3
TP4
NOR R2 G3
MAI G3
MAG R3 G3 CR3
To image tube
MX1 power supply
NOR R5 G2 TP5
MAI G2
MAG R6 G2 CR4
*MAG R10 R TP6
NOR R8 MA2 G1
MX2 CR2
MAG DH2
Mode 1
+15V
IRIS DH1
+15V
To Iris Control MSI XR 0378
*Only on 45560536
Power Supply (PL1)

Illustration 7-19
7-42
REV 1
7-20 TV Camera
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1)

24v input to voltage regulator VR1 provides a +18v output for the TV Camera circuits. R1 enables adj to 18 v ± .1v.
In fluoro, with CL/ON and x-ray/ON inputs both high, the AGC is active when the kV reaches 110 kV after a delay set
by MN1. R9 enables setting the AGC delay. The delay permits the TV Camera circuits to stabilize before AGC
becomes active.
24v input to Regulator G1 produces the ±15v DC output.
The LED, DS3 is energized if the Image Tube current exceeds 1µA.
Regulator VR2 furnishes +10v to the image tube electrode adjustment pots R2, R3, R5, R6, R8 and R10. The pots
enable adjusting the Image Tube G1, G2 and G3 electrostatic lens voltages in the normal and magnify modes as
indicated.
External control signals for image tube (normal and +mag) mode switching and iris HQ mode positioning is through
the opto-couplers DH2, and DH1, respectively.
CR3, CR4 and CR2 protect against overvoltage.
7-43
REV 1
TP1 ImV=InA TP4

Newvicon Q5, 6, 7 To Sync & Mask PL3
Target Q1,2,3 & 4 MA1–1,2 Q8 RX
Signal MX1–1,2,3 (Auto Brightness)
Hclamp
Black R1
Window S4 Black Level
Adjust.
R2 Max Gain TP11
MA3, 4
Q9, 10, 11, 12 Q17, 18, 19 Composite
Video
to Memory DSM
R7 & Monitors
Comp Q16 Video Blk
Blanking Level (Set–up)
250 mV
Comp Q20 B/W
Sync
MA5–2 Gamma & Edge 50 mV Set–up

MX2–1, 2, 3 enhance Q13,
F110 Q15 14, S2, S3
R6 R5
AGC Gain Man. Gain R4 Gamma – wht clip
MSI XR 0376
Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)

Illustration 7-20
7-44
REV 1
7-20-2 Pre–Amp and Video Board (PL2)

The Newvicon target video signal drives the series connected amplifiers Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. At TP1, the level is
1mV = 1nA.
Next we feed the black level circuit consisting of Q5, Q6 and Q7, MA1 and MA2 and electronic switches MX1-1,
MX1-2 & MX1-3. The output is applied to Q8 to provide the (Rx) auto brightness signal.
R1 enables setting the video black level to the Newvicon dark current level.
The black level circuit utilizes the H clamp and black window signal inputs.
The signal at TP4 also drives the MA3 and MA4 attenuator and amplifier. R2 sets the maximum gain and is a factory
adjustment.
The output of Q12 is applied to differential amplifier Q17 and Q18 and an emitter output Q19 for the composite video
output at TP11.
Note that composite sync and blanking are added to form the composite output.
R7 enables establishing the video black level 50 mV above blanking.
The output of Q12 is also fed to the Gamma and white clip and Edge Enhancement circuits formed by Q13 & 14.
Switching S2 enables Gamma and white clip correction by means of R4. S2 permits injecting Edge Enhancement.
The output of MA5-1 drives the AGC circuits consisting of MA5-2 and 3 and electronic switches MX2-1, 2 and 3.
R5 is used for manual gain setting while R6 is for setting the AGC gain in the active mode. The circuit is active in the
auto fluoro and electronic radiographic modes when maximum kV = 110 is reached.
7-45
REV 1
Crystal Comp Sync & blanking

OSC & MN2 TP6
5.04 MHz MUX HD
Divider
(525 line MNI
rate) VD
TP7
MN5 TP11
MA3 MA6–1 Video Circular
2X Int Blanking
MA5 R4 Size
R1 H cent
MN6
MA4 R3 MA6–2 Blk Window
2xInt Roundness
R2 R6 Size
Vcent
MA 7 ABC Window
TP12 R5
Size
Amp
Video Rx Q2, 3, 4, 5, & 6
MX2– 1, 2, 3 Video ABC
(From Pre Amp (To 3A5)
PL2)
TP13
MSI XR 0377
Sync and Mask Board (PL3)

Illustration 7-21
7-46
REV 1
7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3)
The master oscillator and divider (MN1) is crystal controlled at 5.04 mHz and provides RS170 sync and blanking for
the 525 line rate.
The Mux (MN2) outputs produces the composite sync and blanking and horizontal and vertical drive outputs.
The horizontal and vertical drive square wave signals are each integrated twice to generate the parabola signals
required for the video, black window and ABC window circular patterns.
R1 enables horizontal circular mask centering and R2 centers the circular mask patterns vertically. R3 is adjusted for
circular mask roundness.
Video blanking diameter is set by R4, and the Black Window and ABC window sizes are adjusted by R6 and R5,
respectively.
The Rx signal from the Video Board is passed through the series connected amplifiers consisting of Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5
and Q6 and electronic switches MX2-1, MX2-2 and MX2-3 to produce the ABC window video to the hysteresis
circuit on 3A5. Q6 enables averaging of the video data in the sample window area.
7-47
REV 1
VD
MA1–1 MA2–1, 2
Vsweep
MX2–1, 2, 3
(Defl)
R5 Vcent NOR
V size R1
R2 Vcent Rev
VD Q6 ,Q7 Cathode
HD (Newvicon)
R8 H cent
HD Q5 ,TRI Rev
R6 H sweep
H size R7 H Lin K1 (Defl)
R9
H cent
NOR
R10 MA4, Q8 Focus

Focus
R12 Target
Target 0 to +80V.
To
Q3 TR2 G2 300V Newvicon
HD G3 450V
MA3 G4 630V
R4 Stand–by
R3
(G 2 ,G 3 , G 4 ) G1 Beam
K2
R11 Normal
+18V VRI 6.3V Filament
MSI XR 0375
Scan Converter and Focus (PL5)

Illustration 7-22
7-48
REV 1
7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5)
Vertical Drive to MA1 and MA2 amplifiers and electronic switching MX2 provides Vertical Sweep to the Camera tube
Vertical Deflection Coil.
R5 permits sweep size adjustment while R1 and R2 enable vertical raster centering on the camera tube target for
normal and reverse presentations, respectively.
Vertical and Horizontal Drive to Q6 and Q7 produces Camera Tube Cathode blanking.
Horizontal Drive to Q5 and Transformer TR1 develops the horizontal sweep to the Camera tube H Deflection coil.
R6 and R7 are for H size and H linearity corrections, respectively. R8 and R9 enable centering the raster horizontally
on the Camera tube target in the normal and reverse modes.
R10 adjustment, fed to MA4 amplifier and driver output Q8 to the Camera Tube focus coil enables focusing the beam
on the Newvicon target.
H Drive to the circuit consisting of Q3, MA3 and Transformer TR2 enables setting Newvicon operating potentials as
follows:
R12 established the required target voltage.
A single adjustment, R3, sets the G2, G3 and G4 Camera tube electrode potentials.
R4 and R11 set the Newvicon G1 beam potentials for STAND-BY (no x-ray exposure) and NORMAL
(x-ray) modes. K2 relay is driven by the control circuits on Board 3A3.
Filament voltage (6.3v DC) for the Camera pick-up tube is obtained from regulator VR1.
7-49
REV 1
+24V
From IRIS SIG

3A9
B3 B2
Std FL –
P1 B1
X
+
HLC –
P2 M IRIS
+
63 mm
– (Max open)
B1
+
+V
Servo
B2 Position
MSI XR 0374
Iris Control
Illustration 7-23
7-50
REV 1
7-23 IRIS CONTROL
The iris, or aperture, has only two positions. One is for setting the standard fluoro light input to the TV Camera
pick-up tube. The second is for the HLC operating mode.
These iris openings are established by adjustment of P1 for standard fluoro and P2 for HLC. In the HLC mode, the
iris is closed down from its fluoro position.
The iris is physically located in front of the TV Camera lens. Its maximum physical opening is 63mm.
Let's consider we are adjusting P1 to establish the iris opening for standard fluoro. Assume we develop a positive
voltage output at X of B3. This is fed through follower B2 applies a positive input to the inverter input of B1 and
develops a negative output voltage across the top side of motor M.
Note that the positive output of follower B2 is also applied to the positive input of the lower B1 on the drawing. Its
output will, therefore, be positive applied to the lower side of motor M. Simply, we have a voltage across the motor
and the iris motor drives and changes the iris opening.
Note that the servo position pot is physically tied to the motor. Thus, we now develop an increasing positive input
position voltage to the remaining inputs of both B1 output drivers. This is applied through the lower follower, B2, as
the position of the servo pot is changed.
When the sum of the inputs to both B1 drivers is zero, their outputs will be zero and the motor stops.
Adjusting P2 will result in the same action, and we will close down the iris opening for HLC operation.
7-51
REV 1
(Sync separator)
H
U4 U3
U2 U1 (Sync) Remote
Q1 Q2 contrast
V
Q11
Blk Level
Clamp
Q6
Video
Q3,4,5 Q7, 8 Q1 0
In
C17
Diff. Amp Follower
R29 Gain
Q9
R45
BIAS
Remote
Q6
Brightness
Grid
Q1 Q2, 3, 4, 5 to CRT
Cathode
Follower Diff amps

cascaded
H–V
Blanking
blanking control
circuit Q101
Ext to Q105
blanking
R32 XR0386
BIAS
Video Preamp and Output Amplifier
Illustration 7-24
7-52
REV 1
7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS
The camera video output is fed to series connected buffers Q3, 4 and 5. R29 sets the video level gain. Output buffer
Q5 is capacity coupled to a differential amplifier (Q7 and Q8).
At the output of the differential amplifier, R45 driving Q9 enables setting the video black level to zero as measured on
the collector of Q8. Also, the remote contrast permits establishing the desired contrast setting through Q11.
Q10 follower applies the video to Q1 which in turn drives the differential amplifier (Q2 and Q3). These now drive a
pair of cascade output amplifiers (Q4 and Q5). The collector of Q5 drives the CRT cathode while the Q4 output is
applied to the grid of the CRT.
Remote brightness adjust fed to Q6 enables establishing the desired video brightness level on the grid of the CRT.
The composite signal applied to the sync separator circuits strips the video portion and produces the H and V sync
outputs.
Q6 clamps the video black level.
The blanking circuit will permit blanking the video during H and V retrace periods or upon an external blanking
commands.
7-53
REV 1
+V
H hold B+ +Video
R113 Boost V. T102 & Reg –150V.
U105, U104, +6V.
U106 +5V.
–5V.
Q101 Pre Amp
H OSC – PLL
T101
Sync U101, U102
Q104 Output Amp
H Defl
+V Phase
Delay
R110
L 102 Lin
L 103 Width
To Q303 To Q301
(Sweep dynamic
protect) L 101 focus
H cent
Simplified H Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-25
XR0388
7-54
REV 1
The PLL oscillator, U102, driving the preamp, Q101, and output amplifier, Q104, locks the deflection output pulse to
the H sync input.
Q104 feeds the series connected horizontal deflection coil, H linearity L102, width coil L103 and the H centering
L101.
Q104 also switches the current input to T102 primary at the horizontal sweep rate (15.75 kHz). The secondary of
T102 driving the voltage regulators U105, U104 and U103 produces the +6v and ±5v regulated outputs. In addition,
T102 supplies the -150v and +video unregulated outputs.
R110 sets the phase of oscillator U102 while R113 enables adjustment of the horizontal hold to within ±150 Hz of the
H sync.
L102, L103 and L101 permit adjusting H linearity, width and centering, respectively.
Notice that the H drive current through the width coil L103 is also fed to Q303 for sweep failure protection and to
Q301 for dynamic focus.
7-55
REV 1
V L 103
V Sync Q201 Inverter Defl H. width
U201–
OSC,Ramp gen, power amp.
+V
V
shape
R207 R219
V cent H sweep Q303 To CRT
R205A
Q304 (Control Grid)
V freq.
Q202 V sweep
R212 (Sweep failure
Q203 protection)
V size
R213
V linearity To dynamic focus
ckt (V parabola)
XR0387
Simplified V Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-26
7-56
REV 1
U201 is an oscillator, a ramp generator and power amplifier. The oscillator is locked to the V inverted sync input while
the output power amplifier drives the vertical deflection yoke.
R219 enables vertical raster centering.
Q303 and Q304 protect the CRT against either an H or V sweep drive failure. Should a sweep failure occur, the
control grid of the CRT will be driven to cut-off.
Q202 and Q203 furnish a V parabola signal to the dynamic focus circuit.
R205A is the vertical hold adjustment.
R212 enables adjusting the vertical raster size.
R213 adds the parabola signal to the ramp generator section of U201 for setting the top and bottom V raster size to
center size ratio.
R207 enables fine adjustment of V sweep linearity.
7-57
REV 1
+V
+300V
Q302
R311
H Focus
C307
CR308
+V C309
T301 C304
To CRT
V (FOCUS GRID)
Parabola C302 &
C303
R310 CR304
Corner
focus
V Focus
+V
+V
L103
Width R321 To CRT
DC Focus (G2)
Q301 G2
R323
Adj.
–150 V
Simplifed Dynamic Focus Circuit

Illustration 7-27
7-58
REV 1
Transformer T301 and capacitors C302 and C303 form a tuned resonant circuit at the H rate. The tank circuit is
excited by the H sweep through Q301.
Thus, the output at T301 is a sinusoid at the H frequency, coupled to the Monitor CRT focus electrode through C304.
The H oscillations are modulated by the V parabola applied to the base of Q301 and controlled by R309. This
particularly effects the focus at the corners of the raster scan.
R311 controls the peak amplitude of the H oscillations and therefore must be set for best focus at the edges of the H
sweep.
R310 controls the amplitude of the V parabola driving Q302 and enables adjusting the V focus at the top and bottom
edges of the vertical sweep.
The DC focus potential is set by R323. It is set to provide best center focus.
The final resultant signal output to the CRT focus grid is a sinusoid at the H frequency, amplitude modulated by the V
parabola and added to the DC level set by R323.
R321 enables adjusting the CRT, G2 electrode potential.
7-59
REV 1
T2
L–C Reg +
T1 Filter 24V.
R5&6
CR9
220V
AC HV Supply
C13 (sealed)
Nonserviceable
To CRT
CR1 Accel
Anode
CR8
U1
R11 U2 Switcher Q1 &2
U3 & U4 R33
XR0390
Simplified Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

Illustration 7-28
7-60
REV 1
220v AC is fed to bridge rectifier CR9.
Current through R5 and R6 charges C13 to the threshold level (16v) and starts switcher U1. U1 drives Q1 and Q2
and energizes T1.
T1 output current through T2 feeds the RC filter network to produce the +24v regulated output.
T2 secondary continues to supply the switcher U1 through CR1.
If the T2 supply is too high, the crowbar circuit involving U2 and CR8 is activated for circuit protection.
The feedback voltage across R33 driving the Zener U4 and the opto-coupler U3 determines the duty cycle
(ON-OFF) time of switcher U1. The +24v DC output of the power supply is thus regulated to within +24v ±.5v.
R11 and R33 are factory set and should require no further adjustment.
7-61
REV 1
Rear Panel Light Sensor

Switch Bd. Board
Photo Cell
Film Cassette
Main Board Lens Plate
M Shutter
Board
Alpha Switch
Numeric Interface CRT
Display Board
Monitor
XR0392
Matrix 1010 (Model 1) Block Diagram
Illustration 7-29
7-62
REV 1
7-25 1010 FORMATTER
The main board performs the following functions:
• It accepts operator-selected exposure parameters through the Rear Panel Switch Board and the Switch
Interface Board.
• It drives the Alphanumeric Display
• The Main Board uses the photocell brightness control signal to control monitor CRT brightness for constant
film exposure density
• The Main Board controls opening and closing of the shutter drive motor through the lens Plate Board.
• It houses the Z80 microprocessor and memories that control Matrix functions.
7-63
REV 1
Mirror
CRT
Shutter
Lens Photo Cell
Mirror
Mirror
Film cassette
xr0395
Matrix 1010 Optical Path

Illustration 7-30
7-64
REV 1
The folded optical light path is as shown in the drawing.
Note the position of the photocell on the second mirror. The photocell is used to manage monitor CRT brightness.
The shutter remains closed before each film exposure to set-up the brightness loop in a calibration mode. It then
opens for the film exposure.
Actual film exposure time is controlled by unblanking the monitor CRT.
7-65
REV 1
CRT Photo cell
Integrator
Monitor
light sensor
board
Mux
D/A
Contrast, blanking
& brightness
Compare
A/D
Memory µp
Operator
Select
Contrast Exposure time

& brightness XR0393
Brightness Exposure Control Loop
Illustration 7-31
7-66
REV 1
The operator programs the monitor brightness, contrast and exposure time for the desired film density and film to be
used. The operator data is stored in memory. Up to eight sets of values can be stored using four for positive images
and four for negative images.
Using the set exposure parameters, the brightness feedback loop maintains monitor brightness for consistent film
density. The photocell operates in conjunction with the microprocessor and the video monitor. It reads monitor
brightness and produces an output current proportional to brightness.
Before each film exposure, the microprocessor commands the monitor to display a calibration pattern.
The photocell measures the monitor CRT light output with the Cal" pattern and the microprocessor then compares
this with a reference level represented by the brightness number stored in memory. The microprocessor then
adjusts the monitor brightness to match the reference value. When this occurs, the calibration cycle is completed,
the CRT displays the video image, the shutter opens and the exposure takes place.
The block diagram shows the photocell current output integrated on the Light Sensor Board, passed through a mux
and then to a comparator and A/D converter to the microprocessor. The microprocessor looks at the stored memory
exposure data, compares this with the photocell signal and then provides a correction through a D/A to the monitor
brightness circuit to satisfy the loop. Stored memory data with respect to contrast and exposure time is also fed to
the monitor circuits. Exposure timing is controlled by unblanking the monitor.
7-67
REV 1
Comp Video
Unblanking Comp Video & Blanking
Video Amp.
Contrast
Scan & DYN Focus
Brightness
Output Board CRT
Comp Sync
V Scan &
+750V.
V Sweep Blanking
X Smoothing
Sync Board V. Defl
CRT
Filament
V Defl. Coil
CRT Board
H Defl. Coil
–150 & +750v
H Sync
H Defl
H Scan & H. V. Power
PLL Sync Blanking Supply
Brightness
Scan Fail
XR0394
Matrix Video Monitor Block Diagram

Illustration 7-32
7-68
REV 1
7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER
Composite video from the Mother Board is applied to the Video Amplifier. The video signal is amplified and stripped
of sync. Composite video drives the Output Board and is then applied to the CRT cathode. Composite sync is fed to
the V Defl and the Smoothing Board. Contrast signal from the Mother Board sets the gain on the Video Amplifier
while the unblanking input drives the cathode of the CRT to control exposure time.
7-26-1 Smoothing Board

Composite sync from the Video Amplifier is used to develop H Sync and V Sweep on the Smoothing Board. H Sync
is applied to the H Defl while V Sweep is used on the V Defl. PLL sync from the H Defl to the Smoothing board is used
as a line clock. The X Sync output to the external circuits (Mother Board) is for blanking control for photographic
applications.
7-26-2 V Defl
The V Defl produces the V drive the the Vert deflection coil and applies V scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These
are derived from the ramp signal from the Smoothing Board and the composite sync from the Vertical Amplifier.
Adjustable blanking from composite sync is used for dynamic focus on the CRT Board.
7-26-3 H Defl
The H Defl furnishes H scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are developed by processing the H sync input
from the Smoothing Board. The H sync also produces the H sweep to the Horizontal CRT deflection coil.
7-26-4 CRT Board

The board functions to detect H or V sweep failures. Should such occur, the scan fail signal is developed and fed to
the external control circuits. The brightness signal from the Mother Board controls a brightness amplifier which in
turn drives the G1 electrode of the CRT (through the Output Board). H and V blanking inputs together with the
-150V to +750V potentials from the HV supply are used for static and dynamic focus to the Output Board. The CRT
Board also has a filament regulator for the CRT filament.
7-26-5 Output Board

Summing of the static and dynamic focus signal inputs from the CRT Board enables applying focus control
potentials to the G4 electrode of the CRT. The brightness signal and +750v inputs fed through low pass filters
produce potentials for the G1 (brightness) and G2 electrodes of the CRT.
A regulated filament voltage passes through the Output Board to the filament of the CRT. Finally, the composite
video from the Video Amplifier fed through a final cathode amplifier drives the CRT cathode. Blanking from the Video
Amplifier enables controlling the Output Board cathode amplifier to either blank or unblank the CRT.
7-69
REV 1
7-70
REV 1
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide the student with experience doing the electronic adjustments for the X-ray portion of the
Stenoscop.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 19
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S kVp measurement
S Travel safety
S Fluoro mA adjustment
S Fluoro Preheating
S Fluoro Timer
S Rad Safety
S Rad mA Preheating
S Rad/Fluoro switch test
S mAs Integrators
SAFETY:
Safety Policy.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the adjustments procedures given in Section 19 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement. Use
the Service Manual that was received with the equipment to insure that we are using the most current directions.
7-71
REV 1
7-72
REV 1
7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide necessary experience for the student for calibration of the Stenoscop Image System.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 13
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S Calibration of the Monicon 3 Camera System

S Calibration of the Imageur Image System
S Calibration of the Stenoscop Auto Brightness Loop
S Use of the DSM Image Quality Tests
SAFETY:
Safety Policy, Static Control - ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the calibration in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement, Section 11 Monicon 3 TV Calibration.
7-73
REV 1
7-74
REV 1
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
FUSES REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
PWB SWITCHES JOB CARDS RG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
TIME COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
RG 21 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-1
REV 1
8-2
REV 1 SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 6.3
6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
6–2–1–1 X–RAY PROTECTION
During an operation involving X–ray emission, put a lead apron between the X–ray head and the image intensi-
fier of the mobile system.
6–2–1–2 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must
be taken with the oscilloscope in differential mode.
Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.
6–2–1–3 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 ”COMMANDE SCR”
Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized.

The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 is
disconnected.
6–2–1–4 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS
Don’t forget to ground the boards (with an extension lead with FASTON terminals).
6–2–1–5 BOARD REPLACEMENT
De–energize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY
6–2–2–1 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards.
The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:
1) Non–interchangeable boards.
2) Readily interchangeable boards.
Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.
3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.
NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.
In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it.
All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...
6–2–2–2 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
– DIVIDER 6A1 PWB

In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the X–ray head, on which it is mounted.
This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.
After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar char-
acteristics. This can be done in the factory only.
8-3
6–2–2–3 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (C–arm motor)
2A1 MODULE G2 (control console) PWB

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG40
2A3 MODULE D2 (control console) PWB
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWB

3A7 AD/kV PWB

Check the presence of bridge W10
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWB

Check the presence of W245 bridge
CAUTION : EPROM
Check agreement: name, position, revision
3A12 kV/mA PWB

Adjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG10)
Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG14)
Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.
3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWB

Check bridge presence W16
4A1 SCR No1 PWB
4A2 SCR No 2 PWB
5A1 PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)
7A1 FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)
7A2 DISQUE PWB (Disk) – Complete adjustment of collimator
9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)
9A4 PRISE PWB
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 – STENOSCOP 2

This board is fully factory calibrated.
If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG21.
8-4
6–2–2–4 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS
3A5 Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)

–Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 20).
3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)

–Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 12)
–Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 13)
–Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 16)
8-5
6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT
The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.

During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL
OF FUSE.
A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R n 01 sheet for access.
This bag countains :
2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V code 854 352 P 025
1 Fuse ABC 3A 250V code 854 352 P 045
1 Fuse ABC 5A 250V code 854 352 P 055
1 Fuse ABC 8A 250V code 854 352 P 075
1 Fuse MDA 3A 250V code 854 352 P 425
1 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V code 854 362 P 315
It is possible to order this ”Maintenance bag” with the code number 828 731 G 015.
6–2–3–1 FUSES LIST
NAME MODEL LOCALIZATION ACCES

1A1F5 MDA 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
1A1F8 ABC 3A 250V MODULE 1 D/R 02
5F2 ABC 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
5F3 ABC 8A 250V MODULE 5 D/R 01
9F1 ABC 1A 250V MONITOR CART see sheet
9F2 ABC 1A 250V
9F4 FNQ 1A 500V
6–2–3–2 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT
Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuse

MODEL MDA 3A 250V
When 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system
– Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.
– Check cleanliness of the roller plates
– Verify that the motor current is lower than 2,5A when column is on mechanical stop.
8-6
6–3 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
6–3–1 GENERAL
– There are two categories of disassembly/reassembly sheets : mechanical (numbered from 1) and electronic
(num bered from 20).
– Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassembly and
reas sembly procedure.
–The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.
6–3–2 LIST OF DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
6–3–2–1 MECHANICAL PARTS
Sheet Title
No.
01 Disassembly/Reassembly of mobile system front cover
02 Disassembly/Reassembly of mobile system rear cover
03 Disassembly/Reassembly of X–ray head upper cover
04 Disassembly/Reassembly of steering handle
05 Control console opening procedure
06 Disassembly/Reassembly of guide cable
07 Disassembly/Reassembly of gas spring
08 Releasing the inverter and the board rack
09 Disassembly/Reassembly of Monitors support rear covers
6–3–2–2 ELECTRONIC PARTS
Sheet Title
No.
20 Disassembly/Reassembly of X–ray head
21 Disassembly/Reassembly of Extender board
22 Disassembly/Reassembly of C–arm motor PWB 1A1
23 Disassembly/Reassembly of inverter capacitors 4C1 to 4C6
24 Disassembly/Reassembly of inverter bridge 4CR7
25 Disassembly/Reassembly of press–pack semiconductors
26 Disassembly/Reassembly of transformer 5TR1
27 Disassembly/Reassembly of power supply bridges CR2 and CR3
28 Disassembly/Reassembly of heating power PWB 5A1
29 Disassembly/Reassembly of main power supply capacitors C2, C3 and C4
30 Disassembly/Reassembly of control console PWBs
31 Disassembly/Reassembly of C–arm motor 1M1
32 Disassembly/Reassembly of breaker 9Sm1
40 ”C Arm” cable replacement
8-7
STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 40 1 of 2
Purpose: PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION. Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
Time: Manpower:
No et Nom du CI Switch No Switch Position FONCTION
EUR. USA
2A1 S58 1–4 (A) ON ON The 3 switches determine the function of BP 2A1 Sm 35
PUPITRE MODULE G2 2–3 (B) ON ON Stenoscop 2 (D6/D9)
S59 1–4 (A) ON ON HIGH QUALITY or STANDARD FLUORO mode
828 986 G015 2–3 (B) OFF OFF selection
S60 1–4 (A) OFF OFF Stenoscop LE
2–3 (B) OFF OFF BLOCKING OF MEMORIZATION ( DR )
2A2 S528 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = Possibility of camera sweeps inversions
PUPITRE MODULE D2 2–3 (B) OFF OFF OFF = No possibility of camera sweeps inversions
828 984 G025

3A1 S502 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )
INTERFACE DSM OFF = No RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )
2–3 (B) OFF ON ON = No RX Hold in SN mode
828 988 G035 OFF = RX Hold in SN mode
S602 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = RX Hold in SN mode during T1+T2 (if S502 B OFF)
Stenoscop2(D6/D9) OFF = RX Hold in SN mode during T1 (if S502 B OFF)
only 2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = ACP delay activated
OFF = ACP delay not activated
3A3 S133 1–8 (A) OFF OFF ON = AGC Camera ON
DIAPHRAGMES 2 2–7 (B) OFF OFF ON if MAINS 100, 108 ou 120V–Reduced power
3–6 (C) ON ON OFF = Beam standby mode
828 978 G025 4–5 (D) ON ON OFF = Go to black function inactive
S501 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = Stenoccop 2 D9

OFF = Stenoscop 2 D6
2–3 (B) ON ON OFF = Led PB II mode OFF
3A9 S140 1–4 (A) ON ON ON = 2A1 Sm35 bistable function
CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 2–3 (B) OFF = 2A1 Sm35 instable funcntion
ON ON ON = Iris TV camera disconnected
828 980 G035 (D6/D9)
OR S246 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL mode
828 980 G045 (LE) 2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL and ER mode
3A19 S76 1–8 (A) OFF OFF ON = Unit without memory
COMMANDE SCR 2 2–7 (B) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure not autorised from Footswitch
3–6 (C) ON ON ON = RAD Exposure autorised from RAD?FL handswitch
828 982 G025 4–5 (D) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure not autorised from consol PB
3A26 S528 1–4 (A) OFF OFF ON = RAD Exposure at reduced power
CHAUFFAGE FILA- 2–3 (B) OFF OFF ON = Used only in calibration procedure (reduced ma)
MENTS 4 829357G035
X = position indifférente
8-8
REV 1
TIME COUNTERS
Two time counters are provided on 3A3 DIAPHRAGME PCB.
The upper counter (K510) totals the switching ON time.
The lower counter (K233) totals the X-Ray emission time.
The time is displayed in hour and hundredth of hour.
8-9
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035
8-10
Purpose: 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB – ( 201 – 210B ) Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
Time: 30 min. Manpower: 1
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
– Oscilloscope
2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– All the potentiometers are FACTORY CALIBRATED.
– This procedure will be performed only if accidental uncalibration occures.
3. CONDITIONS
The image system must be completely and correctely adjusted (see corresponding manual).
4. PROCEDURE
NOTE : The waveforms are given for your guidance.
The parameters of the oscilloscope adjustment are different of the parameters given in the procedure.
– Switch OFF the unit
– Install 3A1 PB on extender card
– Connect ground of 3A1 to card rack ground
– Power ON the unit.
4.1 T1 DELAY ADJUSTMENT
– Connect the scope as follows :

Probe 3A1.E123
V/div 5V/div
Sweep 0,2 sec/div
Trigger Int. DC–
Memory Memory ON
– On the control console, select E.R. (Electron Rad)
– Initiate Fluoro sequence
– Adjust 3A1R151 in order to obtain a delay of 1000 +/– 20 ms.
– Connect the probe to 3A1.E124

– On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20
– Initiate FLUORO
– Verify that the delay, triggered on the falling edge of T1, is 880 +/– 100 ms.
8-11
8-12
Job Card RG 21 2 of 3
4.3 T3 DELAY CHECK
– Connect the scope to 3A1.E122

Sweep 10 ms/div
– On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20
– Select NORMAL FLUORO MODE
– Initiate FLUORO and release RX control
T3 Delay is triggered by the falling edge of the RX control.
– Verify that the delay is 62 + /–8 ms

Sweep 0.2 s/div
– Select PULSED FLUORO on the control console.
– Initiate FLUORO sequence.
Delay T4 is generated after the first RX pulse.
– Adjust 3A1.R152 in order to obtain a delay of 500 +/– 10 ms.
4.5 T5 MINIMUM DELAY CHECK
– Connect the probe to 3A1.E127.

– On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20.
– Select PULSED FLUORO mode.
– Initiate FLUORO sequence.
– Verify that T5 delay is 880 +/– 100 ms.
8-13
8-14
4.6 PULSED FLUORO RATE ADJUSTMENT : T6

– Select PULSED FLUORO MODE
– Initiate FLUORO sequence
– Adjust 3A1.R150 in order to obtain a delay T6 of 1000 +/– 50 ms.
With T4 = 500 ms, the pulse rate is 1 X–ray pulse / 1,5 second.
– Remove connection between 3A1.a8.a20.
4.7. ANODE COOLING PAUSE SAFETY ADJUSTMENT (not used)
This adjusment is valid only for the PWB INTERFACE DSM.

Code number 828 988 G 035
– Sweep 0,5 Sec/Div
– Trigger DC–internal
– Position SW 602.2 (B) to ON
– Select ER mode (Election Radiography)
– Initiate exposure
– Adjust 3A1.R604 in order to obtain a delay of 2 sec +/– 0,4 sec.
– Position SW 602.2 (B) to OFF
8-15
REV 1
8-16
REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS
(with flat field)
KVP
mA & mAs
8-17
REV 1
8-18
REV 1
Kv Converter
Cap Add
Module G(2A1) Prep Cap Main SCR’S
CR7 CR4 CR1–6
FL / RAD +5V
16 2 11–7
Exposure Sm7
SYXSC a28
3A7 a15 FL Fil.
BPCL X–ray
a34 a7 3A9 14 3A26 Fil.
Module D (2A3) Trans.
PRE a31
+5V a10
a12 a18 Rad Fil.
Sm26
Rad/Rad Select
FT Sw Rad/ Rad Fil preheat
SEXP
3A5 3A12
b8 a14
Activate KV/20 FL Timer

Ref Auto Int.
a13
3A3
b12
Time Counter
AGC–Off MSI XR0372
FL/RAD Exposure Switch Signal Path

Illustration 8-33
8-19
REV 1
8-20
REV 1
b20
TV
High Level +5V Camera
b21 3A9 b33 14
FL (HLC) Sm35 Lens
3A7 Aperture
Module G(2A1)
b6
3A19
b29 OXHLC
OX
a6 b28
3A3
Sy XSc Rad MSI XR0371
HLC Switch Signal Path

Illustration 8-34
8-21
REV 1
8-22
REV 1
3A7
Sm 33 3A9
TV Camera
Electronic +5V b31 b29 a32 AGC – ON
Rad AUTO+ER F110
Module G (2A1)
3A1
Memory Memory DSM

a31 Interface
Display
3A9
FL Eproms
b8
G65, 66
MSI XR 0370
Electronic Rad Switch Signal Path
Illustration 8-35
8-23
REV 1
8-24
REV 1
3A7
3A1
Sm 52
Pulsed a6 Memory DSM
FL Interface
Module G (2A1) SP
a17 a15
OX OX
Sm 7
Module G (2A1) a6 a5
Exp Switches a7 Command

BPCL SCR
3A19
Sm 26
Module D (2A3)
MSI XR 0369
Pulsed Fluoro Signal Path

Illustration 8-36
8-25
REV 1
8-26
REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS
8-27
REV 1
8-28
REV 1
8-29
REV 1
8-30
REV 1
8-31
REV 1
8-32
REV 1
8-33
REV 1
8-34
REV 1
8-35
REV 1
8-36
REV 1
8-37
REV 1
8-38
REV 1
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-4 GENERATOR THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9-1
REV 1
9-2
REV 1
9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
A Linear IC's like OP Amps, voltage regulators, opto couplers, etc.

B Terminal Board
BP Pushbutton
C Capacitor where:
2K2 = 2.2k picofarads = 2.2 nanofarads
500mf = 500 microfarads
CR Diode*, SCR, etc.
D Diode*, SCR, etc.
DS Indicators like neon lights, led, etc.
E Test points including ground which are bolted to the chassis.
F Fuse
G Non-linear IC's like gates, FF, Eprom, logic circuits, etc.
K Relay
L Coil
M Motor
OP Linear IC's like Op Amps, voltage regulators, opto couplers, etc.
PL Plug
Q Transistor, FET, etc.
R Resistance, where:
2E2 = 2.2 ohms
2K2 = 2.2 k ohms
S Switch
SM Circuit Breaker
SW Switch
TB, B Terminal Board
TR Terminal Strip
W Jumper
* Schottky diodes are used because they are inexpensive, not because they are needed for their special
characteristics.
9-3
REV 1
Value Indicated on Schematics Actual Value
CAPACITOR VALUES
2K2 = 2.2 kpicofarads

= 2.2 nanofarads
4K7 = 4.7 kpicofarads
100K = 100 kpicofarads
500mf = 500 microfarads
4MF7 = 4.7 mf
RESISTOR VALUES
2E2 = 2.2 ohms
2K2 = 2.2 kohms
7K15 = 7.15 kohms
100K = 100 kohms
4K02 = 4.02 kohms
OTHER
7 x 150E = 7 resistors with a value of 150 ohms each
9-4
REV 1
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON
FRENCH WORD EQUIVALENT ENGLISH WORD
affichage display
alim (alimentation) supply
apres after
arret stop
avant before
balayage scanning
bobine coil, spool
bouton button
cache hidden
cadrage centering
chauffage heating
cliche exposure
coupure cut
dalle area, section
de of
demarrage start
disque record(LP)
droit right
ecretage slip
electro solenoid
fin end
focalisation focusing
gaine tube casing
gauche left
graphie rad
gros course
inferieurs lower
linearite linearity
marche on, start
masse ground
9-5
REV 1
FRENCH WORD EQUIVALENT ENGLISH WORD

minuterie timer
niveau level
noir no
pas push
prise plug, connector
pupitre control panel or desk
puissance power
repro (reproduire) copy
reseau network
scopie fluoro
si if, so
sortie out, exit
superieurs uppers
sur on/upon/over/in
terre earth
verte green
volets blades
9-6
REV 1
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS
1 inch = 2.54 cm
3 feet = 0.9144 meters
1 mile = 1.609 kilometers
1 fluid quart = 29.573 milliliters

1 quart = 0.946 liters
1 ounce = 28.35 grams

1 pound = 453.59 grams
1 ton = 0.907 metric tons
SAMPLE CONVERSION
kilograms per sq. cm to pounds per sq. inch
454 grams = 1 pound
Kg (2.54)2 1 pound = (2.54)2 pounds = 14.2 pounds
cm2 inch2 0.454 Kg 0.454 inch2 inch2
1 pound = 1 Kg
inch 0.34 cm2
TEMPERATURE
Centigrade = C_ = 5 (F_-32) Fahrenheit = F_ = 9 (C_ +32)
9 5
atto = a = 10-18
femto = f = 10-15
pico = p = 10-12
nano = n = 10-9
micro = u = 10-6
milli = m = 10-3
centri = c = 10-2
deci = d = 10-1
deca = da = 10
hectro = h = 102
kilo = k = 103
mega = M = 106
giga = G = 109
tera = T = 1012
9-7
REV 1
LINEAR equivalents
10 millimeters = 1 centimeter
10 centimeters = 1 decimeter
10 decimeters = 1 meter
10 meters = 1 dacameter
10 dacameters = 1 hectometer
SQUARE equivalents
100 sq. millimeters = 1 sq. centimeter
100 sq. centimeters = 1 sq. decimeter
100 sq. decimeters = 1 sq. meter
100 sq. meters = 1 sq. decameter
100 sq. dacameters = 1 sq. hectometer
100 sq. hectometers = 1 sq. kilometer
CUBIC equivalents
100 cubic milliters = 1 cubic centimeter
1000 cubic centimeters = 1 cubic decimeter
1000 cubic decimeters = 1 cubic meter
LIQUID equivalents
10 milliliters = 1 centiliter
10 centiliters = 1 deciliter
10 deciliters = 1 liter
10 liters = 1 decaliter
10 decaliters = 1 hectroliter
10 hectoliter = 1 kiloliter
WEIGHT equivalents
10 milligrams = 1 centigram
10 centigrams = 1 decigram
10 decigrams = 1 gram
10 grams = 1 decagram
10 decagrams = 1 hectrogram
10 hectrograms = 1 kilogram
100 kilograms = 1 quintal
10 quintals = 1 ton
9-8
REV 1
9-4 GENERATOR THEORY
9-9
Module 8
Module 2
Module 3
Module 7
Module 4
Module 6 Module 5
Module 1
Module 9
9TR1
9-10
6–6–3 IDENTIFICATION
– The electronic circuits in the mobile intraoperative radiology system are grouped
together in the modules identified as follows:
. module 1 : block (item 1),
. module 2 : control console (item 2),
. module 3 : card rack assembly (item 3),
. module 4 : inverter (item 4),
. module 5 : power supply (item 5),
. module 6 : X–ray head (item 6),
. module 7 : X–ray head, collimator (item 7),
. module 8 : image intensifier and TV camera (item 8),
. module 9 : interface installed on the rear side of the monitor cart (item 9).
Examples:
– the ”kV/ma reference” board in module 3, position 9, is marked 3A9,
– the HV divider board in module 6 is marked 6A1.
– the supply transformer in module 5 is marked 5TR1.
6–6–4 SCHOTTKY DIODES
Schottky diodes (1N6263), commonly used in the mobile system electronic circuits, are in
fact used as ordinary diodes.
6–6–5 LIST OF SYMBOLS
6–6–5–1 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS
Examples :
. 3A1 : – 3 is module number (give a location information),
– A means PWB (PL for plug, a and b for PWB connector).
– 1 is order number.
. 3A1 R58 : – number 58 resistor which is on 3A1 PWB.
. 4R29 : – number 29 resistor which is in module 4 (not on a PWB).
BP = Pushbutton
C = Capacitor
D = CR = Diode, thyristor or rectifier bridge
DS = Light
E = Test point
F = Fuse
G = Logic circuit
K = Relay
L = Coil
M = Motor
A = OP = Operational amplifier, FET switch voltage regulator
Q = Transistor
R = Resistor
S = SW = Switch
B = TB = Terminal board
T = TR = Transformer
W = Jumper
PL = Plug
9-11
6–6–5–2 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS
ABBREVIATIONS PWB NAME COMMENTS

LOCALISATION
AUTO 3A7–51A Automatic FLUORO mode selection

BP01 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : opening control
BP02 3A13–112B Lower blades of collimator : opening control
BPF1 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : closing control
BPF2 3A13–112C Lower blades of collimator : closing control
BPmA(s) Up 3A17–66C mA or mAs selection : increase control
BPmA(s) Down 3A7–66C mA or mAs selection : diminution control
BP OFF 3A3–116D Unit switching OFF Push–button
BPCL 2A1–102B Request of X–Ray emission – Fluoro and RAD
2A3–102C
BUS kV/20 3A7–60C 8 bits coded information of kV/20 value
CAG ON/OFF 3A3–119A Gain automatic control switching
CAPA PREPO 3A19–35C Prepositioning of converter capacitors (C3/C4 discharge con-
trol)
Consigne mAs 3A7–78E Analog signal of mAs reference for RAD exposure
(mAs integration).
Consigne mA SC 3A9–78B Analog signal of mA reference for the regulation of Fluoro
filament heating.
Consigne kV/20 3A9–97A Analog signal of kV reference for kV regulation
CLIGN 3A12–106A Square wave signal for display lights and intermittent
operation of the buzzer.
CLOCK 3A19–31E Pulse generated by the control oscillator of the mains
thyristors
DEM X 3A12–28D Signal of kV regulation obtained by comparison of
composite kV (actual kV and kV/20 reference)
DETECTION I 3A19–36B Detection of the presence of current through main thyristors.
ER 3A7–66B ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY mode selection
FC01 3A9–76C Minimum value of mA : 0,1 mA
FC0 3A9–76C Minimum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 0,16 mAs
FCGR 3A9–76C Maximum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 160 mAs
FCGR1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCGR2 3A3–114B Lower collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCSC1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size
FCSC2 3A3–114C Lower collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size
9-12
FC40 3A9–91A Minimum kV value (40 kV)
FC110 3A9–91A Maximum kV value
FL 3A7–66C FLUORO mode selection
Fmax 3A19–31D Maximum frequence operation of the converter. Not used
FS 31B X–Ray request from foot switch
GR 3A7–66B RAD mode selection
HLC 2A1–71A High definition fluoro selectionHLC does not refer to ”Hi level
control” operation above 5 or 10 R/min. In both Hi definition
and low dose operation, the entrance exposure rate remains
below 10R/min.
Hold kV 3A1–201E Latching of the kV regulation loop after T1 delay (delay of
automatism kV stabilization)
INT 4 CLQ 3A12–28B Exposure interruption after 4 VHV leakages
kV C0 3A7–57C Counter locking when kV bus is at ”0”
kV 85% 3A12–28C Signal generated when kV reach 85% of selected kV value.
kV 120 3A12–28C Safety : stops the converter if kV value is 120 kV
kV/20 Auto 3A5–45D kV reference in automatic Fluoro mode
kV composite 3A12–23D Actual kV value (VA + VC)
Mesure mA Sc 3A12–20C FLUORO mA measure (1 mA = 1V)
Mesure mA GR 3A12–20C RAD mA measure (10 mA = 1V)
OX 3A19–31A Control the X–RAY emission bistable (through 3A1 PWB when
a memory is used)
OX.HLC 3A3–119F Hold of HLC selection during pulsed Fluoro mode operation.
PRE 3A19–35A Control of mA reference in RAD mode (delayed signal)
PRI 3A19–40B Signal present when current is detected in one of main thyris-
tors.
PRX 3A12–24A Signal present when X–Ray are emitted
PRX.CP 3A12–106B Synchronous signal (50 Hz) with X–Ray emission
RAD 3A19–40A RAD mode selection signal
RP 3A26–81A Reduced power signal in RAD mode when unit is used with the
100, 108 or 120V mains
RX req. 3A12–28C Not used
Sa Th2 MOD 6–16E X–Ray head temperature detection (68[C)Switch ON thermal
overload display
SC 3A17–63A Signal (SC or SC) generated by the RAD or RAD selection.
SEC BELLOW MOD 6 – 16E Safety of X–Ray head temperature
(6Sa1) Bellow compensation switch : inhibition of exposure
SEXP 3A19–35B Control signal of main thyristors oscillator
9-13
SP 3A7–66B PULSED FLUORO mode selection

STOP mAs 3A26–85D RAD exposure end signal (elapsed mAs = selected mAs)
SX 3A19–33A X–Ray emission safety (BPCL + PWB presence)
SYX SC 3A19–35A Control signal of heating in FLUORO.
Latch Fluoro mA reference.
SYX GR 3A19–35B Control signal in RAD mode : not used
TROU CLQ 3A12–28A Momentary stop of the control oscillator of the main thyristor
when a VHV leakage occurs
Va 6A1–20C Actual anodic volts value
Vc 6A1–20C Actual cathodic volts value
Z(ZOOM) 3A3–111E ZOOM selection with II 22 cm (2 fields)
0 logic from 3A9–78C mas integrator selection : low or High mAs
0,16 to 5 mAs mAs integrator
4’26” 3A12–103B Warning signal of 4’26” X–Ray emission time
4’57” 3A12–106B Stop signal of X–Ray emission after 4’ 57” of Fluoro sequence
12V CI 15F–18F Detection of the PWB presence Permit the operation of main
thyristors
9-14
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5.7/5.8(blank)
INTERFACE DSM 3A1 828988 G 035
ACP 201C Anode Cooling Pause : generate a delay between exposures in

ER mode selection if SW602.B is in ON position
HYST 45C not used
MCH 202B Mode change : signal generated during the switching of an
operating mode to an other
ON REST + MCH 203B Reset of the monostable when the unit is switching ON or
during an operating mode switching
OX* 204C RX emission order generated through the adaptation operating
logic network
OX* R1 204D Signal delayed according to the rising edge of the OX* signal
but
synchronous with the falling edge of OX*
OX* R2 204D Signal synchronous with the rising edge of the OX* signal but
delayed according to the falling edge of OX*
RAZ ROTATION 206D Rotation to the start position of the monitor rotation coils
when mode A/B is selected in the memory
SN 203F NORMAL FLUORO MODE selection generated by default of
other mode selections
STOP DSM 208D Signal generated by X PERM from the memory
T 114F Signal generated during the field change with a 22 cm (9”)
imager
T1 to T5 Control delays of RX emission sequence in the different
operating mode
T6 202A Control of RX pulses emission in PULSED FLUORO mode.
X PERM 207E Signal from memo unit : availability of the memory or end
of the image processing
9-15
6–6–6 USE OF THE SCHEMATICS
– The schematics are in flow chart form.

– As much as possible, the relation between control and action has been respected.
– Each signal is indexed and addressed in the schematics.
Example : SEXP signal
The SEXP signal is generated on PWB 3A19 commande SCR2 – output a18 – schematic
reference 35B.
The signal is used on PWB 3A12– input a14

3A5– input b8
3A3– input a17
The index of the signal is marked in front of the use terminal.
3A12.a14 – 21B
In front of 3A12.a14 terminal, SEXP signal has the index of the terminal where the signal is
generated : 3A19.a18–35B
– The wiring between terminal is respected and so permits an easier localization of

interconnection default.
9-16
6–7 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
9-17
6–7–1 GENERAL POWER SUPPLY (DIAGRAM 1–10)
The general power supply comprises the transformers 9TR1 and The secundary winding 19–20 supply the imager system
5TR1 which supply the voltage needed by the various subassem- (module 8)
blies of the HF mobile unit.
– POWER ON SEQUENCE
9TR1 TRANSFORMER (Module 9 – monitor cart)
The system is switched ON by pressing 9Sm1.
The primary winding of 9TR1 is supplied by the mains through When 9Sm1 is depressed, 9TR1 transformer is supply through
9Sm1 and 9K1 contacts. resistor 9R1 (current limiter).
The primary winding has 2 winding with adaptation taps for mains 9K1 relay is energised through 9F2 fuse, safety plug bridge
of 100, 108, 120, 200, 208, 220, 228 and 240V. 9PL1–32–33, delay system (M) and 9F1 fuse.
The secundary windings supply the voltages : After the delay, 9K1 switch ON and supply 9TR1 through its con-
tacts.
– 275 V for the inverter
– SWITCH OFF SEQUENCE
– 220V for peripheral unit : monitors, memory, reprograph When one of the stop pushbutton is actuated on the control console
(2A1.Sm4 or 2A3.Sm21–116 DE) relais 9A1.K3 is energized.
5TR1 TRANSFORMER (module 5 – mobile unit)
Its contact apply a 110V on the auxiliary coil of 9Sm1.
5TR1 primary winding is supplied by 9TR1 through the 9F4 fuse 9Sm1 switches OFF
The secundary winding 6–7 supplies the +/– 12V and + 5V regula- If 9PL1 plug is removed, 9K1 relais is deenergized.
ted power supply.
– CONNECTOR SAFETY.
The secundary winding 16–17 supply filament heating circuit.. If the plug 9PL1 is removed , 9K1 relay is deenergised.
The secundary winding 31–23 supply C–arm up/down motion The contact 21–22 (3D) of 9K1 supplies 9A4K5. The contact of
circuit. 9A4.K5 apply 110V on the auxiliary coil of 9Sm1 which opens.
9-18
6–7–2 OPERATION OF INVERTER (DIAGRAM 11–20)
– THEORY
In alternate operation, capacitors C1 and C2 are in parallel, as they If the power supplied to the secondary is less than that absorbed by
have a common terminal and the two other terminals are separated charge RL, the voltage at CF terminals decrements.
by a DC voltage Va. To respect the operating condition 0 < Vz < Va/2, the only way to
For a description of operation, (see figure 2), where C is equal to change the HV is to change the inverter control pulse rate frequen-
the sum of C1 and C2. cy.
Suppose at the start that capacitance C has a charge voltage Va (0 V
at terminal 2 and Va at terminal 1) and capacitance CF has a charge – REALISATION :
voltage Vz, which must respect 0 < Vz < Va/2.
The value of CF will be very high in relation to C.
Capacitance C will be selected so that the inverter can supply its
Suppose that the HV transformer ratio is 1 and that Va = 500 V and
nominal power under any circumstances.
Vz = 100 V.
However, this has a disadvantage: at low consumption levels, in-
At t0, CR1 is made to conduct; capacitor C therefore discharges
verter control frequency is low, which generates high residual HV
through the HV transformer primary, coil L2 and CR1.
ripple.
Capacitor CF voltage remains almost constant throughout conduc-
To get around this, two groups of capacitances are used, selected as
tance of CR1.
function of the charge.
The polarity of this voltage is therefore positive at terminal 1 and
negative at terminal 2. At low charge, group 4C2 and 4C3 of 2 x 2 µF is always selected.
Capacitor discharge is consinusoidal and corresponds to equation If the charge increments, a second group, 4C1 and 4C4 (2 x 5 µF),
Vc = Vz + (Va – Vz) cos t/LC. selected by 4CR4, is added to the first. These two groups offer the
At t1 (figure 3), capacitor voltage tends to invert, diode CR4 con- choice between 4 µF and 14 µF.
ducts and keeps voltage from reaching the capacitor terminals. In practice, capacitance C is replaced by two capacitances C1 and
Through conductance of CR4, voltage Vz is applied directly to the C2, enabling better adjustment of Va supply consumption (figu-
terminals of coil L2, and since Vz is practically constant, current re1).
decrement in CR1 will be linear. At t2, current I stops and CR1 Control of capacitance selection thyristor 4CR4 is always in syn-
locks. chronism with 4CR1.
A sufficient period must elapse (around 20 µsec) before CR2 can Thyristor CR7 makes it possible to preset capacitances at energiza-
be made to conduct, if HV adjustment so requires. tion.
A cycle identical may then start again with CR2, L1 and CR3. A core is used to detect current crossing thyristors 4CR1 and 4CR6
As current I crosses the HV transformer primary, it develops a se- (PRI).
condary voltage. Since the rectifier bridge also conducts, it will This data is taken into account by SCR control PWB 3A19, which
allow the current to charge capacitor CF. synchronizes triggering of 4CR4, CR7, 4CR1 and 4CR6.
In particular, 4CR1 and 4CR6 must not conduct simultaneously.
The energy supplied at each cycle of HV capacitor CF is therefore The inverter is supplied by a DC voltage, approx. 380 V.
This DC voltage is filtered by capacitances 4C5.
ŕ Vz.Idt
t2
equal to :
t0
CAUTION :
i. e. 1/2 C. Va2
Lamp 4DS1 comes on when the inverter is energized.
The power supplied to the secondary is therefore equal to : If the modulator is de–energized, lamp 4DS1 remains on while the
1/2 C.Va.f (f is the pulse rate frequency) capacitances discharge into resistor1R3, indicating that the voltage
at the terminals of these capacitances is still dangerously high.
9-19
6–7–3 OPERATION OF THE X–RAY HEAD (DIAGRAM 11–20)
– PRESENTATION – KILOVOLT MEASUREMENT
Anode and cathode kilovolt measurement (VA and VC) is made by

The X–ray head consists mainly of the following elements:
a large–ratio divider bridge approx. 1/1000) whose high value re-
. a VHV transformer with its filter and a rectifier circuit
sistor is located in the X–ray head (special 2 x 100 megaohm resis-
. a filament heating transformer,
tor) and whose low value resistor is located on PWB 6A1. This
. an X–ray tube,
low value resistor is in fact made up of fixed resistors (R/18 and
. two heat switches,
R17) and adjustable resistors (R12 to R15).
. overvoltage protection spark gaps.
Capacitances C19 and C11 filter voltages VA and VC whereas
capacitances C28 and C27, parallel coupled to adjustable capacitan-
These components are inside the XRay head and are lubricated in ces C9 and C16, carry out frequency compensation.
an oil bath.
The assembly also includes divider circuit 6A1 outside the head. NOTE:
Potentiometers and adjustable capacitors of 6A1 PWB are factory
adjusted according the X–Ray head.
– VHV TRANSFORMER OPERATION :
The VHV transformer primary is supplied by the inverter (mod 4).

– ANODE / CATHODE CURRENT MEASUREMENT
It has two secondary windings, one of which supplies the X–ray
tube anode and other the X–ray tube cathode. This measure is performed by measuring the voltage across a resis-
The two secondaries are each connected to a voltage doubler com- tor.
prising 2 diodes (CR1 and CR2 for the first, CR3 and CR4 for the The current in RAD mode is more important than in FLUORO
second) and two 2500 pF capacitances. mode, so current measure in RAD mode is performed across a low
The cathode of CR1 is connected to the X–ray tube anode and the value R5 resistor and in FLUORO mode accross R4 + R5 resistors
anode of CR4 is connected to the X–ray tube cathode. in order to have the same level of measure.
The anode of CR2 and the cathode of CR3 are connected by a low Jumper between Tb24.1 and Tb24.2 permits the connection of a
value resistor (R4 and R5) used to measure anode/cathode current. mA, mAs meter for maintenance operation.
As the CR3 cathode is connected to the ground, its potential is The measures VA, VC, mASc et mAGR are used on 3A12 kV/mA
approximately 0 V, and it may be assumed that the anode and ca- PWB.
thode voltages are opposed.
– SAFETY
– HEATING : Spark gaps are provided in the X–Ray head in order to short circuit
the VHV if 6A1.PWB (Diviseur) is disconnected or if a default of
The filament heating transformer primary is supplied by the heating ground continuity appears.
power PWB 5A1. Damages of VHV propagation are so avoided if connexion failure
It has a secondary winding with a middle point. or error of maintenance operation occurs.
The entire winding supplies the radiography filament (1,8) through The 6Sa1 switch opens its contact when temperature rises up to 70o
2 diodes, when pulses are positive. C.
SEC BELLOW signal is connected to 3A19 PWB (SCRcontrol)
and stops the inverter operation.
The lower part of the winding supplies the fluoroscopy filament
(0.5) through one diode, when pulses are negative. The 6SaTh2 Thermal switch opens its contact when temperature of
The radiography or fluoroscopy filament is therefore selected by the X–Ray head rises up to 50o C.
the filament heating transformer power supply as a function of
pulse polarity. The signal TH switch ON the temperature displays on the control
The transformer primary is highly isolated from its secondary be- console through 3A7 AD/kV PWB and switches over the FLUO-
cause its secondary is brought to the negative potential of the X– RO 500W to FLUORO 154 W on 3A9 PWB consigne kV/mA
ray tube cathode. (except in E.R. mode).
9-20
6–7–4 OPERATION OF THE kV/mA PWB 3A12 (DIAGRAM 21–30)
– This board has the following main functions : . This changes the D kV which will be transmitted to the memo
. HV regulation (very high voltage), 20
. blow safety, ry between two thyristor conductions.
. differential/common mode conversion of mASc and
mAGr measurement values, – OPERATING SAFETY:
. low voltage divider compensation,
Circuit OP114. A permanently compares the output of OP114 B
. 0–5 min. timer.
with the kV reference.
– VHV REGULATION
20
In normal operation, the output of amplifier OP114.B must always
When selecting the KV data, Op 114.8 (B) supplies a voltage refe- be less than the kV reference.
rence kV * kV to the input of compara- 20
+ (consigne * 1) x1.1 If a fault in the regulation circuit causes the opposite to occur com-
20 20
tor Op 122. parator OP114.A flips and blocks OP114 B, i.e. DEM X.
The composite KV signal is generated by the measurement of Vc/ – LEAKAGE SAFETY :

Va (cathode/anode) at the input of Op 180.
The output of OP180 is input to OP46, which detects a sudden
The output in common mode of the Op 180 is linked to potentio-
VHV variation. The output of OP46 then triggers monostable G32.
meter R216, adjusted by the latter (KV regulation), is transmitted to
The output of G32 sends signal TROU CLQ used by the hystere-
the input of Op 122.
sis safety of SCR PWB 3A19 and SCR control.
. The signal kV * and KV composite being different, the signal Counter G31 counts to 4 VHV leakages and then sends the INT
20 4CLQ signal, used to shutdown the inverter by SCR PWB 3A19.
DEM X permits the oscillator to operate.
Diode CR4 also comes on, showing the technician the cause of
. When the HV increases to reach kV * = KV omposite, the Op inverter shutdown.
20
122 switches and the signal DEM X generated is transmitted to the
– DIFFERENTIAL/COMMON MODE CONVERSION OF
card 3A19 SCR to request the first oscillator operation cycle stop.
mASC AND mAGR MEASUREMENTS
. Comparator Op 102 compares the KV composite and the This conversion is performed by OP192 for the mASc measure-
actual kV ment and by OP203 fo the mAGr measurement. Diodes mounted
20 in head–to–tail configuration at the input of these amplifiers protect
them against overvoltage. These two measurement signals are sent
A ∆ KV therefore appears at the output of the Op 102.
to PWB 3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENT (HEATING).
This is transmitted to the memory Op 97 when signal PRI is active
and after the time constant 1.1 x R81 x C82 c.a.d. 13 µs after a – COMPENSATION OF DIVIDERS IN FLUOROSCOPY
current thyristor stops. MODE :
. The D kV then supplements the kV * , which results in the refe-
20 20 This is achievied out by the coupling carried out by R232 between
rence at the input to Op 122 being increased. the mASc measurement and the output of OP180 to make up the
There is disequilibrium and the signal DEM X disappears, which COMPOSITE kV signal.
authorises the oscillator to function until the new equality KV com-
posite = kV * ) D kV – GENERATION OF 85% KV AND 120 KV SIGNALS :
20 20
. Each reduction in KV composite due to consumption of the tube 85% is generated by comparing COMPOSITE kV with 85% of the
appears on the memory C 134 at the input to Op 102. value of the kV/20 reference (OP160).
120 kV is obtained by comparing the COMPOSITE kV to a 6 V
reference (OP313 / OP314).
9-21
6–7–5 OPERATION OF SCR CONTROL PWB 3A19 (DIAGRAM 31–35, 36–40)

–This PWB performs the following functions : – SELECTION OF AUXILIARY CAPACITORS (4C1 AND
. preset of inverter capacitance 4C3, 4C4) :
. generation and synchronization of the control pulses of main
When a radiography is requested, signal GR from PWB 3A7 is
thyristors 4CR6 and 4CR1,
converted into signal RAD which is then applied to amplifier
. selection of auxiliary condensators,
(Q300) and isolating transformer TR313 of the trigger of inverter
. control the status of the 12 V safety PWB,
thyristor 4CR4.
. control the stop signals (temperature, VHV leakages, mAs refe
rence reached), – PWB 12V SAFETY
. current detection in main thyristors 4CR1 and 4CR6,
A +12 V continuity line crosses the PWBs in the mobile system,
. generation of SEXP, PRE, SYX GR and SYX SC commands
thus checking the voltage and making sure that the PWBs are pro-
for regulation PWBs 3A5, 3A12 and3A26,
perly plugged in. The feedback from this line is input into a safety
. generation of clock (CLOCK) of the inverter,
circuit (Q189,Q178) where it is checked. If the feedback is incor-
. generation of signal fmax (not used),
rect, a lock command is sent to the all driver amplifiers of the isola-
. hysteresis safety of HV transformer.
ting transformers (TR248–TR313–TR269–TR291).
The lock command of the drivers operates also if :
– SX signal is not present : signal generated by BPCL or FS
– PRESET OF INVERTER CAPACITOR 4C3 : – POWER SUPPLY (+12V) voltage is lower than 6,2V
(Q185–D180)
Logic circuit OX (G116–A) generates command OX using the – CONTROL OF THE STOP SIGNALS
following signals:
. BPCI, generated by the X–ray PB on the control console, The signals should be as follows:
. FS, generated by the footswitch, . SEC BELLOW = 1 (if the X–ray housing temperature is less than
. RAD, generated by GR on PWB 3A7 when radiography 70o C),
mode is selected. . STOP mAs = 1 (switches to 0 when the mAs reference on the
Command OX is sent to memory interface PWB 3A1 (in memory control console is reached.
option configuration) if switch S76.A is opened. . INT 4CLQ = 1 (switches to 0 when four successive VHV leakage
If this is the case, command OX returns via PWB 3A1 to command have been detected by PWB 3A12),
bistable (G114–G117B). . 120 kV = 1 (switches to 0 if a high voltage of 120 kV is detected
The bistable flips and sends a preset command via amplifier by PWB 3A12).
(Q235) and isolating transformer (TR248), provided that the follo- If any of these signals changes value, bistable 114A–G117B flips
wing conditions exist: and inverts the state of signal SEXP, which switches to 0, thereby
120 kV =1, inhibiting oscillator G128.
INT 4CLQ = 1, When signal SEXP switches to 0 bistable G119B is also locked,
STOP mAs =_ 1, which means that flip–flop G121.A cannot be validated. A second
SEC BELLOW = 1. safety device is thus provided.
– GENERATION OF SEXP, PRE, SYX GR AND SYX SC

COMMANDS :
– 4CR6 AND 4CR1 SCR CONTROL These signals are generated by a selection logic made up of
G114–115 :
. SEXP is used by PWBs 3A5, 3A12 and 3A19, delayed accor
Bistable (G119B–120B) enables flip–flop G68 when signal SEXP ding to PRE and SYC.GR
switches to 1. . PRE switches to 0 when G114.A–G117.B bistable flips.
G121A output Q is applied to amplifier (Q278) followed by isola- PRE is used by PWB 3A26 to valide the transfer of the
ting transformer (TR291) which controls the trigger of thyristor RAD current regulation differential.
4CR1. G121A complementary output Q controls the trigger of . SYX SC is used by PWB 3A26 to validate the transfer of the
second thyristor 4CR6 in the same way. herefore, 4CR1 and 4CR6 Fluoro current regulation differential,
cannot operate simultaneously. If the signals are as follows, oscil- . SYX GR (not used).
lator G128 operates:
DEMX = 0, – GENERATION OF CLOCK :
PRI = 1, The output signal of G128 constitutes the basic clock used in the
TROUCLQ = 1, synchronization of inverter operation, i.e. thyristors 4CR1, 4CR6
SEXP = 1. and the voltage regulation carried out by PWB 3A12.
9-22
– GENERATION OF SIGNAL FMAX : – RAD AND RAD SIGNALS
not used RAD and RAD signals are generated from GR signal and set the
different circuits in RAD mode.
When the kV/mA PWB 3A12 regulates the high voltage, if the
displayed reference is not reached, signal DEMX is generated and
charges capacitance C209. If DEMX remains active too long
(which means that the inverter cannot reach the reference on dis-
– CURRENT DETECTION IN MAIN THYRISTORS 4CR1
play), capacitance C209 is sufficiently charged to generate fmax.
AND 4CR6
– HYSTERESIS SAFETY OF HV TRANSFORMER
The thyristor current is detected by core 4TR1, located behind the
If a VHV leakage occurs during thyristor 4CR1 is being validated, inverter.
data TROU CLQ which is generated by kV/mA PWB 3A12, vali- The current is rectified by D29 and amplified by A135 then the
dates the second monostable in circuit G155B. detection threshold is adjusted by R123.
Thyristor 4CR6 can then restart during a short time. When TROU The output signal of low–pass filter A 137(protection against trig-
CLQ disappears, inverter cycle can be restarted with thyristor gering by interference) goes to make up signal PRI which is used
4CR1, i.e. with right direction of HV transformer hysteresis. by the regulation circuit of kV/mA PWB 3A12 and to validate
This safety protects HV transformer against overcurrent generated bistable.
by hysteresis.
9-23
6–7–6 OPERATION OF TIMER PWB 3A5 (MINUTERIE) (DIAGRAM 41–50)
– TIMER DISPLAY – ABC HYSTERESIS OR AUTO KV/20 REFERENCE
. The purpose of this ABC hysteresis is to make an AUTO kV refe-

20
The reference clock signal PRX CP is supplied by kV/mA PWB
rence by using the RX control signal output from the TV camera in
3A12.
order to use the correct kV to obtain an optimum TV image.
The 50 Hz frequency is at first divided by 50 (counters G143 and
G144), which gives a 1 Hz signal, input to 4–bit counter G158. . The RX control signal output from the TV camera is connected to
The output of counter G158 is decoded by G184 to supply the the + input of A82 comparator. The – input of A82 is connected
7–segments display DS15. This is how seconds are displayed. to potentiometer R65 (video image reference).
. The output of A82, i.e. ∆ RX is connected to A74B through R66

potentiometer (system gain) and after to an integrator circuit A73,
After 10 seconds, G158 sends a pulse to G159, counting tenths of
C72 and R60.
seconds. G159 counts to 6 (corresponding to 1 minute) and sends
a pulse to G160, which totalizes minutes. . A74.B does not permit the ∆ RX to pass unless it greater or lower
After 10 minutes, G161 receives a pulse from G160, and totalizes than a threshold determined by the hysteresis R67. A121 BC
tens of minutes.
Zero reset is by pressing key Sm19 of the mobile system control . When RX control signal is not present, the system is calculated to
console. This generates an active signal to the RESET inputs of the provide a kV reference equal to 2V (= 40 kV reference).
counters. 20
9-24
6–7–7 OPERATION OF 3A7 PWB AD/KV (DIAGRAM 51–60)
The main purpose of this board is to generate the kV (kilovolt) – AUTOMATIC FLUOROSCOPY MODE
reference in automatic or manual mode.
Key Sm49 (hand symbol) on the control console is used to select
Pressing key Sm49 activates automatic mode and deactivates keys
operating mode.
Sm31 and Sm32 (+kV and –kV).
The kV reference is now generated by the timer PWB 3A5 using
– MANUAL FLUOROSCOPY MODE
the TV camera reception X–ray signal.
Pressing key Sm31 (+kV) or Sm32 (–kV) increments or decre- This analog reference (called kV/20) is converted to digital form by
ments counters G48 and G31. These counters, as well as latch G90. The 8–bit data thus obtained is compared by two 4–bit bina-
circuit G69, are selected in fluoroscopy mode (SC = 0). ry comparators, G108 and G126, with the data on the kV bus.
The 8–bit data sent by G69 is transmitted on the kV bus to the kV/ The resulting comparison signal (A > B or A < B) increments or
mA reference PWB 3A9. decrements counters G48 and G31 until the reference and the value
The kV/mA reference PWB 3A9 compares the kV data transmitted on the bus are equal.
on the kV bus with min. and max. stops (40 kV and 110 kV).
If one of these stops has been reached, the data FC40 or FC110 is
– OPERATION IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE
sent to the logic of AD/kV PWB 3A7. This then inhibits incre-
mentation or decrementation of counters to prevent the kV value
going below 40 kV or above 110 kV. Pressing keys Sm31 and Sm32 (+kV and –kV) increments or de-
The clock supplying the counters is obtained by two NAND gate crements counters G138 and G125. These counters, as well as
oscillator circuits. The first, frequency 3 Hz, enables slow referen- latch circuit G97, are selected in radiography mode (SC = 0).
ce incrementation as soon as it is commanded. As regards the 40 kV and 110 kV stops and the reference incre-
After approximately 2 seconds, a second oscillator, frequency 30 mentation speed (3 Hz and 30 Hz), operation is identical to manual
Hz, takes over and thus accelerates incrementation. fluoroscopy mode.
9-25
6–7–8 OPERATION OF 3A7 PWB AD/kV (DIAGRAM 61–70)
– MODE OF OPERATION SELECTION Output counter supplies LED corresponding to the pressed BP
through G 139 (A to F) and provides selection informations though
The basic circuit providing this operation is G150 : counter CMOS G 137 (A to F) to the unit.
4017B.
When power is switching ON, the RC network (C119–R117) hold
counter outputs in Reset state : output ”0” (pin 3) to 1 logic other The 300 kHz clock needed for G150 to operate is taken from ADC
outputs to 0 (outputs 1 to 9). converter G90 on the same board.
This counter position corresponds to FLUORO mode selection.
– The following signals are output from the board :
Pin 13 of G150 (CLOCK INHIBIT) is held to 1 logic through R80 . ER, SP to the memory interface board if present,
and inhibits the counting sequence. . BP mA(s) UP, BP mA(s) DOWN, to the kV/mA reference PWB
3A9,
When a PB selection mode is pressed, logic state of G150 output . GR to the SCR control PWB 3A19.
(0V) is applied through the PB on pin 13 of the counter (CLOCK
INHIBIT).
This 0V logic state permits the counting sequence : clock pulses on – 1.2 Hz and 12 Hz clock (Clock 1 – Clock 2)
pin 14 generates counter evolution until the output corresponding
to the pressed BP rises to 1 logic state : clock INHIBITS input rises These two clocks are for the operation of the kV/mA reference
to 1 and so inhibits count : the counter is locked on this position PWB 3A9. They allow mA and mAs references to be incremented
until an other PB is pressed. at two different speeds.
9-26
6–7–9 OPERATION OF THE PWB 3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA (DIAGRAM 71–80)
– HIGH DOSE FLUORO MODE SELECTION (HLC) The PB mA(s) UP or BPmA(s) DOWN informations, elaborated
on PWB 3A7 AD/kV, permits operation of the counters through
PB Sm35 permits the HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode selec- G128.CD and G128.AB bistables and control logic of speed
tion. (CLOCK signal).
The validation and the locking of the mode selection is performed
by the OX.HLC signal : 0X.HLC is to 1 logic all the time an expo- The output of G90–G89 is converted in analog signal to make up
sure is required (BPCl or FS depressed). the FLUORO mA reference.
When PB Sm35 is depressed, 1 logic is present on pin 6 of G122.A – mAs REFERENCE GENERATION
(set).
G122.A pin 1 flips to 1 : switching ON of PB Sm35 light and se- The mAs UP data from 3A7 PWB AD/kV causes incrementation
lection of the opening reference of the camera iris. (or decrementation) of 4 bits counter G135 and G134.
The TH signal on G130D.12 pin cancel HIGH DEFINITION The output of these counters addresses an EPROM (G26) which
FLUORO mode when the thermal switch of the X–Ray head sends a digital value, varying from 0,16 to 160 in 33 steps.
opens. This digital reference is converted in analog form by G133 to make
up the mAs reference varying from 0,16 mAs to 160 mAs used in
In ER Mode (ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY) selection the the 3A26 PWB chauffage Filament (Filament heating).
HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO Mode is automatically selected
through G130B.6. The output of G135 and G134 is also connected to G120 and G121
EPROM through G119.
The HLC information is also connected to G66 and G65 EPROM
in order to select the correct kV/mA ratio curve. G121 provides :
– FLUORO MA REFERENCE GENERATION

– information for the displays
– logic signal for the selection of high or low value integrator
AUTOMATIC MODE
– 3 signals min or max values
The kV bus addresses the memory G66(EPROM) which sends on
its data bus, an optimal mA value for each kV value. FC01 : FLUORO minimum mA
value – 0,1 mA
The data mA value according to kV value depends of mode selec- FCO : RAD mAs minimum
tion and safety of the unit : value – 0,16 mAs
FCGR : RAD mAs maximum
– AUTO FLUORO mode value – 160 mAs
– HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode
– ER mode (Electronic Radiography) – FLUORO RANGE OPERATION AND LIMITATION
– Thermal safety of the X–Ray head not actuated (TH)
The G65 EPROM has 4 data sections access of which depends of
The AUTO signal (1 logic) is present on Preset input (1) of G90 selected operation mode and thermal safety (TH*).
and G89 : G90 and G89 are ”transparent” and data of G66 are con-
verted to analog form by G99 (DAC) to make up the FLUORO FLUORO – 154W limitation
mA reference. HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC) – 500W limitation
ELECTRON RADIOGRAPHY (ER) – 500W limitation
MANUAL MODE
TH*=1 = thermal safety : reduced power operation.
When mode operation is switched from AUTO mode to MANUAL
mode, the last mA value according to kV value is memorised in The data corresponding to this rate operation are compared by G87,
G90 and G89 counter : preset input from 1 to 0 logic state. G88 with mA bus (G90–G89 outputs counters).
Count up or count down operation is selected by the mA(s) UP If the two values are equal, counting UP sequence is inhibited and
signal : automatic counting DOWN sequence is automatically operated if
1 logic – count UP mA bus is upper than the limitation.
0 logic – count DOWN
9-27
6–7–10 OPERATION OF FILAMENT 4 HEATING PWB 3A26 (DIAGRAM 81–85)
– This PWB performs the following functions: added to the above difference, thereby providing the mA radiogra-
. current regulation in FLUORO mode, phy reference at output A214.
. current regulation in RADIOGRAPHY mode,
. generation of STOP mAs command when the mAs reference is – GENERATION OF STOP mAs SIGNAL
reached,
Integrator A138 calculates mA x s.
. safety in radiography mode – 7 an 10 secondes
Because the mAs reference may vary greatly (0.16 to 160), the
integrator features two integration speeds.
– CURRENT REGULATION IN FLUORO MODE : PWB 3A9 splits the mAs reference variation range into two sub–
ranges: 0.16 mAs to 5 mAs and 6 mAs to 160 mAs.
The mA Fluoro measurement sent from PWB 3A12 and the mA The integrator selected by 0 (on a25 connector PWB) comprises
Fluoro reference sent from PWB 3A9 are compared by A220. high–value R6 (100 K) and A138. The integrator selected by 1
The Fluoro rate can be adjusted using R9. comprises low–value R5 (5 K) and A138.
The difference between the reference and the measurement passes A180 compares the integrator output with the mAs reference sup-
from the output of A220 through the low–pass filter comprising plied by PWB 3A9. When the values are equal, the STOP mAs
A222 before transmission to the inverter input of A214 by electro- signal switches to 0 and prevents SCR PWB 3A19 from sending
nic switch Q287.B when signal kV 85% is present. pulses to the thyristor triggers, i.e. stops the inverter.
If command SYX SC sent by SCR PWB 3A19 switches to 0, the
electronic switch Q287.B conducts. – RAD SAFETY : 7 AND 10 SECONDS
Adjustable potentiometers R3 and R4 are also connected to inverter
output of A214. These potentiometers used to adjust the current Two safeties are provided in order to limit the exposure duration in
during the pre–heat phase, i.e. when no reference is present, in RAD mode.
RAD or FLUORO mode. The correct safety is selected by 3A3.S133.B : RP – power reduc-
tion.
– CURRENT REGULATION IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE
If power reduction is not selected, RP is 1 logic.
The capacitor C203 is charges through D248, R247 and potentio-
The RAD mA measurement sent by PWB 3A12 is added to the
meter R7 (7 sec adjustment).
mA Gr reference at the inverter input of A152.
The reference is selected by the electronic switch (Q108 to Q110) If power reduction is selected, RP is 0 logic.
which has been activated by the kV/mA reference PWB 3A9. The capacitor C203 is charged through D250, R249 and potentio-
PWB 3A19 attributes an mA value to each of the six high voltage meter R8 (10 sec. adjustment).
ranges used.
This value is modified if RP switch 3A3.S133B is switched ON The signal PRE through G184.A starts the delay performed by
(power reduction). Q193 and Q194.
When signals PRE and kV 85% are present,the difference between When the delay is elapsed, if the exposure is not completed, the
the reference and the measurement obtained at the output of A152 STOP mAs signal switches to 0 and inhibes X–ray emission.
is transmitted to A214 by switch Q287
The difference in potential supplied by R4 (pre–heat adjustment) is
9-28
6–7–11 OPERATION OF FILAMENT 4 HEATING PWB 3A26 (DIAGRAM 86–90)
– FILAMENT HEATING CURRENT REGULATION duct, thereby discharging C4 through the primary of the hea
ting transformer. The current in the primary of the transfor
The A214 output transmits a reference to A237 for comparison mer is inverted.
with the RMS current measured in the final stage of heating power
The operating cycle is as follows:
PWB 5A1, i.e. in the primary of the heating transformer in the
. capacitance C3 is charged by a 175 V (approx.) dc supply,
X–ray head.
. the positive segment of the control pulses cause transistor Q20
The X–ray tube is heated by sending variously spaced pulses.
to conduct, thereby discharging C3 through the primary of the
A237 inhibits the transmission of these pulses if the RMS current is
heating transformer in the X–ray head.
greater than the reference.
. the negative segment of the control pulses cause Q11 to con
The pulse generator system comprises the following components: duct, thereby discharging C4 through the primary of the hea
. a 180 Hz oscillator, comprising G155, which sends a square ting transformer. The current in the primary of the transfor
signal, mer is inverted.
. a selection logic comprising G182 and G183. One of the two This assembly is designed to produce +175 V pulses at the termi-
output channels (fluoro or graphy) of the logic circuit is acti nals of the heating transformer primary (between A and B, A =
vated depending of the state of signal RAD, ground) in FLUORO mode, and –175 V pulses at the same termi-
. two pre–amplifiers (Q162 and Q176), nals in RADIOGRAPHY mode.
. a push–pull amplifier comprising Q122 and Q129. The Q122 The polarity is switched (thereby selecting the radiography or Fluo-
and Q129 output to R133 conveys pulses (negative or positive ro filament in the X–ray head) by varying the polarity and width of
depending on the selected mode) to two current limiters. the control pulses.
. two current limiters (Q125–Q128 for RAD and Q121–Q123 for
Fluoro). – REALISATION
If R25 and R26 detect overvoltage in the final stage of PWB
5A1, the current limiters ground the output of R133. Capacitances C3 and C4 are located in module 5 of the mobile
system. The +175 V dc supply is generated by the secondary of
The system which measures the RMS current in the final stage of 5TR1. Protection is provided by an 8 A fuse.
PWB 5A1 comprises the following components: The control pulses are sent by FILAMENT HEATING PWB 3A26
. two circuits measuring the RMS current in the final stage. and are transmitted by resistor R27.
These circuits comprise two reverse feedbacks (resistor R26 The positive peaks are detected by CR25 and cause Q21 and Q20
for FLUORO and resistor R25 for RAD). to conduct.
One of these circuits is selected by electronic switch Q213B, The negative peaks are detected by CR24 and cause Q15 and Q11
RAD = 0 in Fluoro mode. to conduct.
The other circuit is selected by Q213A, RAD = 0 in RAD Low–value resistors R7 and R8 (O.15 ohm), in the transmission
mode, circuit of the output transistors, are used to retrieve the current data
. a low pass filter, comprising A282. in the final stage. This data is used as reverse feedback by the cur-
. a circuit which increases the value of input n to n, comprising rent limiters on PWB 3A26 and the control circuits of PWB 3A26.
A278, The output transistors are protected against overvoltage by diodes
. an integrator comprising Q265 and A234. CR3 and CR14.
The integrator receives a cyclic reset pulse at a frequency of
180 Hz. SAFETY
Output A234, which represents the RMS current, is injected Two safety network are provided in order to prevent abnormal
into the inverter input of A237, which compares the measure operation of tube heating during +/– 12V.power supply variation
ment and the reference sent by A214. (switching ON or OFF sequence of the unit or default on +/– 12V
power supply) V+
– OPERATING PRINCIPE
The operating cycle is as follows: Q20
. capacitance C3 is charged by a 175 V (approx.) dc supply,
. the positive segment of the control pulses cause transistor Q20 Heating transformer
Control pulses primary
to conduct, thereby discharging C3 through the primary of the A B
heating transformer in the X–ray head.
. the negative segment of the control pulses cause Q11 to con + +
Q11
C3 C4
V–
9-29
6–7–12 OPERATION OF THE CONSIGNE kV/mA PWB 3A9 (DIAGRAM 91–100)
– KV/20 REFERENCE GENERATION G22 (BCD/decimal decoder) to make up the mA/radiography refe-
rences for filament heating PWB 3A26.
FLUORO OR RAD MODE These references correspond to the 6 mA values allocated to 6 vol-
tage ranges.
The kV data generated by the ADkV PWB 3A7 on the kV bus is
converted to analog form by circuit G68. This voltage is called
– DECODING AND DISPLAY KV/MA/MAS
kV/20 and is sent to the kV/mA regulation PWB 3A12.
Two groups, of two 4–bit comparators each, monitor of the kV
The following circuits (EPROM) carry out decoding :
reference on the bus:
G138, G172 for kV display,
. one group (G18 and G19) has an input B wired for 40 kV. G137, G136 for mA and mAs display.
The kV bus value is sent to input A. If A < B, comparator
output A < B is activated and used to generate the FC40 signal. kV DISPLAY
This signal then inhibits kV reference decrementation by
ADkV PWB 3A7, G67 transforms the kV bus into two BCD buses (for unit and tens
display).
. the second group of comparators (G21 and G20) has an input B G22 detects the 1 of the 100th and the kV ranges.
wired for 110 V.
The kV bus value is sent to input A. If A > B, the comparator
mA/mAs DISPLAY
output A > B is activated and is used to generate the FC110
signal.
The G120 output is divided into two BCD buses, which assume
This signal then inhibits kV reference incrementation by ADkV
mA or mAs reference display according to the mode selection :
board 3A7.
FLUORO or RAD.
– GENERATION OF RADIOGRAPHY MA REFERENCE The decimal point (range of displayed value) and upper value of
the display are controlled by G121 output through transistors net-
The kV bus addresses the kV value decoding memory G67 work according to the mode operation selected : FLUORO or
(EPROM). The four data bits of G67, 04 to 07, are decoded by RAD.
9-30
6–7–13 EXPOSURE PB – FLUORO TIMER (DIAGRAM 101–110)
– EXPOSURE PB G35 to supply both the LED of key Sm14 (0–5 min.) and buzzer
DS 175.
The X–ray request is performed by 2 PB : 2A1.Sm7 and
2A3.Sm26. G69 is triggered by PRX = 0, i.e. when X–rays are present.
The PB leds are switched ON by 3A12.G74, 3A7.Q140, R154 and
R155. PRX = 0 also triggers monostable G39, validating buzzer operation
after approximately 0.25s.
– 0–5 MIN. TIMER
The 2A1.Sm14 PB resets the timer.
The basic clock signal is supplied by the oscillator G69, adjustable
by R217 to 50 Hz. This signal comprising PRX.CP is directed to – RX LAMP
the timer PWB 3A5 to display the timer value, and to the counter
assembly (G37, G36, G38) to increment up to the following values The lamp 9DS1 is lighting when X–Rays are generated in RAD or
: FLUORO mode.
Signal PRX causes 3A12 Q625 conduction through G74 wich
. 4’57”, which sends a stop signal to SCR PWB 3A19, energises 9A2 K3
. 4’26”, which validates a 2 Hz flash signal generated by oscillator 9DS1 is supplied through the contact 1–3 of 9A2 K3.
9-31
6–7–14 OPERATION OF THE COLLIMATOR 3A3 PWB (DIAGRAM 111–115)
– COLLIMATOR ROTATION The control is ensured by PB 2A3.Sm13 (opening–BP02) and

2A3.Sm14 (closing – BPF2).
The collimator rotation is ensured by 7M1 motor. After according, these signals switch the push–pull stage output to
+ 12V or – 12V if limit switch are not reached (FCSC2 in FLUO-
A – 12V voltage is applied on 7M1 motor by 2A3 Sm11 for CCW
RO and FCGR2 in RAD).
rotation.
These 2 limit switches permit to identify the maximum opening
A + 12V voltage is applied on 7M1 motor by 2A3Sm12 for CW
positions in FLUORO mode and RAD mode.
rotation.
AUTOMATIC PREPOSITIONNING
– SHUTTERS OPERATION
Two possibilities are available : When unit is switched from RAD mode to FLUORO Mode, the
shutters of the collimator are automatically positionned in FLUO-
. Image intensifier 16 cm : 1 field RO mode in order to limit the X–Ray emission at the FLUORO
. Image intensifier 22 cm : 2 fields size (FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated).
16 CM IMAGE INTENSIFIER : 1 FIELD On the other hand, when unit is switched from FLUORO mode to
RAD mode, the shutters opening must be manually controlled.
When unit is provided with a 16 cm I.I, the 7M5 motor is not pre- The LEDS of the 2 PB 2A3Sm14 and Sm16 are flashing and RAD
sent on the collimator ASM. opening is completed when LEDS flashing is stopped. (FCGR1
and FCGR2 limit switches reached).
On the 3A3 PWB, the switches S501.A and B are open : Z infor-
mation is to 1 logic (112.E G165.A pin 6 to 1 and pin 4 to 0) 22 CM IMAGE INTENSIFIER : 2 FIELDS
UPPER SHUTTERS CONTROL When unit is provided with a 22 cm I.I, an additional function is
available on the control console : ZOOM function PB 2A3.Sm7.
The upper shutters are opaque and are moved by 7M3 motor.
This function is selected with the 3A3.S501A and B on PWB 3A3.
Closing and opening movements are controled by reversing motor
power supply polarity (Q218 = +12V and Q211 : – 12V)
Opening and closing shutters sequence are identical with the II 16
cm operation.
The control is ensured by PB 2A3 Sm15 (closing –BPF1) and
2A3.Sm16 (opening – BPO1).
When ZOOM function is not selected, Z signal is 0.
After decoding, these signals switch the push pull stage output to + Z = 0 changes the limit switches selection in the logic control of the
12V or – 12V, if the following conditions are present : shutters.
. limit switches not reached FCSC1(FLUORO) and FCGR1 (RAD) The maximum opening depends of FCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of
. Controls compatible with operating mode selection (FLUORO or FCSC1 and FCSC2 (actuated from FLUORO position to RAD
RAD). position).
The 2 limit switches permit to identify the maximum opening posi- When ZOOM function is selected, Z signal is 1 Logic and the shut-
tions in FLUORO mode (FCSC1) and RAD mode (FCGR1). ters close automatically until limit switches FCSC1 and FCSC2 are
reached (ZOOM size).
LOWER SHUTTERS CONTROL
AUTOMATIC PREPOSITIONNING
The lower shutters are semi–transparent shutters.
The opening and closing movements are controlled by 7M2 motor BP LEDS flashing and prepositionning sequence are identical with
. 16 cm I.I sequence.
9-32
– X–RAY BEAM LIMITATION FLUORO MODE
16 cm imager
Two limitations are provided : RAD = 0 and RAD = 1 informations control the 7M4 motor : 16
16 cm controled by 7M4 cm field limitation is positionned and limits the X–Ray beam to the
22 cm controled by 7M5 imager size.
When unit is mounted with a 16 cm II, only the 16 cm limitation is Motor is always supplied in order to maintain the limitation device
present on the collimator. in place.
22 cm imager
RAD = 0 and RAD = 1 informations control the 7M4 motor : 22

RAD MODE
cm limitation is positionned and limits the X–ray beam to the ima-
ger size.
Motor is always supplied in order to maintain the limitation device
16 cm or 22 cm imager in place.
ZOOM selection : ZOOM selection controls the positionning of the

RAD = 1 and RAD = 0 informations, after decoding, control the
16 cm limitation with 7M5
motion out the field of the X–Ray beam limitation device : motors
are always supplied in order to maintain the limitation in place.
9-33
6–7–15 OPERATION OF THE COLLIMATOR PWB 3A3 (DIAGRAM 116–120)
– AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (CAG ON/OFF) – ZOOM FUNCTION (22 CM IMAGER)
The signal FC110 controls the CAG ON/OFF sequence in the ca- When the ZOOM Function is selected (PB 2A3.Sm17–111E) a Z1
mera. signal is generated and select in the camera the ZOOM mode
(mode 1) through 3A3Q148.
The CAG function operates in AUTOMATIC FLUORO mode and
in ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY only during the XRay emis- – SWITCHING OFF SEQUENCE
sion (SEXP = 1) and if maximum kV value limit (FC110=0) is
When the PB 2A3.Sm21 or 2A1.Sm4 is depressed, 1 logic signal is
reached.
applied on Q152 base.
Q152 energizes 9A1.K3 (2C)
The delay, generated by R239, C235, inhibits CAG operation at the
9A1K3 contact applies 110V on 9Sm1 auxiliary coil : the unit
beginning of the VHV regulation.
switches OFF
The switch S133.A locks camera operation in AGC mode.
– REDUCED POWER SELECTION
– GO TO BLACK VIDEO OPERATION When unit is used on a mains voltage of 100, 108 or 120V (USA)
it is necessary to reduce the power : this operation is controlled by
The 3A3.S133.D permits a blanking of video signal of the camera A3.S133.B
without X–Ray emission (SYX = 1).
– OX.HLC
– BEAM MAX CONTROL When unit operates in FLUORO and HIGHT DEFINITION (HLC)
mode the OX signal (from 3A19.a16) is validated by SYX Sc and
Without X–ray emission, the camera is in ”reduced beam” mode. RAD and generates the 0X.HLC signal.
The SYX SC signal holds the HLC selection during the X–Ray
The 3A3.S133.C permits the selection of ”BEAM MAX” during pulses in PULSED FLUORO mode.
X–Ray emission (SYX SC = 0).
During RAD mode operation, OX HLC is hold to 0 logic.
9-34
6–7–16 C–ARM UP/DOWN MOTION (DIAGRAM 121–130)
– COLUMN MOTORISATION
The column motorisation is performed by a DC motor 1M1. A motion request energises the relay K6 through D7 or D4 diode
and supplies the motor.
The UP motion is controlled by the BP 2A3.Sm23 or 2A1.Sm5
which energises the relay 1A1.K34 – 24 VDC POWER SUPPLY
The DOWN Motion is controlled by the BP 2A3.Sm22 or A 24 VDC power supply is provided to supply the imager (VHV
2A1.Sm9 which energises the relay1A1.K41. and TV camera).
9-35
6–7–17 OPERATION OF 3A5 TIMER PWB (MINUTERIE). (DIAGRAM 131–140)
– This board performs the following functions : Closing one of these relays causes monitor coils to rotate in the
. monitor coil rotation, desired direction.
– ROTATION OF MONITOR 1 COILS – ROTATION OF MONITOR 2 COILS (OPTIONAL)
This function is identical to rotation of monitor 1 coils and is con-

This function is controlled by keys Sm8 and Sm7 on the control trolled by keys Sm6 and Sm5.
console. PWB 3A5 is fitted with the corresponding circuits.
Pressing these keys generates a logic signal which is amplified by
transistors Q151 and Q156.
These transistors control relays K7 and K5 located on the monitor
cart relay PWB 9A1.
9-36
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
C R/C CD +TR –TR Q Q
T = RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q no change
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care
RA
7 3
RB Pin 1 : Ground
6 555 2 : Trigger
2 5 3 : Output
C 4 : Reset
8 : Vdc
4
Borne 4
T = T1 + T2 = 0.693 ( RA + RB ) C
3 T1 = 0.693 ( RA + RB ) C
T2 = 0.693 ( RB ) C
T1 T2
9-37
6–7–18 WORKING OF THE INTERFACE BOARD DSM 3A1 (DIAGRAM 201–205)
– GENERAL – SELECTION OF THE MODE OF WORKING
Integrated circuit CMOS 4538 The information of selection of RAD, SP and ER mode condigura-
te the control logic RX and the memory management.
The 4538 circuit includes 2 independent monostables whose time The information NORMAL FLUORO is obtained as a default if no
constants are determined by an external RC circuit other mode of working has been selected.
– MEMORY SIGNALS
Each monostable can be triggered on the rising or falling dege of a
pulse, according to the input chosen. Signals MG+ and MF+
– outputs 4 and 12 – rising edge
– inputs 5 and 11 – falling edge The signals MG+ and MF+ manage the technique of working of
the memory (FLUORO, PULSED FLUORO, E.R.).
Each monostable has 2 outputs : Signal MEMO +

– outputs 6 and 10 generate a positive pulse
– outputs 7 and 9 generate a negative pulse This signal indicates the end of digitalization or the authorization of
treatment (filtering).
Inputs 3 and 13 reset the monostables.RAZ = logic 0
The signal is maintained at 0 logic during the time of establishment
and stabilization of the video signal.
Integrated circuit CMOS 4013
This time is generated on the circuit 3A1 by G117.8 (T1).
In PULSED FLUORO, the signal is also managed by the times T2

The 4013 circuit includes 2 identical ”D FLIP–FLOP”s each ha- and T5.
ving independent inputs of set, reset, clock, data and 2 outputs Q
and Q. Signal VISU +
The logic level present at the input D (5 or 9) is transferred to the This signal indicates to the memory the presence of RX or of a
output 0 (1 or 13) during the positive transition of the signal clock sequence during which RX pulses are emitted.
(inputs 3 or 11).
The signal is at 1 logic for the whole time of an RX request in
Resetting is carried out by a signal at 1 logic on the reset (4 or 10). NORMAL FLUORO or PULSED FLUOTO, but will return to 0
logic in E.R. mode at the end of the single RX pulse.
Signal X PERM
Integrated circuit 555 (Timer)
The signal at 1 logic indicates that the memory is available.
As long as the input 4 (Reset) is at 0, the output 3 is at 0. By its return to 0 logic it generates an end of exposure via the logic
When input 4 passes to 1, output 3 passes to 1 for the whole of the of the 3A1 PWB (STOP DSM).
time generated by the RC circuit (T1 – constant of charge) then
falls back to 0 during the time T2 (constant of discharge). This end of exposure generated by the memory reduces the time of
Since the inputs 2 (Trigger) and 6 (threshold) are connected, the RX emission to the minimum necessary to obtain a correct picture.
circuit works as multivibrator until input 4 (reset) is at 0.
Signal A/B
This signal indicates that the memory is in mode 2 pictures and

makes the rotation of the monitors return to the initial position.
9-38
– GENERATION OF OX OUT ORDER of the PULSED FLUORO sequence onwards

It can be shortened by the signal X PERM.
The OX order OUT depends on : It is not influenced by the release of the order OX, so as to permit
– the mode of working selected the memory to acquire a correct picture.
– the signal X.PERM from the memory.
PULSED FLUORO CADENCER
– MONOSTABLES
5 monostables are present on the PWB 3A1 T6 (202A–Q110A)
T1 (206A–G117B) The time T6 is generated by a multivibrator type 555. This time

determines the cadences of the RX pulses in PULSED FLUORO
This time allows the picture to stabilize in AUTO mode. It can be mode.
adjusted by R151.
It can be shortened by the signal HYST (not active in this version). The multivibrator is triggered at the end of the time T1 and syn-
T1 is deleted if the RX control is released. chronized by each pulse T4 – this makes it possible to have a cons-
tant time between each pulse.
T2 (207A–G117.A)
The integrated circuits G119.A and G82.8 (203A) prevent the
This time is fixed and is used as safety timer of the duration of RX emission of an additional impulse when the BP RX is released.
necessary for processing the picture (16x40 ms = 640 msec).
It is shortened by the signal X PERM from the memory. SIGNALS OX AND OX*
T2 is used in ER Mode and during the first impulse in PULSED
FLUORO mode. The treatment of the signal OX and OS* is prvbided by the ”D
T2 is deleted if the RX control is released. Flip–Flop” G103.B (204C).
The purpose of this circuit is to :
T3 (207B–G115.A – wait for the state of permission X PERM
– prevent the release of OX* during the sequence of PULSED
This time is fixed and is used to prolong the RX emission in NOR-
FLUORO and ensure that the end of each impulse of RX
MAL FLUORO so as to allow the memory to finish the acquisition
is generated by the signal X PERM.
of a correct picture.
– Take account of the signal T
It is generated each time the order OX is delete by an origin other
than that of the signal X PERM of the memory.
T : this signal is generated at the level of the PWB 3A3 DIA-
PHRAGM if a change of field occurs in the 22 cm ampli (normal
T4 (204A–G120A)
field to magnify or vice versa).
This time is adjustable and is used from the second impulse of
PULSED FLUORO onwards. This signal is used to drop the order OX and recommence the se-
It can be shortened by the signal HYST (not active in this version) quence with a new phase of automatic search for the kV/mA ins-
and remains active after the release the signal 0X to permet the tructions.
acquisition of a correct picture given by the last impulse of R
The signal HOLD kV frees the automatic mechanism during the
T5 (205A–G120B) time T1.
This time is fixed and is used as safety timer for the duration of RX The purpose of the ”D FLIP–FLOP” G 103.A (202C) is to main-
necessary for the processing of the picture from the second impulse tain the RX emission if the signal T occurs during the pulse.
9-39
– ORDER X OUT S 502.A in position CLOSED
NORMAL FLUORO MODE The RX emission is generated as soon as BP OX is pressed.

If the BP OX is released during the RX emission, the emission is
As soon as BP RX is pressed, OX OUT passes to 1 logic. not interrupted, and the end of exposure will be given by the signal
STOP DSM coming from the memory.
When the BP RX is released, OX OUT is released when the time
T3 has expired. PULSED FLUORO MODE
ELECTRON RAD MODE As soon as the BP OX is pressed, the PULSED FLUORO sequen-
ce starts off with a first pulse identical to that generated in ER mode
The working depends on the position of S502.1 (205B). (T1 + T2).
At the end of the time T1, the cadencer T6 is triggered and syn-
S 502.A in position OPEN chronized by each pulse of T4 so as to maintain an equal time bet-
ween the RX pulses. The second and following pulses are genera-
The RX emission is generated as soon as the BP OX is pressed and ted by the monostables T4 and T5.
maintained during the time T1 and T2.
The end of exposure is given by the memory : the signal STOP – HOLD KV
DSM makes T2 return.
The purpose of this signal is to free the search kV/mA circuit du-
If the BP OX is released before the end of the sequence, the signal ring the time T1 in PULSED FLUORO mode.
OX OUT returns and interrupts the RX emission. In the other modes of working, automatic radioscopy is active all
the time.
SCOPIE PULSEE – PULSED FLUORO
OX IN
3A1.a17
T1
E123
E124 T2
T6
E121
E126 T4
T5
E127
OX OUT
3A1.a15
T1+T2 T4+T5
STOP DSM
E49
VISU
E58
MEMO
E59
9-40
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1
9-41
9-42
REV 2
For Monicon Camera Version of Steno
F18 to Monicon & I.I.

24v
(See page 9-87)
9-43
9-44
REV 3
CCD Version of Steno Camera Will keep unit from
Safety plug needed
to turn on unit.
If bad connection or shorted to
chasis can cause disk drive problems on DSM
turning on
Surge resistor
275VAC
Inverter
Time delay
remove for demo mode
monitor
& accessories
230V
Emergency off
buttons on
Console
Opens after time delay (turn on)

If cable disconnected (9PL1), it closes and trips
breaker by energizing K5.
C-ARM vertical
1A1 fuse to
Bd. CCD
Keeps K5 from energizing
& tripping 9SM1 until (See pg. 9-89)
time delay is resched & not used
K1 opens
9-45
9-46
REV 3
Bleeder
Inverter
current
sense
Board on tube head.

Factory matched to
tube HV transformer
voltage doubler caps
275v
AC
HV transformer
fluoro (x10)
adds 4C4 & 4C1
for Rad
Discharges 4C3 & 4C4 Rad (x1)

just priot to Exp. Insert mA
meter here
Charge 4C3
Discharge 4C3
Inhibits Exp.
>70_
>50_ Lights warning light &

disables high dose fluoro
All boards plugged in before you can

fire HV inverter
(Exception is 3A1 digital interface.)
9-47
9-48
REV 3
Presence of X'
Start
Exposure
switched at 10 kV Tube arc. Int & restarts

expl to 4 times) goes
low at 4+ tube arce to
terminated ex for good
Tube spit
1v - 20 kV counter
desired kVp
(kVp command)
If kV drops below
30 kV = tube arc
Order x-ray
(start in steno &
goes to digital &
then back here)
Presence of
current in
inverter
1V = 20KV
1v-1 kV
40 kV=1.1v
110 kV=4.95v
Anode
Real time kVp

feedback
Cathode Pulse stream

fire inverters
1v - 1kV
desired
actual
kVp
Exceeded mA
(kVp has reached)
Fluoro mA
1v = 1mA
Rad mA
1v = 10 mA
9-49
9-50
REV 3
Fluoro fiament
XPERM goes high at 5.
Fluoro time on.
3A1
open if have digital
Digital close to bypass
order X-ray Rad filament
If closed, then
FL disabled
from H.S.W. Start exp
when RAD
selected
If closed, then can

only FL - no RAD
One pulse at
Exp. start
Pule stream to regulate

inverter firing rate via
C. Loop kV control
Tube arc interrupts

exp momentarily
Presence of inverter
current to prevent
SCR cross firing
FF
Alternately fires
main SCRs
Off if missing
+12v (cannot fire SCRs)
Don't hook scope here. It
12v daisy chain on if missing may trigger SCR unintentionally.
interlock through +12v
all boards
9-51
9-52
REV 2
Job Card Rg11 or RG203
See pg 8-34
30 msec to ensure main SCR is off

before firing the other main SCR.
Current sense
from inverter
9-53
9-54
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P545, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000
9-55
9-56
9-57
9-58
REV 3
50 Hz (not 60 Hz)
free running oscillator Divide by 10
Fluoro Time
Totalizer
Reset total time Divide by 6
60 sec/min
Divide by 10
Adj So Cde RX
= 2.1v CCD
=2.35v monicon
12 volt
interlock
0v if ABC
satisfied
High if Sample & hold
error integrator
> 0.87v Analog 1v = 20 kV
2.1v DC for CCD

2.35v DC for monicon
at proper ABC brightness
(=250 mV flat field video at
monitor) damping of
loop gain" +.87
ABC deadband" Adj'd for 1.75v

Start Exp. 1.75v across R67.
mA is function of kVp (via -.87
EPROMS).
This circuit prevents oscillation High if error
Pulsed FL selected if on edge of EPROM step. more neg.
Goes low when kVp is satisfied
than -0.87v
9-59
9-60
REV 3
Order X-ray
ABC needs more kVp

ABC needs less kVp
Preset to start
at 40 kVp
Low = ABC
satisfied
Desired kVp from
ABC circuit
On" = manual
mode
Momentary
switch
goes high at 110KV selected Comparitor

chips
Fluoro = 0v Digital kVp

demand signal
Disables manual
kv up/down conĆ 25 sec. 3Hz to drive manual
trol in auto mode delay kVp up slowly for 2 sec.
Rad = 5v
30 Hz to drive kV quickly manually

after hyolding down switch for > 2 sec.
2 Hz Sq. wave
Ready light
on = 5v ok
>50_c
9-61
9-62
9-63
9-64
REV 3
Rad Order X-ray prevents

change modes during
X-ray
ER = Extended
Radiography
= single pulsed
fluoro snapshot.
HLC = High Level Fluoro

= 2 times mA/dose
Pulsed Fluoro
Normal fluoro dose
S" LED in mAs diaplay
1.2 Hz slow change mA/mAs
12 Hz fast change mA/mAs
9-65
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P615, STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D - M.D.A, Rev. 1, Page A20
DUAL 4 BIT LATCH

TRUTH TABLE 3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 828 980 G035 / G045
4508 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
2 G65 G132
Reset Disable Strobe D input Q output Voir tableau Voir tableau
Vcc See chart See chart
Q3B D3B Q2B D2B Q1B D1B Q0B D0B Out. Stro. Reset
disa B B
B 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 0
G66
Voir tableau
Out. 0 0 0 X Latched See chart B A
disa Stro. Reset 1 0 X X 0
A A A D0A Q0A D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A
GND
X 1 X X Z G120
Voir tableau
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Z : H. Impedance See chart
G121 PL1
Dual D Flip Flop Voir tableau
CL D R S Q Q See chart
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
GND X X 1 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Binary UP / DOWN Counter

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 CL CI U/D PE R ACTION
4516 VCC X 1 X 0 0 No Count
CLOCK Q3 P3 P2 Q2 UP / Reset 0 1 0 0 Count UP
Preset Carry Down
enable Q4 P4 P1 IN Q1 Carry OUT 0 0 0 0 Count DOWN
GND X X X 1 0 Preset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X X X X 1 Reset
3A9 CI Consigne kV / mA
3A9 Consigne kV / mA
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care PCB
828 980 G035
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator Eprom 5R – 500W
INPUTS G65 828 230 P605
1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS
4585 6 COMPARING CASCADING
A3 B3 A > B A B AB G66 828 232 P605
Cascading Inputs A3>B3 X X X X X 1 0 0 1
Dis. kV
B2 A2 A = B A > B A < BA = B A1 A3=B3A2>B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 G67 828 229 P305
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A3=B3A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1 mA / mAs
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1 G120 828 234 P305
BIN DEC
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1 G121 828 233 P305
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0 Cons. mAs
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0 G132 828 231 P305
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0
A3=B3A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0
A3=B3A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0
PROGAMMATION CI 2A1 PUPITRE MODULE G
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0
1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Fonction de Sm35
Sm35 function
Sm58. 1–4 (A) ON ON

2–3 (B) ON ON
Sm59. 1–4 (A) ON ON

2–3 (B) OFF OFF
Sm60. 1–4 (A) OFF OFF
2–3 (B) OFF OFF
9-66
REV 3
In U.S. when hit 50_C, can stay in high dose FL. Europe drops to normal dose.
Iris Controls dose

(norm & HL)
CLosed for
U.S.
Order X-ray & High

Fluoro mA demans based
level dose selected
Electronic Rd. on Kv selected/current
(single pulse FL) using
>50v
High
EPROM
level
FL
Min. FL mA = 0.1 mA
Min. RAD mAs = 0.16
Max. RAD mAs = 160

Selects mAs integration
scale range.
Digital
Desired kVp signal
EPROM
mA;mAs
up & down
Desire mAs as selected

at console
9-67
9-68
REV 3
120 v AC
Reduced power = closed 68 Kr with CCD
derates available mA at 40kV = 24 mA
Reduced
selected kVps 110 kV = 12 mA
power
If closed, allows fluoro

on large filament forĆ
RAD tube alignment.
Preheat
Selected RAD mA based
on kVp
See pgs. 9-97, 4-15 or
12-33 Rad 1v = 10mA
FL 1v = 1mA
Selected RAD mA
based on selected kV
RAD
Rad mA feedback
1v = 10mA FL
Controls mAs integrator gain
Selected/desired mAs
Stop Rad Exposure
at selected mA
(no phototiming)
Reduced power 120v AC
backup timer = 15 sec
Presence of X-ray
220 v power backup

set for 7 seconds
FL
Preheat
Actual FL mA feedback
Closed loop fluoro mA Control
Desired FL mA (EPROM
based on kVp)
FL mA adjust
9-69
9-70
REV 3
See waveforms on page 8-35
RAD
Remove aluminum
RAD filter on collimator
to see filament
Free running switching
180 Hz
1.8 mm XL (Rad only)
0.5 mm XS (FL only)
180_
phase Current
XS, XL Selector shift feedback
resistors FL
180_ Current
phase safety
shift
FL
Fuse
Rad fil I.
feedback
RSM current
feedback
FL current
feedback
Filament drive to
achieve desired mA
If actual current feedback > desired
current, then comparitor goes high &
interrupts 180 Hz inverter.
9-71
REV 1 Source: SM 826 921 P615, STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D - M.D.A, Rev. 1, Page A22
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4011 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829 357 G045
9-72
9-73
9-74
9-75
9-76
REV 3
max kV limit 110 kV

Desired/select kVP
1v = 20 kV
min kVp = 40
Rad mA determined
by kVp
digital
selected/desired
kVp
EPROM
EPROM
9-77
9-78
REV 3
2Hz Osc.
5 min timer For flashing 50_C

accuracy thermal thermometer
Pot is R217 light
(see Job
Card RG14
or RG206)
Low = stop HV Inverter
X-ray on indicator
Presence of x-ray - lights lamps on console & on top of

2Hz monitor cart.
Console
X-ray switches
Monitor
cart
Sonalert tone
9-79
9-80
REV 3
Slip ring
continuous turn
+ = CW
- = CCW
Rotate
collimator
+12 = close
-12 = open
Lead
Blades
Close
6" FL
Lead Lead Limit switches close
blades Open
when reach open
(opaque)
blade limit
AL
Aluminum
blades
(Radio-translucent) Causes blades to flash
on console if blades
need to be opened.
+12 = close
-12 = open
Aluminum
Blades
Low for 9"

high for 6" = zoom
Circular lead
aperature for 6"
FOV selected on
9" bottle (not used
w/6" bottle)
6" FOV
Toggle Sw.
for 9" Systems
9" II normal FOV

or
6" II normal FOV
9-81
9-82
REV 3
Start & Exp.

(Ft. Sw.)
Close to turn on AGC on/off

AGC for service mode monicon = max kV
+ automode
+ making x-ray
Fluoro selected
CCD: AGC is always on

(dynamic)
Electronic radiogr.
(single pulse fluoro = snapshot)
ABC mode
Unblank TV when logic high

Max kV
Low during Fluoro Monicon only

High sets max beam = 1500 nA
Low = standy beam
Open = down = off = 400 nA
Open to UNBLANK
to set up camera standĆ
TV w/o X-ray
by beam (400nA) when Mag to 6" FOVE
fluoroing. on 9" I.I.
See pg. 11-57
Emergency off
switches on C-ARM
console
120v AC
9-83
9-84
9-85
9-86
REV 3
Up/down
switches
Switches drive
direction
Check F18
if camera
loses power
Monicon
See next page

for CCD
Vertical Drive
9-87
9-88
REV 2
CCD
camera
Not used for

CCD
24v DC comes from

LVLE supply
See Coord. 6, C for

SM826921P545
Pg 9-45 in this book
9-89
9-90
REV 2
DSM uses monitor yoke rotation,

MDA does not.
Monitor A
Rotate
Monitor B
A/B selection (Split Screen) forces both

monitors to drive fully CCW when split screen
selected on DSM 200. (DSM 600 did not roĆ
tate.) MDA digital uses electronic rotation
9-91
REV 1
9-92
REV 2
Goes to DSAD J7 Not used
Monitor cart to C-ARM interface
See also pg. 9-45 for completion of connections
Monitor
Curt
C-ARM
simply =12v used

to generate X PERM
Memory available, end of

image processing
9-93
9-94
REV 2
3A1 Interface DSM
(MDA version, See Volume 3 of Technical Supplement)
See pages 9-38 and 16-16 for theory and
signal names of this board.
Norm FL
Pulsed
Fluoro
Electronic Rad
(single pulse fluoro)
Rad.
norm closed
OX manager
From 3A19 board

3A19S76.A switch used to
bypass digital if it is down.
(DSMs have bypass"
mode if it is down)
Pulsed
Fluoro
Not used
2 sec. delay for andoe

_____ing between ER pulses.
To 3A5 Hysteresis
to maintain kV
between FL pulses Schematics jump fro Coord. 150 to 201 = Normal!
9-95
9-96
REV 2
DSM has bypass. If it fails,

can switch 3A19 S76.4 at
steno to enable fluoro.
Timing signal from steno

that indicates ABC should
be stabilized. Allows digital
acquisition & processing
X-ray present
Used by digital to indicate

pulsed fluoro or electronic
radiograph (single pulsed
fluoro) is selected.
OX = order X-ray
when digital ready
for next exposure
To 3A19.a5
EXPERM" XPERM indicates memory is

+ enables x-ray emission available. Used in pulsed FL
- stops x-ray & E.R. Used for integrating
images (frame averaging) &
then allows x-ray when averĆ
aging complete.
(See pg 16-16)
End of Exp.
9-97
REV 1
9-98
REV 1
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-1
REV 1
10-2
REV 1 Source: 45559811 Imageur 22 Stenoscop 2, Rev. 3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
REV 1
10-10
REV 1 Source: sm 36003153, Advantx Imageur Schematics, Rev. 0, Page 1-2
ILLUSTRATION 1-2 ILLUSTRATION 1-3

IMC2 BOARD LOCATIONS IMC2 BOARD LOCATIONS
R1
R2
10-11
REV 2
SW in one pos – display C.blank window
other pos – Black (Perimeter blank windwo)
mus_____ usually open windows to view I.I.
5.04 MHz POWER SUPPLY (PL1)

SCAN CONVERTER & FOCUS (PL5) (525 line rate)
COMPOSITE SYNC Look like metal
can transistors
REGULATOR fused from C–ARM ____tor drive Bd.
MN3, MN4 VR1
DS1 Logic on/off
R10 CRYSTAL COMPOSITE BLANKING
(3A9)
Focus MX4, Q8 FOCUS OSC & dose control
Video
DIVIDER Strap for 60Hz
Circular
when replace Bd. R4 Size
Blanking DS2
REGULATOR (IRIS)
G1
H cent
V–def MX1 & MX2 R1 S1 S2 DH1
MA6 DS4
TV Camera
MN5 MA3 Aperature
R6 Size
H– Parabola
H–def TR1 & Q5 MN1 Gen
MA5 MA6 From/To
& BLK Image Tube Generator
HD MN2 MN6, MA4 WINDOW Power Supply
MUX – MX1
R5 Size
V–Parabola MA7
Q6, Q7 Gen DH2
R2 ABC
G2,G3,G4 (AGC) (MAG)
R3 adjusts Adj R3 Target–V Vcent 6” FOV on 9” II
CATHODE all WINDOW
R12 SYNC & MASK BOARD (PL3)
630V MN8 (Not Used) used on Advantx
DS3
CAMERA 450V Camera Tube TP63
Electrode Voltage blank/unblank camera ff.sw. CR SW 133.D on 3A3 Bd.
TUBE 300V Control AUTO BRIGHTNESS LOW PASS
Q6 S1
(NEWVICON) Q3, TR2 & MA3 (VIDEO RX) Q5
Czicon Beam No. Adj. FILTER VIDEO RX
Q2,3,4 (Not Used)
Target Sig Sweep reverse on
Monicon only
Beam Control (K2) (3A5) CCD uses digital
18v FIL REG (from Generator)
R4–Stand–by
R11–Normal
VR1 Test Switch to
set up beam
3A3 S133.C
Target Voltage
Edge Enhancement
Q8 System TP10 250 mV –
Blanking Composite video
PREAMP Jumper S2 (ROI 94–114 on DSM)
Q1,2,3,4
Q5,6,7 Q11 LOW PASS
MA3 MA4 Q12 Q13,14 Q16,17,18 Q19 VIDEO – OUT To J8 os DSM
TO DSM 250mV comp.
MA1, MA2 H–CLAMP FILTER video
OR
TV MONITORS
1mV = 1nA
R2 Gamma–Wht clip
R3 50 mv
TP1 BLK LEVEL Max Gain R4 & S3 R7
150 Factory adj. BLK LEVEL
mV ADJ. Factory adj. Adj. pg 11–67
FF R1 enablegamma
See pg. 11–63, Ill. 6

Q15
MA5 – 1,2,3 If video is low and
MX2 – 1,2,3 F110 AGC is on, (110 kVp)
variable gain is active
150 in AGC on/off from 3A3

250 out Active = 110 kV and in
R6 R5 pg. 11–65 Automatic Fluoro
and making x–ray
AGC Gain Manual Gain
(PL2) Adj. pg 11–63 done first (higher gain)
CCD––>AGC always active
10-12
ILLSTRATION 10-2
IMC2 PL5 SCAN AND CONVERTER BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
VCIBLE
K1
R5 R2 R1
10-13
10-14
10-15
REV 1
10-16
REV 2
PL5 Scan Converter & Focus (TV)
Vertical Center Normal Vertical Center Reverse
Adjust R3 for 300vDC (VG2)

R3 adjusts VG2, VG4, VG3
VCIBLE" Target Voltage = 18v
Beam Current
(If adj. R3 then beam must be
readj. Normal = 1500ma
Stdby = 400 mA
Cathode blanking
Sweep
Focus
Sweep Reverse
from 3A5 to MoniĆ
can PL1 to here
Syx SC" from C-arm

3A3 S133.C used to set
standby beam (See pg.
11-57 for Adj. Proc.
10-17
REV 1
10-18
10-19
REV 1
10-20
ILLUSTRATION 8-2
IMC2 PL3 SYNC AND MASK BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-21
REV 2
PL3 Sync & Mask (Strapped for 5v Hz from France)
View (size = 1/2 diam. of image)
View ABC/AGC window
Blank/unblank
From foot Sw or Circle Blanking
3A3 S133.D
Normal
Service
Permieter blanking
H/V Blank Comp (remove flyback)
H/V Comp Sync

Composite sync
H drive
V drive
H&V drive
H drive
Remove for
V drive
60Hz 525 line
NOTE: New Board

This jumper is laĆ
beled S1 on back soldered wire
of board (solder) jumper ABC sindow for sampling
Jumper for 60Hz

S2 on New Board
Composite
Parabola
Switch from standby

beam 400mA to normal
beam 1500 mA
Perimeter Balnking
5mm smaller than
P.U.T. target
10-22
REV 2
PL3 Sync & Mask Board
Parabola Roundess ABC Window
H. Parabola (Fixed, Non-Adj.)

2.35v + .15v dc
APB
Goes to C-arm 3A5
Composite ABC Board
Parabola
150 mv F.F. APB

ABC video from
preamp
Video RX
(vedeo ! monitor = 250 mv)

V. Parabola
10-23
10-24
10-25
ILLUSTRATION 7-2
IMC2 PL2 VIDEO AND PREAMP BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
AGC ON/OFF
R6
10-26
REV 2
PL2 Video Board
from PL3
perimeter blanking"
only allows video w/in
window to pass. ElimiĆ
from PL3 nates P.U.T. flyback ulses.
60Hz rate
Preamp video
150 mv Flat
* Field
AGC ABC video = 150 mv

at proper brightness
variable using flat field.
gain Generates 2-35vdc
amp which then goes to
To PL3 TP12
Sync & Mask Steno to control ABC.
Board
AGC
Control voltage fixed Sht. 2
for non-AGC [H,6]
varies for AGC
10-27
REV 2
AGC gain. Calibrate first.
Manual gain adjusted second.

Adj. for 250 mV F.F.
Normal on = some edge enhancement
Video from
sheet 1 [C, 2]
4.7 v Ref.
250 mV F.F. video At proper brightness (ABC mode).

50 mV ~ 550 mV F.F. video with CVII (CV + 1 AL) in auto mode
Composite setup
blanking
Composite video
to J8 @ DSM
250 mV
F.F. video
= 50 mV
300 mV
sync
Comp
Sync
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
ILLUSTRATION 6-2
IMC2 PL1 POWER SUPPLY AND INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-32
REV 3
AGC on/off
Adx
Coax from
video board
To J8 on DSM
3A5 (41, D) 2.35v=ABC ck

3A3S 133.D (120, B)
blank/unblank
ABC stabilize before
Sweep Rev.
{ AGC kicks in
3A3S133.C (120,C)
to set stdby Max beam
beam=400mA switch
to 1500 mA +0.2v
Factory
from 1A1 adj. I.I. Size
elevator Bd.
3.43S133.A (120, A) AGC on/off I.I. Center focus

HLC (high level
dose) (78,A) +0.75
Edge focus
(120, C) Z" = zoom

mag 1 - 6" mode See also pg.
on 9" bottle 10-36.
New board
has 3 pots
used on Adx
Vacuum DS3 lights
when too much leakage
in image tube (Getter I)
(>1mA of II gas current),
Normall lights at
power up and goes out
To/from C-ARM
To Camera
To Iris Control Bd
To II Supply
Not used
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-36
10-37
ILLUSTRATION 11-2
IMC2 PL6 IRIS AND LIGHT SENSOR BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-38
REV 3
logic for dose Iris motor

control
Norm
1.8 mR/min
.108 R/hr.
Iris opening
pots for dose control
3.6 mR/min
.216 R/hr.
HLC (High level definistion)
10-39
REV 1
10-40
10-41
REV 1
10-42
REV 1
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-1
REV 1
11-2
REV 1
11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
TEST
EQUIPMENT: OSCILLOSCOPE
DVM
CV PHANTOM KIT
STANDARD FIELD SERVICE TOOL KIT
METRIC ALLEN WRENCHES
SIZING GAUGE FOR 9" IMAGE INTENSIFIER - PART # 46-286485P1
INITIAL CONDITIONS: FOR DSM 600 SYSTEMS (FLICKER FREE MONITORS) THE DSM SYSTEMS MUST BE
ON FOR ALL ADJUSTMENTS
• 2mm of Copper (2mm of Copper equal 3 Copper from CV Kit)
• Adjust PL-2 R4 fully clockwise removes gamma.
• Remove generator trim cover.
• Place 3A3 board on extender in Stenoscop chassis.
• Position C-arm so that the image tube is on the top and the x-ray tube is on the
bottom.
• Remove image head trim cover to expose camera head and image tube.
• Remove rear trim cover on monitor cart to get at the back of the DSM.
• Turn off the DSM with the switch above the power cord. (only on DSM-200 systems)
• Get at the video preamp by swinging out PL1 power supply board.
• Allow the unit to warm up for 30 minutes.
• Unblank TV camera with switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop, to OPEN (DOWN)
position.
PROCEDURE
POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: CERTAIN VIDEO MODULE SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE. IF THE 18V SUPPLY IS ADJUSTED, A COMPLETE TV SYSTEM CALIBRATION
MAY HAVE TO BE PERFORMED.
1. Turn on Stenoscop and allow to warm up 30 min.

2. Check that three green LEDS on the PL1 Power Supply Board are on:
DS1 +18v TP-2 (TP-1=GND)
DS2 +15v +/-0.75v TP-8
DS3 -15v +/-0.75v TP-9
3. Connect digital meter between TP2 and TP1 of Power Supply board PL1.
Voltage should read +18volts +/-0.1v.
4. If not, adjust PL1-R1 for +18volts +/-0.1v.
11-3
REV 1
J1 J1
TP TP TP
11 10 10
TP1 TP1
TP8 TP8
J6 J6
TP2 J3 TP2 J3
R1 TP9 R1 TP9
J2 J2
R11 R8 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R9 R8 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R9
TP3 R10 TP3
TP4 TP4
TP5 J4 TP5 J4
TP7 TP7
TP6 TP6
PL1 (HP) POWER SUPPLY PL1 (F1) POWER SUPPLY

45560563 45202778
TP10 R7
TP11
TP8 R6
R9
R8
TP1 R10
R3 R5
R2
R1
TP2
TP9
TP3 J2
TP12
TP4
TP13 TP6
R12
TP5 TP7 R4
R11
PL5 SCAN & FOCUS BOARD
11-4
REV 1
VG2 ADJUSTMENT
1. For D9, unbolt image tube high voltage power supply from image tube casting
(3 screws) to get at the bottom of the PL5 board. (DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRES
FROM IMAGE TUBE).
2. Image reversal module should be in the NORMAL mode on Stenoscop control.
3. Connect meter between TP5 of Scan/Converter/Focus board PL5 and ground.

Voltage should be 300VDC +/-10v.
4. If required, adjust PL5-R3 for 300VDC +/-10v. R3 is located in the center of the
board.
5. Reinstall HV power supply.
NOTE: The power supply may be removed again for the beam alignment check.
TARGET ADJUSTMENT
1. Connect meter to PL5-TP6 of Scan/Converter/Focus board and chassis ground.
2. Check that the target voltage is equal to the target voltage supplied with the pick-up
tube.
NOTE: CURRENTLY, THE NEWVICON TUBE IS BEING USED IN THE STENOSCOP. THIS
IS A CZICON TUBE BY ANOTHER MANUFACTURER. THEREFORE THE TARGET
VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 18V.
THE RANGE FOR THE TARGET ADJUSTMENT IS 5 VOLTS TO 80 VOLTS DC.
3. Adjust PL5-R12 for correct voltage.
11-5
REV 1
R21 R23 R20 R4

R18 R3 R2 R1
R13
R16
DUAL FREQUENCY BOARD

VMI MONITOR
11-6
REV 1
VMI MONITOR RASTER ADJUSTMENT
1. Turn the DSM on and allow to run the power-up sequence.

2. Enter the maintenance mode by typing G,M,A simultaneously.
3. Select 2-QI, then M-PATTERN. Then select 1-CENTERING. A centering pattern
will appear on both monitors.
4. Verify the raster sizing on the monitors with ILL. 1.
5. If adjustment is necessary, remove the rear cover of the affected monitor(s).
Refer to the tables below and make the following size and centering adjustments to
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊ
each monitor, based on the line frequency of your unit.
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊ
DUAL FREQ. VERT. DEFL.
BD.
60Hz 50Hz
Vertical Center R13 R16
Vertical Size R7 R4
Vertical Hold R18 R20
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
#1 DEFL. BD (HORZ 50 & 60 Hz.
DEFL. BD.)
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Horizontal Center L101
Horizontal Size L103
A non-ferrous `tuning wand' must be used if horizontal adjustments are necessary.
RASTER
=
270
=
= =
ALL DIMENTIONS IN MM
360
ILLUSTRATION 1
11-7
REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP TP
4 3 J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
TP
R3 TP
12
6
R4 1
J2
S1
3
2
1
S3
3
2
TP
11
1
S2
TP
3
10
2
TP R7
9
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
PL3 SYNC & MASK BOARD
11-8
REV 1 Source: SM 2131062-100, 15" and 20" DISTAR MONITORS, Rev. 1, Page 3-1
CHAPTER 2 - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 1
REQUIREMENTS
1–1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to access and adjust the Monitor for proper operation.
A luminance meter is required to optimise the adjustment of brightness/contrast for ambient

light. However,
D A luminance meter may not be available. Refer to Job Card RG004 for an alternative
procedure without luminance meter.
D The Minolta LS 100 may not be available. Refer to Service Note 3681B for an
alternative procedure IET luminance meter.
Adjustments to the Monitor are limited to procedures specified in this Service Manual.
1–2 Test Equipment Required
D Luminance meter, MINOLTA LS100 or equivalent.

D Green reflecting screen (Part No. 21 103 60).
D Photographic tripod (optional).
For further information on the luminance adjustment procedure, refer to the corresponding
system procedure (for example, ssm DRS) or the specific Image Quality Procedure
(Photometric Measurement of Radioscopy Systems).
All monitors except DLR were preset during manufacturing to the values indicated below:
D For an ambient light level darkroom:

– Black level = 0.4 cd/m2 (black picture),
– White level = 125 cd/m2 (at center),
D CEL activated (CEL LED ON) for an ambient light level slightly above 64 lux.
D For an ambient light level of 200 lux:
– Black level = 9 cd/m2 (black picture),
– White level = 220 cd/m2 (at center),
– CEL LED on.
11-9
The DLR monitor was preset during manufacturing to the values indicated below:
D For an ambient light: dark room,

– Black level = 0.4 cd/m2,
– White level = 250 cd/m2.
D CEL activated for an ambient light level of 64 lux:
D For an ambient light level of 200 lux:
– CEL BRIGHTNESS MINIMUM.
– White level = 300 cd/m2 (at center).
11-10
15” and 20” DISTAR MONITORS Job Card RG 001 1 of 6
Purpose: BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS Version No.: 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE Date: 08/95
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D Standard tool kit.

D Luminancemeter type LS 100 MINOLTA or equivalent.
D Gray reference card 18% ±1% (2110360).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1 General Procedure with Luminance Meter
These controls are located on the back of the monitor and can be accessed by removing the rear door
(Ill. 1). For rear door removal, see Chapter 2, Job Card IST 001.
The purpose of these settings is to ensure that, for any room ambient light level, the dark grays are not
below the monitor cut-off level and the image contrast ratio is satisfactory.
11-11
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS
GENERAL PROCEDURE Job Card RG 001 2 of 6
5.1.1 Recommendations
D Power on the monitor and allow a 15- to 20-minute warm-up period before measuring any values.
D The light meter should be in the position normally occupied by the operator, and not less than one
meter from the screen.
D The procedure and final values will vary slightly between systems (test patterns for digital systems,
or image quality criteria for analog systems, can differ from one system to another). However, the
general DISTAR adjustment procedure described in the following pages should be applied.
ILLUSTRATION 1
REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH REAR DOOR REMOVED
3
4
ITEM FUNCTION
1 LED
2 CEL Brightness Control
3 CEL Contrast Control
4 CEL Threshold Control
11-12
5.1.2 Definitions used in the Procedure
Luminance (L) expressed in candela per square meter (cd/m2).
– 1 cd/m2 = 3.42 fL (fL = foot Lambert).

– 1 fL = 0.29 cd/m2.
LA = Reference luminance (white image).
LB = Luminance at white level (digital pattern).
LO = Zero dose luminance (black pattern).
LP = Phosphorus out luminance (monitor off).
LN = Luminance at point of operation (analog fluoroscopy).
CEL = Cell.
5.1.3 Controls Presentation and Description
See Illustration 1 for a presentation of the controls:
D Monitor Brightness Control: modifies the tube bias of the monitor (when CEL is not active). Turn
it clockwise to illuminate the raster or increase the black level.
D Monitor Contrast Control: modifies the video gain (when CEL is not active). Turn it clockwise to
increase the white level.
D LED (DS1) and CEL Threshold Control (Ill. 1, Items 1 and 4). The CEL Threshold Control sets the
threshold level of ambient light at which CEL becomes active; LED DS1 indicates whether CEL
is active:
– When LED DS1 in ON, the CEL is active,
– When LED DS1 is OFF, the CEL is not active,
– Turn the CEL Threshold Control clockwise to increase the threshold level of ambient light,
anti–clockwise to reduce it.
D CEL Brightness Control (Ill. 1, Item 2): operates as the Monitor Brightness Control when CEL is
active.
D CEL Contrast Control (Ill. 1, Item 3): operates as the Monitor Contrast Control when CEL is active.
5.1.4 General Procedure
D The same procedure is used to adjust Monitor Brightness and Contrast settings or the CEL
Brightness and Contrast settings. Check that CEL is not active during Monitor setting up (LED DS1
is OFF).
D Generally, two levels of ambient light can be defined: for example, for Fluoroscopy and for Review,
for two types of examination, for the presence or not of an external light, etc.
11-13
D The CEL threshold is set between the two levels (normally at 64 lux).Monitor settings are adjusted
at the lower level of ambient light (normally below 64 lux); CEL settings are adjusted at the higher
level of ambient light.
1. Adjustment at Lower Ambient Light (CEL OFF)

Set the room lighting conditions to obtain the required lower level of ambient light; check that the
CEL LED is off.
Carry out the checks and adjustments described below:
a. Check Ambient Light Conditions

– Place a white reflecting screen (GE Medical Systems Part No. 45 066 988) on the front of the
monitor and measure Light Level LA in the center of the screen: the typical value should be
3 to 10 cd/m2.
b. Check Reflected Light

– Switch off the monitor and remove the power connector. Measure Light Level LP at the center
of the screen: (LP/LA is about 0.1).
– If reflections of room lights appear on the screen, the customer should be asked to change the
position of the monitor.
c. Monitor Brightness Setting

– For Digital systems, set the system to a Black Image and measure the Luminance LO at the center
of the screen.
– For Analog systems, measure Luminance LO obtained during a totally black fluoro exposure
(Manual Mode, generator HV OFF, mA min, kV min, 2 mm Cu filter).
LA LA
– Adjust the Monitor Brightness control to obtain: 1.3 x < LO < 2 x
10 10
d. Monitor Contrast Setting

– For Digital systems only, present the density test pattern and set it to Level F or 100 % and
measure Luminance LB at the center of the screen: adjust the Monitor Contrast setting to obtain:
60 LO < LB < 100 LO
– For Analog Systems only, measure Nominal Luminance LN obtained during a nominal fluoro
exposure (Automatic Mode, 2 mm Cu filter, mA adjusted to give 75 kV); adjust the Monitor
Contrast setting to obtain:
LN > 8 x LO (a good value should be between 2 x LA and 3 x LA).
– Check that the black level has not changed (LO). Otherwise return to Para 1.c.
11-14
e. CEL Threshold Adjustment

Adjust the CEL threshold control R109 (Ill. 1, Item 4) (turn it counter-clockwise) to switch on the
CEL LED DS1 (Ill. 1, Item 1) , then turn it clockwise until the CEL LED DS1 is just extinguished.
2. Adjustments at Higher Ambient Light (CEL ON)

Set the room lighting conditions to obtain the required higher level of ambient light; check that the
CEL LED is on, DS1 (ILL. 1, Item 1).
Carry out the checks and adjustments described below (as described under 2–5–1, but using the
appropriate CEL controls and values):
a. Check Ambient Light Conditions.

– Place a gray reference card (GE Medical Systems Part No. 2110 360) on the front of the monitor
and measure Light Level LA in the center of the screen.
b. Check Reflected Light.

– If reflections of room lights appear on the screen, the customer should be asked to change the
position of the monitor.
c. Monitor Brightness Setting.

– For Digital systems, set the system to a Black Image and measure Luminance LO at the center
of the screen.
– For Analog systems, measure Luminance LO obtained during a totally black fluoro exposure
(Manual Mode, generator OFF or mA min, kV min, 2 mm Cu filter).
– Adjust the CEL Brightness R108 (Ill. 1, Item 2) control to obtain:
LA LA
1.3 x < LO < 2 x
10 10
d. Monitor Contrast Setting.

– For Digital systems only, present the density test pattern, set it to Level F or 100% and measure
the Luminance LB at the center of the screen. Adjust the CEL Contrast setting to obtain:
60 LO < LB < 100 LO.
Note: LB must never exceed < 220 cd/m2.

– For Analog systems only, measure Nominal Luminance LN obtained during a nominal fluoro
exposure (Automatic Mode, 2 mm Cu filter, mA adjusted to give 75 kV); adjust the CEL Contrast
R107 (Ill. 1, Item 3) setting to obtain:
LN > 8 x LO (a good value should be between 2 x LA and 3 x LA).
– Check that each white area is less than 220 cd/m2.
11-15
3. Cel Pot Adjustments.

The CEL BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and THRESHOLD pots have been factory–set for “typical”
room lighting conditions. If satisfactory tracking of room light cannot be attained in the room where
the monitor is installed, the CEL BRIGHTNESS and CEL CONTRAST pots may be re–adjusted by
following the steps of PART 2 below. PART 1 of this procedure must be done first. When making the
following adjustments, do not obstruct or shade the light paths to the CEL light sensor.
a. Set room lights for “low–light” condition and adjust CEL THRESHOLD to just extinguish the
LED located just above the pot. Set room lights for “high–light” conditions. CEL LED should
be turned on.
b. With room lights at “high–light” condition, set the CEL CONTRAST pot fully CCW. Adjust
CEL BRIGHTNESS pot to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster. For R&F
rooms, it may be preferable to set this pot to just visualize the collimator blades.
c. Observe the lung field, and set the CEL CONTRAST pot so that the image is a bright as is it can
be with the penetrameter features discernable and the mesh in clear focus.
d. Re–adjust the CEL BRIGHTNESS pot, is necessary, to just visualize blanking as described in
Procedure 6 above.
11-16
Purpose: BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS FOR VASCULAR

Version No.: 1
AND CARDIAC APPLICATIONS – 20” ROOM MONITOR Date: 08/95
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Luminance meter.
D Gray reference card.
D 2 mm Cu.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1 Extended Procedure
5.1.1 Description
The good perception of all the details of a radiological image on a monitor depends mainly on the
observation conditions and the right operating conditions of the monitor versus the dynamic range of the
video signal.
This procedure helps to measure the observation conditions and adjust the operating conditions.
11-17
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS FOR VASCULAR AND CAR-

DIAC APPLICATIONS – 20” ROOM MONITOR Job Card RG 003 2 of 4
5.1.2 When to perform this Procedure
The monitor is the final component on the video chain; and its main contribution to Image Quality is
often forgotten.
We recommended to perform this procedure each time the customer is not perfectly satisfied with its
image quality, or each time you could believe some adjustments has changed in the monitor.
5.1.3 Tools required
D Luminance meter (recommended model: Minolta LS100) + stand.

D Calibrated gray reference surface (RG is often 18%) with known reflection ratio RG.
D 2 x 0.8 mm Cu or 2 x 1 mm Cu.
5.2 Procedure
5.2.1 Set–Up
D Boot–Up Advantx Application Software and make the following selections on the Advantx Console:
– VASCULAR or CARDIAC,
– DLX Fluoro,
– 75 kVp,
– Manual mA at minimum.
D Select the Technical Menu on DLX.
D The positioner, tabletop, and room monitor must be positioned in the room at the same place they
are in working condition; verify especially:
– Monitor positioning,
– Height versus floor,
– Tilt,
– Direction toward the user.
D The room lighting must be the same as in working conditions; verify the conditions (during fluoro
if there is an automatic switching of some lights):
– Artificial lighting (fluorescent, incandescent lighting),
– Adjustment of variable lighting,
– If there is a natural lighting, verify if it could be the main lighting (curtains or door opening,
meteorological conditions).
In this case, this procedure is not useful because it is impossible to

CAUTION guarantee good performance with a room ambient light which is not
stable and which intensity is generally very high.
11-18

Note: In vascular or cardiac rooms, it is specially interesting to have a low level of lighting to get a
good contrast in the blacks, but the physician needs an enough lighter area on the patient,
where he introduces his catheter.
So, it is recommended to have a directional light like a spot, which makes a lighter area with
a diameter of some decimeters (for example 2 to 5).
D Position the luminancemeter (if possible on its stand, which can stand on the table top) at about the
same height and position the physician eyes are in working conditions (near the table top).
In that case, the monitor screen shall be between 1.1 and 1.9 meter for a high line rate, and twice
this distance for a low line rate.
5.2.2 Procedure
Note 1: Do not move the monitor during the whole procedure!

1. Reference Luminance (LR)
a. Position the gray reference surface roughly centered on the monitor screen with the gray surface
towards the luminancemeter.
b. Measure the reflected light on the gray surface center: LG.
c. Calculate the reference luminance: LR = LG/RG.
Note 2: RG is the reflection ratio of the gray surface; this surface shall be clear with no fingerprints.
Note 3: The measurement can be repeated on the whole surface, so the ratio between the higher and lower
values shall not be more than 2. It could occur when some spot light illuminates the monitor screen.
If it occurs, modify the monitor position or room lighting conditions in agreement with the user.
d. Calculate the ambient illumination: IA: LR x :
IA is correct only if the gray surface has a lambertian response, so IA shall be between 10 and
50 lux.
e. Record LR and IA on data sheet.
f. Remove the gray surface from the monitor.
2. Luminance of the Switched–off Phosphore (LP)

a. Power off the monitor, for example by removing its power plug.
b. Measure the phosphor luminance (LP) on the screen center, that means the ambient light diffused
by the screen (see Note 3 above).
This measure concerns only the light which is diffused by the phosphor,
CAUTION but not the reflection (as a mirror) of light on the CRT glass.
If there are very visible reflection, they MUST be suppressed by
modifying the lighting (suppressing, switching off or moving the lights) or
by moving the monitor (position, tilt).
c. Calculate the monitor screen reflection ratio: RM = LP/LR

Note 4: RM is a feature of the monitor, it should be less than 10% for a Distar monitor.
11-19

d. Power on the monitor and wait some minutes before any other measurement because of the
stabilization time of the monitor.
3. Luminance at Zero Dose (L0) and at Maximum Level (LMAX)

a. Close fully the collimator blades and put a strong filtration in the X–ray beam (for example lead
shirt the II entrance plane).
b. Do a short fluoro (1 to 2 s) at manual and minimum mA. Release the fluoro footswitch.
Note 5: In DLX Technical Menu, the LIH function stores the last fluoro image, so it is not necessary to do
fluoro during all the measurement.
c. Measure the luminance at zero dose (or black level), L0, on the screen center.
d. Adjust the monitor brightness knob to obtain:
L0 = LP x K with:
K = 1.5 for vascular or K = 2 for cardiac.
e. Select the gray 15 (255 LSB) on the DLX Technical Menu and display it.
f. Measure the maximum luminance (LMAX) on the screen center.
g. Adjust the monitor contrast knob to obtain: LMAX = L0 x 150, or, if L0 is less than 1 cd/m2, adjust
LMAX = G x 150 with G = 1.5 for vascular and 2 for cardiac.
h. Repeat steps 2 to 7 you have L0 and LMAX equal to the calculated values.
Note 6: LMAX can vary between L0 x 120 and L0 x 180 (or G x 120 and G x 180), but must not exceed
360 cd/m2; if that occurs, readjust L0 at a smaller value between LP x 1.2 and LP x 1.5.
i. Record L0 and LMAX on data sheet.
j. Open the collimator blades and remove the filtration from the X–ray beam.
4. Luminance at Nominal dose (LN)

a. Place the copper filtration in the X–ray beam.
b. Do DLX fluoro in automatic (regulated) mode.
c. Measure the luminance (LN) on the screen center.
Note 7: If the lighting conditions are good and the monitor has been correctly adjusted, LN should be
between 30 and 40 cd/m2.
If it is not the case, then there might be a misadjustment of video gains.
d. Record LN on data sheet.
11-20
Purpose: BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ALTERNATIVE Version No.: 1

PROCEDURE WITHOUT LUMINANCEMETER Date: 08/94
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1 Distar Monitor Set–up Theory
There are two practical limits to an image displayed on a CRT monitor. One limiting factor is variable,
and is established by the amount of ambient light in the environment surrounding the display. The
amount ambient light reflected from the surface of the display limits how dark “black” areas of the image
may appear. The BRIGHTNESS control is used to compensate for this limitation.
The other limiting factor is fixed, and relates to how bright you can make “white” areas of an image
without degrading perceived image clarity. Here, the displayed image is limited by the physics of CRT
technology. The phosphor on the inside surface of the CRT screen can “saturate” or “bloom” if it is
driven too hard, and the effect is like using a blunt crayon to draw a picture, as opposed to a sharp pencil.
The CONTRAST control must be set with an understanding of this limitation, to avoid overdriving the
phosphor.
The range of CRT output between the dark and bright limits is called the contrast ratio. The
BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST should be set to achieve the highest overall contrast ratio possible over
a range of room light conditions.
11-21
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ALTERNATIVE
PROCEDURE WITHOUT LUMINANCEMETER Job Card RG 004 2 of 6
A photocell is used in the Distar monitor to compensate for changes in room lighting by adjusting the
CRT output. This sensor automatically increases the monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST as the
room light increases. Unfortunately, the practical range of control by the sensor is limited by the
saturation point of the CRT phosphor, as described above. Therefore, unless it is properly calibrated, the
automatic sensor cannot compensate for large increases in room light without pushing the CRT beyond
the phosphor saturation limit. The objective of the Distar set–up procedure is to find the optimum
monitor settings which take full advantage of the available contrast ratio without allowing the phosphor
to be overdriven.
5.2 Customer Preferences (of displayed images)
Since the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls on Distar are not easily accessible, it is important to
align them to a setting which will please a majority of users.The set up procedure represents a good
compromise between an ideal (infinite) contrast ratio, and the real–world limitations of the display. Even
so, it may be necessary to deviate from these settings to please the customer.
Generally speaking, there are two categories of customer applications: cardiac/vascular and R&F.
Cardiac/vascular users seem to prefer more overall brightness, so that detail is not lost in dark areas of the
image. They are typically looking at small arteries and guide wires, and want to see detail across all
shades of grey. R&F users seem to prefer higher contrast, even at the risk of losing image detail in dark
areas. They are usually looking at broader parts of anatomy, and want sharp contrast with defined edges.
It is important to get final approval of the monitor settings from actual users at each installation.
5.3 Definitions used in the Procedure
Room Light Conditions:
D Low–light: room light dimmed to lowest level for fluoro or other imaging mode.
D High–light: full or maximum room illumination under any circumstances.
Input Signal Conditions (typical values):
D A calibrated X–ray system will provide 1V p–p of terminated video, including 300 mV of sync, 50
mV of black–level setup and 650 mV of black–to–white video.
5.4 Adjustments
There are five adjustments used to set up the Distar monitor, located behind the rear door. To simplify
Distar alignment, three of the adjustments have been pre–set at the factory to accommodate “typical”
room lighting conditions where the Distar may be installed. If the Distar is installed in a room with an
abnormal lighting situation, site adjustments of all five controls may be necessary. The five adjustments,
and their functions, are described as follows:
D Site adjustments:
– BRIGHTNESS knob:
sets baseline for darkest areas of the displayed image. Set at low–light conditions so that blanked
monitor raster is just visible.
11-22
– CONTRAST knob:
sets limit for brightest areas of the displayed image. Set at low–light conditions for sufficient
(but not maximum) brightness of white areas.
D Factory pre–set adjustments:
– CEL THRESHOLD post:
establishes a minimum level of ambient light above which the photocell becomes active, to
compensate for changes in room lighting. Set at low–light conditions so that the LED (located
above the pot) just extinguishes.
– CEL BRIGHTNESS pot:
adjusts how accurately the photocell increases the monitor brightness to compensate for a change
in room light. Set at high–light condition so that blanked monitor raster is just visible, and detail
is visible in the darkest areas of the image.
– CEL CONTRAST pot:
adjusts the amount of increase in image contrast for a given increase in room light. Set at
high–light condition for brightest image with detail still visible in the brightest areas of the
image.
5.5 Brightness and Contrast Settings
This procedure describes a method for setting the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST knobs for baseline
performance. Final settings should be based on known customer preference.
1. Fluoro a CV phantom with a screen (#20 mesh) covering part of the lung field. Select 6” field of
view. Locate the apex of the CV phantom near the top of the image, with the abdomen field covering
the central part of the image. Set the X–ray system for “auto brightness” mode, with 80 kV applied.
Be sure that circular blanking is turned on.
Bring in the collimator blades until the displayed image is a square with the corners just touching the
perimeter of the circle.
11-23
ILLUSTRATION 1
MONITOR SCREEN
CV PHANTOM DISPLAYED IMAGE
CTR Screen
Lung
Circular Field
Blanking
Mesh
Collimator
Blades Abdomen
Field
Blanked
Raster
2. Set room lights for “Low–Light”. Set CONTRAST knob fully CCW. Adjust the BRIGHTNESS
knob to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster (just outside the perimeter of circular
blanking). In some R&F rooms, it may be preferable to just visualize the collimator blades.
3. Observe the lung field, and set the CONTRAST knob for a sufficient brightness level. The
penetrameter features should remain discernable with the mesh in clear focus. The CONTRAST
should not be set close to the point where the mesh begins to become unclear.
4. Re–adjust BRIGHTNESS knob, if necessary, to just visualize blanking (or the collimator blades) as
described in Procedure 2 above.
5. Set room lights to “High–light”. Verify that the mesh is still in clear focus. Reduce CONTRAST if
necessary.
11-24
5.6 Cel Pot Adjustments
The CEL BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and THRESHOLD pots have been factory–set for “typical”
room lighting conditions. If satisfactory tracking of room light cannot be attained in the room where the
monitor is installed, the CEL BRIGHTNESS and CEL CONTRAST pots may be re–adjusted by
following the steps of PART 2 below. PART 1 of this procedure must be done first. When making the
following adjustments, do not obstruct or shade the light paths to the CEL light sensor.
1. Set room lights for “low–light” condition and adjust CEL THRESHOLD to just extinguish the LED
located just above the pot. Set room lights for “high–light” conditions. CEL LED should be turned
on.
2. With room lights at “high–light” condition, set the CEL CONTRAST pot fully CCW. Adjust CEL
BRIGHTNESS pot to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster. For R&F rooms, it may
be preferable to set this pot to just visualize the collimator blades.
3. Observe the lung field, and set the CEL CONTRAST pot so that the image is a bright as is it can be
with the penetrameter features discernable and the mesh in clear focus.
4. Re–adjust the CEL BRIGHTNESS pot, is necessary, to just visualize blanking as described in
Procedure 6 above.
11-25
Blank page
11-26
Purpose: SIZING ADJUSTMENTS FOR LLR – LLR VIC – Version No.: 1

HLR – FFD ROT MODELS (15” AND 20”) Date: 08/95
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED

D Luminancemeter type LS 100 MINOLTA or equivalent.
D Gray reference card (2110360).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Remove the rear case (see Job Card DR 002).
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
11-27
SIZING ADJUSTMENTS FOR LLR – LLR VIC – HLR

– FFD ROT MODELS (15” AND 20”) Job Card RG 005 2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
SCAN BOARD - COMPONENT LOCATION
LLR, HLR, FFD ROT, LLR VIC
16
1
15
2
3
14
4
5
13
6
12 7
11 10 9 8
NOTE:
All components may not be
present on all models
11-28

TABLE 1
ITEM ELEMENT FUNCTION

1 R25 HORIZONTAL PHASE (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
2 R27 HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
3 R35 HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
4 R31 HORIZONTAL PHASE (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
5 R48 VERTICAL SIZE (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
6 R51 VERTICAL FREQUENCY
7 R60 VERTICAL SIZE (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
8 R78 HORIZONTAL BLANKING
9 R74 VERTICAL CENTER LINEARITY
10 R71 HORIZONTAL SIZE
11 R59 NOT USED
12 R45 VERTICAL CENTERING (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
13 R44 VERTICAL CENTERING (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
14 R39 VERTICAL LINEARITY (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
15 R40 VERTICAL LINEARITY (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
16 L1 HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
Note: This monitor has been adjusted at the factory. The adjustments described will normally be
required after a board change.
5.1 LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/FFD ROT. Monitor Adjustments
5.1.1 Sizing Controls Location
Adjustments for positioning, sizing, linearity, frequency, are located on the Scan Board (Ill. 1)
5.1.2 Scan Board Adjustment
See Illustration 1 for component location.
1. Horizontal Blanking:
Connect one probe to TP13 and TP14 and adjust R78 (Table 1, Item 8) so that the pulse on TP14 is
larger than that on TP13 (0.2/0.3 s) (Ill. 2).
11-29

ILLUSTRATION 2
SCAN BOARD (TP13/TP14)
TP 14 CH1
(50V/DIV.)
TP 13 CH2
(2V/DIV.)
T 1ms/DIV.)
T + 0.2/0.3s
2. Line Frequency:
Connect the multimeter between TP3 and TP7 and adjust R27 (Table 1, Item 2) (60/120 Hz) or R35
(Table 1, Item 3) (50/100 Hz) to measure 0 mV.
3. Vertical Frequency:
Connect one probe to TP12 and adjust R51 (Table 1, Item 6) to obtain a sawtooth of 4 V
(peak–to–peak) amplitude (see Ill. 3).
11-30

ILLUSTRATION 3
SCAN BOARD - TP12
TP12 (1V/DIV.)
4V
CH1gnd
4. Horizontal Centering:
Observe the screen so that the image is centered inside the bezel: adjust R31 (Table 1, Item 4)
(50/100 Hz) or R25 (Table 1, Item 1) (60/120 Hz) if necessary.
5. Horizontal Size:
For LLR Boards check if the jumpers are in the right position (TS1/TS2/TS3):
VIDEO FORMAT 4 / 3 or PED VIC or HLR
JUMPER POSITION POS. 1 POS. 2
D Adjust R71 (Table 1, Item 10) so that the image width equals:
VIDEO LLR-VIC HLR HLR

LLR FFD–ROT
FORMAT with graphics with graphics DLX
20” 50 Hz 360 297 270 337
HORIZ. SIZE 20” 60 Hz 360 297 297 337

(mm)
15” 50 Hz 273 205 205
15” 60 Hz 273 225 225
11-31

6. Horizontal Linearity:
a. Adjust L1 (Table 1, Item 16) so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of
the left half of the image ±2 mm.
b. If L1 was modified set the horizontal size again.
7. Vertical Centering:
8. Vertical Size:
Adjust R60 (Table 1, Item 7) (50/100 Hz) or R48 (Table 1, Item 5) (60/120 Hz) to obtain the size
meets the value in the table below:
VIDEO LLR-VIC HLR HLR

LLR FFD–ROT
FORMAT with graphics with graphics DLX
20” 270 270 270 270

VERT. SIZE
(mm)
15” 205 205 205
Adjust R60 (Table 1, Item 7) (50/100 Hz) or R48 (Table 1, Item 5) (60/120 Hz) to obtain the size
meets the value in the table below:
9. Vertical Linearity:
a. Adjust R40 (Table 1, Item 15) (50/100 Hz) or R39 (Table 1, Item 14) (60/120 Hz) so that the
height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom half of the image ±1.5 mm.
b. If adjustments were necessary, set the vertical size again.
10. Center Vertical Linearity:

a. Use a cross-hatch pattern.
b. Adjust R74 (Table 1, Item 9) so that the size of a square in the center equals the size of a square
on the sides.
11-32
Purpose: VIDEO ADJUSTMENT Version No.: 1

Date: 08/95
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
11-33
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
ILLUSTRATION 1
VIDEO BOARD
1 2 4 3
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
TABLE 1
ITEM ELEMENT FUNCTION

1 R1 HORIZONTAL FOCUS
2 R2 VERTICAL FOCUS
3 R5 MAIN FOCUS
4 R34 G2
5 R85 POLARIZATION (BLACK LEVEL)
6 R97 SET-UP COMPENSATION
7 R96 BRIGHTNESS LIMITATION
8 R115 MONITOR CONTRAST
9 R113 MONITOR BRIGHTNESS
10 DS1 LED
11 R109 CEL THRESHOLD
12 R108 CELL BRIGHTNESS
13 R107 CELL CONTRAST
14 R90 CUT-OFF
11-34
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Note: This monitor has been adjusted at the factory.
5.1 Video Board Location
Adjustments for set-up level, cut off, G2, focus correction, brightness and contrast limitations, and Cell
correction are located on the Video Board (Ill. 1 and Table 1).
5.2 Video Board Adjustment
1. Input Differential:
Set Switch S1 so that:
– DIF position: the video input ground is tied to the chassis ground.
– DIF position: the video input ground is insulated from the chassis ground.
2. Set-Up Level (pre-adjustment):

Display a black pattern, connect a probe to TP26 and adjust R97 (Table 1, Item 6) to align the set-up
level pulse in the back porch to the black level (Ill. 2).
Note: For DLR Monitor, adjust R97 to minimum position (counterclockwise) (Ill. 2).
ILLUSTRATION 2
TP26 - BACK PORCH
For LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT. For DLR

Set–up level Black level Set–up level Black level
back porch back porch
11-35
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
3. Video Amplifier Polarization:

Display a black pattern and verify that the LIGHT SENSOR is not active (LED DS1 (Table 1,
Item 10) OFF). Connect a probe to TP2 and adjust R85 (Table 1, Item 5) to obtain a black level =
69 V (Ill. 3).
Note: For DLR Monitor, adjust R85 to obtain a black level = 67 V (Ill. 3).
ILLUSTRATION 3
TP2 - BLACK LEVEL
For LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT. For DLR
69 V 67 V
4. Set-Up Level (final adjustment) (LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT only):

Display a black pattern and connect a probe to TP2. Adjust R97 (Table 1, Item 6) and R85 (Table 1,
Item 5) so that the black level stays stable (vary by less than 100 mV) when the Contrast control is
changed from minimum to maximum.
5. G2:
Connect the multimeter in TP19 and adjust R34 (Table 1, Item 4) to obtain 580 V (dc).
6. Cut-Off:
– The video cable is disconnecting and the brightness control (Table 1, Item 9) is set to position
3.
– In darkroom conditions, adjust R90 (Table 1, Item 14) so that the raster is just visible (0.03 to
0.04 cd/m2).
11-36
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
7. Brightness Limit:
The brightness control (Table 1, Item 9) is set to maximum–clockwise: in darkroom conditions,
adjust R96 to obtain 10 cd/m2 (Table 1, Item 7).
8. Focus Correction:
It is recommended that the focus be adjusted in low room light condition and a white brightness level
of 250 cd/m2 (Table 1, Item 7).
– R1 (Table 1, Item 1) is used to correct horizontal focus.
– R2 (Table 1, Item 2) is used to correct vertical focus.
– R5 (Table 1, Item 3) provides a global focus correction.
9. Brightness/contrast. Refer to Job Card RG 001, RG 002, RG 003, or RG 004.
11-37
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
11-38
Purpose: ROTATION ADJUSTMENT Version No.: 1

(FFD ROT ONLY) Date: 08/95
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1 Adjustment for FFD ROT Monitor (Model Number 36004047)
1. Power on the monitor power supply.

2. Execute an image and adjust the deflection unit by hand, to obtain a horizontal image (top edge of
image parallel with top edge of monitor front panel).
3. Move the Rotation Board, to activate Microswitch SW0 (Ill. 1, Item 1).
4. Tighten the three Rotation Board mounting screws (Ill. 1, Item 2).
5. Execute an image rotation command; return the image to the horizontal position (top edge of image
parallel with top edge of monitor front panel).
6. If the image is not horizontal, obtain a horizontal image by adjusting the self–locking screw on
Microswitch SW0 (Ill. 1, Item 1).
7. Repeat these adjustments as necessary.
11-39
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY) Job Card RG 008 2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
MONITOR REAR VIEW
5.2 Adjustment for FFD ROT 0° Monitor (Model Number 2126839)
ILLUSTRATION 2
COMPONENT LOCATION
4 5 6
1
2
3
11-40
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
TABLE 1
Item Component Function

1 R+ 0° stop, positive direction
2 O 0° stop time
3 R- 0° stop, negative direction
4 DS1 Negative end–of–travel detection
5 DS2 0° detection
6 DS3 Positive end–of–travel detection
5.2.1 Preliminaries
By convention, when the deflection unit is turned counterclockwise, viewed from the rear of the monitor,
it will be called a positive rotation (R+).
5.2.2 Procedure
D Power on the monitor.

D Turn the deflection unit manually to obtain an image at 0° (top edge of image parallel with top edge
of monitor front panel).
D Check that the pulley marker (Ill. 4, Item 1) approximately lines up with the position of the Rotation
Board. If the gap exceeds 5 mm, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the collar screw (Ill. 4, Item 2).
2. Manually hold the Deflection Block.
3. Manually turn the Rotation Board and collar to correct the error.
4. Tighten the collar screw (Ill. 4, Item 2).
Check that Cell DS2 (Ill. 2, Item 5) is located at the center of the disk slot (Ill. 4, Item 3) and
oriented longitudinally. If not, repeat the longitudinal positioning of the Rotation Board using
its mechanical anchoring as follows:
1. Loosen the two screws (Ill. 3, Item 1).
2. Reposition the Rotation Board (Ill. 4, Item 3).
3. Tighten the two screws (Ill. 3, Item 1).
D Setting 0° stop (image scanning from right to left):
a. Execute an R+ command for approximately 30 seconds.
b. Execute an R- command, the monitor should stop at 0°. If not, turn the R- Potentiometer
(Ill. 2, Item 3).
11-41
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
D Repeat Steps a and b above to optimize the R+ adjustment and obtain a horizontal image.
Setting stop time:
D The 0° stop time can be adjusted using Potentiometer “0”. Turn and set if necessary.
This stop time is: 1 second.
D Setting 0° stop (image scanning from left to right):
a. Execute an R- command for approximately 30 seconds.
b. Execute an R+ command: the monitor should stop at 0°. If not, turn the R+ potentiometer (Ill.
2, Item 3).
D Repeat Steps a and b above to optimize the adjustment and obtain a horizontal image.
11-42
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
ILLUSTRATION 3
MONITOR REAR VIEW
2 1
ILLUSTRATION 4
MONITOR REAR VIEW
11-43
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
11-44
REV 1
GETTING A USEFUL IMAGE
1. Turn off the DSM using the switch above the power cord in the back of the DSM
module. (Do Not Turn Off, on DSM-600 Systems)
2. Unblank camera by moving switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop chassis to the
OPEN (DOWN) position, if not already done.
3. Place video module in manual mode by placing 3A3S133-1 in Stenoscop chassis to
the OPEN (DOWN) position (normal position).
4. Select manual fluoro mode on Stenoscop console.
5. Turn off video mask (circular blanking) by moving jumper PL3S1-1 to 2 in the camera
head.
6. Scope on PL2TP-11 or DSM-J8 (Composite Video). (PL2-TP11 may not be on all
boards).
NOTE: 2VDC offset on video.
7. Adjust PL2-R7 for black level (set-up) for 50 mV above blanking at PL2-Tp11 or
DSM-J8.
8. Place 2-mm of copper on the x-ray tube output.
9. Make fluoro x-rays while adjusting kVp and mA to get approximately 250mV of
video, black level to white at PL2TP11 or DSM-J8.
10. Place a resolution wedge on the input of the intensifier so that the lines run vertical
(perpendicular to the raster lines).
11. While making fluoro x-ray, adjust the video focus on the Scan/Converter/ Focus
board PL5-R10 for best resolution on the monitor.
IMAGE MECHANICAL CENTERING
1. DSM still off. (Do Not Turn Off, on DSM-600 Systems).

2. Video Mask (circular blanking) still off (PL3S1-2).
3. Select 50kV, manual mode.
4. Adjust mA values to get a non-saturated image.
5. Check that the image from the II is centered on the pickup tube target. To visualize
this, the black mask must be adjusted outside of the target area.
Adjust PL3-R6 CCW to open the black mask outside of the target.
11-45
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
TP10 R7
TP11
TP8 R6
R9
R8
TP1 R10
R3 R5
R2
R1
TP2
TP9
TP3 J2
TP12
TP4
TP13 TP6
R12
TP5 TP7 R4
R11
11-46
REV 1
6. The centering adjustment can be made by loosening the 3 screws on 9" sys.;
4 screws on 6" sys., holding the camera body to the camera lens assembly.
Move the camera body so that II output is centered in the pick-up tube target.
See ILL 2.
7. Tighten screws when aligned.
NOTE: The Black Mask may have to be adjusted out so that the edge of the target can be
seen. This adjustment is PL3-R6.
II TUBE
OUTPUT
PICKUP TUBE
TARGET
ILLUSTRATION 2
8. Readjust camera size and centering on the Scan Converter/Focus board PL5 for a
useful image (preliminary adjustment)
PL5-R5 Vertical size
R1 Vertical center (normal)
R6 Horizontal size
R9 Horizontal center (normal)
* Note on D6 System may be reverse.
11-47
REV 1
J1 J1
TP TP TP
11 10 10
TP1 TP1
TP8 TP8
J6 J6
TP2 J3 TP2 J3
R1 TP9 R1 TP9
J2 J2
TP3 R10 TP3
TP4 TP4
TP5 J4 TP5 J4
TP7 TP7
TP6 TP6
PL1 POWER SUPPLY PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45560563 45202778
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
11-48
REV 1
IMAGE TUBE FOCUS AND SIZE CHECK
1. DSM still off. (Only on DSM-200)

2. Select manual fluoro on Stenoscop console, 50kVp, normal field of view for 9" image
systems. PL3-S1 in position 2, (circle blanking still off).
3. For center focus adjustment and edge focus adjustment, place an RMI resolution
screen or equivalent at the input to the image intensifier. For sizing adjustments, use
the sizing gauge from an IET or Focaligner.
4. Remove lower intensifier trim cover with grid installed.
CAUTION: THIS WILL LEAVE THE INPUT OF THE INTENSIFIER EXPOSED. TAKE CARE
WHEN WORKING AROUND THE IMAGE TUBE FACE.
5. Place 1mm of copper on the x-ray tube output.
6. Press the fluoro footswitch and adjust manual mA just sufficient to visualize the
resolution screen.
G1-G2 EDGE & CENTER FOCUS
7. Check G2 image tube center focus. If necessary, adjust PL1-R5 for best center
focus
8. Check adjustment for best edge focus on the monitor by adjusting PL1-R8. Verify by
measuring drive voltage at PL1-TP6.
NOTE: For D9 systems with `HP' image tubes AND power supply board PL1, 45560563, do the
following:
A. Select MAG mode on Stenoscop console.
B. Adjust R6 for best center focus as seen on the monitor.
C. Adjust R10 for best edge focus.
G3-SIZE
NOTE: It will be necessary to readjust G1 edge focus and G2 center focus after adjusting G3 size
as they are interactive.
9. Select normal FOV (for 9" II)
10. Place PL3-S1 in position 2 (turns off video mask (circular blanking))
11. Check image tube sizing with gauge at the II input of grid.
For 9” image tubes; Input should be 210mm.
For 6” image tubes; Input should be 144mm.
Adjust PL1–R2 for proper size on monitor, if necessary.
11-49
REV 1
J1 J1
TP TP TP
11 10 10
TP1 TP1
TP8 TP8
J6 J6
TP2 J3 TP2 J3
R1 TP9 R1 TP9
J2 J2
TP3 R10 TP3
TP4 TP4
TP5 J4 TP5 J4
TP7 TP7
TP6 TP6
PL1 POWER SUPPLY PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45560563 45202778
11-50
REV 1
FOR 9" IMAGE TUBES.......
12. Select MAG mode on Stenoscop console.
13. Sizing gauge still attached to input of image tube.
14. Check image tube sizing with gauge. Input should be 152mm. Fluoro and adjust
PL1-R3 for correct size.
15. Recheck center focus. If necessary, adjust PL1-R6 for best center focus.
For units with 'HP' image tubes AND power supply board 45560563, recheck edge
focus (PL1-R10).
NOTE: PL1-R4 and R7 are not used.
Adjustment 9" Normal & 6" 9" Mag Mode

G1 - Edge Focus PL1-R8 PL1-R10*
G2 - Center Focus PL1-R5 PL1-R6
G3 - Size PL1-R2 PL1-R3
*Only on Power Supply Boards 45560563
11-51
REV 1
TP10 R7
TP11
TP8 R6
R9
R8
TP1 R10
R3 R5
R2
R1
TP2
TP9
TP3 J2
TP12
TP4
TP13 TP6
R12
TP5 TP7 R4
R11
11-52
REV 1
BEAM ALIGNMENT
1. For D9 units, unbolt image tube high voltage power supply from image tube casting
(3 screws). (DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRES FROM IMAGE TUBE)
2. Install a jumper between PL5-TP12 to TP13.
3. Fluoro. The bright spot should be centered within the larger blurred spot.
4. Adjust the tabs on the neck of the pickup tube to center the bright spot within
the target. For 9" image systems, it may be necessary to remove the TV camera and
the shield to get at the tabs if adjustment is required. See note below.
5. Remove the jumper, reassemble the TV camera and image tube power supply.
NOTE: For D9 systems, if it is necessary to remove the camera for the beam adjustment, do
the following;
A. Turn off power to the Stenoscop. Remove cable at PL1-XJ4 to HV power supply &
PL1-XJ1 main cable from Stenoscop chassis.
B. Remove 4 cap screws holding the lens assembly and iris to the image head casting.
Lift the camera straight up.
C. Reconnect main cable to PL1-XJ1.
D. Turn on power to the Stenoscop.
E. Carefully adjust the tabs for results in step 3. Make sure jumper is still installed. The
should be enough room light to produce the spot on the monitor.
F. When complete, remove the jumper and reassemble the camera and connectors.
11-53
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
TP10 R7
TP11
TP8 R6
R9
R8
TP1 R10
R3 R5
R2
R1
TP2
TP9
TP3 J2
TP12
TP4
TP13 TP6
R12
TP5 TP7 R4
R11
11-54
REV 1
SIZE AND CENTERING-NORMAL AND REVERSE
1. Turn on DSM.
2. In the camera, place PL3S1 to position 2 VIDEO MASK (circular blanking) off, if not
already done.
3. Select Vertical and Horizontal NORMAL scan on Stenoscop console.
4. On DSM console, enter the service mode by pressing G, M, A simultaneously.

Select 2-QI (Image Quality). Then select M-pattern. Then select 1-CENTERING.
A circle and crosshairs will appear. This is used to adjust the camera image position
in relation to the DSM acquisition window. See ILL. 3.
DSM CENTERING
PATTERN
ILLUSTRATION 3
4. While making fluoro x-rays, adjust the following size and centering pots to coincide
with the circle generated from the DSM:
PL5-R5 Vertical size

PL5-R1 Vertical center (normal)
PL5-R6 Horizontal size
PL5-R9 Horizontal center (normal)
5. Select Vertical and Horizontal reverse on the Stenoscop console. Adjust the following
pots to center the image with the circle generated by the DSM:
PL5-R2 Vertical Center-Reverse

PL5-R8 Horizontal Center-Reverse
6. Leave PL3S1 in pos. 2 (circle blanking off), for now.
7. Turn off the DSM at the back of the DSM module.
11-55
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
TP10 R7
TP11
TP8 R6
R9
R8
TP1 R10
R3 R5
R2
R1
TP2
TP9
TP3 J2
TP12
TP4
TP13 TP6
R12
TP5 TP7 R4
R11
11-56
REV 1
BEAM ADJUST
Standby Mode
1. Move 3A3S133-3 to the OPEN (DOWN) position.
2. 1mm copper in x-ray beam.
3. Select manual fluoro mode on Stenoscop console.
4. Scope on PL3-TP12 (preamp out), Sync and Mask board.
5. Fluoro and adjust mA and kVp to get 500mV of video at TP12. (If this cannot be
reached, adjust Standby bias pot PL5-R4, Scan/Converter/Focus board, until video
level is restored).
6. Adjust PL5-R4 until video is clipped to 400mV at PL3-TP12. Stop fluoro when
complete.
7. Return switch 3A3S133-3 to the CLOSED (UP) position.
Normal Mode
THESE STEPS MUST BE DONE AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE AS DAMAGE CAN OCCUR
TO THE PICK-UP TUBE.
1. Set up is same as steps 2-4, above.
NOTE: Remove copper filter if beam current can be reached.
2. Fluoro and adjust mA and kVp to 1600mV at PL3-TP12

(preamp video) Sync and Mask board. (If this cannot be reached, adjust
Normal bias pot PL5-R11, Scan/Converter/Focus board, until video level is
restored).
3. Adjust PL5-R11 so that video is just clipped to 1500mV. Stop fluoro when complete.
FINAL FOCUS
1. 1mm copper on x-ray tube output.
2. RMI resolution screen at image tube input.
3 50kVp, manual fluoro mode, normal FOV.
4. Loosen TV lens locking screw (6" II only) CAUTION: DO NOT MISTAKE IMAGE
TUBE LENS FOR THE TV LENS.
5. For D9, get access to the lens adjustment by removing 1 screw from the trap door on
lens mount and swing trap door out of the way.
6. Fluoro and adjust lens for best center resolution.
7. Touch up camera focus by adjusting PL5-R10 Scan/Converter/Focus board for best

focus as seen on the monitor.
8. Tighten TV lens locking screw or replace trap door and screw.
11-57
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
11-58
REV 1
MASK ADJUSTMENTS-The following roundness adjustment sets the roundness for all masks.
VIDEO MASK (Circular Blanking)

NOTE: In this procedure, the images may not line up exactly on both monitors with
the pattern on the DSM. This is normal. Align the system using the live monitor.
1. Turn on DSM , depress `GMA' simultaneously. Select `2 QI'; select `M Pattern' and
select centering pattern 1.
2. Jumper PL3-S1 to position 1 (circular blanking on).
3. On the PL3 Sync and Mask board adjust the following pots so that the circle is just
inside the DSM circle by 1-2mm (increasing brightness and contrast on the monitor
will aid in visualizing the video mask.)
R1 Horizontal center
R2 Vertical center
R3 H/V ratio (roundness)
R4 Video mask diameter
(circle size)
X-RAY MASK (ABC & AGC WINDOW SIZE)

1. Jumper PL3-S1 and S2 to position 2. A black circle will appear in the center of the
image. See ILL. 4.
2. Adjust PL3-R5, ABC window size, to 40% of image diameter approx. 108mm
+/-5mm (4.25in +/-.2in).
3. Reset jumper PL3-S2 to position 1 (ABC window off).
108mm
X-RAY MASK ADJUSTMENT
ILLUSTRATION 4
11-59
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
11-60
REV 1
BLACK MASK ADJUSTMENT (Dark Current Clamp)
1. Turn off DSM. (Only on DSM-200)
2. Jumper PL3-S1 to position 2 (circle blanking off, dark current clamp on), if not
already done.
3. Adjust PL3-R6, black mask diameter, so that mask is 5mm from the inside of the
pickup tube edge. To visualize, adjust R6 so that the edge of the pickup tube can be
seen, then adjust 5mm in from pickup tube edge. See ILL. 5.
II TUBE OUTPUT
BLACK MASK
PICKUP TUBE TARGET
ILLUSTRATION 5
4. Return jumper PL3-S1 to position 1 (circle blanking on).
11-61
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP TP
4 3 J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
TP
R3 TP
12
6
R4 J2
1
S1
3
2
1
S3
3
2
TP
11
1
S2
TP
3
10
2
TP R7
9
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
11-62
REV 1
BLACK LEVEL AND GAIN ADJUSTMENT
1. Eliminate stray light input by covering the image head with a black cloth.
2. Place 2mm of copper in the x-ray beam.
3. Connect scope channel 1 to PL3-TP12 (preamp video).
4. Select manual fluoro approximately 0.3mA & 75 kVp at Stenoscop console.
5. During fluoro, fine adjust mA for 150mV in at PL3-TP12 (preamp video).
6. During fluoro, check that back porch is aligned with the black level of the pick-up
tube. If not, adjust PL2-R1 Video Board (offset/black level) for correct alignment.
See Ill. 6, below.
NOTE: Bring in collimator so you can see setup level easier.
BLACK LEVEL OFFSET

CORRECTLY ADJUSTED
BLACK LEVEL OFFSET

MISADJUSTED
ILLUSTRATION 6
Video Gain
1. Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (preamp video), scope channel 2 to PL1-TP11 or
DSM-J8 (camera video) in the back of the DSM.
2. Force camera operation in automatic gain mode by placing 3A3133-1 in
Stenoscop chassis to the CLOSED (UP) position. This places the camera in the
auto mode for AGC (not to be confused with Auto mode for fluoro ABC.).
3. Select manual mode on console. 2mm copper still on x-ray tube.
4. Fluoro at 75kVp and approximately 0.3mA to obtain 150mV (if not already done) at
PL3-TP12. Fine adjust video level with mA. See ILL. 7.
5. Adjust PL2-R6 Video Board for a video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) for
250mV black to white. (DSM Density=102 (94-114)).
6. Return 3A3S133-1 to the OPEN (DOWN) position.
The DSM can be used to determine correct adjustment of TV camera video levels. In the QI mode, select ROI and
draw a small box in the center of the image. Note that the cursor only moves in the top half of the image. Follow the
ROI prompts on the monitor. The average density is displayed in the upper right corner of the monitor. If an
adjustment is made to the video level, fluoro again for 3 seconds. Then redraw the ROI box to obtain a new density
reading.
11-63
REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP TP
4 3 J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
TP
R3 TP
12
6
R4 J2
1
S1
3
2
1
S3
3
2
TP
11
1
S2
TP
3
10
2
TP R7
9
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
11-64
REV 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
250mV
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
150mV
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PL3TP12 DSM J8
PREAMP VIDEO VIDEO
ILLUSTRATION 7
Manual Gain Contrast

1. With 3A3S133-1 in the OPEN (DOWN) position, fluoro at 75kVp and adjust mA to
obtain 150mV (if not already done) at PL3-TP12.
2. Video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) , should be approximately 250mV
+/-25mV.
3. If not, adjust PL2-R5 on Video Board for 250mV +/-25mV black to white at
DSM-J8. (DSM Mean Density=102 (94-114)).
NOTE: With setup of 50mV.
Verify Maximum AGC Gain

1. Scope channel 1 still at PL3-TP12.
2. 3A3A133-1 in Stenoscop chassis in CLOSED (UP) position.
3. While still in the manual mode, fluoro and adjust mA to obtain 20 mV at PL3-TP12
(preamp video)
4. Video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) should be approximately 200mV.
Verify with the DSM Mean Density of 68-92.
Do not adjust max gain pot PL2-R2.
5. Return 3A3S133-1 to the OPEN (DOWN) position. (This is the normal operating
position for this switch).
Black Level
1. Scope still on J8 in back of DSM.
2. Place Stenoscop in manual mode (Min KvP & mA) on operators console.
3. Turn off circle blanking by moving PL3S1 to position 2.
4. Adjust PL2-R7 on Video board for a black level of 50 mV.
(DSM Mean Density 17 (13-23) in QI mode).
50 MV
BLACK LEVEL SET-UP
ILLUSTRATION 8
11-65
REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP TP
4 3 J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
TP
R3 TP
12
6
R4 1
J2
S1
3
2
1
S3
3
2
TP
11
1
S2
TP
3
10
2
TP R7
9
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
11-66
REV 1
Gamma Correction (white clip & HLDE)
1. Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (preamp video), channel 2 on J8 in back of DSM

(composite video).
2. During fluoro, adjust kV and mA for PL3-TP12 output of 1200mV +/- 50mV.
3. Video level at DSM-J8 should be 625mV +/-25mV black to white. See ILL. 9. If
necessary, adjust PL2-R4. (DSM Mean Density= 238 (230-248).
NOTE: IF THIS ADJUSTMENT DOES NOT PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, IT WILL
BE NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE PL2 VIDEO PREAMP SHIELD TO INSPECT JUMPERS
PL2-S2 & S3. Jumpers PL2-S2 to position 1 and PL2-S3 to position 1, Gamma
Correction ON.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
625mV
ÎÎ Î
1200mV
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
PL3TP12 DSM J8
PREAMP VIDEO Video
ILLUSTRATION 9
11-67
REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
J2 R1
TP5
R2
2
S1
TP6
3
TP7
1
S2
TP8
2
P2 P1
R1 R2
J1 XJ1
16CM IRIS (D6 & LE) 22CM IRIS (D9)
11-68
STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000 Job Card RG 20 1 of 4
Purpose: AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM Version No.: 00

ADJUSTMENT. Date: May 1993
Time: 2 H. Manpower: 1
1 – TOOLS REQUIRED
– Double beam Oscilloscope, double time base.
– 3 cm of plastic material (polyamide or polyethylene)
– 2 mm of Aluminium.
– 2 mm of copper.
– 0,8 mm of copper.
– 1 plastic tray.
2 – PRELIMINARY REMARK
– This procedure is valid for the 828 970 G 015 MINUTERIE board
3 – ADJUSTMENT PREREQUISITE
– The image system must be correctly and completely adjusted. (See IMEX of the imager and the monitor) .
– The X–ray head cover must be in place.
4 – ADJUSTMENTS
4.1 X–RAY EMISSION REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–ray head.
– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.b9 (cde RX)
– On the control console :
– select FLUORO MANUAL mode
– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
– if unit is equiped with a 22 cm imager, the ZOOM mode must not be selected.
– Select 75 kV
– Initiate Fluoro and select mA parameters in order to read on the measure device a value of 2,35 +/– 0,15
Volts (control RX value).
– Note mA and kV values :
there 2 values determines the reference rate of X–ray emission
4.2 DOSE REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–Ray head.
– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.A82.6 operational amplifier
– On the control console :
– select MANUAL FLUORO mode
– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
– select mA and kV values corresponding to the X–ray emission reference (see 4.1)
– Initiate FLUORO and adjust 3A5.R65 in order to read on the measure device an average value of 0 +/– 10
mV.
11-69
11-70
4.3 LOOP GAIN PREADJUSTMENT
– Preadjust the potentiometers :

– 3A5.R67 fully CCW (zero hysteresis)
– 3A5.R60 fully CW (min. phase adjustment)
– 3A5.R66 mid range
– Connect an oscilloscop
– Probe A 3A5.a7
– Trigger Ext. DC + to 3A5b8
– Select Automatic Fluoro, standard Fluoro
– With an absorption requiring a VHv included between 105 and 110 kV; adjust 3A5.R66 in order to obtain
a rise time of VHV of 0,55 sec.
Observe the analog kV signal at the A7 output of 3A5 by taking only vhv build–up time into consideration and
leaving stabilization problems to a later stage.
4.4 PHASE LEAD AND LOOP GAIN ADJUSTMENT
IMPORTANT remark concerning stability adjustments for the scope regulation loop :
– Water and plastic are ideal (polyamide or polyethylene) for phantom absorption.
The regulation loop is less stable when a copper phantom is used.
Variation in image signal output in response to a kV variation will be much ronger for copper than for an
organic tissue equivalent material.
– If regulation loop adjustment is carried out under very strict conditions, a weaker loop gain is chosen to
obtain a response with sufficient stability.
This adjustment using copper obtains a slower response speed than that obtained using an organic
substance.
11-71
11-72
PHASE ADJUSTMENT
Connect an oscilloscop
– Probe 3A5.b9
– Trigger EXT. DC + to 3A5.b8
With the same absorption determined in § 4.3, adjust 3A5.R60 in order to obtain image without overshoot of
the control RX signal.
Select absorption in order to obtain a HV regulation of about 60 kV.
Observe control RX signal on 3A5.b9 and correct if necessary gain adjustment (R66) and phase adjustment
(R60) in order to obtain an image without oscillation and with a maximum glare displayed by an overshoot of
33% max.
Then check that high kV regulation takes place in a sufficiently short period : T2 = 1000 msec max.
Check that the value of control RX signal is included between 95 and 105% of nominal value after 1000 msec
of the beginning of the X–ray exposure with different absorptions, in FLUORO and HIGH DEFINITION
FLUORO mode and AUTOMATIC mode.
Check that low kV regulation occurs without oscillation.
Only one positive overshoot of the RX control signal corresponding to monitor glare is accepted.
Maximum acceptable glare is characterized by a 50% overshoot of the RX control signal for a regulation
(45 +/– 1) kV.
4.5 HYSTERESIS ADJUSTMENT
– Purpose of the Hysteresis circuit

The automatic control finds the kV/mA pair to which the RX control signal (Monicon camera output), equal to
the reference signal (i.e. zero signal error), corresponds.
The kV/mA variations are discrete and in order to avoid continuous flutter around the equilibrium value, a hys-
teresis defining a zone without corrections of X–Rays intensity is needed.
– Hysteresis values must be limited to those that are truly useful in order to obtain an easily duplicated opera-
ting point.
The results of an automatic control mechanism correction are greater at low kV because the increments are
constant over kV, due to the kV/mA linkage principle.
Hysteresis value adjustment :

3A5 R67 will be adjusted to obtain a potential difference of 1.75 Volt at the potentiometer terminals.
11-73
4.6 AGC – DELAY ADJUSTMENT
Remark : the AGC of the TV Chain only works in the automatic mode of fluoroscopy, if the 110 kV limit has
been reached and after one delay adjusted by means of 3A3.R239.
The correct adjustment of this delay (3A3–R239) when the AGC circuit is activitated, as soon the video signal
corresponding to the maximum of radiation (110 kV) is stabilized.
Nominal adjustment : 1020 msec +/– 20 msec.
Displayed Auto kV = 110 kV
Cde RX Absorption = 7 mm Cu
3A5 – b9
Displayed kV AUTO = 110
kV
AGC
3A3 – a32
t
t0 t0 + ∆t
4.7 OPERATION CHECK
Check the correct operation of the automatic control using different filters and varying amounts of water in the
tray, for different absorption values, characterized by :
– appearance of image without abnormal glare (see § 4.4) and without apparent oscillation,
– the constancy of radiologic stabilization date of the automatic control for successive scope operations with
identical absorption,
– modification of radiologic date due to automatic control, for small variations in absorption.
11-74
11-75
REV 1
DOSE CALIBRATION
1. Place 2mm of copper at x-ray tube output.
2. Center rate meter probe at image tube input against the grid.
3. Select 75 kVp, manual mode at Stenoscop console.
4. Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (Sync & Mask bd.) horizontal rate and 10 mV/div. in
center of waveform.
LOW DOSE HIGH QUALITY
D6 3.4mR/min +/- .3 (203mR/hr) 6.75 mR/min +/- .6 (405 R/hr)
D9 1.8mR/min +/- .25 (108mR/hr) 3.5 mR/min +/- .35 (210 R/hr)
LE 4.5 +/- .4 (270mR/hr) NOT APPLICABLE
9" (22CM)II Systems
1. Select normal FOV. Normal fluoro, (low dose) at Stenoscop console.
2. During fluoro, adjust mA values for 1.8mR/Min +/-.25 (0.108R/HR.+/-0.015).
(Note: 1.8 mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 1.3mR/min (0.076R/HR) behind
the grid if the ratio is 10:1.).
3. Note the mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
4. Adjust pot P1 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
High-Quality Fluoro
1. Select HQ Fluoro at Stenoscop console.
2. During fluoro, adjust mA values for 3.5 mR/min
+/-.25 (0.21R/HR. +/-0.015.)
(Note: 3.5 mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 2.45mR/min (0.147R/HR.)
behind grid if ratio is 10:1)
3. Note mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
4. Adjust pot P2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
6"(16CM) II Systems
1. Select normal Fluoro (low dose) at Stenoscop console.
2. During fluoro, adjust mA values for 3.4mR/Min +/-.25 (0.204R/HR. +/-.015).
(Note: 3.4mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 2.55mR/min
(0.153R/HR) behind the grid if the ratio is 8:1.).
3. Note the mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
4. Adjust pot R2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
High-Quality Fluoro
1. Select HQ Fluoro at Stenoscop console.
2. During fluoro, adjust mA values for 6.75mR/min +/-0.3(0.405R/HR
+/-0.018).
(Note: 6.75mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 5.1mR/min (0.306R/HR.)
behind grid if ratio is 8:1)
3. Note mA value at this dose and remove the probe..
4. Adjust pot R1 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at
PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask board.
11-76
REV 1
STENOSCOP LE
1. During fluoro, adjust mA values for 4.5mR/Min +/-.3 (0.27R/HR. +/-.018).

(Note: 4.5mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 3.38mR/min (0.203R/HR)
behind the grid if the ratio is 8:1.).
Note the mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
2. Adjust pot R2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
• Check jumpers for normal operating position as listed in appendix A.
• Reinstall preamp shielding, if previously removed. Close up the TV camera, check that
all connectors and grounds are connected properly and install trim covers.
• Blank TV camera with switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop, to CLOSED (UP) position.
PERFORM AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS IN THE STENOSCOP MANUAL.
11-77
REV 1
APPENDIX A
SWITCHES AND ADJUSTMENTS
*NORMAL POSITION
PL1-POWER SUPPLY AND INTERCONNECTION BOARD
ADJ/SW SETTING NAME FUNCTION
PL1-S1 1-4 STENOSCOP ROUTES ABS VIDEO SIGNAL
1-3 IMAGEUR R/F DEPENDING ON USE.
R1 SUPPLY ADJUST ADJUSTS 18VDC SUPPLY
R2 VG3/N IMAGE SIZE
R3 VG3/L1 IMAGE SIZE-MAG 1 (9" ONLY)
R4 VG3/L2 IMAGE SIZE-MAG2 (NOT USED)
R5 VG2/N CENTER FOCUS-NORM
R6 VG2/L1 CENTER FOCUS-MAG 1 (9")
R7 VG2/L2 CENTER FOCUS-MAG 2
NOT USED
R8 VG1 EDGE FOCUS
R9 AGC DELAY
R10 VG1/L1 EDGE FOCUS-MAG 1**
R11 VG1/L2 EDGE FOCUS-MAG 2**
**PRESENT ON PL1 BOARD 45560563 ONLY
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
S1 CLAMP ON/OFF 1 - ON*
2 - OFF
S2 HLDE 1 - ON*
HIGH LEVEL DETAIL 2 - OFF
ENHANCEMENT
S3 GAMMA 1 - ON* (WHITE CLIP)
2 - OFF
S4 BLACK LEVEL COMP OPEN-SERVICE
SHORTED-ON*
R1 OFFSET/BLACK LEVEL ADJ PICKUP TUBE BLACK LEVEL
R2 MAXIMUM GAIN
R3 GAIN COMP ADJUST DO NOT ADJUST!!
BANDWIDTH
R4 WHITE CLIP LEVEL & ADJUST MAX VIDEO OUTPUT TO
GAMMA CORRECTION MONITORS
R5 MANUAL GAIN ADJ. VIDEO GAIN IN MANUAL
MODE
R6 AGC OUTPUT LEVEL ADJ VIDEO GAIN IN AUTO MODE
R7 BLACK LEVEL ADJUST ADJ. BLACK LEVEL IN
COMPOSITE VIDEO
CG1 BF (STREAK)
CG2 HF (BANDWIDTH) DO NOT ADJUST !!
11-78
REV 1
*NORMAL POSITION
PL3-SYNC AND MASK BOARD
S1 VIDEO MASK 1 - CIRCLE ON*
(CIRCULAR BLANKING) 2 - BLACK MASK ON
S2 ABC/AGC WINDOW 1 - SERVICE WINDOW OFF*
2 - SERVICE WINDOW ON
R1 HORIZONTAL CENTERING CIRCLE CENTERING H.
R2 VERTICAL CENTERING CIRCLE CENTERING V.
R3 H/V CIRCLE ROUNDNESS
R4 CIRCULAR BLANKING SIZE CIRCLE SIZE
R5 AGC WINDOW SIZE ABS WINDOW SIZE
R6 BLACK WINDOW SIZE ADJ. BLACK MASK
PL5-SCAN/CONVERTER/FOCUS BOARD
S1 LOW/HIGH BEAM 1 - NORMAL*
2 - TEST
R1 VERTICAL CENTER-NORM
R2 VERTICAL CENTER-REV
R3 G2 ADJUST 300V ADJUST G2
R4 BEAM-STANDBY
R5 VERTICAL SIZE
R6 HORIZONTAL SIZE
R7 HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
R8 HORZ. CENTER-REV
R9 HORZ. CENTER-NORM
R10 FOCUS ADJ. FOCUS COIL CURRENT
R11 BEAM-NORMAL BEAM DISCHARGE LEVEL
R12 TARGET ADJUST ADJ. TARGET VOLTAGE
0V TO 80V RANGE
STENOSCOP CHASSIS - 3A3-S133

S133-A AGC SERVICE SWITCH CLOSED-SERVICE CAL
OPEN-NORMAL*
S133-B REDUCE POWER CLOSED-REDUCED PWR (120V)
OPEN-NORM. PWR (220V)
S133-C LOW BEAM SET-UP CLOSED-NORMAL*
OPEN-TEST
S133-D VIDEO UNBLANK CLOSED-NORMAL*
OPEN-UNBLANKS CAMERA
11-79
REV 1
11-80
REV 1
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-2 STENOSCOP LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12-9 SN 4011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12-10 SN 4018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12-11 SN 4024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12-1
REV 1
12-2
REV 1
12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE
Exposure
FL & RAD Power OFF
C" Arm (up-down)

Power Exposure
OFF
Heat Heat
Indicator Inidcator Opaque
Coll.
FL-rest ON (Ready) NOT ON
flash 4'30" 6000/9000
FL interrupt FL timer (99 min)
after 5 min. Reset
Rad KV Monitor
(FL&Rad) Image H&V
ER reversal
HL-fl MAS = Rad Semi
(HQ) MA = FL transparant
Pulsed FL Monitor Coll.
Image Coll.
ON = FL (man) Rotation
Standard OFF = FL (auto) Rotation
FL
Stenoscop 6/9
Reduced
Circular
Field
Blocked
Memory Same Functions as on U.S. Stenoscop
except where indicated
Stenoscop LE Version
12-3
REV 1
Gamma (1,2,3)
Anti Bloom Image Reverse H&V (5,6)
Noise Red Image Transfer (8,9)

Filter
Split Screen Formatter (film copy)
Scroll Monitor A
(14, 17)
Magnify x2
Scroll Monitor B Store Image

(13, 16) (15, 18)
Remote Console
Reset
Annotation remove 6 stored
On Monitor A (9) images in RAM
Store 26 FL images
Memory (10)
Subtraction Edge Enhance Store (11)
Cursor Cursor move
Road Map
Peak opacification Filter coeff selection
DSM Console
Illustration 12-1
12-4
REV 1
12-2 STENOSCOP LE
The following additional information is provided on the Stenoscop LE Version. The LE System is not sold in the U.S.
but is available in Europe and Asia. Since students from these areas may from time to time participate in Stenoscop
training in the U.S. the following enumerates some of the difference between the LE & U.S. Stenoscop.
Refer to Illustration 12-1
Exposure key 1, when depressed to initiate an x-ray exposure, will not activate an audiable alarm as on the U.S.
Stenoscop.
Key 21 reduces the x-ray field to 11cm. There are no keys available to activate opaque and semi-transparant
collimators as on the U.S. version.
Key 11 selects what is called Blacked Memory". When the Key is depressed the memorized image cannot be
renewed. Therefore the memo image can be compared with subsequent live images.
The LE system does not use the DSM for image processing. It employs what is referred to as a DR Processor". The
Processor is capable of storing only one image. The 200 image hard disk or Image Port Processor used with the U.S.
System cannot be used on the LE. Also the U.S. type Monitor Cart cannot be added to the LE.
The LE has no provision for a video tape recorder, and cannot use a Stand Alone" Monitor Cart as is available with
the U.S. Stenoscop.
The LE has no provision for adding an x-ray exposure handswitch.
Orbital rotation of the C Arm" is 115_ .
With the DR Processor the pixel display format is 768 pixels/line, 576 lines/frame with an 8 bit grey scale.
In the manual mode, kV & mA can be independently selected but limited by curve 6 (On page 12-6)
12-5
ILLUSTRATION 12 COURBES kV – mA
kV – mA CURVES
7.0 mA
6.0
5.0
4.0 3.9
3.85
3.0
2.
7
2.0 2.3
1.4
1.0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 kV
Note: in normal mode the curves 3 – 4 – 6 are references.

The other curves are rules giving relation between kV and mA
LEGENDES DES COURBES
COURBES MODE POUR / FOR PUISSANCE MAX

CURVES STENOSCOP 2 MAX POWER
1 Scopie Auto Mode Normal D6 + D9 253 W

Auto Fluoro Normal Mode 6000 + 9000
2 Scopie Auto Mode Haute Qualité D6 +D9 500 W

Auto Fluoro High Quality Mode 6000 + 9000
3 Scopie Mode Manuel D6 + D9 500 W

Fluoro Man. Mode 6000 + 9000
4 Scopie Sécur. Thermique D6 + D9 154 W

Fluoro Thermal Safety 6000 + 9000
5 Scopie Auto LE 300 W

Auto Fluoro
6 Scopie Mode Manuel LE 300 W

Fluoro Man. Mode
12-6
REV 1
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
12-7
REV 1
12-8
REV 1
STENOSCOP 6000/9000 SERIES PRODUCT MATRIX
6000 6600 9000 9600 9600 ANGIO

16 cm/6 in. II 16 cm/6 in. II 22 cm/9 in. II 22 cm/9 in. II 22 cm/9 in. II
One flicker-free Two flicker-free Two flicker-free Two flicker-free Two flicker-free
monitor monitors monitors monitors monitors
8 image RAM 600 image 8 image RAM 600 image 600 image
memory permanent memory memory permanent memory permanent memory
Rad/Fluoro manual Rad/Fluoro manual Rad/Fluoro manual Rad/Fluoro manual Rad/Fluoro manual
command command command command command
Sterile drapes - Sterile drapes - Sterile drapes - Sterile drapes - Sterile drapes -
3 sets 3 sets 3 sets 3 sets 3 sets
Stand alone device Stand alone device Stand alone device
Image Processing Image Processing Image Processing

package; edge package; edge package; edge
enhancement, enhancement, enhancement,
peak opacification, peak opacification, peak opacification,
roadmapping roadmapping roadmapping
Sequential
acquisition and
cine review
SONY S-VHS VCR
OPTIONS
6000 6600 9000 9600 9600 ANGIO

2nd flicker-free Sequential SONY S-VHS VCR Sequential Visiplex
monitor acquisition and acquisition and CCM620-1
cine review cine review hardcopy imager
SONY S-VHS VCR SONY S-VHS VCR Visiplex SONY S-VHS VCR SONY UP910
CCM620-1 thermal printer
hardcopy imager
Visiplex Visiplex SONY UP910 Visiplex

CCM620-1 CCM620-1 thermal printer CCM620-1
hardcopy imager hardcopy imager hardcopy imager
SONY UP910 SONY UP910 SONY UP910

thermal printer thermal printer thermal printer
12-9
REV 1
12-10
REV 1
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION
12-11
REV 1
12-12
REV 1
12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
on temps:
625 lignes - 50 Hz 25 i/s 525 lignes - 60 Hz 30 i/s
Frequence pixel 14.750 MHz 14.868 MHz

Periode pixel 67.80 ns 67.26 ns
Periode ligne (H) 944 p 64.00 s 944 p 63.49 s

Frequence ligne 15.625 KHz 15.750 KHz
Visible ligne 576 p 39.05 s 576 p 38.74 s
Horizontal front porch 22 p 1.49 s 22 p 1.48 s

Horizontal synchro 70 p 4.75 s 70 p 4.71 s
Horizontal back porch 85 p 5.76 s 85 p 5.72 s
Horizontal blanking 177 p 12.00 s 177 p 11.90 s
From last pixel to leading edge of horizontal synchro 118 p 8.00 s 118 p 7.94 s
From loading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel 250 p 16.95 s 250 p 16.81 s
Vertical front porch 3 H 192 s 3 H 190 s

Vertical synchro 3 H 192 s 3 H 190 s
Vertical back porch 19 H 1216 s 14 H 889 s
Vertical blanking 25 H 1600 s 20 H 1270 s
FIELD
From loading edge of vertical synchro to first ligne 22 H 1408 s 17 H 1079 s

From last line to leading edge of vertical synchro 3 H 192 s 3 H 190 s
Number of visible ligne 287.5 H 18400 s 242.5 H 15397 s
Total 312.5 H 20 ms 262.5 H 17 ms
FRAME
Number of field 2 2
Number of ligne 625 H 40 ms 525 H 33 ms
50 Hz 60 Hz
12-13
REV 1
12-14
REV 1
DSM 600 FFD
DSM 200/600
12-15
REV 1
12-16
REV 1
12-17
REV 1
12-18
REV 1
12-19
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
Pixel frequency: 14.75 MHz
625 lignes 50 Hz Pixel duration: 67.8 ns
Horizontal front porch

22 p 1.49 s Horizontal back porch
85 p 5.76 s
12-20
Horizontal synchro
70p 4.75 s
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series

From last pixel to leading
edge of horizontal sunchro
From leading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel
118p, 8 s
250 p, 16.95 s Visible ligne
576p, 39.05 s
Ligne time (H)
944p, 64 s
Horizontal blanking
177p, 12 s
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
625 lignes 50 Hz Line duration: 64 s
field 1 field 2
312.5H 312.5H
vertical vertical
front front
porch porch
3H vertical back porch vertical back porch
19H 3H
19H
12-21
voir details voir details

vertical synchro vertical synchro
3H
3H

287.5H 287.5H
from last line from leading edge of from last line from leading edge of
to leading vertical synchro to leading vertical synchro
edge of vertical to first line edge of vertical to first line
synchro 22H synchro 22H
3H 3H
vertical blanking vertical blanking

25H 25H
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
625 lignes 50 Hz Pixel Frequency: 14.75 MHz
Pixel duration: 57.8 ns
field 2 field 1
1H=944p
1H=944p
70p
0.5H = 472p 0.5H = 472p

35p Vertical Blanking
12-22
field 1 field 2

Vertical Blanking
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
Pixel frequency: 14.868 MHz
525 lignes 60 Hz Pixel duration: 67.26 ns
Horizontal front porch

22 p 1.48 s Horizontal back porch
85 p 5.72 s
12-23
Horizontal synchro
70p 4.71 s

From last pixel to leading
edge of horizontal sunchro
From leading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel
118p, 7.94 s
250 p, 16.81 s Visible ligne
576p, 38.74 s
Ligne time (H)
944p, 63.49 s
Horizontal blanking
177p, 11.9 s
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
525 lignes 60 Hz Line duration: 63.49 s
field 1 field 2
262.5H 262.5H
vertical vertical
front front
porch porch
3H vertical back porch vertical back porch
14H 3H
14H
12-24
voir details voir details

vertical synchro vertical synchro
3H
3H

242.5H 242.5H
from last line from leading edge of from last line from leading edge of
to leading vertical synchro to leading vertical synchro
edge of vertical to first line edge of vertical to first line
synchro 17H synchro 17H
3H 3H
vertical blanking vertical blanking

20H 20H
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
525 lignes 60 Hz Pixel Frequency: 14.866 MHz
Pixel duration: 62.26 ns
field 2 field 1
1H=944p
1H=944p
70p
0.5H = 472p 0.5H = 472p

35p Vertical Blanking
12-25
field 1 field 2

Vertical Blanking
REV 1
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Model numbers are on a Rating Plate located at the back of the DISTAR Monitor
(see Ill. 1–3) and on the bottom side of the chassis base.
To determine the model of the Monitor you are working with, refer to Table 1–1.
TABLE 1–1
MODEL VIDEO DEFLECTION LOW VOLTAGE

NAME SIZE CRT YOKE ASSY.
NUMBER FORMAT BOARD POWER SUPPLY
20” 36004057 45067372

LLR 525/625 - 60/50 Hz – 4/3 45562121 45067369 2127942
15” 2116937 2119237
FFD ROT
20” 2126839 2129457
0°
525/625 – 120/100 Hz – 4/3 36004234 45067372 45067369
FFD–ROT 20” 36004047 36007137
* Monitor can be adjusted on site to the other format:

50 Hz to 60 Hz or 60 Hz to 50 Hz.
** Monitor can be adjusted on site to the 525/625 60/50 Hz 4/3 video format.
FOR ALL MONITORS
– Video Board: 210 1865
– HV Power Supply: 45 067370
– Cell Board: 212 1334
LLR = Low Line Rate

FFD-ROT = Flicker Free Display - ROTation (from 0_ to 240_)
DLR = Dual Line Rate
FFD-ROT 0_ = Flicker Free Display - ROTation (from –170_ to 0_ to +170_)
DISTAR
MONITOR
12-26
REV 1
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: Maintenance operations are prohibited on equipment under power.
Preliminary Steps:
If both of the power supply units are identical, you must follow the job card DR005 instructions of t6he service
manual. Otherwise proceed as follows:
Removal - Installation Procedure:

Remplacement of the LFQ26 LAMBDA power supply unit by NFS 200-7608 COMPUTER PRODUCTS power
supply unit.
*To remove the LFQ26 Lambda" power supply unit:
1 - Remove the power supply to the DSM board.
2 - Disconnect the power supply cable from J2 of the DSAD board.
3 - Disconnect the three AC supply wires and the ground (yellow/green) wire from the disk unit.
4 - Disconnect the two wires from the fan.
*To connect the NFS 200-7608 Computer Products power supply unit:
1 - Crimp the two terminals on the AC supply wires. See Illustration A.
2 - Crimp the three terminals with the yellow/green and the blue and red wires of the fan. See Illustration B.
3 - Connect the wirees as shown on Illustration C.
4 - Replace the power supply unit in the DSM board.
5 - Connect the power supply cable to J2 of the DSAD board.
6 - Check the 5.1V between the pin 2 and 3, and adjust if necessary. See Illustration C.
Final Steps:
1 - Follow the job card VF001 instructions of the service manual.
2 - Follow the job card DR001 paragraph 6 instructions.
12-27
REV 1
AC SUPPLY CABLE 1 CRIMP THESE

2 TERMINALS
3
ILLUSTRATION A
CRIMP THESE TERMINALS
RED
BLUE
7
YELLOW/GREEN
ILLUSTRATION B
12-28
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
GROUND WIRE POWER SUPPLY CABLE
FROM DISK
5.1V ADJUST
12-29
TO FAN

YELLOW/GREEN 8-9 NOT CONNECTED
AC SUPPLY CABLE
ILLUSTRATION C
REV 1
9
4 5
13
15
16
12
17
1
6 7
10
11
12-30
REV 1
12-31
REV 1
12-32
REV 1
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO
12-33
REV 1
12-34
REV 1 Source: SN 4011, December 30, 1994, Page 1 of 2
12-9 SN 4011
12-35
REV 1 Source: SN 4018, November 24, 1994, Page 1 of 1
12-10 SN 4018
12-36
REV 1 Source: SN 4024
12-11 SN 4024
DSAD/DSMP P.W.B. SUBSTITUTION
The DSAD and the DSMP boards from the DSM memory are no more in production
line fro some time.
These boards will be replaced by the DSAD2 and the DSMP2 couple.
So ordering one of the old board, you will automatically received the two boards with their
product locator in order to trace the updated old memory.
The DSAD2 board has two different video signal outputs, one in 50/60 Hz
and the other in 100/120 Hz, in this case the 50/50 Hz must be selected.
The DSM emulation is selected by the juumper X2. (Powerup as DSM 200 & disables FFD outputs).
The selection 50/100 and 60/120 Hz is done by the jumper X3.
For more details see the drawing here joined.
12-37
REV 1
12-38
REV 1 Source: Add-on 832 604 P065, STENOSCOP CCD Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. A
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON
12-39
12-40
12-41
12-42
12-43
REV 1
12-44
REV 1
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13-1 SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-1
REV 1
13-2
REV 1
13-1 SYSTEM CHECK
TEST EQUIPMENT: OSCILLSCOPE

DVM
CV PHANTOM KIT
METRIC ALLEN WRENCHES
STANDARD TOOL KIT
1. Center DASI on the x-ray tube.
2. Press GMA on the DSM simultanteously. (This will get you into service mode).
3. Select 2 (QI) press M (patterns).
4. Select 1 for image centering.
5. DASI pipe should be centered in image cross hairs.
6. Select manual mode - 2mm of cu
1. Min ma & KVP
2. Select GMA and select R0I. Using the directional arrors center a 1 inch by 1 inch box on the monitor. Close
collimator blades and cover with lead apron.
3. Fluoro (image should be balck just setup).
4. ROI density is 17(15-22).
5. Set KVP & ma to max, open collimator blades remove apron.
6. ROI denisty - 238(220-250)
7. Select Auto, then Fluoro
8. ROI density is 102(95-108).
9. Auto mode, low dose, CV type 2 centered, 12 inches from grid prefrom a ROI on the phantom. Since the
lower half of the phantom can not be measured, use vertical reversal to measure the other half. Make the
ROI box as close as possible to the size of the slug (+/- 10% on all ROI values).
ROI of Phantom MODE Slug H A M L

74KVP-2ma Low 27 130 33 46 195
73KVP-4.1ma HQ 27 130 50 46 195
Values of Ma and KVP are approximate.
13-3
REV 1
FLAT FIELD TEST
Setup
Auto mode
2mm of Copper in the beam
Collimator is fully opened
FOV Low Dose High Dose
6" kV 64-68 64-68

mA 1.6-2.0 3.2-3.6
9" kV 68-72 6.8-7.2

mA 1.8-2.2 3.7-4.1
6" (Mag 2) kV 70-74 70-74

mA 1.9-2.3 3.9-4.3
13-4
REV 1
13-5
REV 1
13-6
REV 1
13-7
REV 1
13-8
REV 1
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE
This document is intended as a quick reference instruction for performing minor image adjustments that may be necessary during installation. Due
to variations between video sources, image blanking, position or size may need fine tuning. Exaggerated representations of these image symptoms
are shown in the table at the end of this document, along with the adjustments necessary to correct them. The diagram below shows the physical
layout.
If your image exhibits any of the symptoms as shown you will need to:
Physical Layout Of Monitor Circuit Boards
1. Power the imager on and allow it to go through it's warm-up sequence.
2. Remove the top cover of the camera. (If you need instructions on this process
refer to Chapter 3 of the Installation and Service Manual).
3. Access the CRT for viewing. (If you need instructions on this process, refer to
Chapter 3 of the Installation and Service Manual). Monitor
Horizontal Mother Vertical
4. Unblank the monitor by doing the following: Deflection Deflection
Board
S Press the RESET and PROG keys simultaneously for longer than 2 Board Board
seconds. This accesses the Service Mode.
AIM
S Press the → key until the display shows VW B>xxxx C xxx (P or N)". Video
Board
S Using the ↑ or ↓ keys, set the B (brightness) value to approximately 200. CRT Circuit Amplifier
S Press the → key until the display shows VW B 200 C>xxx (P or N). Board Board
S Using the ↑ or ↓ keys, set the C (contrast) value to approximately 300.
S Press the → key until the display shows VW B 200 C 300> (P or N).
S Use the ↑ or ↓ keys until the display shows VW B 200 C 300>P". Rear Of CCM 620
5. Make adjustments as necessary.
6. Blank the monitor by pressing the PROGRAM key.
IF YOUR IMAGE LOOKS LIKE ... ...IS MISADJUSTED ON THE ... ADJUST ... SUCH THAT ...
The image is properly adĆ

justed.
Vertical Blanking Vertical Deflection Bd. R50 All active video at the bottom of the
image is just displayed.
R38
-then-
All active video at the top of the image

is just displayed
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ Horizontal Blanking Horizontal Deflection Bd. R25 (LLR) All active video at the right side of the
image is just displayed
R23(HLR)
-then-
R27 (LLR) All active video at the left side of the

image is just displayed
R25 (HLR)
Image Position Vertical Deflection Bd. R4 The image is centered top-to-bottom

(Vertical) within the CRT
bezel
Image Position Horizontal Deflection Bd. R30 (LLR) The image is centered left-to-right
(Horizontal) within the CRT bezel.
R11 (HLR)
Image Size Vertical Deflection Bd. R3 The image height just fills the CRT beĆ
(Height) zel.
Image Size Horizontal Deflection Bd. R6 (LLR) The image width satisfies the proper
(Width) image aspect ratio.
R9 (HLR)
NOTE: LLR - Low Line Rate (e.g., RS170)

HLR - High Line Rate (e.g., RS343)
13-9
REV 1
13-10
REV 1
13-11
REV 1
13-12
REV 1
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE
DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide the student with exposure to an alternative method on system calibration.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement
COMPETENCIES:
Students will receive a in-depth knowledge of the DSM Image Quality Tests.
PROCEDURE TIME: 1.5 hrs.
SAFETY:
Safety Policy and Static Control - ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.
PROCEDURE:
Perform the functional test in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement.
Record film exposure of Globe pattern from image quality test in DSM and record values on Page 13-5 of the
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement.
13-13
REV 1
13-14
REV 1
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14-1
REV 1
14-2
REV 1 CCM620 Video Imager Installation and Service, Document Number 20-29-1004, Rev. 3, Page 2-1
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
REV 1
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-13
14-14
14-15
14-16
14-17
14-18
14-19
14-20
14-21
14-22
14-23
REV 1
14-24
14-25
14-26
14-27
14-28
14-29
14-30
14-31
14-32
REV 1
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15-1
REV 1
15-2
REV 1
DAPS - BLOCK DIAGRAM
SGNL
+24V
ELECTRONICS BOX
CHAMBER
-24V
HT
SGNL
DISPLAY
PWER SUPPLY
15-3
REV 1
DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER
SPARE PARTS
DESCRIPTION REFERENCE GE
ION CHAMBER 86137P025
ELECTRONIC MODULE 86137P035
DISPLAY MODULE 86137P045
OVERLAY 86137P055
CABLES 86137P065
SPACER 86137P075
DRILLING TEMPLATE 86137P085
15-4
REV 1 Source: 841-S Dose Area Product Meter User Manual, Version 1.0, April 1994, Page 1
1. About the Dose Area Product Meter Model 841-S DAP-S
1.1 Product Background
The Model 84 range of Dose Area Product Meters has been designed in response to worldwide requests from
Radiologists, Radiographers and Medical Physicists. The meters have been designed to meet the following
objectives:
a. to be capable of simple measurement on a wide variety of X-ray equipment.

b. to provide easy to read real time information on patient dose.
c. to allow for simple manual transcription of this information into patient records.
d. to offer a means of checking the X-ray equipment without the need for additional instruments.
e. to include models which can relay this information to a computer for storage and analysis.
It was necessary that the resulting instruments achieved the above criteria while remaining completely unobtrusive
during the examination.
Until the introduction of the DAP-S Model 841-S the problem of overcoming a variety of local installation difficulties
frequently deterred X-ray equipment manufacturers and hospital managements from fitting dose area product
meters to all X-ray machines. The DAP-S Model 841-S design specification addresses these problems and has
resulted in an instrument which is economic to purchase, minimizes installation problems and is easy to use.
15-5
In some cases all that is necessary is to mount the chamber and connect the electrical supply cable to a convenient
supply rail found within the X-ray equipment.
When a remote display is used it is connected to the chamber by simple telephone type cable and, due to its small
size display can be mounted in a wide choice of locations.
When in use the dose area product (DAP) is measured throughout the examination and can be monitored on either
the integral or remote display. On completion of the examination the total DAP can be transcribed into the patient's
notes and the display reset ready for the next patient.
Gammex-RMI offers a range of product enhancements such as a system control module with computer interface
and a large in-room display. These can be added to the DAP-S at the time of the initial installation or they can be
retrofitted.
Having a simple indication of DAP has been shown to influence changes in working practice which can result in
patient dose reductions of 50% without any deterioration in image quality.
15-6
1.2 Principle of Operation
The aim of diagnostic radiology is to obtain patient images with the minimum absorption of radiation within the
patient. The radiation risk to the patient is related to various dose quantities including organ dose, effective dose
equivalent and the total energy imparted to the patient by the radiation field. However, none of these can be
measured directly.
It is possible to make simple, direct measurement of surface dose from the product of dose in Grays and the
exposed body surface area in cm2. Current research may eventually allow this quantity to be translated into
absorbed dose in the patient. In the meantime measuring the dose area product and finding ways to minimise it are
the most practical ways of reducing patient risk. Figure 1 shows that dose area product is a constant regardless of
where it is measured between the collimator face and the patient.
15-7
Figure 1: Principle of Operation
The dose area product of an x-ray beam is equal for all planes normal to the beam axis.
x2
x1
y2
y1
DAP Chamber
Patient Location
x 1 y1 D1 = x 2 y2 D 2
Where D1 = Dose1 and D2 = Dose2
15-8
1.3 Product Description
The Chamber
The DAS-P uses a full field ionisation chamber consisting of a collector plate sandwiched in a cavity between two
energizing plates. All the plate are made of a transparent insulating material with the appropriate surfaces having a
thin conductive coating.
The chamber is mounted perpendicular to and centered on the X-ray beam axis so that its area always exceeds the
beam area. The dose area product must be measured after all field size collimation and beam attenuation. These
are usually carried out in a single collimator unit which offers a rigid mounting surface for a radiation sensor. The
X-ray beam will then interact with the air within the chamber cavity producing electrically charged ions. The effect of
this ionisation is a flow of electrons from the polarization plates which are energized with a high 500 volt potential to
the collector plate which is at approximately ground potential. The ensuing current is proportional to the product of
the beam area and the dose which is the same for all planes normal to the beam axis (see Figure 1).
It is therefore possible to measure the dose area product remote from the patient which avoids movement
restrictions. In addition, the chamber may be mounted close to the focal point of the X-ray tube where the beam
area is relatively small and the dose rates are high.
The chamber assembly includes an 8 digit LCD display, power on indicator, test and reset push buttons (see Figure
2).
15-9
Figure 2: Chamber Front Panel
POWER ON LED
TEST
RESET
DAP-S
WINDOW CLEAR SIZE 37 MM x 15 mm
1. Test Button - This injects a small charge to the front end electronics. The result is shown on the
local display and Remote Display where fitted.
2. Reset Button - Resets both the local display in the chamber and the Remote Display.
15-10
Signal Processing
The current flow is extremely small, making it necessary to use very sensitive electronic circuitry with minimum noise
and drift. The first stage of signal processing which is part of the chamber assembly, converts the small charge into a
dose equivalent signal of sufficient amplitude to drive the display which is mounted within the same protective
housing. The dose area product is transmitted to a remote display where fitted. Also mounted close to the chamber
is the 500 volt energizing supply which eliminates the hazard of feeding such a potential along lengths of cable.
General System Configuration
The DAP-S is a stand alone Dose Area Product Meter with an integral display. A remote display is also included with
the system. The various system configuration which can be produced by using different combinations of the
components supplied as standard are illustrated in figure 3. It can be seen from these diagrams that the chamber
has a number of unique features not usually associated with ion chambers which lack in-built electronics.
15-11
Figure 3: General System Configuration
A. Chamber & Power Supply
CHAMBER
B. Chamber, Remote Display & Power Supply
CHAMBER
C. Chamber & Local Lamp Supply
CHAMBER
D. Chamber, Remote Display & Local Lamp Supply
CHAMBER
15-12
1.4 Specifications
841-S DAP-S:
S Type: Full Field Ion Chamber
S Chamber Active Area: 140mm x 140mm
S Dose Area Product Rates: 1 mGycm2s-1 to 400000 mGycm2s-1
S Energy Range: 50 kVp to 150 kVp
S Chamber Sensitivity: 130 pC/mGycm2
S Absorption: Less than 0.5mm Al
S Signal Processing: Assembly contains integrated electronics
S Connection: 3m Cable with integral plug
S Warm Up Time: 8-10 minutes
S Calibration and Offset Adjustment: user accessible controls
S Transparency: Greater than 75%
S Physical Size: 195mm x 157mm x 23.5mm
S Weight 0.75kg
Integral Display:
S Display: 8 Digit LCD with reset and test function
S Display Units: mGycm2
S Dose Area Product Range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2
S Free Running Rate: 10kHz
S Response Time: Dose rate dependent 1 ms - 5 seconds
15-13
(Specification Continued)
Remote Display:
S Display: 8 Digit LCD with reset
S Display Units: mGycm2
S Dose Area Product Range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2
S Response Time: Dose rate dependent 1 ms - 5 seconds
S Power Input: <50 mA at 24 V dc
S Power Input Range: 15-28 V dc
S Size: 82mm x 33mm x 28.5mm
S Weight: Approximately 100g
Power Supply:
S Local Supply at Collimator Head: 24 V dc, 50mA (Tolerance 15-28 V dc)
S Power Adaptor: Output power 18 V dc, 500mA
Input power
100 V ac +/- 10%, 60Hz

or
230 V ac +/- 10%, 50Hz
Cable:
S Type: 6mm Oval cross section, pvc insulated 4 core
S Length: 30m supplied (40m maximum)
15-14
(Specification Continued)
Extension Options:
S Special purpose chambers
S The 841-S chamber is compatible with Gammex-RMI's full range of DAP display and processing products.
15-15
1.5 Operation
These instructions assume that the DAP-S has been installed correctly.
a. Apply electrical power by plugging in the power supply to the AC outlet or by switching on the X-ray machine if
a local supply is being used.
b. Ensure the powering up sequence proceeds as normal, ending with zero indicated on the display/s after
pressing `RESET'. Note that the DAP-S has an 8-10 minutes warm up period.
c. Use the X-ray machine as normal.
d. Dose area product reading will be seen on the display/s.
e. On completion of the examination, the total dose area product should be noted and transcribed according to
local policy.
f. Reset the display/s by pressing `RESET' on either the integral or remote display.
The system is now ready for the next examination.
NOTE: The chamber `TEST' function confirms the system operation. Please check the value of test display
against the number recorded on the test certificate and test record sheet.
15-16
Do not press the test button during a patient examination without first recording the display reading and pressing
`RESET'. Recording of the examination can resume after using the test function only after a further reset of the
display. The total examination DAP is obtained by adding the DAPs prior to and after using the test function.
NOTE: The buttons must be presses for about 1 second for the instrument to respond.
NOTE: The chamber is not waterproof. During interventional procedures where fluids are used in close
proximity to the chamber, the use of waterproof drapes for protection of the chamber is necessary.
Operation Summary
The following table shows when the buttons are pressed on the chamber or remote display.
Button Integral & Remote Display Indicates
Reset Resets integral display and Remote

(Integral & Remote Display) Display unit to zero.
Test Places a test charge on the chamber input,

(Integral Display only) which is displayed on both the integral and
remote display.
15-17
3. Calibration
3.1 Introduction
The DAP-S is delivered having been nominally calibrated as shown in Appendix A.
Although an extensive calibration carried out by an independent laboratory is available as an optional extra, there
are advantages in carrying out final calibration on site following the installation. If this is done, compensation can be
made for the radiation beam quality and any absorbing material between the DAP-S chamber and the patient.
The principle of DAP-S calibration is shown in figure 8. Diagrams 1a and 2a show the importance of correct offset
adjustment prior to calibration.
This can be confirmed after the warm up period by ensuring the display remains at zero for 30 minutes following
pressing the reset button. If this is not the case please refer to the positive offset adjustment procedure in the service
section of this manual. The test for negative drift requires the test button to be pressed and the result noted. The
display can then be reset. After 30 minutes press the test button again, the reading should be no lower than 5 digits
compared with the recorded reading. If it is, refer to the negative offset adjustment procedure in the service section
of this manual.
15-18
The process of calibration is illustrated in figure 3a and 3b. The transfer function between the reference
measurement and the indication on the DAP-S will be a straight line as the instrument is inherently linear over a
400,000 : 1 dynamic range. Assuming the offset adjustment is correct, calibration involves adjustment of a scaling
factor within the DAP-S to obtain correspondence between the reference instrument and the DAP display.
Therefore a single dose rate measurement is all that is required to achieve the correct calibration as indicated in
figure 3b.
Some Useful Information Related to Calibration
Energy Response
Inspection of the specifications will confirm the DAP-S chamber has a flat energy response from 50kVp to 150kVp
to within 1.5%. Calibration can therefore be carried out at any energy and 80kVp has been selected. However, this is
not the case when the energy response is modified by absorbing or scattering material within the beam path. In
these circumstances it is recommended that calibration is carried out at the most frequently used energy or the
average energy used. After completing a calibration it is wise to repeat the measurement at several energies to
ensure variation of DAP readings are within expected tolerances.
Dose Rate Used
It has been stated that the DAP-S chamber has a linear response with dose rate, nevertheless it is advisable to use a
total dose and dose rate towards the upper limit of expected values for the calibration.
15-19
Units
This model displays mGycm2 only.
cGycm2 can be obtained by dividing by 10. This is also the factor used for Rcm2.
15-20
Figure 8: Calibration and Offset Graphs
1a 1b
Display Display
Error due to
positive
offset.
Positive offset
corrected following
adjustment procedure
Actual outlined in section 4.1 Actual
2a 2b
Display
Display
Negative offset
error corrected
following procedure
in 4.2
Actual Actual
Error due to
negative
offset.
3a 3b
X=Y+ Y1
Display Display X=Y
Calibration Y1
error. No error
Y
Y
X X
Actual Actual
(ref. dosemeter
reading) (ref. dosemeter reading)
Correction applied to calibration control as stated
in section 3.2
15-21
3.2 Calibration Procedure
The aim of calibration is to equalize the displayed DAP reading to that of a reference instrument located at a typical
patient examination distance as illustrated in Figure 9. The DAP-S is mounted on the face of the X-ray tube
collimator unit. If a couch top or other radiation absorbing obstruction is normally between the collimator and
patient, it should remain in situ during calibration.
A reference chamber must be placed in such a position that it is totally within the radiation beam. To evaluate this,
follow the procedure listed below:
Place a film cassette on the reference dosemeter as shown in Figure 9. Expose with radiation and process the film.
An image similar to that in Figure 10 should be visible. For this, confirmation can be obtained that the reference
chamber is now within the radiation beam and the total field size may be measured from the image on the film.
The collimator is set to give a defined field size at the patient plane (ie at the reference dosemeter). If the field size is
for example, 100 cm2 and the reference dosemeter gives a point source reading, (i.e. 1cm2), the DAP-S DAP
reading should be 100 times the reference dosemeter reading. This is to say; the DAP-S should display the
reference dosemeter reading multiplied by the field area (Field size is 100 cm2).
Many reference dosemeters present the results in Roentgens (R). To convert to mGycm2 multiply by 8.7.
i.e. DOSE AREA PRODUCT = Reading on reference meter * field area * 8.7.
15-22
Figure 9: Calibration Diagram
Optional phantom to
apply Backscatter Ref. dose meter
correction (see text) with Chamber
Cassette with Film

to establish size
correction factor
Couch top or
other in beam
absorber (see text)
Set Field size

Typical patient/ smaller than
examination DAP chamber,
distance larger than
Ref. dose
Chamber
DAP Chamber
Collimator
All measurement
equipment X-Ray Tube
symmetrical to
central axis
15-23
Figure 10: Typical Reference Chamber
Field
y Image
Chamber
Image
X-Ray Film
15-24
3.3 Calibration Adjustment
A. Set the X-ray machine to 80 kVp and the field size to 100 cm2 at the reference chamber.
B. Access to the calibration control is gained via hole A of the chamber electronics cover (See below).
CHAMBER
B A
C. Reset the reference dosemeter and the DAP-S, then take an X-ray exposure.
Record the result of the reference dosemeter and the DAP-S. Calculate and record the DOSE AREA
PRODUCT.
D. Compare the calculated dose area product with the displayed value on the DAP-S. Reset the DAP-S. Adjust
calibration control using the precision screwdriver provided, anticlockwise to increase or clockwise to
decrease the displayed value. This change will be apparent after the next X-ray exposure.
E. Repeat sections XC & D again until value on DAP-S is equal to or within 5% of the calculated value. The unit is
now calibrated.
15-25
F. The unit is now ready for use.
G. Press the `TEST' button. Record the new test number on the TEST RECORD sheet found in appendix B.
15-26
4. Service
4.1 General
The DAP-S has been designed to provide trouble free measurements of dose area product for many years.
Should the instrument fail to meet the QA testing criteria outlined in section 1 of this manual a fault may require
correction.
The fault finding section of this manual is a guide to locate and correct faults.
The only adjustments that may be required are calibration as previously outlined and offset adjustment.
The offset adjustment procedure as outlined in this section of the manual is carried out following production of the
instrument and should not normally require attention. If adjustment is necessary the procedure outlined should be
carefully followed.
CAUTION: The chamber assembly includes a 500V dc supply, if for any reason the cover is removed care
should be exercised.
15-27
4.2 Positive Offset Drift (See Figure 11)
Drift in the chamber electronics will cause readings to occur when no radiation is present. The following procedure
must be followed to correct this offset drift. It is assumed that there will be no radiation events during this procedure
and adjustment will be carried out using a precision screwdriver (1.4mm flat blade type).
a. Access to the offset control is gained via hole B of the chamber electronics cover. (See below).
CHAMBER
B A
1. Reset the display.
2. Adjust offset control anticlockwise 1/4 turn via hole B, the rate of drift will slow down. When the display
has stopped counting, `REST' the display from the front panel.
3. Leave the chamber for 10 minutes.
4. If there are numbers still appearing on the display, repeat sections 1 to 3 again, adjusting offset control
1/4 turn anticlockwise.
15-28
b. Leave the chamber for 30 minutes.
1. If the chamber display has not remained on zero, `RESET' the display.
2. Adjust the offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise.
4. If the chamber has not remained on zero, repeat section 1 to 3 again.
c. If the chamber has remained on zero, `RESET' the display.
1. Press `TEST' button. Record the result as T1, and reset the display.
3. Press `TEST' button. Record the result as T2.
4. If T2 is greater than T1 by 10, adjust the offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat sections 1 to 3
again.
5. If T1 is greater than T2 by 10, adjust the offset control 1/4 turn clockwise and repeat sections 1 to 3 again.
d. The unit is now ready for routine use.
15-29
Figure 11: Flow Chart for Positive Offset Correction
15-30
4.3 Negative Offset Drift (See Figure 12)
Negative drift is defined as the electronics drifting in such a manner as to cause the reading from an X-ray exposure,
or from the `TEST' function to be lower than expected.
To test for negative drift, follow the procedure below:
1. Press `TEST' and then `RESET'.
2. Press the `TEST' and record the result. `RESULT' the display and leave the chamber for 10 minutes.
3. Press `TEST' and record the result. `RESET' the display and compare the test results. The test values should
be the " 5 counts. If the second value is smaller, then the difference is negative offset drift.
To correct this negative offset drift, the procedure below:
It is assumed that there will be radiation events during this procedure, adjustment will be carried out using a
precision screwdriver (1.4mm flat blade type).
a. Access to the offset control is via hole B on the chamber electronics cover (See section on Positive Offset Drift).
1. Adjust offset control clockwise.
2. Press `TEST' and record result as T1. `RESET' the display.
3. Leave the chamber for 10 minutes. Press `TEST' and record result as T2.
4. If T2 is still less than T1, repeat sections 1 to 3.
15-31
5. If T2 is greater than T1, adjust offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat sections 2 and 3.
6. Repeat sections 1 and 3 until no difference is found between T1 and T2.
b. If the chamber display has not remained at zero, adjust offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat
sections 1 and 3.
c. The unit is now ready for routine use.
15-32
Figure 12: Flow Chart for Negative Offset Correction
15-33
4.4 Faultfinding
Fault Possible Causes Suggested Actions
No display or green power Power supply failure. Try running the unit from an
indication on switch on. alternative supply.
No Reset from chamber. Switch board disconnected in Remove chamber cover and
chamber housing. refit the switch board.
No Reset from Remote Cabling fault. Check the wires are
Display. connected in plugs at
Disconnected plugs. couplers and at the chamber.
Dose Indication without Offset Drift. See previous section of user

radiation. manual. Remove chamber
Chamber leakage. and dry at 50_ Max
overnight. If problem still
persists contact your local
representative.
All other faults should be reported to your Hospital in house service

organization or your local representative.
15-34
APPENDIX B: TEST RECORD SHEET
Chamber Serial Number.........................................
DATE TEST NUMBER SIGNATURE
15-35
REV 1
15-36
REV 1
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16-1 DSM 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-1-1 Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16-3 DSM 200 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16-4 DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16-7 DSM 600 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-79
16-1
REV 1
16-1 DSM 200
1 2 3
4
12
11
10
DSM (200 + IP)

Illustration 16-1
16-2
REV 1
16-1-1 Component Location

(See Illustration 16-1)
1. DSAD
2. DSIP (DSM 200 + IP)
3. Line SW, fuses and line filter
4. Fan
5. Power Supply ( + 5V, " 12V)
6. Hard Disc
7. DSID (interfaces hard disk)
8. DSMP
9. DSKB Keyboard
10. RECIR (infrared board)
11. Infrared receiver
12. Technical Data Label
16-3
REV 1
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION
Processes the TV analog video data to digital form providing a 576 x 576 x 12 bit digital format.
Provides for eight image RAM storage including two frozen images & 6 saved images.
Capable of display and processing images on up to two independent monitors.
Has provisions for driving a formatter (Imager) for either film or paper copy reproduction. The DSM can also drive a
VCR if such is added to the system.
Employs a 68000p for DSM management including interface functions with the Stenoscop.
Digital to analog conversion of image data.
DSM (Configurations)
Basic:
An electronic assembly with a control console as shown in Illustration 16-1 but without the 200 image hard disk
storage and the Image Postprocessor (IP).
An Infra-red remote control which enables remotely performing all the functions on the left-most DSM
operator console panel.
DSM (200 + IP) :
With the addition of the 200 image hard disk and the IP the following additional processing functions are
available.
1. Storage of up to 200 images on the hard disk.
2. Programmed acquisition sequence
3. Real-time subtraction in fluoro and pulsed fluoroscopy
4. Peak opacification techics for improved visualization of opacified vessles in the patient anatomy.
5. Road mapping for following catheter insertion.
6. Edge enhancement for better imaging of small anatomical structures.
16-4
REV 1
VIDEO
IMAGER
DSM Block Digram

Illustration 16-2
16-5
REV 1
Acquisition, Display and CPU Management
The Image Acquisition, Display and CPU management functions are assigned to the DSAD board. These include
the following:
Acquisition
1. Amplification and A/D conversion of the TV Camera signal.
2. Synchronization of the DSM functions to the TV camera composite video signal (PPL) phase lock loop.
3. Generate the system clock at 14.75 MHz.
4. Generate sequencing signals for memory.
Display
1. D/A conversion of the image data.
2. Image graphic overlay.
3. Data multiplexing digitized images for display.
4. Provides access to the DSIP board.
CPU Management
1. Keyboard and associated LED's.
2. Exposure control interface signals with the Infrared remote control and the Stenoscop.
3. Management of the other DSM board functions.
16-6
REV 1
DSAD Interconnects
The DSAD Interconnects with:
1. The Stenoscop console, generator and TV cameras through the DSM cable connection to the Stenoscop.
2. The TV Monitors
3. The DSMP Board
4. The DSIP Image Processor
5. Imagers (film or paper copy)
6. VCR
7. Power Supplies (+5V, "12V)
The DSAD board includes a frequency selector for operation from a 50 or 60 Hz power source.
The board has a RESET (X11) and a ABORT (X12) button. The ABORT is for factory use.
Nine LED's are located on the board for signal monitoring purposes (See Section 8 under Troubleshooting)
Interface with the (IP) Image Post Processor is through the DSIP.
DSMP Board
The DSMP board is dedicated to Image Processing and memory. Communication is through buses LS1 (reading)
and LS3 (writing). The information transfer is time shared.
RAM memory has a capacity for storing two frozen images and six saved images in a 576 x 576 x 12 bit format.
The board controls access to RAM in real time and enables the zoom and TV camera H&V reversal functions.
Interface to the hard disk is made through the DSID board to increase RAM.
The DSMP enables real-time image processing functions such as; identity, recursive filtering or integration filtering.
Selected pixel filter coefficents from 2 to 16 provide for image noise reduction. Recursive filtering is active in fluoro,
after stabilization of the video image, while integration filtering is used in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography.
Processing functions also include image subtraction in single fluoro.
DSKB Keyboard
The keyboard DSKB has 82 keys, of which 31 are illuminated keys. An illuminated key signals to the operator that
the selected function is in progress. A flashing key indicates a question or an action request to the operator.
16-7
REV 1
RECIR Infrared Receiver Board
The RECIR Infrared Receiver Board connects to the CPU through serial link RS232C. The transmission rate is 9600
bauds. The board contains an infrared sensitive detector, a serial encoder using Pulse Position Modulation (PPM)
coding.
Interface With The DSID Board
Interface with the hard disk drive is through the DSIS board. The board enables managing the hard disk, but
respects real-time processing constraints. The board includes an image buffer. Addition of the hard disk permits
expansion of RAM enabling an added storage capability of up to 200 images.
DSIP and Image Post Processor
The DSIP connects the Image Post Processor (IP) with the display on the DSAD. In conjuction with the DSMP
processing and memory functions it enables performing the following:
1. A programmed acquisition sequence.
2. Real-time subtraction in pulsed fluoro.
3. Peak opacification to display filling of a vascular body vessel with an x-ray opaque material on only one
image
4. Road Mapping to facilitate viewing placement of a catheter in the vascular system. It combines with
subtraction and peak opacification imaging technics.
5. Edge enhancement, to enable improved visualization of vascular vessels.
16-8
REV 1
Internal Connections
The power supply cable connects the power supply to the DSAD board through J2.
The ribbon cable connects the DSKB (keyboard) to connector J1 of DSAD.
The RS232C (with telephone connector) connects the console RECIR board to J6 of DSAD.
The SCSI cable connects the hard disk to XJ3 of the DSIS board (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP version).
The hard disk power supply cable interconnects to XJ2 of the DSIS board (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP version).
External Connections
These connections are made at the rear terminals of the DSAD board:
J8: DSM video input coaxial link from the TV camera.
J9: DSM video output coaxial link to Monitor A.
J10: START REPRO" coaxial link at DSM output to initiate the video imager.
J11: DSM video output coaxial link to the video imager. The signal corresponds to the image displayed on
Monitor A.
J12: DSM video output coaxial link to a VCR. The signal corresponds to the image displayed on Monitor A.
J13: DSM video output coaxial link to Monitor B.
J4/J5: RS232C serial links only used for system debugging (i.e., a terminal connected at J4 and a computer
connected at J5).
J7: Link with the console and STENOSCOP for the x-ray control signals. (See Illustration 16-3)
16-9
REV 1
SIGNAL IN = TO DSM FUNCTION

OUT = TO STENOSCOP
MF + IN Technique coding
MG + IN (fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy and electronic
radiography)
MEMO + IN Indicates stable video (acquisition enabling)
VISU + IN Indicates the presence of X-rays
SP1 + IN Spare
SP2 + IN C-arm present
COMMON IN OV of above signals
X.PERM +/ OUT S Enables X-ray emission

X.PERM - OUT S Controls X-ray sequencing (pulsed fluoroscopy
and electronic radiography modes)
A / B +/ OUT Indicates the two image mode

A/B- OUT
SP3 +/SP3 - OUT Spare

SP4 +/SP4 - OUT Spare
Signals Passing Through J7
Illustration 16-3
16-10
REV 1
16-11
REV 1
Remote Control
Illustration 16-4
16-12
REV 1
Remote Control (See Illustration 16-4)

The keys on the Remote Control Unit perform the same functions as the keys on the DMS Console (Group 1).
The keys on the Remote Constrol are active at Stenoscop power-on". This enables the operator to select a
function either on the Remote Control or on the DSM Console.
Keypad Function
Keypad function selection is as follows:
Key 1 - Selects the variable contrast (gamma) correction.
2,3 - Contrast correction.
4 - Edge enhancement
5,6 - Vertical & horizontal video image reversal
7 - Selects noise reduction
8,9 - Image transfer from Monitor A to B.
10 - Selects split screen
11 - Zoom image (X2 magnification)
12 - Activates Imager for hard film or paper copy
13-16 - Monitor B image scrolling
14-17 - Monitor A image scrolling
15-18 - Enables image storage
16-13
REV 1
Stenoscop 2
RECIR CPU DSKB

DSAD
Option IP
DSIP
Video IN ACQ ACQ

DSAD
Video OUT
A
(Monitor A)
PROCESSING
DISPLAY
DSMP
Video OUT
B
(Monitor B)
SCSI
DISK DSID MEMORY
DSMP
Option M 200
XR0384
DSM Block Diagram

Illustration 16-5
16-14
REV 1
16-3 DSM 200 THEORY
The DSM complete assembly consists of two TV monitors, A and B, the DSM (Dedicated Stenoscop Memory) and a
Video Imager or Formatter for providing a film image hard copy. The latter is an optional item.
The DSM is microprocessor controlled (68000 µp), provides for RAM storage of 8 images (576 x 576 x 12). Two
images are frozen and displayed on Monitors A and B and 6 images are saved. On the DSM-200 hard disk,
additional storage is available for up to 200 TV frames. Graphic overlay is provided to indicate operating mode and
parameters selected by the operator.
During real time imaging (x-ray emission), the dynamic image is displayed on the left monitor (monitor A). Upon
termination of x-ray, the last image is frozen on the monitor.
Initiating another x-ray exposure results in transfer of the image from monitor A to the right monitor B (as a frozen
image). Upon x-ray termination, the new last dynamic acquired during the second exposure is displayed and
frozen on monitor A.
Refer to Illustration 16-5
DSAD
The video analog signal coming in is digitized for transmission on the acquisition 8 bit bus.
The DSM is:

• sync locked (PLL) to the video.
• generates the clock of 14.75 mHz (60 Hz units)
• contains the microprocessor CPU for managing operating mode data from the Stenoscop, the infrared
Remote Control to the the RECIR and operator data from the DSKB alphanumeric keyboard.
Display
Converts the acquisition bus digital information back to analog to drive the TV monitors Video Formatter or VCR (if
used).
Handles the image graphic overlay data to be displayed on the monitors.
DSMP
Enables RAM storage of up to 8 images (576 x 576 x 12 format), 2 freeze TV frames for monitor display and 6 frames
save.
Provides zoom image enlargement (2X), of the central area of the image.
Enables Horizontal and Vertical image reversal.
Provides for real-time Image post-processing, including recursive filtering of 2 to 16 frames in fluoro and
integration filtering of 2 to 16 frames for noise reduction in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography operating
modes.
DSKB
Interfaces the alphanumeric operator keyboard to the CPU. The keyboard has 82 keys. 31 are LED illuminated.
These indicate function selection and, when flashing, indicate an operator action request.
16-15
REV 1
RECIR
Interfaces the infrared remote control to the CPU. Transmission rate is 9600 baud using a PPM code. (Pulse Position
Modulation).
DSID
Interfaces the hard disk image storage with the DSMP. The disk stores up to 200 frames. Disk management is
designed to respect real-time image processing constraints.
DSIP (IP)
This is an optional item that provides the following:
• A programmed acquisition sequence for image post-processing.
• Real-time subtraction.
• Peak opacification - to display peak opacity in vascular vessels.
• Road mapping - for catheter placement
The IP function acts only on Monitor A in real time.
DSM Image Paths

The TV Camera composite video signal is fed directly to the acquisition module on the DSAD. Here the signal is
converted A/D and applied ot the Display and the DSMP processor. The Display performs a D/A conversion and the
resultant analog composite video is then passed to the TV Monitors A or B, and can be passed to the Video Imager
(Formatter) or a VCR if such are used.
DSMP processed images are routed through the DSID for storage on the hard disk and the DSMP volatile RAM
memory.
Stenoscop and DSM Interface Signals

MF+ to DSM Used for technic coding, fluoro, pulsed fluoro and ER (electronic radiography)
MG+
Memo+ to DSM Indicates video stable for acquisition and processing.
VISU to DSM X-ray present
X-Perm ± to Steno + enables x-ray emission

- stops x-ray emission
used to control sequencing in pulsed fluoro (SP) and electronic radiography (ER)
A/B ± to Steno Drives monitor display rotation to normal, used for split screen operating mode
Fluoro Operation
When the x-ray exposure is initiated, the DSM monitor A displays the non-filtered dynamic (real-time) image.
When the video is stable (Memo signal), the recursive filter with selected coefficents becomes active on the dynamic
image. When the exposure is terminated, the filtered image is frozen and displayed on monitor A. Initiation of
another x-ray exposure results in transfer of the first image to monitor B while the new dynamic image is displayed
on monitor A. With the IP, post processing of the real time image includes subtraction peak opacification and road
mapping.
16-16
REV 1
Pulsed Fluoro Operation

When the exposure is made in the pulsed fluoro mode, a dynamic image is displayed on monitor A for the duration of
the first x-ray pulse. A refreshed frozen image is displayed at the end of each additional pulse.
The x-ray exposure time is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM) signal for the processing selected. If the x-ray
exposure switch is released before the image is frozen, the x-ray emission is not interrupted, but continues to
enable completing the processing.
The pulsed fluoro mode forces integration filtering.
Road mapping and peak opacification cannot be done in the pulsed fluoro mode. These techniques are
automatically inhibited. Pulsed fluoro mode subtraction is only possible when the IP option is used.
Electronic Radiography (ER)

In this mode, initiation of the x-ray exposure results in a non-filtered real-time image display as in standard fluoro.
When the video signal is stable (Memo to the DSM), the dynamic real-time image is subjected to integration
filtering. X-ray exposure time is controlled by the X-PERM DMS signal to the Stenoscop. In the event the exposure
is prematurely terminated by the operator, before the image is frozen, x-ray emission is not interrupted but
continues to complete the necessary processing.
Road mapping, peak opacification and real time subtraction technics are automatically inhibited.
16-4 DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

These are initiated from the keyboard or the Remote Control. They require use of the DMS software program. The
Operational Function when selected, perform specific tasks and are therefore useful for failure diagnostics.
Refer to Illustrations 16-6 & 16-7. Shown, are the key-function selections and the modules or boards of the DSM
that are involved. This should prove to be of considerable value when troubleshooting DMS faults.
16-17
REV 1
Key Module/Board Concerned

IMAGE MEMORY
FUNCTION
- Automatic or manual - DSID Memory (DSMP)

image storage ES, LS2, LS3
- Animation rate - DSID DISK (option), Memory (DSMP),

S monitor A Display (DSAD)
S monitor B LS2, LS3
- Automatic or manual - Memory (DSMP)

image clearing LS2, LS3
- Programmed acquisition - Memory (DSMP)

sequence ACQ DSAD, ES
- Vertical and horizontal - Memory (DSMP)

video reversals LS2, LS3
- Automatic or manual - Memory (DSMP), Display (DSAD)

image transfer from LS2, LS3
monitor A to monitor B
- Two-image display - Memory (DSMP), Display (DSAD)

on one monitor LS2, LS3
- x 2 zoom - Memory (DSMP)

LS2, LS3
IMAGE POSTPROCESSING
FUNCTION
- Noise reduction - Processing (DSMP)

filtering coefficient ACQ, LS2, LS3, ES
- Variable contrast - Display (DSAD)

correction (Gamma) LS2, LS3
Operational Functions
Illustration 16-6
16-18
REV 1
DSM 200
Key Module/Board Concerned
IMAGE MEMORY
FUNCTION
- Antiglare - Display (DSAD)

correction LS2, LS3
- Real time - Processing (DSMP) ACQ, LS2, LS1

subtraction
- Peak opacification - Processing (DSMP) ACQ, LS2, LS1
- Road Mapping - Processing (DSMP) ACQ, LS2, LS1
- Edge enhancement - DSIP board
HARD-COPY
REPRODUCTION FUNCTION
- EXP reproduction - Display (DSAD)

CPU
ANNOTATION
FUNCTION
- Annotation display - Display (DSAD), CPU (DSAD)
- Annotation extinction - Display (DSAD), CPU (DSAD)
- Annotation clearing - Display (DSAD), CPU (DSAD)
- Alphanumeric keyboard - DSKB, CPU (DSAD), Display (DSAD)
OTHER
- Arrows (cursor - CPU (DSAD)

displacement)
- Function enable - CPU (DSAD)
- DSM reset - CPU (DSAD)
Operational Functions (continued)

Illustration 16-7
16-19
REV 1
16-20
REV 1
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS

The following diagnostics tests should prove helpful to identify and locate malfunctions when troubleshooting the
DSM-200. The diagnostic tests include a SELF-TEST, a general ACCEPTANCE test, INDIVIDUAL MODULE tests
and an IMAGE QUALITY test.
Self-Test
Determines Power Supply malfunctions
Detects data transmission faults
Detects P problems
In the event of a DSM malfunction the system will automatically switch to a by-pass" mode to enable continued use
of the Stenoscop.
1. Memory is inhibited and the VIDEO IN signal is applied directly to the VIDEO A OUTPUT to TV MONITOR
A (See Illustration 16-8).
2. X-Ray is enabled via X-PERM signals transmitted through J7 of the DSM to the Stenoscop.
To perform the Self-Test, snap the Power Switch to ON. If operation is normal the TV Monitor screen will display:
GENERAL ELECTRIC CGR - logo

Software references
System configuration (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP)
If no malfunction occurs, at the end of the Self-Test, one beep is generated, application starts and the TV Monitor
displays the last stored image with its identifying numbers.
The following keys will be lit:
Noise Reduction ON/OFF (Key 7)
Noise Reduction level coefficient (Key 4- Group 2)
Auto image clear (Key 12A - Group 3)
Infrared I/O Remote Control active
If a fault be detected during the self-test the POWER-UP TEST FAILED" message will be displayed. If a fault
inhibits application during use, RESET by means of the DSAD push-button or the OFF/ON Power Switch. The
Self-Test will re-run and indicate the fault.
Power Supply problems and TV Camera signal loss can be determined by reading the LED's on the DSAD board.
Normal operation will be indicated when LED #1 is OFF and LED's #2 to 9 are lit. (See Illustration 16-9).
A non-formatted disk will display UNFORMATTED DISK" on the Monitor. The disk must then be formatted in the
Maintenance Mode" by a FORMAT command.
Finally if problems are encountered refer to the START-UP" tables (Illustration 16-11 & 16-12).
16-21
REV 1
Power Switch - ON
DSM
SELF TEST Video IN Looped

checks Power Supply to Video OUT to
Failure Monitor A
checks data transmission
checks P X-ray enabled by
x-perm signals - J7
X-Ray Ready
Auto
NR Simultaneously Press GMA
Remote Lights Keys to transfer to Manual mode
I/O ON
Filter-4 Screen Displays
0 - Exit
1 - Acceptance test
2 - Image Quality Test
3 - Bug
4 - Disk Formatting
Function Tests
Illustration 16-8
16-22
REV 1
LED function Indicators on the DSAD Board
DS1 RESET (push button x11)
DS2 VIDEO IN signal
DS3 phase-lock loop
DS4 system clock
DS5 + 5V (analog)
DS6 - 12V
DS7 + 12V
DS8 + 5V
DS9 - 5.2V
DS1
DS2
DS3
J7 DS4
DS5
X11 DS6
Reset DS7
DS8
DS9
DSAD
LED Function Indicators

Illustration 16-9
16-23
REV 1
Access To Manual Mode

After the DMS SELF-TEST is completed select the Manual Mode by simultaneously depressing keys G, M and A
(Alphanumeric keyboard). The DSM block diagram will be displayed as shown in Illustration 16-10, except for
statistic window" and error window." X-ray emission is not possible in the manual mode.
The control window at the bottom of Illustration 8-8 provides access to other manual mode functions. Depressing
the corresponding number on the Keyboard selects the function as follows:
0= Exit - to exit
1= ALL - performs DMS Acceptance (ALL)
2= QI - Image Quality Tests, used to check image performance and adjust TV Camera & TV
Monitors
3= Bug - Not used
4= Format - Format the disk
DSM Acceptance Test (ALL)

Depress Key 1. Each module and associated link is sequentially tested. The module under test is displayed in
reverse video (white) for the duration of the test. The test for a faulty link between modules, is performed at the end of
the second module tested.
A failure interrupts the test and the module or link error is registered. Depressing any key after a registered failure
enables continuing the test and the error indicated is deleted.
At the end of the test, STATISTIC WINDOW will be displayed indicating number of errors and number of passes
made. A positive test is indicated if none of the modules are displayed in reverse video (white). To stop the test,
press Z on the alphanumeric keyboard. Depress 0 to exit.
Individual Module Test

Each module contains an identifying letter which is the same as used to identify the component in the Renewal
Parts" listing. Depressing D on the keyboard, for example, starts testing of that module.
Depress keys G, M and A simultaneously. Next, select the module to be tested by typing in its associated identifying
letter. This starts the test program. The module being tested, is shown in reverse video (white).
When completed, the number of bad passes relative to the total performed (99 maximum) will be displayed in the
Statistic Window."
If an error is detected the ERROR WINDOW displays the number of errors with details of the first five showing actual
and theoretical address values from the beginning of the test. In case of an error, refer to Illustration 8-11 to
determine module replacement. The control window displays the error description.
To stop the test, depress any key letter on the Keyboard. To select another module to be tested, depress the key for
the module's identifying letter.
If the test had no errors, the module will be displayed in normal video. Depress 0 to exit.
16-24
REV 1
DSAD BUS ACQ DSAD

ACQUISITION BUS LS2 DISPLAY
D BUS LS1
DSMP
MEM LS1
DSMP ES LS2
PROCESSING M200
DSAD DSAD B LS3 DSIP
DISK
B CPU F
E
BUSES
ERROR WINDOW
STATISTIC WINDOW
00 BAD ON 00 PASSES NB ERRORS
ADDRESS READ THEORETICAL
0 : EXIT 1 : ALL 2: QI 3 : BUG 4: FORMAT
Control window
XR0383
DMS Display
Illustration 16-10
16-25
REV 1
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

No beep upon No DSM power S Check connection of the line cable between
start-up the distribution system and the DSM power
input.
S Set the DSM I/O switch to I.
DSAD board power S Check the connections between:
supply failure - Line module and power supply unit.
- Power supply unit and J2 of DSAD.
S Check that LEDs DS5 to DS9 are ON" if not
check:
- Fuses.
- Filter assembly.
- DSM power supply.
No monitor No monitor power On monitor:
image S Connect the line.
S Set the switch to ON.
No video output If DSM is in by-pass mode, faulty
signal ACQUISITION module (DSAD).
If DSM is not in by-pass mode, faulity
DISPLAY and ACQUISITION modules (DSAD).
Video input S Check the camera-to-J8 of DSAD connections.
failure
S DS2 OFF" S Check:
(incorrect Video - Camera signal.
IN) - ACQUISITION module (DSAD).
S DS3 OFF" (PLL - CPU module (DSAD).
incorrect)
S DS4 OFF" or dim
(CK 66 incorrect)
Keyboard S No DSAD S Correctly connect the 60-contract cable to

inoperative connection keyboard and J1 of DSAD.
S Faulty circuits S Faulty:

- DSKB board.
- 60-contact cable.
- DSAD board (CPU module).
Fault Isolation Upon Start-Up

Illustration 16-11
16-26
REV 1

Remote S No connection S Check connection of telephone connector to
control" RECIR and J6 of DSAD
i
inoperative
ti S Faulty circuits S Faulty:
(with keyboard - RECIR baord.
I/O key ON" - Remote control" six-conductor cable.
- Remote control.
S Change the remote control battery.
Switchover Faulty keyboard or S Faulty:
to maintenance CPU - DSKB baord.
mode impossible - DSAD board (CPU module).
Hard disk S Faulty S Check the connection of SCSI and power

formatting connections supply cables between hard disk and DSID
fault board.
(DSM 200)
S Faulty S Faulty:
components - Disk.
- Cables.
- DSID board.
- DSMD board.
Faulty screen S Faulty graphic S Faulty DSAD board (CPU module) and
g
dialog generation screen.
S Keyboard board S Replace DSKB board.
S CPU dialog S Faulty DSAD board (CPU module)
After the
self-test, a See Illustration 16-13
message is
displayed
NOTE: In all cases, use the maintenance mode to trace the fault origin.
Fault Isolation Upon Start-Up (continued)

Illustration 16-12
16-27
REV 1
COMPONENT (S) TO BE
MONITOR MESSAGE REPLACED in order
DSAD DISPLAY TEST DSAD board (DISPLAY and
S DSAD DAC REGISTERS TEST FAILED CPU modules)
S DSAD FM MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSAD GRAPHIC MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSAD VERTICAL RETRACE INTERRUPT TEST FAILED
DSMP MEMORY TEST DSMP board (MEM module)
S DSMP TRANSVAG MEMORY TEST FAILED DSAD board (CPU module)
S DSMP RANDOM ACCESS DATA BUS TEST FAILED
S DSMP RANDOM ACCESS ADDRESS BUS TEST FAILED
S DSMP F3D Z SELECTION TEST FAILED
S DSMP PARAVAG MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS ES TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS LS1 TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS LS2 TEST FAILED
S DSMP IMAGE MEMORY TEST FAILED
DSMP PROCESSING TEST DSMP board (PROCESSING
S DSMP ALU operations test failed and MEM modules)
S DSMP F1 multiplications test failed DSAD board (CPU module)
S DSMP F3 divisions test failed
S DSMP COMPARATOR test failed
ACQUISITION TEST DSAD board (ACQ and CPU
S DSAD DIGITALIZATION TEST FAILED modules)
KEYBOARD TEST DSAD board
S KEYBOARD NOT HERE DSKB board
S DSAD REGISTER LED TEST FAILED 60-conductor cable if
most keys are inoperative
DSID HARD DISK TEST FAILED
S DSID RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY TEST FAILED
S UNFORMATTED DISK DSID board
S HARD DISK READ TEST FAILED SCSI + pwr supply cables
S DSID SEQUENTIAL ACCESS MEMORY TEST FAILED Hard disk
S HARD DISK WRITE TEST FAILED DSMP board
DSMP board
DSIP TEST DSIP board
S DSIP TEST FAILED DSAD board
Monitor Messages and Possible Replacements

Illustration 16-13
16-28
REV 1 Source: sm 2128761-100 DSM (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP, DSM 600 IP SEQ) EMC, Rev. 0, Page 1-1
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 1 – DSM DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION OF OPTIONS
This chapter describes:

D The DSM (Basic version and options).
D The installation schedule for the options.
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1–1 Description of Stenoscop 2, Product Line D–6 000 or D–9 000 CCD
See Illustration 1–1.

The DSM (Dedicated Stenoscop Memory) forms the memory of the Stenoscop 2, Line 6 000
or 9 000 mobile intraoperative radiology system.
This system consists of the following two mobile units:
D The C-arm carrier assembly (A) for image acquisition.
D The monitor carrier (B) equipped with:
– One or two monitors (Item 1) (the second monitor is optional),
– DSM unit (Item 2),
– Film imager (Item 4) (optional),
– Hard-copy printer (Item 5) (optional),
– VCR (Item 3) (optional).
This mobile system is delivered with all the power supply and interconnection cables
together with the DSM (Refer to Service Manual of the Stenoscop 2 system).
The DSM is designed for:
D Temporary image storage,
D Display and processing of images on one or two independent monitors, hard-copy
reproduction and connection to a video recorder,
D Graphic overlay.
16-29
The DSM exists in three versions:

D DSM 8 IP comprising:
– Electronics Rack and Console.
– IR (infra-red) remote control unit, with the same controls as those on the left-hand
side of the console.
– IP (Image Processing) module providing the following functions:
– Real-time image subtraction,
– Peak opacification,
– Road mapping,
– Edge enhancement.
D DSM 600 IP.
This comprises one DSM 8 IP with hard disk (600 images).
D DSM 600 IP SEQ comprising:
– DSM 600 IP unit.
– Memory extension (32 images), enabling the acquisition function to be used,
– Dynamic display in Cine-Loop Mode.
16-30
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
STENOSCOP 2
5 A
16-31
1–2 Description of DSM Rack

1–2–1 Labels
The identification and technical data labels (18) are located outside the rack (and can be
seen from the rear on the right).
1–2–2 General Arrangement
The Electronic Equipment Rack (17) is housed inside the monitor carrier (11):
D All the controls are mounted on the console (13) at the front.
D The rear panel (1) carries all electrical connections.
1–2–3 Electronic Equipment Rack
This rack features:

D At the top, the following two printed-circuit boards:
– DSAD2 (Illustration 1–2, Item 3) for Acquisition-Display, EMC version.
– DSMP2 (Illustration 1–2, Item 10) for Memory-Processing.
These two boards plug into each other in the horizontal slideways. The boards are locked in
position by the frame on the rear and by the DSAD2 plate.
In the DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ IP versions, the DSID (disk interface) Board
(Illustration 1–2, Item 9) is secured to Connector XJ1 of the DSMP2 Board (Illustration 1–2,
Item 10).
In the DSM 8 IP/DSM 600 IP and DSM 600 IP SEQ version, the DSIP (Illustration 1–2,
Item 4) Board is connected to the J3 connector on the DSAD2 Board (Illustration 1–2,
Item 3).
In the DSM 600 IP SEQ version, Board DSMP2 has a larger memory module
(Illustration 1–2, Item 19).
16-32
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
DSM RACK
2 3 1 4 5
6
10
11
18
17
19
15
14
13
12
16-33
D Fixed components including:

– Line connection module (Illustration 1–2, Item 5) provided with a switch, two fuses
and a line filter,
– Power supply unit (Illustration 1–2, Item 7) providing + 5V, + 12V and – 12V
rectified voltage outputs. It is connected to J2 of the DSAD Board (Illustration 1–2,
Item 3),
– Fan (Illustration 1–2, Item 6) supplied with +12 V,
– Hard disk (Illustration 1–2, Item 8) specific to the DSM 600 IP and DSM
600 IP SEQ versions and connected to the DSID Board (Illustration 1–2, Item 9).
1–2–4 Console
Inside the console, the front panel (Illustration 1–2, Item 13) is provided with the following:
D The DSKB (keyboard) Board (Illustration 1–2, Item 12),
D The RECIR Board (Illustration 1–2, Item 14) which receives the infrared rays from the
remote control through the receiver (Illustration 1–2, Item15).
16-34
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
J4
J5
J6 CPU
MODULE
STENOSCOP J7
CONSOLE AND
GENERATOR VCR read J18
command
X3
1
2 PUT X4
CCD
J16
CAMERA Video IN
ACQUISITION
(CCD)
J17 MODULE
Video OUT A J9
MONITOR
A (50 Hz)
HCC start J10
REPRODUCTION
HCC video J11
UNIT DISPLAY
VCR video OUT
Video IN J12 MODULE
VIDEO RECORDER
VCR command
Video OUT B J13

MONITOR
B (50 Hz) J14
J15 J3
DSAD 2 DSMP 2
Moniteur A’ J19
Flicker–free 100 Hz
CCD
Moniteur B’
Flicker–free 100 Hz
16-35
1–2–5 Boards

The DSAD2 Board makes the interconnection with:
D The mobile base (through the cables from the monitor cart).
D The console.
D The power supply unit.
D The DSMP2 Board.
The DSAD2 Board comprises:

D Two pushbuttons: S1: Reset.
S2: Abort.
D Eight jumpers: X1: Bus error (configured in plant).

X2: DSAD or DSAD2 functionality.
X3: Frequency selection: 50 or 60 Hz.
X4: PUT (Pick–Up Tube) or CCD function.
X5: CPU clock (configured in plant).
X6: Watchdog.
X7: Enable automatic detection – Read VCR.
X8: Video system adjustment in plant.
D Seven LEDs: DS1 red: DSAD2 test failed.

DS2 red: DSM reset.
DS3 yellow: Video IN OK.
DS4 yellow: VCR acquisition.
DS5 green: –12 V.
DS6 green: +12 V.
DS7 green: +5 V.
The DSAD2 Board is divided into three functional modules assigned to acquisition, display
and CPU:
D The acquisition module has the following three functions:
– Amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the VIDEO IN signal received
from the camera or VCR,
– Synchronization of the DSM on the VIDEO IN signal (PLL phase locking loop) and
generation of the system clock (frequency = 14.75 MHz),
– Generation of the sequencing signals for the entire memory.
16-36
D The display module has the following four functions:

– Data multiplexing of the digitized images to be displayed,
– Digital-to-analog conversion of image data,
– Display in flicker-free mode,
– Image graphic overlay.
This module also provides access to the DSIP Board in the DSM 600 IP or 600 IP SEQ
version.
D The CPU module (organized around a 68000-series microprocessor) has the following
functions:
– Management of the keyboard and associated LEDs,
– Interface with Stenoscop 2,
– Serial interface with the IR (Infrared) receiver,
– Management of the various boards making up the DSM.
DSMP2 Board
This board makes the interconnection with:

D DSAD2 Board.
D DSID (hard disk interface) Board (optional).
D Memory module.
Functionally, it is composed of two modules assigned to memory and processing which

communicate over buses LS1 (sequential reading) and ES (sequential writing), which
operate on a time-shared basis:
The memory module has a capacity of:
D DSM 8 IP or DSM 600 IP version:
Eight images: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
(two working images and six saved images)
D DSM 600 IP CL version:
32 images: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
(two working images and 30 saved images)
It controls the access to this memory in real time and enables the zoom (enlargement)
and vertical and/or horizontal sweep reversal functions.
D The processing module performs real-time image postprocessing through the following
functions:
– Identity function,
– Recursive filtering (active during a fluoroscopy transmission once the video signal
is established). It is provided for noise reduction, increasing the reduction as the
selected weighting coefficient is increased (2, 4, 8 or 16),
16-37
– Integration filtering (active during a pulsed fluoroscopy transmission or an

electronic radiography once the video signal is established). It permits the
integration of two, four, eight or sixteen images, pixel by pixel, at the video rate.
Signal-to-noise ratio increases as the number of integrated images is increased.
– Substraction in single fluoroscopy.
DSKB (keyboard) Board
The DSKB (keyboard) Board has 82 keys. Of these, 31 are illuminated keys:
D Illuminated LED, corresponding to a function in progress.
D Flashing LED, corresponding to a question or an action request for the operator.
RECIR (Infrared Radiation Receiver) Board
The RECIR Board is connected to the CPU module of the DSAD Board through an RS232C
serial link with a transmission rate of 9600 bauds. The Board comprises:
D Infrared-sensitive detector,
D Serial encoder.
The infrared code is a PPM (Plessey Pulse Position Modulation) coding.
DSID (Hard Disk Interface) Board and Hard Disk (DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ version)
The DSID Board:

D Permits hard disk management while respecting real-time processing constraints.
D Complies with the SCSI standard.
D Comprises an image buffer.
The disk forms a 600-images extension of the random-access memory.
DSIP (Image Postprocessing) Board (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ)
In conjunction with the DSMP Board, the DSIP performs the following functions:
D Programmed acquisition sequence,
D Display of sequence recorded on disk in Video Loop Mode,
D Peak opacification to display the peak opacifications of a vascular sequence on only
one image,
D Road mapping used to simplify and facilitate the placing of a catheter in the vascular
system. It combines the subtraction and peak opacification functions,
D Edge enhancement.
16-38
1–2–6 Internal Connections

These comprise the following items:
D Power supply cable connecting the power supply unit to Connector J2 of DSAD2,
D Ribbon cable connecting the DSKB (keyboard) Board to Connector J1 of DSAD2,
D RS232C cable (with telephone connector) connecting the console RECIR Board to
Connector J6 of DSAD2,
D SCSI cable connecting the hard disk to XJ3 of the DSID Board (DSM 600 IP or DSM
600 IP SEQ version),
D Hard disk power supply cable connected to XJ2 of the DSID Board (DSM 600 IP or
DSM 600 IP SEQ version),
D Connector J3 for connection to IP,
D Connector J19 not used.
1–2–7 External Connections
The connections are made at the following rear connectors of the DSAD Board:
D J4/J5: RS232C serial links only used for system debugging (i.e., a terminal
connected at J4 and a computer connected at J5),
D J7: Link between console and Stenoscop generator,
D J8: DSM video input coaxial link from camera,
D J9: DSM video output coaxial link to monitor A (not in flicker-free),
D J10: “START REPRO” coaxial link at DSM output to initiate the imager
(not in flicker-free),
D J11: DSM video output coaxial link to imager; the signal corresponds to
the image displayed on monitor A (not in flicker-free),
D J12: DSM video output coaxial link to video recorder. The signal
corresponds to the image displayed on monitor A,
D J13: DSM video output coaxial link to monitor B (not in flicker-free),
D J14: Video 1 OUT coaxial link in flicker-free mode,
D J15: Video 2 OUT coaxial link in flicker-free mode,
D J16: VCR interface connector,
D J17: Video IN coaxial link between DSM and VCR,
D J18: VCR external read command.
See table below.
16-39
REV 1
16-40
TABLE 1–1
SIGNALS PASSING THROUGH J7
PIN SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION

1 COMMUN I Common return for inputs
9 MG I X-Ray Mode encoding
2 MF I X-Ray Mode encoding
10 MEMO I Stable video
3 VISU I X-rays present
11 CAG– I AGC operating
4 CAG+ I AGC operating
12 SPAREOUT– O Not connected
5 SPAREOUT+ O Not connected
13 RECORDVCR– O VCR recording command
6 RECORDVCR+ O VCR recording command
14 AB– O 2-image mode
7 AB+ O 2-image mode
15 XPERM– O Exposure enable
8 XPERM+ O Exposure enable
16-41
ILLUSTRATION 1–4
REMOTE CONTROL
IR RECEIVER
IR TRANSMITTER
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

2
1 3
5
4 6
8
7 9
11
10 12
14
13 15
17
16 18
20
19 21
16-42
1–3 Remote Control

1–3–1 General Arrangement
The remote control keypad keys are identical to those located on the console keyboard left
hand side.
The remote control is active at power-on (console I/O key On) and the operator can use
either the remote control or the corresponding console keys as desired.
When the console I/O key is OFF (key depression), the remote control is inactive.
1–3–2 Functions
The functions concern the image display:

1 Selection of the variable contrast correction
2–3 Variable contrast correction
4 Antiglare correction
5–6 Vertical and horizontal video reversals
7 Noise reduction filtering
8–9 Image transfer from monitor A to monitor B
10 Display of two images on one monitor
11 Zoom (x 2 duplication)
12 Hard-copy reproduction
13–16 Monitor A animation rate
14–17 Monitor B animation rate
15–18 Image storage
19 Acquisition in subtraction
20 Acquisition in road mapping
21 Acquisition in “Sequence” mode
Video loop in post-processing.
16-43
1–4 Physical Characteristics
Overall dimensions (mm) Length Height Depth

D IR remote control 9.6 190.5 25.4
D Memory Rack 380 190 460
D Console 490 260 100
Maximum weight
D IR remote control 100 g (0.22 lb)
D Memory Rack 18.5 kg (40.7 lb)
D Console 2.2 kg (4.8 lb)
Temperature conditions
D Operating : 10 to 40°C without condensation
D Storage or transport : -40 to +70°C without condensation
D Temperature variation: up to 10°C/h.
Cooling
Fan fitted to rack side.
Relative humidity
Operating: 10 % to 80 % without condensation.
Electrical requirements
D AC line power supply: 207 to 250 V.
50 or 60 Hz.
D Fuses on line power input: 3.2 A/250 V
(slow-blow).
D Consumption: 1 A at line rating
20 A at 5 V.
D Overcurrent protection: upstream of line.
D Resistance between frame and ground: 0.1 ohm maximum.
16-44
Legal specifications
The DSM complies with the following rules and regulations.
D EMC 601–1–2.
D UL 478.
D CSA 22–2–114.
D IEC 601–1.
The labelling complies with the above standards and with internal rules.
1–5 Technical Characteristics
1–5–1 Characteristics
D Storage of eight or 32 images in dynamic memory.

D Black and white display of two independent video channels.
D Two independent contrast windows.
D Displayed image matrix: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
D Video-composition.
D Graphic associated with image.
D Real-time or deferred-time image postprocessing.
D Parallel external interface for the controls and synchronization (isolated by
optocouplers).
D Modular and expandable application software.
D Self-test at power-on or after an initialization.
D Connection of an infrared remote control.
1–5–2 Option
D Connection of a hard disk.

D Image processing module.
1–5–3 Acquisition
D Video input: 1 – volt peak-to-peak composite signal, 75-ohm impedance.

D Video standard (CCIR and RS170 standards):
– 625 lines/50 Hz, two interlaced fields (CCIR).
– 525 lines 60 Hz, two interlaced fields (RS170).
D Scanning ratio: H/V = 4/3.

D Video bandwidth: 6.5 MHz at – 3 dB.
D Signal-to-noise ration greater than 54 dB.
16-45
D Analog-to-digital converter (8 bits § 1/2 LSB).

D Sampling frequency:
50 Hz : 14.75 MHz
60 Hz : 14.89 MHz
D Maximum acquisition rate in dynamic memory:
25 images/second (CCIR)
30 images/second (NTSC).
1–5–4 Display
D Two independent black and white composite video outputs complying with same
standards as the input.
D Output video signal standard same as that of input video.
D Scanning ratio same as that of input.
D Hybrid digital-to-analog converters (eight bits).
D Matrix displayed according to scanning ratio and video standard:
625 lines/50 Hz 576 pixels x 575 lines
D Flicker-free display:
1–5–5 Storage
D 32 Mb memory plane in dynamic RAM. (128 Mb in DSM 600 IP SEQ)

D 4 megaword x 8-bit capacity: eight images.
32 megaword x 8-bit capacity: 32 images.
D Image matrix: 576 x 576 x 12 bits.
D 600 images on the disk.
1–5–6 System
D System controlled by 68000-series microprocessor at 10 MHz.

D Watchdog and power supply control.
D DSMBUG monitor.
D 2 Mbytes of static memory.
D 512 Kbytes of EPROM.
16-46
1–5–7 Processing
D Contrast transformation table independent

D Scroll in increments of 1 on X and Y on the two
D x 2 zoom on X and Y video outputs
D Video multiplexer for mixing two video channels on only one channel, for the
two-image mode.
D Programmable screen field defined within displayed matrix with position and
dimension determined as desired.
D Min/Max function between two images in real time.
D Recursive and averaging filtering to improve signal-to-noise ration of acquired images
by 5 dB (plus movement detection).
D Image addition and subtraction on 12 bits (linear and logarithmic).
D Constant-value image initialization.
D Deferred-time processing by microprocessor.
D 7 x 5 convolution kernel allowing real time processing (e.g., edge enhancement).
1–5–8 Interfaces
D Optoelectronic coupling interface with an external device.

D RS232C serial asynchronous interface.
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DSM 600 IP, CINE-LOOP, AND IP OPTIONS
2–1 Description of Installation Sheets
This section describes the installation of the following options in the DSM Rack:
D M 600 IP comprising:
– Hard disk,
– DSID Board to be plugged into Connector XJ1 of the DSMP2 Board,
– SCSI cable and power supply cable making the connection between the DSID
Board and hard disk.
– Set of PROMs.
D Cine-Loop option:
– Four memory extension modules for the DSMP2 Board.
16-47
REV 1
16-48
16-7 DSM 600 THEORY
CHAPTER 2 – THEORY OF OPERATION
SECTION 1
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
1–1 DSM in its Environment

The DSM is a digital memory mode integral with the Stenoscop 2 systems, product line
6000 or 9000.
It is installed in series in the image system between the camera and one or two monitor(s) for
the acquisition, processing and saving of images.
It enables several types of image to be displayed:
D Real-time image (during examination).
The “dynamic” image, obtained upon emission of the x-rays, is displayed on the first
monitor.
When the x-ray emission is stopped, the image is named type A “frozen” image.
When the x-ray emission is restarted, and if SHIFTAUTO is selected, the type A frozen
image is transferred on the second monitor. It becomes a type B “frozen” image, while
the first monitor displays a new “dynamic” image (for the definition of type A or B
images, refer to Operator Manual/OM, of Stenoscop 2).
D Saved images selected from six or 30 images in the DSM random-access memory.
D Stored images selected from 600 images on the hard disk (M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ
option).
1–2 DSM Organization

The main functions of the DSM are described in paragraph 1–2–5 of Chapter 3, according to
the various boards:
D DSAD2 Board: Modules
– Acquisition,
– Display,
– CPU.
16-49
ILLUSTRATION 2–1
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
DSIR CPU DSKB IP

BOARD MODULE BOARD BOARD
CPU BUS
DSAD2 BOARD
ACQ ACQ
CAMERA VIDEO IN MODULE
VCR VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
A 50 HZ
VIDEO OUT
B 50 HZ
DISPLAY
MODULE
MODULETRAIT
VIDEO OUT
ES A 100 HZ
LS1 VIDEO OUT
LS2 B 100 HZ
DSID MEMORY
BOARD MODULE
LS3
DSMP2 BOARD
16-50
D DSMP2 Board: Modules

– Random-access memory,
– Processing,
– Two options: eight images or 32 images with Cine-Loop.
D DSKB Board: Hardware keyboard.

D RECIR Board: Infrared detection and PPM coding relative to the remote control.
D DSID Board (600 IP or 600 IP SEQ option): Management of hard disk storage.
D DSIP Board (Option M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ) for image processing.
1–3 Power Supply

The DSM:
D Is supplied with 220 V 50/60 Hz power from the Stenoscop 2 220 V terminal block,
D Is provided with an individual ON/OFF switch (I/O) mounted on the line input module
(with filter and fuses),
D Feeds DC power (+ 5 V, + 12 V, and – 12 V) to its various circuits from a low voltage
power supply.
Note: The DSM fan is fed with + 12 V.

ILLUSTRATION 2–2
LINE INPUT
F1 UNIT
220V FILTER
50/60Hz
F2
! GROUND CONNECTION
+5V POWER
–12V SUPPLY LV
+12V
16-51
SECTION 2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2–1 X-Ray Techniques and Display
Three x-ray (XR) techniques are used at Stenoscop 2 and concern the DSM:
D Fluoroscopy,
D Pulsed fluoroscopy,
D Electronic radiography (ER).
The following signals from Stenoscop 2 and injected at J7 of the DSM are associated with
these techniques:
D MF (+) and MG (+) : technique coding,
D MEMORY (+) : if the video is stable,
D DISPLAY (+) : if the XRs are present.
When XRs are present, the images are dynamic and displayed on Monitor A.
A dynamic image postprocessing request (e.g.: filtering) is only serviced when the video
signal is stable (MEMORY active).
The following signals are routed from the DSM to the Stenoscop 2:
D The A/B (+, –) information of the two-image mode,
D The X-PERM signal enabling XR emission or which chops the latter in the pulsed
fluoroscopy and ER modes.
In the event of a DSM failure, do not make an exposure.
16-52
2–1–1 Fluoroscopy

The DISPLAY signal is activated when the XR footswitch is depressed; the DSM displays
the non-filtered dynamic image on Monitor A.
When the video is stable (MEMORY signal), the recursive filter becomes active on the
dynamic image.
ILLUSTRATION 2–3
FLUOROSCOPY TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
40ms
ÉÉÉ
VIDEO IN min
VISU 0.25 s thru 1.6 s

ÉÉÉ
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Frozen image Filtered Filtered dynamic image Filtered frozen image

dynamic image*
Display
Image beeps
40 ms max 40 ms max 40 ms max
* When CCD is on, recursive filtering starts with the VISU signal in a non–subtracted image
without peak–op. In the case of a subtracted or peak–op image, the mask is taken from the
moment the MEMO signal starts to rise (x–rays stable).
When the XR footswitch is released, the last image is frozen and displayed on Monitor A.
16-53
2–1–2 Pulsed fluoroscopy

In the pulsed fluoroscopy mode, when the XR footswitch is depressed, a dynamic image is
displayed on Monitor A for the duration of the first pulse. Then, the refreshed frozen image
is displayed at the end of each XR pulse.
Note: 1. The XR emission duration is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM signal) according to
the processing selected. If the XR footswitch is released before the image is frozen,
the XR emission is not interrupted, and continues up to completion of processing.
2. Integration filtering is used with this mode.
3. The road mapping and peak opacification IP modes (option) are not compatible with
this mode; they are automatically inhibited.
ILLUSTRATION 2–4
PULSED FLUOROSCOPY TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
VIDEO IN
VISU 0.25 s thru 1.6 s
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Frozen Non- Dynamic image

Processing image Filtered frozen image n Dynamic image Filtered frozen image n+1
filtered in integration in integration
image
Image beeps
40 ms max 40 ms max 40 ms max
Frozen Non-filtered
Display image dynamic image n Filtered frozen image n Filtered frozen image n+1
n–1
16-54
2–1–3 Electronic Radiography (ER)

In the electronic radiography mode, when the XR footswitch is depressed, a non-filtered
dynamic image is displayed.
When the video signal is stable (MEMORY signal), the dynamic image is subjected to
integration filtering.
The XR duration is determined by the X-PERM signal delivered by the DSM.
Same remarks as in the preceding paragraph.
Note: 1. X-ray emission time is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM signal) according to the
processing selected. If the Exposure footswitch is released before the image is
frozen, x-ray emission is not interrupted (and continues to the end of processing).
2. Integration filtering is used with this mode.
3. The road mapping, peak opacification, and real-time substraction IP modes (option)
are not compatible with this mode; they are automatically inhibited.
ILLUSTRATION 2–5
ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY (ER) TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
VIDEO IN
VISU
0.25 s thru 1.6 s
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Processing Frozen Non-filtered Dynamic image in integration Filtered frozen image

image dynamic image n
Image beeps
40 ms max 40 ms max
Display Frozen image

Non-filtered dynamic image n Filtered frozen image n
n–1
16-55
2–2 Image Routing
2–2–1 Real Time
The VIDEO IN signal from the camera is digitized by the acquisition module.
It is then transmitted by the acquisition “dynamic” bus (8 bits – 14.75 MHz) to the display
and processing modules.
The acquisition module also extracts the DSM synchronization from the VIDEO IN signal
and generates the sequencing signals for the entire memory.
The display module performs the D/A conversion (composite video) and displays on
Monitor A or B:
D The image from the LS2, LS3 or ACQ buses,
D The image comprising the graphic overlays generated by the display module,
D The image display timing diagrams (according to the various modes described in
paragraph 2–1).
The processing module performs real time image postprocessing such as:
D Identity function,
D In fluoroscopy mode: recursive filtering with selected coefficient, real-time
substraction, and, if IP option is used, peak opacification and road mapping,
D In pulsed fluoroscopy mode: integration filtering according to selected coefficient,
D In ER mode: integration filtering according to selected coefficient.
The processed image is routed:

D On the ES bus (8 bits), to the DSID Board for storage on the hard disk (M 600 IP or
600 IP SEQ),
D On the sequential writing (ES) 8-bit bus, to the memory module.
The memory has a capacity of eight or 32 images (576 x 576 x 8) including two frozen
images and a maximum of six or 30 saved images. The memory read/write is sequentially
shared in time in four cycles as follows:
D One ES writing cycle,
D Three LS1, LS2 and LS3 reading cycles:
– LS1 (8 bits) dedicated to processing.
– LS2 et LS3 (8 bits each) intended for display.
The memory module also performs the image zoom and inversion (X, Y) functions.
16-56
ILLUSTRATION 2–6
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
DSIR CPU DSKB IP

BOARD MODULE BOARD BOARD
CPU BUS
DSAD2 BOARD
ACQ
ACQ
CAMERA VIDEO IN MODULE
VCR VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
A 50HZ
DISPLAY VIDEO OUT
MODULE B 50HZ
MODULE TRAIT
VIDEO OUT
ES
A 100HZ
LS1 VIDEO OUT
LS2 B 100HZ
DSID MEMORY
BOARD MODULE
LS3
DSMP2 BOARD
16-57
Hard-Copy Reproduction
If the hard-copy reproduction function is activated, the frozen image displayed on Monitor
A is transmitted with annotations to the imager.
Storage
It is possible to save:
D A maximum of six or 30 volatile images in the memory module,
D 600 images saved on the hard disk, with the M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ option,
To save, activate the following functions:

D Manual storage: the frozen image is saved by pressing key “MAN”,
D Automatic storage: when the automatic storage function is active, the last image,
acquired after release of the XR footswitch, is saved,
D Storage on the fly: pressing key “MAN” during x-ray emission stores the current
dynamic image (maximum saving rate: 2 i/s, activable in fluoroscopy or pulsed
fluoroscopy mode, but not in ER mode),
D Programmed acquisition sequence (Cine-loop option). This consists of two
sub-sequences during which the acquisition rate (for recording the arterial and venous
phases of a vascular examination) is, for instance:
– 4 i/s for 8 s,
– 2 i/s for 4 s,
Each time an image is saved, the new number is displayed after being incremented.
2–2–2 Deferred Time
Any image saved in the memory or on the hard disk can be restored on Monitor A and/or B
by actuating the animation rate keys.
The images are routed through:
D The DSID Board and the memory module when they are stored on the hard disk,
D LS2 and LS3 buses from the memory module to the display module.
Note: Deferred-time filtering is not possible.
2–2–3 Image Display in Cine-Loop Mode
When images have been stored in programmed acquisition mode, the Cine Loop mode
can be used to display the images at their acquisition rate (see above).
16-58
SECTION 3
DETAILED FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
3–1 Introduction
This section details the functional description divided into:

D Operational functions (initialized from the keyboard or the remote control); they use
the DSM software functions. They perform a specific task and are therefore useful for
failure diagnosis.
D Technical functions: approach through logistic components (module or board) which
is used to know the basic functions of the DSM.
3–2 Operational functions
See Table 2–1.

The operational functions are initialized by the commands input via the DSM keyboard or
remote control keypad.
They are converted by the DSM application software interpreted in the CPU module
PROM.
According to the keys activated, the table gives the DSM modules and boards directly
concerned by the function.
ILLUSTRATION 2–7
KEYBOARD
16-59
TABLE 2–1
OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
Symbols Key Module/Board Concerned
IMAGE MEMORY FUNCTION
– Automatic or manual – DSID-Memory (DSMP2) - DISK

image storage ES, LS1, LS2, LS3
– Animation rate – DSID DISK (option) - Memory (DSMP2)

. Monitor A – Display (DSAD2)
. Monitor B – LS2, LS3
– Automatic or manual – Memory (DSMP2) - DSID - DISK

image clearing – LS2, LS3
– Programmed acquisi- – Memory (DSMP2) - DSID - DISK

tion sequence Cine ACQ (DSAD2) ES - LSI
Loop
– Vertical and horizontal – Memory (DSMP2)

video reversals LS2, LS3
– Automatic or manual – Memory (DSMP2), Display (DSAD2)

image transfer from LS2, LS3
Monitor A to Monitor
B
– Two-image display on – Memory (DSMP2), Display (DSAD2)

one monitor LS2, LS3
– x 2 zoom – Memory (DSMP2)

LS3
IMAGE POSTPROCESSING FUNCTION
– Noise reduction – Processing (DSMP2)

filtering coefficient ACQ, LS1, ES
– Variable contrast – Display (DSAD2)

correction (Gamma) LS2, LS3
16-60
TABLE 2–1
OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
Symbols Key Module/Board Concerned
– Antiglare correction – Display (DSAD2) LS2, LS3
– Real time substraction – Processing (DSMP2) ACQ, LS1
– Peak opacification – Processing (DSMP2)ACQ, LS1
– Road mapping – Processing (DSMP2) ACQ, LS1
– Edge enhancement – DSIP Board
HARD-COPY REPRODUCTION FUNCTION
– EXP reproduction – Display (DSAD2) CPU
ANNOTATION FUNCTION
– New annotation – Display (DSAD2), CPU (DSAD2)
– Modification of – Visu (DSAD20, CPU (DSAD2)

annotations of one
image
– Alphanum key – Alphanum keyboard – Visu (DSAD2), CPU (DSAD2), DSKB
– Modification of – CPU (DSAD2), Display (DSAD2)

annotations of several
images
OTHER
– Arrows (cursor – CPU (DSAD2)

displacement)
– DSM reset – CPU (DSAD2) - DSID - DISK
16-61
ILLUSTRATION 2–8
ACQUISITION MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
FFD
Y SIGNALS
HALF–LINE HALF–LINE
COUNTER COUNTER
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL FFD
SIGNAL SIGNAL X SIGNALS
GENERATION GENERATION
FDD FDD
RG ACQ 2 HALF–LINE HALF–LINE

COUNTER COUNTER XABS
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
SIGNAL SIGNAL X SIGNALS
GENERATION GENERATION
Y SIGNALS
SYNC SIGNAL
EXTRACTION
VCO CK66
X2 /2
VREF
CK33
FFD
RG ACQ 1
OFFSET
COMPENSATION
G=2 RAMP
GEN
CAMERA G=1 ACQ
8 BIT
ADC
G=2.86
6.5MHZ
VCR
OPTION CCD
CLAMP
VREF
G=2
VCR INTERFACE
16-62
3–3 Technical functions
These functions are described in the following order:

D Acquisition module (DSAD2 Board).
D CPU module (DSAD2 Board).
D Display module (DSAD2 Board).
D Memory module (DSMP2 Board).
D Processing module (DSMP2 Board and IP option).
D DSKB (keyboard) Board.
D RECIR (infrared receiver) Board.
D DSID (hard disk interface) Board and disk (M 600 IP, M 600 IP SEQ option).
D DSIP Board.
3–3–1 Acquisition module (DSAD2 Board)
Main functions
D Amplification and digitization of VIDEO IN signal,

D Synchronization of DSM,
D Generation of DSM sequencing signals.
Amplification and digitization of VIDEO IN signal
Input signals generated by the camera or the VCR use the following circuit:
D The differential amplifier (gain = 2), with capacitive couplings, which removes the
common mode components,
D A multiplexer which allows either the signal from the camera or the signal from the
VCR to be selected,
D The clamp system which aligns the video signal on a DC component,
D The 6.5 MHz low-cutoff frequency filter,
D The multiplexer which, during test, replaces the video signal with a ramp signal capable
of scanning all the conversion levels,
D The amplifier (gain = 2.86),
D The converter A/D which numerize the pictures.
D A multiplexer which allows the selection of either:
– a direct output from the converter to the processing and display modules, or
– the insertion of the CCD option on the converter output.
16-63
Synchronization
DSM synchronization uses a VCO (Voltage Control Oscillator) to provide the DSM basic
clock CK66, and another clock signal CK33 (33 ns) specially for the FFD module, from:
D The line sync signal extracted from the Video IN signal at the clamp,
D The X line signal from the sequencer for frequency and phase comparison (PLL).
When the line sync is not extracted from the input video signal, the VCO receives a
reference voltage VREF and generates a clock signal CK66 close to 14.75 MHz (free
mode).
Sequencer
It generates:
D Control signals corresponding to the lines and designated YABS (absolute).
D Control signals corresponding to the pixels and designated XABS (absolute).
D A 9-bit bus XABS for encoding each of the pixels of each half-line between 0 and 471.
D Control signals corresponding to pixels XABS and lines YABS for the FFD.
Interrupts
The acquisition module microprocessor interface generates three interrupts which are
active at the low state and indicate:
D The absence of the video signal at the DSM input (VIDEO IN OK ),
D The instant when the current images enter their visible phase on the monitors
(Start-of-image IT),
D The instant when the current images enter their invisible phase on the monitors
(End-of-image IT).
Acquisition module programming
It is localized at two registers:

D One register (write access) enables the microprocessor to control the various operating
modes of the acquisition module as well as the buzzer.
D The other register (read access) informs the microprocessor as regards the
instantaneous status of the acquisition module.
– A VCR status and the presence of the CCD module.
– FFD module test bits.
16-64
3–3–2 CPU module (DSAD2 Board)
Functions
D “User” interface and management:

– Interface with the Stenoscop.
– Serial interface with the RECIR (infrared reception) Board associated with the
remote control.
– Serial dialog with the maintenance and debugging systems (production only).
– Management of keyboard, monitoring LEDs and buzzer.
D Interpretation of user control inputs and programming of the registers associated with
the various modules (acquisition, display, processing and memory) so as to perform the
task requested.
D Random access to the various memories and registers.
Organization
The CPU module is organized around:

D A 68HC001-series microprocessor sequenced at 10 MHz,
D 512 Kbyte x 8-bit EPROM for the application, test and maintenance,
D “User” 1 Megabyte dynamic RAM with parity bits,
D A DRAM sequencer multiplexes the addresses and refreshes the DRAM data.
A package (LT–1232) accomplishes “watchdog” monitoring and controls the power supply
(“By-pass” is triggered if the watchdog is not refreshed in less than 500 ms or if the 5 V
power supply drops below 4.75 V).
A package (MFP-68901) performs the following functions:
D Timer, available for the software.
D USART used for the serial reception associated with DSIR.
D Interrupt handler.
A package (DUART–68681) manages the communications of two RS232C serial links, one
with a debugging monitor dedicated terminal and the other with a “host” computer.
The CPU module comprises two RESET and ABORT buttons located at the rear of the
DSAD Board.
D RESET button: used to immediately stop all programs. It reinitializes the
microprocessor and input/output devices.
D ABORT button: generates a level 7 non-maskable interrupt. It can be used to stop a
program in progress and return to the debugging monitor control level.
16-65
Interrupts
The “INTER” programmable array logic (PAL) encodes the interrupts at seven levels as
follows:
D Level 7 (ABORT): not maskable.
D Level 6: used when a parity error has been detected.
D Level 5: generated by package MFP-68901 and resulting from 16 interrupt sub-levels.
D Level 4: generated by package DUART-68681.
D Level 3: generated by the DMA 68450 controller located on the disk board.
D Levels 2 and 1: not used on DSM.
Access control
The validity of accesses to the peripherals and various registers is controlled at the
programmable decoding box level.
The “DTACK” signal is generated by:
D Themselves in the case of asynchronous peripherals (MFP, DUART, RAM-CPU, VAG,
IMAGE MEMORY, OVERLAY MEMORY, VIDEO DAC, DISK, IPP).
D An external logic depending on their access time for the synchronous peripherals, i.e.:
– Between 50 and 100 ns for the high-speed peripherals (registers).
– Between 250 and 300 ns for the low-speed peripherals (CPU EPROM, signature
PROM).
3–3–3 Display module (DSAD2 Board)
Main functions
D Multiplexing of digital buses,

D Graphic overlay,
D Generation of analog video signals to 50/60 Hz outputs,
D Generation of analog video signals to 100/120 Hz outputs.
Multiplexing and analog conversion
From the image data arriving on three 8-bit digital buses:

D ACQ : dynamic image from the acquisition module,
D LS2 et LS3 : image from the memory module.
16-66
The display module performs multiplexing (MUX) which enables:

D The digital-to-analog converter DAC A to output an analog video A intended for:
– Monitor A,
– Video recorder,
– Imager.
These video signals come from a same bus and are identical, except for the correction
functions.
D DAC B to output an analog video B intended for monitor B (this video is identical to
video A, or different depending on the digital bus used).
D The two-image display function on a monitor by selecting a different bus for each
half-image.
The image data routing is controlled through a microprocessor interface.
Graphics overlay
The graphic data corresponding to each screen pixel are stored by the microprocessor in two
video RAMs. These memories are controlled by programmable PALs.
The OVERLAY RAMs comprise a serial read/write register which enables reading of data,
at the video rate (14.75 MHz) for application to the inputs of the DACs which perform the
superimposition function with the image data.
Data programming:
D Is performed according to the graphics or annotations which have to be overlaid.
D Also provides access to:
– A mode with no overlays.
– Three overlay gray levels; each of these levels is previously coded (between 0 and
255) in the overlay registers of each DAC.
16-67
ILLUSTRATION 2–9
DISPLAY MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
IP OPTION
RG DISPLAY
8
2 DAC0
ACQ
LS2 MUX
8
LS3
2 DAC1
Graphics Menu
2*512*512*4
2 DAC2
UP FFD MODULE
INTERFACE 8
2 DAC3
16-68
Analog Video Generation 100/120 Hz (FFD Module)
ILLUSTRATION 2–10
ORGANIZATION OF FFD MODULE
GRAPHICS
CHANNELS 1 & 2 VCR MODE
2 * 2 BITS
Graphics Mem. 2/3 Graphics Mem. 2/3
Buffer A Buffer B
2 x 1M x 4 bits 2 x 1M x 4 bits
CHANNEL 2 2 2
(DAC 0)
8 BITS
8 2
Image Mem. 2 Image Mem. 2 Demux P/I
Buffer A Buffer B 8 graphic DAC 2
2 x 1M x 8 bits 2 x 1M x 8 bits ctrl bits 8
2 2
2
Image Mem. 3 Image Mem. 3 8 Demux P/I
Buffer A Buffer B graphic DAC 3
2 x 1M x 8 bits 2 x 1M x 8 bits 8 ctrl bits 8
CHANNEL 3
(DAC 1)
8 BITS
Acquisition/Display DAC
CTRL SIGNALS sequencing loading
Memory control
Frequency doubler
16-69
This module takes the digital data input to the 50 Hz DACs (DAC0 and DAC1), stores it,
rereads it twice as fast, and converts it into analog video signals.
Each channel has two image buffers and two graphics buffers. While one channel is in
acquisition, the other channel is in display, alternating every 40 ms (33 ms).
Timing is shown in the diagram below:
Image 1 Image 1 Image 2

WRITE
Field 1 Field 2 Field 1
Image 0 Image 0 Image 0 Image 0 Image 1 Image 1

READ
Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2
20 ms
The memory buffers are 1 Mbit x 4 DRAMs. To improve the speed, the pixels are placed in
parallel, even pixel/odd pixel, and are then serialized in output from the memory by a PLD,
which also manages the inhibition of the graphics on DAC2 in VCR read mode.
Sequencing is provided by five PLDs:
– Pixel counter and generation of FFD X signals (synchronous from 50/60 Hz
module),
– Line counter and generation of FFD Y signals (synchronous from 50/60 Hz
module),
– Memory address generation,
– Generation of memory control signals (refresh cycles and fast page mode),
– Fast loading of DACs during 100/120 Hz flyback.
16-70
ILLUSTRATION 2–11
MEMORY MODULE ORGANIZATION
1024
CYCLE 1,2,3,4
8i
or
VAG 32 i
RAS–CAS 512
ADDRESS
TRANSAG MUX
uP
adresses
16 pixels x 8 bits
uP interface
XABS
FRAME CYCLE 1,2,3,4
CK66 CTRL
SPPS PROCESSING SPPS DISPLAY
Data uP
8 bits 8 bits
LS1
LS2
8 bits
LS3
8 bits
8 bits ES
A
SOUS
ALU1
ACQ 9 bits
A
LUT
12 bits
8 bits ALU2 12 bits
B
12 bits 12 bits
1 CK B
RECURSIVE 12 bits
MEMORY
16-71
3–3–4 Memory module (DSMP2 Board)
See Illustrations 2–11, 2–12
Random-access memory
The images are stored in a dynamic RAM (capacity: eight or 32 images of 576 x 576 pixels
on eight bits).
An image occupies 1024 x 512 8-bit words in the memory.
Memory access in read or write mode
D In sequential access mode, as regards the processing, display and DSID modules, the
DRAM is sequenced on successive 272 ns/pixel cycles as follows:
– LS1 (cycle 1), LS2, LS3: each one reads 16 words (i.e., 16 x 8 bits) from memory
during its cycle and serializes them into 16 pixels (8-bit pixel for LS1 or 8-LSB
pixel for LS2 and LS3).
– ES (cycle 4): writing of 16 parallelized words into memory (on 16 x 8 bits)
corresponding to 16 pixels on the ES bus. The parallelization/serialization is
performed by SPPS gate arrays.
The image memory addresses are generated by VAG gate arrays.

Address transcoding through TRANSVAG PROM enables the image to be directly
addressed through the X and Y coordinates with no allowance for the 1024 x 512 memory
representation.
D In random access mode (during the ES cycle, with sequential writing inhibited).
The “random” mode only concerns the RAM accesses from the microprocessor.
The P address bus is multiplexed at the VAG outputs. The TRANSVAG PROM is
made transparent such that the whole image memory is accessible to the P.
16-72
ILLUSTRATION 2–12
REPRESENTATION OF STORED IMAGE
576
512
8 or 32
1024
Each stored word (represented on 8 bits) is accessible both for reading and writing.
D A DRAM controller:
– Is used for address multiplexing.
– Generates RAS and CAS for the memories.
– Controls and generates refreshing in mode CAS before RAS.
Zoom and inversion functions
The VAG and SPPS gate arrays enable:

D Zooming on bus LS3, i.e., x 2 enlargement of the center portion of the image displayed
on the screen (can be moved by software).
D Vertical and horizontal video reversals. At the VAG, the zoom and inversion:
D Are achieved by groups of 16 pixels,
D Are defined by programming in registers.
At the SPPS arrays, the zoom and inversion configuration:

D Is achieved by groups of 16 pixels,
D Is enabled through the establishment of levels programmed by a VAG register.
16-73
3–3–5 Processing module (DSMP2 Board and DSIP option)
ILLUSTRATION 2–13
PROCESSING MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
8 bits
ACQ
8 bits
SOUS A
8 bits
ALU1
LS1 9 bits
LUT A
12 bits
ALU2
8 bits 8 bits
B
12 bits 12 bits
1 CK
B
RECURSIVE 12 bits ES
MEMORY
Functions
D In DSM 8 version:
– Identity filtering: i.e., transfer from the LS1 or ACQ bus to the ES output (filtering
coefficient: 1).
– Recursive filtering with movement correction: which can be activated in normal
fluoroscopy mode.
– Integration filtering which can be activated in pulsed fluoroscopy or ER mode.
– Filtered real-time subtraction.
D In DSM IP version:
– Peak opacification (min-max).
– Road mapping.
– Peak opacification with subtraction
Processing Module Main Circuits
D Prescattered circuit SOUS which can either be transparent for bus ACQ or bus LS1,
after the processing module, or perform a subtraction between these two buses.
D Two 16-bit ALUs, performing addition, subtraction or self-bypass operations.
16-74
D One LUT (Two 4-KB PROMs) containing 16 tables of 256 12-bit words:
– Four tables for recursive filtering,
– Four tables for integration filtering,
– Four tables for peak opacification,
– One identity table,
– Three tables for the test.
D One “recursive memory” module, which automatically stores, on 12 bits, the last image
output by the processing module (image n–1). This stored image is then used in the
various processing operations.
This module comprises:
– Six 256K x 4 video RAM triple ports, which can store an image of 1024 x 512 pixels
of 12 bits.
– One sequential address generator.
– One address multiplexer.
– One output data multiplexer.
– Sequencing circuits (see Illustration 2–14).
ILLUSTRATION 2–14
RECURSIVE MEMORY ORGANIZATION
CMDE_MEM1 CMDE_MEM1
CTRL
CMDE_MEM2 12
ES bus
3X 12
TPRAM
18 MUX
uP addresses
9
MUX 12
9 OUTREC
3X
SEQUENTIAL 12
TPRAM
ADDRESS
GENERATOR
CMDE_MEM2
16-75
Functions performed in the processing module:
Identity filtering:
The ACQ or LS1 bus is transferred without modification to the IO output. This mode is
mainly used to initialize the recursive memory before any other processing (recursive
integration).
Recursive filtering with movement detection In =1/N (ACQ – In–1) + In–1
Weighting coefficient N selected at the keyboard among values 2, 4 8 or 16 reduces the
noise: the higher the value of N, the greater is the reduction.
A processing internal “hardware” algorithm suppresses the filter when it detects movement
f the target exposed to XR.
ȍ
N
1
Integration filtering I display = – Ii.
N
i+1
The function integrates 2, 4, 8 or 16 images pixel by pixel at the video rate. The
signal-to-noise ratio is increased as the number of integrated images is increased.
Filtered real-time subtraction
The logarithmic subtraction performed by the SOUS gate and recursive filtering of the
result are sequentially executed in the processing module.
The real time substraction mode is used to enhance and observe a dynamic process (for
instance, progress of a contrast medium in vascular surgery).
The last subtracted image of the sequence remains frozen on the screen.
Peak opacification (min–max) with subtraction
Independently of the contrast medium flux, the peak opacification technique enables the
display on only one image of the maximum opacification of each point of the analyzed
vascular area.
Peak opacification (min-max) without subtraction
Road Mapping I = Log (ACQ) – Log (PO)

Road-mapping facilitates placing a catheter in the vascular network. The road-mapping
procedure comprises:
D Acquisition and storage of a mask image containing the opacified vascular area.
D Substraction between the mask and the fluoroscopy images so that only the opacified
vascular area and the catheter are displayed the surrounding anatomic areas are not
visible).
16-76
3–3–6 RECIR (Infrared Receiver) Board

The RECIR Board mainly comprises:
D An infrared LED receiving the signals from the control,
D A preamplifier,
D A decoder (the infrared code is a Plessey PPM). (Pulse Position Modulation) code),
D A UART which is programmed at power-on and controlled by a clock CK,
D An RS232C serial line interface incorporating the regulators,
The RECIR Board is connected to the DSAD2 Board with a telephone connector,
Characteristics of the RS232C line: 9600 bauds, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
3–3–7 DSID (Hard Disk Interface) and disk (M 600 IP, M 600 IP SEQ Option)
See Illustration 2–15

The hard disk is considered as a 600 images expansion of the random-access memory.
The DSID Board Complies with the SCSI standard.
D Complies with the SCSI standard
D Incorporates a 256-Kword x 32-bit buffer RAM used to write and read a real-time image
in relation to the DSM.
Upon disk access, a direct memory access controller (DMAC) provides the interface
between this buffer and the SCSI controller connected to the SCSI bus.
The data are parallelized and serialized by a PARSER gate array.
3–3–8 DSIP Board
The DSIP Board has a 5 X 7 pixels core to make a real circonvolution on Monitor A, with a
1NMOS IMSA110 integrated circuit.
16-77
ILLUSTRATION 2–15
RECIR BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
2,4576 MHz CK
RS232C J6
PPM UART INTERFACE DSAD
5 1
550 kHz
ILLUSTRATION 2–16
DSID BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
PA 8
B
U 8
BUS ES 8 F BUS PARSER PB DRAM
8
F PARSER 256K*32
E 8
PC
R
8
PD
B
8 U
BUS SCSI SCSI F
DISK 8 CTRL F 18
E CPU 18
R ADDRESS CTRL
DRAM
UDS 18
DMA
B CPU ADDRESS
U BUS C
F
F
E DRQ_SCSI
CPU R DMA
DATA H_VISIBLE
16 BUFFER
B
U
F 8 CPU BUS D
F
E
R
LDS CONFIG.
XABS (8:0)
PARITY HALF/LINE SEQUENTIAL
H_VISIBLE CTRL
V_VISIBLE
16-78
16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
CHAPTER 3 – FUNCTIONAL TESTS
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
There are two categories of functional tests:

D Operational tests to check whether the equipment is in good working order or not,
D Fault analysis diagnostic test for use by a qualified service engineer.
SECTION 2
OPERATIONAL CHECKS AND PRE-DIAGNOSTICS
See job card VF001 and Illustration 3–1.

Job card VF001 applies to start-up of the DSM application.
2–1 Self-test
The self-test initiated prior to start-up of the application is intended to:

1. Detect malfunctions such as:
– Power supply fault,
– Data transmission fault (Parity error),
– Microprocessor malfunction (no “Watchdog” reset),
2. Check that the various modules are accessible (quick test of sequential buses,
memories, registers, etc.),
– No x-rays can be obtained and no images can be obtained on the monitor screens,
Note: When a failure is detected during the self-test, the “POWER UP TEST FAILED: CALL
FIELD SERVICE” message is displayed.
The failure can be confirmed:
D At the LEDs of the DSAD2 Board.
D By performing the corresponding test.
2–2 Operation
If a fault occurs during use of the equipment, refer to table 2 (of Job Card VF 001).
If the fault inhibits the application, its origin must be confirmed by means of one of the
following accesses:
D RESET through the DSAD2 Board pushbutton or switch-off followed by switch-on of
the DSM; the self-test will run as for start-up and will indicate the faulty components.
D Diagnostic.
16-79
ILLUSTRATION 3–1
ACCESS TO FUNCTIONAL TESTS
SWITCH–ON MANUAL
RESET
CPU fatal failure
(3 beeps)
3 beeps EXPOSURE
SELF–TEST INHIBITED
(fault – fatal failure)
1 beep
DSM APPLICATION
TESTS
CALL FIELD SERVICE
SIMULTANEOUSLY PRESS
KEYS G, M and A or D, I, A and G.
(MANUAL MODE)
SCREEN DISPLAY
(FUNCTIONAL TESTS)
Control inputs
available:
0 = EXIT
1 = ALL: Acceptance
2 = QI: Image Quality
3 = BUG: Specialized
Maintenance
4 = FORMAT: Disk
formatting
5 = LEVEL: Test screen
replacement
16-80
DSM (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP, DSM 600 IP SEQ) EMC Job Card VF 001 1 of 8
Purpose: OPERATION CHECK OF DSM Version No.: 1

APPLICATION START–UP Date: 07/93
Time: 0 h 10 min Personnel: User
SECTION 1
RENEWAL PARTS REQUIRED
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Illustration 1.
Tables 1 and 2.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
If the LEDs of the DSAD2 Board need to be checked, remove the rear panel, without performing any
work inside the DSM Rack.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Switch-on
Switch on the Stenoscop 2 by setting the monitor carrier (1) ON/OFF masterswitch to ON.
During normal operation, the screen displays:
D Logo: GE Medical Systems
D Software reference.
D Configuration:
– DSM 8 IP, or
– DSM 8 IP or DSM 600 IP (hard disk and IP Board).
– DSM 600 IP SEQ (DSM 600 IP with 32-image module).
16-81
OPERATION CHECK OF DSM

APPLICATION START–UP Job Card VF 001 2 of 8
5.2 Start–Up Check
D Tests performed (at the bottom):

– KEYBOARD TEST,
– DSAD2 Test display,
– DSAD2 Test memory,
– DSMP2 Test processing,
– DSAD2 Test acquisition,
– DSAD2 Test flicker-free display,
– IP test,
– DSID test,
– Hard disk test.
The following malfunctions may occur:
D Failure of DSM CPU: call in a DSM specialized maintenance inspector.
D A fatal failure is detected by the self-test: same effects as the CPU failure (eg: keyboard not present
because cable not connected).
D A non-fatal failure occurs. The monitor displays:
– The error description (object involved). Example: DSMP2 Test Failed Image Memory, one beep
(displayed for five seconds).
– POWER UP TEST FAILED, CALL FIELD SERVICE.
– One beep is generated.
– For an approximation of the failure diagnostis, see paragraph 5–3 hereafter.
– Then enter the application.
If the M 600 IP, M600 IP SEQ option is used and the disk is not formatted, UNFORMATTED DISK is
displayed. The disk can then be formatted in Maintenance Mode by the FORMAT command.
If the self-test detects no faults:
At the end of the self-test, one beep is generated and the DSM application starts:
D The monitor displays:
– In the case of DSM 8 IP: a black image and two “eye” symbols at the top of the screen as well
as the active configuration.
– In the case of DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ: the latest stored image with its number as well
as the active configuration.
16-82

D The following keys come on:
Filter active and selected with coefficient of 4.
Automatic image clearing.
Infrared remote control active (to deactivate the remote control, press this key which then goes
out).
5.3 Visual Diagnosis of any Failures
See Illustration 1 (location of LEDs DS1 to DS7).

If the DSM is not operational an initial power supply diagnosis can be accomplished at the LEDs of the
DSAD2 Board.
Normal operating status of LEDs
TABLE 1
LED Function ON OFF

DS1 Test failed X
DS2 Memory reset X
DS3 Video present in input X

DS4 VCR input selected X
DS5 -12 V present X
DS6 +12 V present X

DS7 +5 V present X
16-83

ILLUSTRATION 1
DSAD 2 BOARD
X5
DS1 O J4
DS2
DS3
O
O
P1
DS4 O J5
S1 J6
X1
S2
X6
J7
J2
J10 X7 J19
X3 X2
J16
J18
DS5 O
DS6
DS7
O
O
X4
J8 X8 J1
J17
J9
J3
J11
J12
J13
J14
P3
J15
16-84

Connectors
P1 DSMP2 connector
P3 DSMP2 connector
J1 keyboard connector
J2 power supply connector
J3 IP option connector
J4 RS232 debugging connector
J5 RS232 debugging connector
J6 infra-red remote control connector
J7 generator interface connector
J8 camera video input
J9 monitor A video output (25 images/s)
J10 hard-copy control connector
J11 hard-copy printer video output (25 images/s)
J12 VCR video output (25 images/s)
J13 monitor B video output (25 images/s)
J14 monitor C video output (50 images/s)
J15 monitor D video output (50 images/s)
J16 VCR interface connector
J17 VCR video input
J18 connector for VCR read control
Straps
X1 debugging strap (bus error)
X2 DSAD/DSAD2 strap (DSAD2 between 1 and 2)
X3 50/60 Hz strap (50 Hz between 1 and 2, 60 Hz between 2 and 3)
X4 strap between 1 and 2: for PUT camera
strap between 2 and 3: for CCD camera
X5 validation strap for CPU clock
X6 debugging strap (watchdog) between 2 and 3
X7 enable strap for automatic VCR read detection
X8 analog system adjustment strap
Leds
DS1 test failed
DS2 memory reset
DS3 video present in input
DS4 VCR input selected
DS5 –12 V present
DS6 +12 V present
DS7 +5 V present
16-85

TABLE 2
FAULT ISOLATION UPON START-UP

No beep start-up No DSM power . Correctly connect the line cable between the input distribution
supply system and the DSM power input.
. Set the DSM I/O switch to I.
DSAD2 Board power . Check the connections between.
supply failure – Line module and power supply unit.
– Power supply unit and J2 of DSAD2.
. Check that LEDs DS5 to DS7 are “ON” otherwise, incriminate:
– Fuses.
– Filter assembly
– DSM power supply
No monitor image No monitor power On monitor:
supply . Connect the line.
. Set the switch to ON.
No video output sig- Check that LED DS4 is “ON” (Video IN present)
nal If DS4 is “OFF”, go into diagnostic mode “D, I, A, G”
Video input failure . Check the camera-to-J8 of DSAD2 connections.
. DS4 “OFF” . Incriminate:
(incorrect Video IN) – Camera signal.
– ACQUISITION module (DSAD2).
– CPU module (DSAD2)
Keyboard . No DSAD2 . Correctly connect the 60-wire cable to keyboard and J1 of
inoperative connection DSAD2.
. Faulty circuits . Incriminate
– DSKB Board
– 60-conductor cable: DSAD2 (J1) to DSKB (J1)
– DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
“Remote control”
inoperative (with . No connection . Correctly connect telephone connector to RECIR and J6 of DSAD
keyboard I/O key
“ON”) . Faulty circuits . Change the remote control battery.
. Incriminate:
– RECIR Board.
– “Remote control” six-conductor cable.
– Remote control.
– DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
Switchover to Faulty keyboard or . Incriminate:
maintenance CPU – DSKB Board.
mode impossible – DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
16-86

TABLE 2
FAULT ISOLATION UPON START-UP (CONT’D)

Hard disk . Faulty connections . Check the connection of SCSI and power supply cables between
formatting fault hard disk and DSID Board.
(DSM 600 IP/
DSM 600 IP SEQ . Faulty components . Incriminate:
option) – Disk.
– Cables.
– DSID Board.
– DSMP2 Board
– DSAD2 Board (CPU module).
Faulty screen . Faulty graphic . Incriminate DSAD2 Board (CPU module and screen).
dialog generation
. Keyboard board . Replace DSKB Board.
. CPU dialog . Incriminate DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
After the self-test,
a message is See Table 2 See Table 2.
displayed
Note: In all cases, use the maintenance mode to trace the fault origin.
16-87

Blank page
16-88
Purpose: MONITOR MESSAGE AND POSSIBLE Version No.: 0

REPLACEMENTS Date: 08/93
Time: Personnel: User
TABLE 1
ERROR MESSAGE
MONITOR MESSAGE COMPONENT (S) TO BE REPLACED in order
DSMP2 TEST: MEMORY
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: TRANSVAG MEMORY 1. DSMP2 Board (MEM module)

2. DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RANDOM ACCESS DATA BUS
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RAMDOM ACCESS ADRESS BUS
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: IMAGE SELECTION REGISTER
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: VAG MEMORY
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL BUS ES
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL BUS LS1
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: IMAGE MEMORY
DSMP2 TEST: PROCESSING
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: GATE SOUS LUTJ 1. DSMP2 Board (PROCESSING and MEM modules)
2. DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RECURSIV MEMORY
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: GATE SOUS ALU SUBSTRACTION
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: ALU1 SUBSTRACTION

ALU2 SUBSTRACTION
IP TEST
. DSIP TEST FAILED: LUT OF IMS A 110 1. DSIP Board

2. DSAD2 Board
16-89
MONITOR MESSAGE AND POSSIBLE

REPLACEMENTS Job Card VF 002 2 of 2
TABLE 1
ERROR MESSAGE (CONT’D)
MONITOR MESSAGE COMPONENT (S) TO BE REPLACED in order
DSAD2 TEST: DISPLAY
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: DAC REGISTERS 1. DSAD2 Board (DISPLAY and CPU modules)
. DASD2 TEST FAILED: DAC LUT MEMORY
. DSAD2 FM TEST FAILED: GRAPHIC MEMORY
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: VERTICAL RETRACE INTERRUPT
DSAD2 TEST: ACQUISITION
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: ANALOG DIGITAL CONVECTER 1. DSAD2 Board (ACQ and CPU modules)
DSAD2 TEST: FLIKER FREE DISPLAY
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: FLICKER FREE DISPLAY MEMORY 1. DSAD2 Board

2. DSIP Board
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: LINK IP. FLICKER FREE DISPLAY MEMORY
KEYBOARD TEST
1. DSAD2 Board
. KEYBOARD NOT HERE 2. DSKB Board
3. 60–wire cable if most keys are inoperative
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: REGISTER LED
DSID
. DSID TEST FAILED: RANDOM ACCESS TO MEMORY 1. DSID Board

2. DSMP2 Board
. DSID TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL ACCESS TO MEMORY
HARD DISK TEST
. DISK TEST FAILED: UNFORMATTED DISK OR HEADER ERROR 1. Hard disk

2. SCSI supply cables
. DISK TEST FAILED: INIT ERROR 3. DSID Board
. DISK TEST FAILED: WRITE READ AND COMPARE OF LAST

IMAGE ERROR
Note: If no error message is displayed, check the basic version of the memory (DSM 8). If it is ok, add
the options one by one (hard disk and DSID, or DSIP) to find the faulty component as fast as possible.
16-90
SECTION 3
DIAGNOSTIC
3–1 Transition into Maintenance Mode
See illustrations 3–2, 3–3.

To isolate any fault:
D Select the manual mode by simultaneously pressing keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G of
the alphanumeric keyboard.
The test dialog shown by the illustration is displayed on the monitor.
3–1–1 DSM block diagram
The DSM block diagram (documented at the top of the screen) shows the logistic “objects”
(components) of theDSM configuration.
Each component is displayed with:
D The associated designation (DSMP2, etc) wich is marked on the component and used
to identify the renewal P/N (See Chapter 5),
D The associated letter (example: “B” for processing DSMP2 Board).
When this letter is entered at the keyboard, it triggers the component test: see sheet
VF003.
Note: Triggering of x-rays is disabled when a test is in progress.
3–1–2 Manual mode controls
The control line, at the bottom of the screen, provides access to the other manual mode
controls, including:
D 0: EXIT : to exit,
D 1: ALL : “Acceptance” test (see sheet VF101),
D 2: BUG : this function ios not required for maintenance,
D 3: QI = Image Quality
This function makes it possible for a DSM-qualified inspector:
– To check the image performance,
– To adjust the monitors,
D 4: FORMAT: to format the disk,

D 5: LEVEL: change test screen (used for manufacturing).
16-91
Remarks about Image Quality
In the Image Quality menu, triggering of x-rays is enabled.

The Image Quality menu includes the following commands:
D R = ROI in order to:
– Define a rectangular ROI (Region of interest).
Use:
. arrows to move the cursor,
. R to validate,
. Z (as applicable) to clear the ROI.
– Measure the noise and compute the MTF (Modulation Transfer Function).
D P = PROFIL to display a density measurement along a vertical or horizontal profile

(segment).
Use:
. arrows to move the cursor (the cursor is restricted to the top half of the screen),
. R to validate,
. Z (as applicable) to clear the profile.
– The bottom half of the screen displays the density curve along the segment.
D M = PATTERN Three test patterns are proposed (by selecting 1, 2 or 3).

– A camera centering pattern to adjust the image position in relation to the DSM
acquisition window,
– A density pattern designed to match a luminance meter. Press keys 0, 1 ...F
to change the density in 17 pitch increments. The density at the cursor
pixel is displayed at the top left of the screen,
– An overall pattern designed for monitor adjustment: it is a checkerboard pattern
where each square has a different modulation.
D K = CURSOR to change the cursor move rate (in 64-, 32- or 1 pixel increments),
D V = VISU to display or not the latest acquired video image,
D Z = CLEAR to delete graphics (example: ROI, PROFIL),
D X = EXIT to return to the Manual Test Dialog screen.
3–2 Degraded Modes
For DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ options, a self-test-detected failure causes switchover
to degraded configurations under IP and/or disk functionality.
16-92
3–3 Corrective maintenance tools and equipment
Test software, described in this chapter.

Standard tools, including:
D A FACOM tool kit.
D A 2000-point multimeter.
D A 20 MHz dual-trace storage oscilloscope.
D Antistatic bracelet.
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
TEST DIALOG DISPLAY - FIRST LEVEL
DSAD2 DSMP2 IP DSID DISK
A B C D E
0:EXIT 1:ALL 2:QI 3:BUG 4:FORMAT 5:LEVEL
16-93
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
TEST DIALOG DISPLAY - SECOND LEVEL
DSAD2 DSAD2
BUS ACQ Display
Acquisition
BUS LS1 LS2
D LS3 A
DSMP2 DSMP2
Processing ES Memory
C B DSK G
DSKB DSAD2 DSIP
Cpu DSID
F E
BUS ES
0:EXIT 1:ALL 2:QI 3:BUG 4:FORMAT 5:LEVEL
16-94
Purpose: ”MODULE” TEST Version No.: 0

Date: 08/93
Time: 0 h 10 min Personnel: User
SECTION 1
None
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Illustrations 3–1, 3–2, 3–3.

Job Card VF002.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance operations are prohibited on energized equipment.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
Start the DSM application; See sheet VF001.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Access to Maintenance Tests (Manual Mode)
After the DSM application is started, simultanously press keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G.

See Illustrations 3–2, 3–3: TEST DIALOG DISPLAY.
5.2 Module Test
To start a module test, type the associated control letter on the keyboard: the module window is entirely
shown in reversed video.
The test is automatically looped on itself 99 times. It displays the number of bad passes relative to the
number of passes performed in the “Statistic Window”.
16-95
”MODULE” TEST
Job Card VF 003 2 of 2
5.3 Errors
If errors are detected:

D The “Error Window” displays the number of errors with the detail of the first five errors (with the
actual and theorical address values) from the beginning of the test.
D The “Control Window” displays the error description(only for the second level by pressing on key
5).
Diagnostic
The error description pinpoints the module and, as applicable, the faulty links associated with this
module: inference rule (See also Job Card VF002 to determine the corresponding modules to be
replaced).
Example of the Inference Rule: The disk test cannot run correctly unless the memory is OK. If the disk
test results NOT OK, the memory test runs automatically.
To stop the module test in progress

D Press any key (alphanumeric keyboard) to stop the test.
If the test has detected an error, the tested module remains in reversed video. The corresponding
description is displayed in the “Error Window”.
If a key is pressed again:
D The error description disappears.
D The module remains in reversed video.
If the test has detected no error, the tested module display is normal again.
16-96
Purpose: ”DSM ACCEPTANCE” TEST Version No.: 0

Date: 08/93
Time: 0 h 10 min Personnel: 1 GE qualified service engineer
SECTION 1
None
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
None
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance operations are prohibited on energized equipment.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
Start the DSM application; See sheet VF001.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Access to Maintenance Tests (Manual Mode)
After the DSM application is started, simultaneously press keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G.

From the control inputs displayed at the bottom of the screen, select the digit “1” corresponding to
acceptance “ALL” and enter it at the alphanumeric keyboard.
All modules and links are sequentially tested:
D Each module under test is shown in reversed video and blinks for the duration of the test.
D The test of links between two modules is performed at the end of the second module test.
16-97
”DSM ACCEPTANCE” TEST

Job Card VF 004 2 of 2
5.2 Test sequence
The test loops 999 times, but is interrupted if a failure is detected.

The screen displays the error description (module and/or link).
To continue the test, press any key (alphanumeric keyboard): the error description is then deleted.
To stop the test, press any key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
At the end of the test, the main menu is displayed in the control window. If the test is positive, no module
is shown in reversed video. Otherwise, testing modules in detailed maintenance will pinpoint the failed
function.
16-98
REV 1
SECTION 17 - VCR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17-1
REV 1
17-2
5–9 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
DSM PWB DSAD 2

Video IN
Monitor B
9PL2
Video IN
Monitor A
9PL1.
30/31
VCR SONY – SVO 9500

Front view
VCR SONY – SVO 9500
+ Interf. 34 pins
+ Remote Control.
Rear view
ROTATION
Monitor B
+
ROTATION
Monitor A 12 1
CCM 620 VISIPLEX

FILM IMAGER
Coax to UP910
or 75 E plug.
SONY UP 910
PAPER IMAGER
Switch
on 75 E
17-3
5–10 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.
LINE 1
LINE 2
17-4
REV 1
17-5
REV 1
17-6
REV 1 Source: Sony Operating Instructions, Model: SVBK-110, 34-pin Interface Board, Page 3
17-7
REV 1
17-8
REV 1 Source: Sony Videocassette Recorder Operating Instructions, Model: SVO-9500MD, Page 7
17-9
17-10
17-11
17-12
17-13
17-14
17-15
17-16
17-17
17-18
17-19
17-20
17-21
17-22
17-23
17-24
17-25
17-26
17-27
17-28
17-29
17-30
17-31
17-32
17-33
17-34
17-35
17-36
REV 1 Source: Sony Remote Control Unit, Operating Instructions, Model: SVRM-100, Page 4
17-37
17-38
17-39
17-40
17-41
17-42
17-43
17-44
17-45
17-46
REV 1
SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18-1
REV 1
18-2
REV 1 Source: Video Cameras: Operation and Servicing, Page 57
18-3
18-4
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
REV 1
18-10
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Title Page
Technical
Publications
2124131–100
Revision 0
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD

for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
asm
Advanced Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 1995 by General Electric Co.
18-11
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR SI LES
MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un danger lorsque le
manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.
Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cet appareil créant
ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de protection
établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la Commission Internationale sur la
Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source of danger in the
hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing themselves
or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the International
Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado por
personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas utilicen este
aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre las normas de
protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 26: Recomendaciónes de la Comisión Internacional sobre
la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbefugter oder
unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Organismus schädlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche Geräte
bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den gefahrlosen
Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen:
Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
18-12
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 1 – PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 2 – II TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
SECTION 3 – EHV POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
SECTION 4 – OPTICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
SECTION 5 – CCD MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
SECTION 6 – CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
SECTION 7 – CCD VIDEO BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
7–1 Video signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
7–1–1 Video gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
7–1–2 Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
7–1–3 Video output stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
7–2 ABD signal generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
7–3 Control signal generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
SECTION 8 – CCD INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
8–1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
8–2 Remote control of EHV power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
8–3 Iris servo–control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
8–4 Analog circular masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
DR 001 – Imageur head disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
DR 002 – X–ray image intensifier tube disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
DR 003 – EHV power supply disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
DR 004 – Compact optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
DR 005 – Board cage disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
DR 006 – Printed wiring boards disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
18-13
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
3 ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
RG 001 – EHV adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
RG 002 – Compact optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
RG 003 – CCD interface board adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
RG 004 – CCD video board adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
RG 005 – X–ray image intensifier tube adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
4 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
LA 001 – Imageur troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
LA 011 – No image appears on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
LA 012 – Video mask only visible on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
LA 013 – X–ray image out of focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
LA 014 – Image is present but unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
LA 015 – Image too bright or too dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
LA 016 – Generator goes to maximum stop in automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
5 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–i
18-14
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page iii
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
18-15
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page iv
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E

COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA

DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO

AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR

COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
18-16
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page v
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 July, 1995 Initial release
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title page 0
Safety Instructions 0
i thru vi 0
1–1 thru 1–26 0
2–1 thru 2–22 0
3–1 thru 3–36 0
4–1 thru 4–24 0
5–i thru 5–ii 0
5–1 thru 5–48 0
18-17
REV 1
18-18
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 1
CHAPTER 1 – THEORY
SECTION 1
PRESENTATION
The Heads of the Imageur 16 CCD* for Stenoscop and the Imageur 22 CCD* for Stenoscop
6000/9000 are compact, integrated units of attractive design (Ill. 1–1, 1–2, and 1–3),
comprising the following components:
D Cover panels,
D Mechanical mount (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3: Item 1),
D X–ray II tube (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 2):
– Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD = TH9438HX–H560
– Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD = TH9449HP–H506
D High voltage power supply (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 3):
– Thomson TH7191
D Optical assembly with integrated motor–driven Iris (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 4),
D CCD sensor module (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 5),
D Video processing module (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 6, and Ill. 1–4), including:
– Compact rack (Item 1),
– Backpanel board (Item 2),
– CCD Power Supply Board (Item 3),
– CCD Video Board (Item 4),
– CCD Interface Board (Item 5).
D Lead counterweight (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 7),
D Dose rate preamplifier (Ill. 1–2 and 1–3, Item 8).
18-19
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
OPERATIONAL FLOWCHART
COMPACT
OPTICS
IRIS
II
CCD
MODULE
HV POWER
SUPPLY
VIDEO
INTERFACE CCD VIDEO

BOARD BOARD
BOARD
DOSE
MEASUREMENT
INTERCONNECTION
PREAMP
POWER SUPPLY.
BOARD IN 24 V (DC)
IMAGEUR MODULE OUT +5 ±1.5V
INTERCONNECTION CABLE
STENOSCOP
18-20
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP
4
7
3
18-21
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
IMAGEUR 16 CCD FOR STENOSCOP
8 6 3
7
18-22
ILLUSTRATION 1–4
VIDEO PROCESSING MODULE
3 4
18-23
SECTION 2
II TUBE
Type
Thomson TH 9438 HX H560 (3–Field version, 22 cm)
TH 9449 HP H506 (1–Field version, 16 cm)
Note: Field 3 is not used on the Imageur 22.
Operating Principle
The II tube changes the x–ray image into a high intensity image with excellent contrast.
The relief information revealed by the radiation which travelled through the patient, first
passes through the tube input window, which is made up of aluminum foil with very low
absorption and very low diffusion properties. The relief information is then absorbed by the
detector screen behind the input window.
The detector screen changes the x–ray photons into luminous photons. A photocathode
attached to the detector screen is energized by these luminous photons and produces
electrons.
These electrons are then accelerated and focused by electrical fields. The electrons strike a
fluorescent screen (P20 type), forming a high intensity inverted image which is smaller than
the image entering the tube (ratio of 1:9).
The gain in brilliance is obtained from the energy of the accelerated electrons and from the
reduction of the image produced.
18-24
TABLE 1–1
PARAMETERS TH9438HX (22 cm) TH9449HP (16 cm) Unit
Quantal detection efficiency 65 65 %

Typical conversion factor 200 180
cd.m–2
(min.) (150) (140)
Typical contrast ratio 30 20
(min.) (24) (16)
Diameter of image produced 25.2 ±0.2 14.5 ±0.5 mm
Entry field at 1000 mm from focal point:
Normal Mode 215 min. 145 min. mm
Mag 1 Mode 160 ±5 – mm
Typical resolution limit.
Normal Mode:
At center 46 42 lp/cm
At 70% of diameter 44 42 lp/cm
At 93% of diameter 42 40 lp/cm
Mag 1 Mode:
52
At center – lp/cm
50
At 70% of diameter – lp/cm
48
At 93% of diameter – lp/cm
Typical MTF at the center
Normal Mode:
2 lp/cm 97 87 %
5 lp/cm 88 76 %
10 lp/cm 69 54 %
20 lp/cm 33 19 %
Mag 1 Mode:
2 lp/cm 97 %
–
5 lp/cm 90 %
–
10 lp/cm 73 %
–
20 lp/cm 40 %
Protection against x–rays and the magnetic field in the Imageur is provided by a lead casing
combined with metal foil having high magnetic permeability.
Note: II tubes have an automatic getter pumping device; this avoids the formation of an ion
spot which could cause loss of resolution and contrast. When the tube has not been in
service for a long time, it is necessary to allow it to regenerate. If the vacuum in the II
tube is not correct (getter current above 1 µA), a red LED indicator light on the side of the
CCD Interface Board lights up. This light also goes on briefly when power to the
Imageur is switched on.
18-25
SECTION 3
EHV POWER SUPPLY
D The II tube HV power supply unit is designed for use with TH 9438 HX H560 (22 cm)
or 9449 HP H506 (16 cm) tubes.
D The unit is 0–10 V programmable. The potentiometers for adjusting this voltage are
located on the edge of the CCD Interface Board (R1 thru R9).
D The high voltage values VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) are obtained using the
low control voltages vg1 (LV), vg2 (LV) and vg3 (LV) on the basis of the following
relationships:
22 cm 16 cm
VG1(HV) – 40 VG1(HV) – 40
vg1 (LV) volts + 1 ) vg1 (LV) volts + 1 )
34.5 34.5
VG2(HV) – 145 VG2(HV) – 1300

vg2 (LV) volts + 1 ) vg2 (LV) volts + 1 )
139 1300
VG3(HV) – 1300
vg3 (LV) volts + 1 ) –
1300
Note: On 16 cm Imageur units, the G2 electrode of the II tube is connected to the G3 output of
the EHV power supply.
Note: The 9449HP H506 II tube does not have the G3 electrode.
G1 controls the uniformity of focusing.
G2 controls focusing at the center.
G3 controls the diameter of the entry field (for 22 cm only).
FIELD TEST
LOW VOLTAGE
NORMAL MAG1 MAG2 POINT
vg1 R1 R2 – TP4
22 cm vg2 R4 R5 – TP3
vg3 R7 R8 – TP2
vg1 R1 – – TP4
16 cm
vg2 R7 – – TP2
Note: On 22 cm Imageur Housing units, Potentiometers R3, R6 and R9 are inoperative.

On 16 cm Imageur Housing units, Potentiometers R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R8 and R9 are
inoperative.
Note: The test points are on the CCD Interface Board. Make the measurement between the test
points shown on the table and the ground located at TP1 on the CCD Interface Board.
18-26
Specifications
D Size: 160 x 115 x 52.5 mm.

D Power supply: 24 V +10/–15%.
D Consumption: 350 mA (max.).
D Stability over 8 hours: ≤ ±0.5%.
D Temperature stability: ±0.05% between +5° and +55°C.
D Detection of insufficient vacuum for getter current > 1 µA.
D Ripple: < 0.3% peak to peak.
D Thomson reference: TH 7191
THIS POWER SUPPLY UNIT PRODUCES VERY HIGH VOLTAGES AND

WARNING SHOULD NOT NORMALLY BE ENERGIZED WHEN ITS OUTPUTS ARE
DISCONNECTED. IF A TEST IS NECESSARY, STANDARD
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES MUST
BE OBSERVED TO AVOID THE POSSIBILITY OF ELECTROCUTION OR
DAMAGE TO THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT.
IN PARTICULAR, ENSURE THAT GROUNDING CONNECTIONS ARE
NOT OVERLOOKED AND CHECK THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE
CONNECTIONS ARE INSULATED CORRECTLY.
ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR THE
X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE PROVIDE A VERY GOOD
CONTACT WITH THE EHV CONNECTORS TO AVOID ANY DISRUPTIVE
DISCHARGE. REMOVE ANY TRACES OF DIRT OR ROUGHNESS ON
THE CONNECTOR CONTACTS.
SECTION 4
OPTICAL SYSTEM
The new optical design from Rodenstock uses a single short focal lens working in
demagnification mode. The lens is common to all the image intensifiers; only the
demagnification factor is different, allowing several different mechanical adaptations. This
optical coupling mode provides an excellent MTF. The lens includes a motorized iris with
position repeater by potentiometer.
The lens mounting allows:
D Focusing,
D Centering,
D Image alignment.
CAUTION The type of optic depends on II size (16 or 22 cm),

and video standard (50 Hz/625 lines or 60 Hz/525 lines).
18-27
CAUTION An Imageur CCD Stenoscop cannot be modified on site from 50 Hz/625 lines to
60 Hz/525 lines.
Special paper is used to clean the optics (Kodak 1546027).
SECTION 5
CCD MODULE
The CCD module includes:
D A Sony Board carrying the CCD sensor and its electronic control system.
D An Interface Board to which the CCD module is fitted. This Board includes connectors
and interfacing circuits.
These two Boards are paired (adjusted together).
The signals provided by the CCD module are:
D Video signal (coaxial cable): CCD preamp output (Normal Mode) or

composite video (Test Mode), jumper selectable.
D Synchronization signals:
– Pixel clock (not used with Stenoscop),
– Horizontal drive,
– Vertical drive,
– Synchro composite,
– Field parity (not used with Stenoscop).
D The signals are transmitted by a ribbon cable fitted with HE10 16–contact connectors
hooked up to the backpanel board.
In the event of CCD sensor malfunction, the optical system/CCD Module tandem must be
replaced. Note, however, that the CCD sensor has an excellent MTBF (≥50 000 hours)
Sony CCD Module Specifications
There are two versions of this Board (they are not interchangeable).
1. CCB M27 BCE (50 Hz/625 L).

– Number of pixels: 752 x 582 (H x V).
– Dimension sensing area: 6.47 x 4.83 mm (H x V).
– Pixel size: 8.6 µm x 8.3 µm (H x V).
2. CCB M27 B (60 Hz/525 L).
– Number of pixels: 768 x 494 (H x V).
– Dimension sensing area: 6.45 x 4.84 mm (H x V).
– Pixel size: 8.4 µm x 9.8 µm.
18-28
Sony CCD Module Settings
The Sony CCD module settings are made in the factory and need not be changed.
If a replacement is made, the gain setting only should be checked (R1 on the CCD module).
See Job Card RG 003.
SECTION 6
CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD
D The Power Supply Board uses the 24–V voltage supplying the II assembly to provide
the three different voltages required to operate the rack boards:
– +5 V
– +15 V
– –15 V
D This function is mainly performed by the PS1 DC/DC converter, which has the
following specifications:
Input voltage: 18 V to 36 V (dc)
Output voltage: +5 V (max. 5 A) ±1 %
+15 V (max. 1 A) ±1%
–15 V (max. 1 A) ±1 %
Max. power: 55 W
D Protection on the 24–V supply side is provided by Fuse F1 (2AT).
D Switch S1 is used to switch off the entire II assembly (including the EHV power supply
and the dose measurement preamplifier).
D LED DS1 indicates presence of the 24 V voltage,
LED DS2 indicates presence of the +5 V voltage,
LED DS3 indicates presence of the +15 V voltage,
LED DS4 indicates presence of the –15 V voltage.
D The Board also includes a thermal safety device designed to warn the user when the
temperature inside the casing becomes too high. This device consists of a buzzer (LS1)
linked to a temperature sensor (V3) which is placed in contact with the housing of the
DC/DC converter (PS1). This is a strictly passive device which does not inhibit
operation of the Imageur. Sensor V3 supplies a voltage of 10 mV/°C. The reference
voltage for the V2 comparator is defined by the R5/R6 bridge and is selected so that
the buzzer is activated when the temperature reaches 80°C.
SECTION 7
CCD VIDEO BOARD
This Board performs two main functions:
1. Processing of the video signal supplied by the CCD module.

2. Generation of the ABD (Average Brightness Detection) signal which is used by the
generator to control the luminance output.
The block diagram for the Board is given in Ill. 1–5.
18-29
The detailed block diagrams of the sub–functions are given in Ills 1–6 thru 1–11.
7–1 Video signal processing
7–1–1 Video gain
See Illustrations 1–5 and 1–6.
There are two methods of adjusting the video gain.
1. Manual Gain: The gain is set at a specific value using Potentiometer R1.
2. Automatic Gain: The level of the video signal is held constant by means of a control
loop. The regulation circuit uses the ABD signal. Generation of this signal is described
in Para 7–2.
Before the variable gain stage, during the vertical return, pulses (VTEST) are added to the
video signal with amplitude proportional to the ABD signal. The gain control circuit
responds only to the amplitude of the VTEST pulse. These pulses are sampled by U5 in each
frame using the STEST command. The direct current voltage supplied at the output of U5 is
used to control FET Q3 which is set up as a variable resistor via Amplifier AR6.
The ABD signal remains constant and the video gain is fixed for as long as the generator can
provide regulation. As soon as the generator reaches its limit, the amplitude of the ABD
signal decreases and at this point, the variable gain control comes in to keep the amplitude of
the VTEST pulses obtained from the ABD signal constant.
The gain control range is deliberately restricted to:
Max. gain = x 5
Max attenuation = ÷ 2
In Manual Gain Mode, the VTEST pulses have a constant amplitude of 1 V.
The AGCVALID signal is used to switch from Manual Gain to Automatic Gain (see Ill 1–6).
Automatic Gain Mode is possible only if the following conditions are satisfied:
D Fluoroscopy Mode ON.

D CLTV Mode ON.
D A specific time has elapsed since the appearance of the x–rays (typically 750 ms). This
time delay can be adjusted by R12/CCD Video Board.
7–1–2 Gamma correction
In order to preserve data which are present in areas of glare, video processing includes a
three–slope gamma correction function with HLDE (High Level Detail Enhancement) to
obtain a gamma value of around 0.45.
Gamma circuit improvement (Dynamic Gamma) can be selected by Jumper X2. The
principle of this circuit is as follows:
D Given Vo as the video level on uniform image at the Do nominal dose. If the video
signal includes levels where V ≥ 10 Vo, the gamma factor is equal to 0.45.
18-30
D A peak detector made up of AR3, D3, C27, R62 and R63 measures the peak value of
the video signal and adjusts the gamma setting control. When the video level decreases,
gamma correction is reduced and this causes an improvement in contrast, especially on
low dynamic images. The signal provided by the peak detector is sampled at field
frequency by U3 and the ”SAMPLE” command.
Note: Dynamic Gamma is active in Fluoroscopy Mode only.
7–1–3 Video output stage
The video output stage includes two operating modes, which can be selected using
Jumper X4:
1. In Position 1, the signal output on J3 is a composite video signal for Stenoscop

applications (1 V peak–to–peak, including 300 mV for synchronization pulse).
2. In Position 2, the signal output on J3 complies with the specifications of the CCD AV
Board A/D converter (2 V peak–to–peak with no synchronization pulse), which is used
only in R/F applications.
Offset is adjustable by R4.
Level of black is adjustable by R3.
7–2 ABD signal generation
The Average Brightness Detection (ABD) signal obtained from the CCD module video
signal output is used by the generator to regulate luminance in Fluoroscopy Mode.
The video signal sampled prior to automatic gain control is first amplified by AR7 (5 to 6
gain), and then clipped by Q26, Q27 to a level twice the nominal dose.
D Clipping is active in Automatic Gain Mode only,

D Clipping can be made inactive using Jumper X5.
The resulting signal is sampled by the measurement window (AGCWIN signal). This
window is generated by the CCD Interface Board.
A threshold circuit made up of AR10 is used to exclude all portions of the video signals with
a level below the threshold defined by the R11 setting from the measurement window. The
circuit is used to eliminate the harmful effect of the collimation shutters, barite, etc., on
regulation.
The sampled video signal goes to the AR8 integrator, which is reset for each field by the
reset signal.
The logic signal defining the measurement window (corrected for dark areas) goes to a
second AR8 integrator, identical to the first one, which provides data proportional to the
area of the measurement surface.
The ABD signal is the result of the division by U10 of the integrated video signal by the
integrated measurement window to the size of an average value video signal. This signal is
sampled at field frequency by the Sample signal.
18-31
It is used:
1. To make the VTEST signal used in the AGC loop.

This signal is made up of test lines with an amplitude proportional to the ABD signal
and these are added to the video signal during field return (see Section 7–1–1).
2. For the generator regulation loop, there are two possibilities (selection by Jumper X6):
a. In Steno version, the nominal level supplied is +2.1 V.
b. In R/F version, the nominal level supplied is –1 V.
ABD output gain is adjustable by R6.
ABD output offset is adjustable by R13.
3. To make the REC logic signal.
Comparator AR10 switches over when the ABD signal falls below half the nominal
value. This occurs when the generator reaches its limit. Since AGC is in operation,
the image is noisier. The REC signal may be used by the DSM memory to switch over
to a stronger recursive table, in order to reduce the noise.
7–3 Control signal generation
The logic signals generated by the CCD Video Board are:
D Synchronization signals used in the Video Board for video processing purposes (see
Timing, Ill. 1–12 and 1–13).
D Test signal generator CAL GAIN signal which is used to perform calibration without
x–ray generation.
The test signal is made up of a uniform white square and a black porch. The test signal
level can be adjusted using R10.
18-32
ILLUSTRATION 1–5
CCD VIDEO—BLOCK DIAGRAM
CBLK
VIDEO
IN Preset Gain Black Level
Auto Gain
VIDEO
OUT
LOW-PASS GAMMA
FILTER
CAL Fluoro STEST

GAIN Rad
SIGNAL Offset
REGULATION CSYNC
TEST LINES
V TEST
BLACK
LEVEL AGC WIND
THRESHOLD
L TEST
AGC/ABD
WINDOW AGC VALID
1V
ABD Gain
ABD
-s B OUT
A S/H
RAZ B
A GAIN=-1
-s
SAMPLE
GAIN=6 VIDEO ABD offset
SAMPLING
COMPARATOR
REC
OUT
HD RAZ
VD SAMPLE
CIRC BLK L TEST V Ref
BX RAYON S TEST
BCLTV CAL TEST SIGNAL
CONTROL
BPG1 CLP1A
SIGNALS
BLACK LEVEL CLP2A
THRESHOLD
AGC VALID, AGC VALID
CBLK
BPG1
T/H
18-33
ILLUSTRATION 1–6
CCD VIDEO – VIDEO INPUT AMPLIFIER—BLOCK DIAGRAM
J2 Preset Gain BPG1

L1, C7
Q20, Q21 L2, C19, C20 POST
R1 AR1 AR2 AGC
Rejector Q1 Q18 + VIDEO
R2 U1 14 MHZ Clipping Lowpass
_ Filter
Fluoro
CLPIA Q19
Rad
X1
CAL Normal R8
CAL
GAIN CLP2A
Signal
CI
OFFSET
AR11
PRE-AGC
Video
Max DYNAMIC
Gain R7 CLAMP
V TEST
STEST
AR6 AR6
- S/H +
U5
U6 AGC VALID
MANUAL AUTO
GAIN GAIN R5
V Ref
18-34
ILLUSTRATION 1–7
CCD VIDEO – DYNAMIC GAMMA—BLOCK DIAGRAM
BPG1
GAMMA ON/OFF
Gamma ON/OFF X3 ON
U2 -10 V
OFF
R9
-10 V
+10 V
Gamma
T/H
Gamma Dyn/normal X2
THRESHOLD 2
U3
PEAK AR3
POST AGC DETEC
Q5 S/H
VIDEO THRESHOLD 1
V ref=1.8 V
AR3, D3, GAIN = -0.15
C27,
R62, R63
SAMPLE
Q5 Q6 GAMMA OUT
L4
R46
HLDE
THRESHOLD 1 Q6 Q7 THRESHOLD 2
-15 V -15 V
18-35
ILLUSTRATION 1–8
CCD VIDEO – VIDEO OUT AMPLIFIER—BLOCK DIAGRAM
AR4
Q10 Q12 R3
GAMMA OUT Q11 Q13 BLACK LEVEL
GAIN=1,9
CLP1A Q9
CBLK
+ J3
Steno 1 VIDEO
CSYNC _ OUT
B29/J1 X4
R/F 2 1 GAIN= 1.15
2 GAIN=3.53
R4
Offset
ILLUSTRATION 1–9
CCD VIDEO – SIGNAL GENERATION
BPG1
D Q DELAY
BX RAYON AGC VALID
CLK
T/H
VD
BCLTV
18-36
ILLUSTRATION 1–10
CCD VIDEO – AVERAGE BRIGHTNESS DETECTION—BLOCK DIAGRAM
AGC/ABD
WINDOW
AR7 U10
AR8
PRE AGC
Video -s A
AGC VALID
GAIN=5.6 U9
A
RAZ S/H
B
Q14 Q16
CLP1A U7
-s CLIPPING B V Ref = 1 V
SAMPLE
AR8
L TEST
V TEST
White clipping X5 U7
ON OFF
CHOPPER
U11 AR9
AGC Valid
CLIPPING
LOW-PASS FILTER
INVERTER
CLIPPING COMPARATOR REC

HYSTERESIS
A19/J1
Q26, Q27
AR9
GAIN=1
R/F
AR9 ABD
R6 X6
ABD Gain Steno B3/J1
GAIN=3
Offset R13
18-37
ILLUSTRATION 1–11
CCD VIDEO – CONTROL SIGNALS—BLOCK DIAGRAM
R16
Clamp
R14
BPG1
Phase Blanking H CLP1A
CLP2A
R15
RAZ
Calibration signal SAMPLE
width VIDEO CONTROL
SIGNALS VD
R10 (SEE TIMING DIAGRAMS,
Calibration signal ILL. 1-12, AND 1-13) L TEST
amplitude S TEST
CAL GAIN SIGNAL
X1
AGC VALID, AGC VALID
Calibration ON/OFF
T/H
A22/J1
CIRCBLK
A6/J1
BPG1
X7
BLANKING COMPOSITE
GO TO BLACK ON/OFF SIGNAL CBLK
X8 GENERATION
AGC WINDOW ON/OFF
A28/J1
HDCAM
A29/J1
VDCAM
AGC/ABD WINDOW
AGC WIND R11

Post AGC VIDEO BLACK LEVEL
THRESHOLD BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUST
AGC VALID
18-38
ILLUSTRATION 1–12
REV 1
GE Medical Systems
RESET
Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 21
HDCAM
MONO1
VD CAM
VD1
VD2
RAZ =VD1 VD2

18-39
SAMPLE=VD1 VD2
VD2 MONO
BLK=(VD2 MONO1)IVDCAM
MONO2 X1 on B (Calibration)

MONO2 X1 on A (Normal)
LTEST X1 on A and on B
STEST X1 on A and on B
CAL GAIN X1 on B =
MONO2.BLK
ILLUSTRATION 1–13
STEST (X1 in A or B)
MONO 2 (X1 in B)
MONO 2 (X1 in A)
VIDEO IN
MONO 1
HD CAM
CLP1A
BLK
Dashed line: signal status during V Blanking

Black pixels
18-40
SECTION 8
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
This Board combines four distinct functions:
1. Interface,
2. Remote control of the EHV power supply,
3. Iris servo–control,
4. Generation of circular masks (for Stenoscop application only).
8–1 Interface
The interface manages and adapts the remote–control commands coming from the
Stenoscop:
D HINV, VINV (not used with Stenoscop),

D Rad Prep/Go To Black (not used with Stenoscop),
D X–ray ON,
D Advantx Iris Command (not used with Stenoscop),
D CLTV ON,
D Dose 1/Dose 2 (Iris switchover in Fluoroscopy Mode),
D Mag 1 and Mag 2 remote control (for 22 cm).
These signals are transmitted via Optocouplers V18 thru V21.
They are used to generate the following signals:
D BCLTV (CLTV ON, BCLTV = 1, CLTV OFF, BCLTV = 0)

D BPG1 (Rad Prep ON, BPG1 = 1) (not used with Stenoscop)
D BXRAY ON (XRAY ON, BXRAY ON = 1)
D BINV H and BINV V (not used with Stenoscop).
The default position of the sweep reversals when power is turned on can be altered by
Jumpers X3 and X4, on Imageur RF only.
D CSYNC
D BPG2 (not used with Stenoscop)
This signal indicates presence of x–rays in Radiography Mode with Imageur 22 RF
CCD.
D DOSE This signal determines the position of the Iris in Fluoroscopy Mode.
D IRIS On the Imageur RF, this signal determines the position of the Iris depending
on whether in Fluoroscopy or Radiography Mode:
State 0 = Fluoroscopy,
State 1 = Radiography.
After a request for Rad Prep is made, the Iris Radiography state is maintained until the next
fluoroscopy.
On the Imageur for Stenoscop, the Iris remains in the fluoroscopy position during a
Radiography exposure (Jumper X1 in M position).
18-41
8–2 Remote control of EHV power supply
The EHV power supply control voltages are adjusted by Potentiometers R1 and R9 located
on the edge of the Board.
In Radiography Mode, the Imageur housing returns to Normal Mode, irrespective of the
status of the Mag commands.
The DS1 LED lights up if the vacuum is insufficient (getter current > 1 µA).
8–3 Iris servo–control
The CCD Interface Board contains the servo–control circuits for the motor–driven Iris.
Three Iris value settings are available, and these are determined by the status of the A0 and
A1 inputs of Analog Switch U6:
A0 0 1
A1
0 DOSE 1 DOSE 2
1 Radiography Radiography
On condition that DOSE 1 < DOSE 2
The position of the Iris and the corresponding adjustment potentiometers (R10 thru R12) is
indicated by LEDs DS2 thru DS4.
Switch X2 is used to set up the Imageur for different uses:
D X2 on T – Iris Fluoroscopy in Dose 2 position when power is switched on (RF use).

D X2 on U – Iris Fluoroscopy in Dose 1 position when power is switched on (Stenoscop
use)
When Switch X1 is in the M position, it is used to inhibit changing over the Iris into
radiography position when a Rad Prep request is made.
This mode is used with the Stenoscop.
With the Imageur 22 RF CCD, Switch X1 must be set in the L position.
When Switch X5 is set in the P position, it is used to open the Iris in the position
corresponding to Dose 1 when the REC1 signal goes to 0. This is used to increase the
dynamics of the video signal when the generator can no longer provide regulation.
This function can only be active in Automatic Gain Mode (AGC VALID signal on 0). When
the Iris has switched over, it retains its position until the next fluoroscopy (Circuit U12).
18-42
8–4 Analog circular masks
These masks are used in the Stenoscop application only.
The line integrator is made up of Operational Amplifier U12 and the R/C components
associated with it. It is reset by the HDCAM signal and a part of the U7 analog switch. Its
output supplies a parabola signal at line frequencies aligned on a direct current voltage equal
to +3 V.
The field integrator is made up of Operational Amplifier U10 and the R/C components
associated with it. It is reset by the VDCAM signal and the other part of the U7 analog
switch. Its output supplies a parabola signal at field frequencies aligned on a direct current
voltage equal to +3 V.
The two parabolas are added together using Potentiometer R15 to adjust the H/V ratio. The
diameter of the video mask is adjusted using R16, and the diameter of the ABD sampling
window is adjusted using R17.
For Stenoscop applications, Jumper X7 is in E position and Jumper X8 is in G position.
For R/F applications, Jumper X7 is in F position and Jumper X8 is in H position. In this case,
the circular masks are provided by the digital CCDMT Board.
18-43
REV 1
18-44
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 2-1/2
CHAPTER 2 – DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
18-45
REV 1
18-46
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 2-3
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 DR 001 1 of 2
Purpose: IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY/ Version No.:

REASSEMBLY Date:
Time: 15 min Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD or Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Hex socket Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THIS UNIT IS IN EMC COMPLIANCE WITH THE IEC 601–1–2

WARNING STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY,
ENSURE THAT ALL THE SHIELDS ARE CORRECTLY
INSTALLED.
TAKE ALL USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRONIC

BOARD MANIPULATION (I.E., MATS AND BRACELETS TO
PROTECT AGAINST THE ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).
1. Be careful not to damage the grid on the front panel of the Imageur.
2. Set the column at its lowest position and lock its movement using the transportation rod (see SM of
Stenoscop, chapter 3).
3. Remove power from the Imageur.
4. Recover all mounting brackets.
5. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the Imageur Head,
to facilitate assembly and disassembly.
18-47
IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

DR 001 2 of 2
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for the 16–cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22–cm unit).
2. Set the Stenoscop C–arm in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest
surface.
3. Remove the stop rod (22–cm unit).
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables coming from the C–arm that are connected to the Imageur as follows:
a. Main cable (HE5 connector, 25–contact).
b. Cable connected to the dose measurement preamplifier (two coaxial cables with Subclic plugs
and
supply cables).
c. Green/yellow security cable.
2. Remove the Imageur and position it on its temporary support (four M6 screws).
3. Route the C–arm cables through the opening of the Imageur Chassis facing the C–arm mounting.
5.2 Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.

2. Check that the Imageur cable is properly clamped to ensure correct grounding of the strap with the
chassis.
18-48
Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE Version No.:

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY Date:
Time: 1 hour Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
X–Ray Image Intensifier Tube 9438HX (22 cm) or 9449HP (16 cm).
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Cards RG 001 and RG 002.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.

DUE TO THE RISK OF IMPLOSION, SAFETY GLASSES

DANGER ARE MANDATORY FOR ALL II TUBE HANDLING.
1. Remove power from the Stenoscop.

3. Be careful not to damage the II tube external surface, especially the entry window.
18-49
X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DR 002 2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the unit to facilitate
assembly and disassembly.
2. Set the Stenoscop in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest surface.
3. Prepare an area for II tube disassembly.
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for 16 cm and two M5 screws for 22
cm).
5. Remove the Imageur Head.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the shield from the optical system (Ill. 2–1 and 2–2, Item 1) and the lead ballast (Ill. 2–1 and
2–2, Item 14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 2–1 and 2–2, Item 2).
3. Disconnect the J3 connector (Iris) from the CCD Interface Board (Ill. 2–3, Item 1).
4. On the CCD chip module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the video coaxial cable (Ill. 2–1, Item 4).
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 2–1 and 2–2, Item 5).
5. Remove the optical system as follows:
On 16–cm units:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 2–2, Item 6) (three screws).
On 22–cm units:
a. The two Boards comprising the CCD Module assembly—(CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 2–1, Item 8)
and CCD Interface Module Board (Ill. 2–1, Item 9)—are interconnected by a flexible board (Ill.
2–1, Item 10). Disconnect the flexible board from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws securing the support angle that supports the CCD Interface Module
Board (Ill. 2–1, Item 11).
c. Remove the CCD Interface Module Board – Support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 2–1, Item 6) (three screws).
6. Disconnect the high voltage cables which run from the II tube to the EHV power supply as well as the
cables connected to the EHV power supply ground terminal.
7. Unsolder the EHV contacts from the EHV cables.
18-50

8. Install the EHV connectors and contacts on the replacement II tube High Voltage cables (observe
polarization).
9. Remove the II tube (Ill. 2–1 and 2–2, Item 3):
On 16–cm units:
a. Remove the Imageur front cover (Ill. 2–2, Item 7) (three screws, Ill. 2–2, Item 8).
b. Remove the Imageur CCD rack temporarily to access the mounting screw of the II tube located
under the rack.
c. Remove the three screws securing the II tube to the chassis (Ill. 2–2, Item 9).
d. Remove the II tube from the front.
On 22–cm units:
a. Remove the stop (Ill. 2–1, Item 12).
b. Loosen the II tube mounting clamps on the chassis (Item 13, Ill. 2–1), as well as the clamp screws
(Ill. 2–1, Item 15) on the mounts (Ill. 2–1, Item 16).
c. Remove the rear cover (Ill. 2–1, Item 7) from the Imageur (two screws, Ill. 2–1, Item 17) and
three pins attached to the mounts (Ill. 2–1, Item 16).
d. Remove the three mounting screws (Ill. 2–1, Item 18) securing the II tube to the chassis.
e. Remove the II tube from the front.
5.2 Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.

2. Check that the optics and the II output window are clean. Clean them if necessary, using Kodak
Optical Paper, Ref. No. 1546027.
3. Perform the EHV Power Supply adjustment (see Job Card RG 001).
4. Perform the optical adjustments (see Job Card RG 002).
18-51

ILLUSTRATION 2–1
IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD
4
9 8 1 10
6
14
18
5
11 13
16
12
15
17
18-52

ILLUSTRATION 2–2
IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD
1 2
14
10
18-53

ILLUSTRATION 2–3
VIDEO PROCESSING MODULE
18-54
Purpose: EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY/ Version No.:

REASSEMBLY Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Thomson TH7191 power supply.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Card RG 001.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the 22-cm
unit).
18-55
EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY DR 003 2 of 2
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Loosen and disconnect all EHV connections which run from the EHV power supply to the II tube.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable connected to the EHV power supply.
3. Remove the EHV power supply (four M3 screws).
5.2 Reassembly
1. Recover the connectors and contacts to be soldered from the new power supply. These connectors
may be used to replace the II tube EHV connectors.
2. Secure the new power supply to the supporting metal plate (Imageur 16) or the chassis (Imageur 22)
with the four M3 screws.
3. Reconnect and tighten all the II tube EHV connections on the EHV power supply.
Note: On the TH9449HP H506 16–cm tube, the G2 electrode must be connected to the G3 terminal
of the EHV Power Supply.
4. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the EHV power supply.

5. On the CCD Interface Board, preadjust the control voltages to the minimum setting by turning
Potentiometers R1 thru R9 fully counterclockwise.
6. Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.
7. Perform the RG 001 adjustments.
18-56
Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Compact Optics: 50 Hz/625 lines 22 cm,

60 Hz/525 lines 22 cm,
50 Hz/625 lines 16 cm,
60 Hz/525 lines 16 cm.
CAUTION The optical system model is specific to each Imageur.
It is not possible to replace a 50 Hz/625 line optical system by a 60 Hz/525

line optical system.
The CCD sensor cannot be separated from the optical system. In case of
sensor malfunctioning, the CCD Module optical system assembly (the
two boards are coupled) must be replaced.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Cards RG 002 and RG 003.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/ REASSEMBLY,
INSTALLED.

1. Remove power from the Imageur Chassis.

18-57
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004 2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the
22-cm unit).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the shielding from the optics (Ill. 2–4 and 2–5, Item 1), as well as the lead counterweight
(Ill. 2–4 and 2–5, Item 14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 2–4 and 2–5, Item 2).
3. Unplug the J3 Iris connector on the CCD Interface Board.
4. On the CCD module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the coaxial video cable (Ill. 2–4 , Item 4),
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 2–4 and 2–5, Item 5),
5. Remove the optical system.
On the Imageur 16 cm:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 2–5, Item 6) (three screws, Ill. 2–5, 2–8 and 2–9, Item 3).
On the Imageur 22 cm:
a. The two boards comprising the CCD tandem – (CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 2–4, Item 8) and CCD
Module Interface Board (Ill. 2–4, Item 9)) are coupled by a flexible board (Ill. 2–4, Item 10).
Disconnect them from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws (Ill. 2–4, Item 11) securing the CCD Module Interface Board.
c. Remove the CCD Module Interface Board/support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 2–4, Item 6), (three screws, Ill. 2–4, 2–6 and 2–7, Item 3).
5.2 Reassembly

2. Refer to Job Cards RG 002 and RG 003 for the necessary adjustments.
CAUTION The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 2–7 and 2–9, Item 5) must be
correctly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.
18-58
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004 3 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 2–4
IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2
11 4 9 8 1 10
6
5
3
14
18-59
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004 4 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 2–5
IMAGEUR 16 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2
1 2
14
18-60
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004 5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 2–6
COMPACT OPTICS – IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
3
3
4
4
1 2
3
ILLUSTRATION 2–7
COMPACT OPTICS – IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
3 1
4
5 P1
18-61
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004 6 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 2–8
COMPACT OPTICS – IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD
3 3
4 4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 2–9
5 P1
3 1
18-62
Purpose: BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Board cage.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the Stenoscop C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur rear cover from the Imageur (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22-cm unit).
3. Remove the Imageur rack cover (four M3 screws).
18-63
BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

DR 005 2 of 2
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables connected to the Imageur rack as follows:

a. Iris cable (connected to J3/CCD Interface Board).
b. Imageur cable (connected to J6/CCD Interconnection Board).
c. CCD Module cable (connected to J8/CCD Interconnection Board).
d. Dose measurement preamplifier cable (connected to J5/CCD Interconnection Board).
e. CCD Module coaxial video cable (connected to J2/CCD Video Board).
2. Remove the rack and dose measurement preamplifier assembly (four M4 screws).
5.2 Reassembly
Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
18-64
Purpose: PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY/ Version No.:

REASSEMBLY Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D CCD Power Supply Board.

D CCD Video Board.
D CCD Interface Board.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Job Cards RG003 CCD Interface Board and RG004 CCD Video Board.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTALLED.


SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Housing (three M5 screws for the 16-cm and two M5 screws for
the 22-cm unit).
18-65
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY DR 006 2 of 2
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Disassembly
1. Remove the rack cover (four M3 screws), leaving the lower screws in place.
2. Remove the board(s) that need replacing. To avoid error, colored tabs and handgrips show where
and in what orientation the boards are to be fitted on the rack.
5.2 Reassembly

2. Refer to Job Cards RG 003 and RG 004 for the necessary adjustments.
18-66
CHAPTER 3 – ADJUSTMENT
18-67
REV 1
18-68
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 RG 001 1 of 6
Purpose: EHV ADJUSTMENT Version No.:

Date:
Time: 15 min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Digital voltmeter.
D II Tube Technical Specifications.
D Funk 23 Test Pattern.
D Oscilloscope, 20 MHz minimum bandwidth.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The EHV power supply generates voltages of up to 30 kV (U5).
All the necessary operator and equipment safety precautions must be taken, including most importantly:
1. Check the ground connections.

2. Check the high voltage insulation.
3. Check the condition of the power supply/tube connection contacts.
4. Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to
protect against electrostatic discharge).
5. Read the safety precautions concerning x–radiation.
18-69
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001 2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The adjustments described in this Job Card should be performed when replacing:
D II tube.
D EHV power supply.
1. Remove power from the Stenoscop or from the board cage.
2. Remove the board cage cover.
3. On the CCD Interface Board, turn the R1 thru R9 potentiometers fully counterclockwise (min.
control voltage).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
D High voltage measurement with an EHV measurement box is not necessary for EHV power supply
adjustment.
D The following equations are used to calculate VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) high voltages
from vg1 (HV), vg2 (HV) and vg3 (HV) low voltages:
TABLE 1
22 cm 16 cm
VG1(HV) – 40 VG1(HV) – 40
vg1 (LV)volts 1 ) 1 )
34.5 34.5
VG2(HV) – 145 VG2(HV) – 1300
vg2 (LV)volts 1 ) 1 )
139 1300
VG3(HV) – 1300
vg3 (LV)volts 1 ) –
1300
D Low voltages are adjusted on the CCD Interface Board using the R1 thru R8 potentiometers.
D Voltages VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) are those indicated in the Inspection Acceptance
Report for the II tube.
D Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.
D Adjust the low voltages according to the following table:
18-70
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001 3 of 6
TABLE 2
FIELD TEST
Low Voltage
NORMAL MAG1 MAG2 POINT
vg1 R1, Item 9 R2, Item 10 – TP4, Item 5
22 cm vg2 R4, Item 12 R5, Item 13 – TP3, Item 4
vg3 R7, Item 17 R8, Item 16 – TP2, Item 3
vg1 R1, Item 9 – – TP4, Item 5
16 cm
vg2 R7, Item 17 – – TP2, Item 3
D The test points are on the CCD Interface Board. Make measurements between the test points in the
table and ground, located at TP1 on the CCD Interface Board.
Note: VG1 controls focusing uniformity.
VG2 controls center focusing.
VG3 controls the entry field diameter (on Imageur 22 cm only).
D On the 16–cm versions, low voltages for Magnifiers 1 and 2 must be set at minimum.
D Adjustments can be optimized. Begin by adjusting VG3 (entry field diameter R7 and R8, Imageur
22 cm only) because this adjustment affects the other voltages.
D The center focusing adjustment (VG2) can be optimized on the oscilloscope with the following
procedure:
1. Connect an oscilloscope probe at TP3/CCD Video Board (video output).
2. Place a Funk 23 Test Pattern on the input window of the Imageur (bursts in the vertical direction on
the screen), and run a fluoroscopy sequence at 50 kV with open field.
ILLUSTRATION 3–1
VIDEO OUTPUT—TP3/CCD VIDEO BOARD
10 s/div A
50 mV/div
18-71
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001 4 of 6
3. Observe the modulation on one video signal line.

4. Optimize the VG2 adjustment (R4 and R5 on 22–cm units, R7 on 16–cm units) to obtain maximum
amplitude (A).
II tube supply high voltages and currents used in the Imageur are as follows:
TABLE 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TH 9438 HX H560 (22–cm) Tube
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Normal Magnifier 1 Magnifier 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG1 100 to 300 V 100 to 300 V 100 to 300 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
500 to 1100 V
3.0 to 4.5 kV
500 to 1100 V
6.0 to 8.0 kV
500 to 1100 V
10.0 to 12.5 kV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG4 2.5 to 3.0 kV 2.5 to 3.0 kV 2.5 to 3.0 kV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG5
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 30.0 kV 30.0 kV 30.0 kV
TABLE 4
TH 9449 HP H506 (16–cm) Tube
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Normal
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG1 50 to 150 V
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG2 1.8 to 2.3 kV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VG3 –
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VG4 2.5 to 3.0 kV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VG5 30.0 kV
18-72
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001 5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14
15
16
17
18-73
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001 6 of 6
Blank page
18-74
Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Two copper plates, 175 mm x 175 mm, thickness 1 mm.
D Radcal 2025 AC dosimeter.
D Ionization chamber 20 x 5 x 160 mm.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to
D Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray equipment.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments are performed when replacing the compact optics/CCD Module (consisting of the
CCD Sensor Board and Interface Module Board) assembly.
Note: The two boards comprising the CCD Module are coupled. They must be replaced together.
18-75
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 2 of 10
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Configuration
Check that Jumper X1 (Ill. 9, Item 1) is in the V1 position on the CCD Module.
5.2 Adjustments
5.2.1 Centering and Orientation
The optical system is comprised of two main parts:
D The mounting ring on the II tube (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and 3–9, Item 1).
D The upper part supporting the CCD Module (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and 3–9, Item 2).
1. Check that the three ring mounting screws are tight (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and 3–9, Item 3). Do not
tighten the three screws (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and 3–9, Item 4) securing the upper part of the optical
system to the mounting ring.
2. On the CCD Interface Board, turn R16 completely clockwise to open the circular blanking window
to its maximum, and turn Potentiometer R10 and R11 completely clockwise to open the Iris wide.
3. Place a non–metallic rule on the II tube input window, perpendicular to the C–arm.
4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence using minimum parameters. Center the image in the memory display
window by using the mounting assembly of the optical system upper part. At the same time, ensure
that the image in the patient axis is correctly aligned by running a sweep reversal: The image of the
rule must remain vertical on the screen.
5. Once the centering and orientation correctly adjusted for all sweep reversal positions, tighten the
three screws (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and 3–9 Item 4).
5.2.2 Focusing
1. This adjustment must be performed with open Iris for good accuracy (on the CCD Interface Board,
turn Potentiometers R10 and R11 fully clockwise).
2. Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP3/CCD Video Board (video output).
3. Loosen the locking screw (Ill. 3–7 and 3–9, Item 5) on the adjustment ring (Ill. 3–6, 3–7, 3–8, and
3–9, Item 6).
4. Place a Funk 23 test pattern on the input window of the II tube, with the bursts perpendicular to the
C–arm.
5. Run a wide open fluoroscopy with minimum parameters.
18-76
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 3 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
10 s/div A
50 mV/div
Principal time synchronization base = TP11/CCD Interface Board (VD) 20 ms/div.

Delay time synchronization base = TP12/CCD Interface Board (HD) 10 micro s/div.
6. Observe the modulation on one video signal line.

7. Optimize the focusing adjustment to obtain maximum amplitude (A) by turning the
adjustment ring (Ill. 3–7 and 3–9, Item 6).
8. Tighten the blocking screw.
9. Remove the Funk 23 Test Pattern.
CAUTION The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 3–7 and 3–9, Item 5) and must be
correctly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.
5.2.3 Circular Blanking
1. Circular Blanking:
Adjust the circular blanking window so that it is flush with the useful image of the output window of
the II tube. To do so, use the following potentiometers (see Illustration 3–10):
– R13 = Horizontal centering (Item 31),
– R14 = Vertical Centering (Item 30),
– R15 = Horizontal/Vertical Ratio (Item 29),
– R16 = Diameter (Item 28).
2. ABD window:
Check the diameter adjustment (50% of the useful image) by positioning Switch X8/CCD (Ill. 3–10,
item 25) Video Board to the S position. Adjust via Pot. R17 (Ill. 3–10, item 27), if required.
18-77
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 4 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–4
0.5 A
5.2.4 CCD Module Gain Adjustment Check
Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP2/CCD Video Board, using the same synchronization as in the above
paragraph.
The gain adjustment determines the maximum video level output of the CCD Module.
Readjust the gain as follows:
1. Turn R1 (Ill. 3–11, Item 7), on the CCD module, completely clockwise (gain adjusted to the
minimum).
2. Run a wide open fluoroscopy gradually increasing the parameters until video signal clipping at
TP2/CCD Video Board. Note the video level obtained under these conditions = V1 (A according to
Ill. 3–5).
ILLUSTRATION 3–5
Clipping Level A
Max useful Level B = 0.8 A

= 1.2 V after adjustment
A
B
18-78
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 5 of 10
3. Run a second fluoroscopy sequence while gradually decreasing the parameters, to obtain a value of
0.8 V1 (B according to Ill. 3–5).
4. Adjust R1/CCD module (Ill. 3–5, Item 7) to get 0.8 V1 = 1.2 V "50 mV,
Note: The maximum useful level generated by the CCD Module is considered to be equal to 80% of the
clipping level (when near the saturation level, the CCD sensor is no longer linear).
5.2.5 Dose Adjustment
See Service Manual, Job Card RG 002.
18-79
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 6 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–6
3
3
4
4
1 2
3
ILLUSTRATION 3–7
3
4
2
6 5
P1
5
18-80
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 7 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–8
3 3
4 4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 3–9
2
6 5
5 P1
3 1
18-81
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 8 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–10
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
37
36
35
15
34
16
33
17
32 18
19
31 20
30
29
28
27 26 25 24 23 22 21
18-82
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 9 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–11
CHIP MODULE CCD
1 2 3
V2
V1
TP1 TP3
X1
J2 TP4
TP6 4
TP5
9 5
8 J1
TP7
TP2
7 R1
6
TABLE 1
ITEM
Fuses None
X1 V1 = preamp video output (NORMAL)

Switches 1
V2 = video output (test)
Leds None
Potentiometers 7 R1 Video gain
2 TP1 Composite video output

6 TP2 0V
3 TP3 Video preamp output
Test points 4 TP4 –9 V
5 TP5 +15 V
9 TP6 +7 V
8 TP7 +5 V
18-83
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002 10 of 10
Blank page
18-84
Purpose: CCD INTERFACE BOARD ADJUSTMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Digital multimeter.
D Two copper plates, 175 x 175 mm, 1 mm thickness.
D Radcal 2025AC dosimeter.
D II Tube Technical Specifications.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Take all usual safety precautions for manipulation of electronic boards (i.e., mats and bracelets to
D Read the precautions necessary when working near x–rays.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The adjustments described in this Job Card should be performed when replacing:
D II tube.
D EHV power supply.
1. Remove power from the Imageur.
2. Remove the board cage cover.
3. On the CCD Interface Board, turn the R1 thru R9 potentiometers (Ill. 3–12, Items 9 thru 17) fully
counterclockwise (min. control voltage).
18-85
CCD INTERFACE BOARD ADJUSTMENT

RG 003 2 of 6
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Configuration
Check the position of the switches on the new Board.

TABLE 1
Switch Position Mode

X1 M IRIS command in Stenoscop Mode
X2 U Dose command in Stenoscop Mode
X3 A Preset Horizontal Inversion*
X4 C Preset Vertical Inversion *
X5 Q IRIS/REC Coupling in OFF Mode
X6 R A REC output in ON Mode
X7 E ABD Window in Stenoscop Mode
X8 G Circular Blanking in Stenoscop Mode
X9 J Selection of PG Input in SAS Mode
X10 W IRIS selection in Compact Mode
* Inactive
5.2 Adjustments
EHV Adjustment:
D The command voltages of the EHV power supply must be adjusted on the new CCD Interface Board.
Perform the adjustments as shown on Job Card RG 001.
D Perform the checks on the interface functions with the Stenoscop (see SM RG 001, Sec. 5 and
SM, RG 001, Sec. 7).
Dose Adjustment:
D This is carried out via the CCD Interface Board, and must also be readjusted (see SM, RG 002).
Circular Blanking Adjustment:
D Perform the adjustments described in Job Card RG 002, Para. 5.2.3.
Note: R40 inactive with Stenoscop units.
18-86

RG 003 3 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 3–12
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
37
36
35
15
34
16
33
17
32 18
19
31 20
30
29
28
27 26 25 24 23 22 21
18-87

RG 003 4 of 6
TABLE 2
CCD INTERFACE
ITEM
L R/F
32 X1 IRIS COMMAND M Steno
T R/F
22 X2 COMMAND DOSE SELECTION U Steno
A Norm
21 X3 H SWEEP REVERSAL PRESET B INV
C Norm
19 X4 V SWEEP REVERSAL PRESET D INV
P ON
24 X5 IRIS/REC Q OFF
Switches–Jumpers
R ON
23 X6 AREC OUT S OFF
E Steno
26 X7 ABD WINDOW MODE F R/F
G Steno
25 X8 CIRCULAR BLANKING MODE H R/F
J SAS
20 X9 PG INPUT SELECTION K ADVX
V Anamorphote lens
7 X10 IRIS SELECTION W Compact lens
2 DS1 (red) II tube vacuum default
38 DS2 (green) DOSE 1
Leds
36 DS3 (green) DOSE 2
34 DS4 (green) DOSE RAD.
09 R1 VG1 – N
10 R2 VG1 – Mag 1
11 R3 VG1 – Mag 2
12 R4 VG2 – N
13 R5 VG2 – Mag 1
14 R6 VG2 – Mag 2
17 R7 VG3 – N
16 R8 VG3 – Mag 1
15 R9 VG3 – Mag 2
37 R10 IRIS 1
Potentiometers
35 R11 IRIS 2
33 R12 IRIS RAD
31 R13 H CENTERING
(not used in RF versions)
30 R14 V CENTERING
ANALOG WINDOWS
29 R15 H/V
CIRCULAR
28 R16 BLANKING
DIAMETER
AGC WINDOW
27 R17 DIAMETER
18 R40 BPG2 DELAY
18-88

RG 003 5 of 6
ITEM
1 TP1 0V
3 TP2 VG3
4 TP3 VG2
5 TP4 VG1
TP5 Iris command
TP6 REC 2
Test points
TP7 B X–RAY ON
TP8 B CLTV
TP9 BPG1
TP10 BPG2
6 TP11 VD
8 TP12 HD
18-89

RG 003 6 of 6
Blank page
18-90
Purpose: CCD VIDEO BOARD ADJUSTMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Digital voltmeter.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Take all usual safety precautions for manipulation of electronic boards (i.e., mats and bracelets to
D Read the precautions to take when working near x–rays.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments are made when replacing the CCD Video Board.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Configuration
Check the position of the switches on the new Board.
18-91
CCD VIDEO BOARD ADJUSTMENT

RG 004 2 of 10
TABLE 1
Switch Position Mode
X1 A Video Input in Normal Mode
X2 C Gamma in Dynamic Mode
X3 E Gamma in ON Mode
X4 H Video Output in Stenoscop Mode
X5 I ABD Clipping in ON Mode
X6 L ABD Output in Stenoscop Mode
X7 P Go to Black in ON Mode
X8 R ABD Window visualized in OFF Mode
X9 T AGC activated
1. Connect an ocilloscope probe at TP11/CCD Inteface Board (VD –20 ms/div): synchro principal time
base.
2. Connect an oscilloscope probe at TP12/CCD Interface Board (HD –10µs/div).
5.2 Checks and Adjustments
Put the CCD Video Board on an extension board and perform the following checks:
5.2.1 Clamp Pulse
Test Point: TP21/CCD Video Board
Duration: A = 2.0 ±0.1 µs
ILLUSTRATION 3–13
CLAMP PULSE
Adjustment: If necessary, use R16/CCD Video Board (Ill. 3–22, Item 22).
18-92

RG 004 3 of 10
5.2.2 Test Signal
Duration: B = 40 ± 1 µs
ILLUSTRATION 3–14
TEST SIGNAL
Check the display test pattern.
1. Put X1/CCD Video Board in B position (Ill. 3–22, Item 26).

2. Disconnect the plug from J2/CCD Video Board.
The image should be as in Ill. 3–15.
ILLUSTRATION 3–15
Black
The white/black transition must be

Circular blanking located between the ABD window
and the circular blanking.
White
ABD Window
3. Reconnect the plug to J2/CCD Video Board.

4. Put X1/CCD Video Board in the A position.
5.2.3 Horizontal Blanking
1. Open the video mask to its maximum (R16/CCD Interface Board completely clockwise).
2. Run a wide open fluoroscopy, with open shutters.
Duration: C = 12 ±0.3 µ (625 lines/50 Hz)

C = 11.1 ±0.2 µs (525 lines/60 Hz)
18-93

RG 004 4 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–16
HORIZONTAL BLANKING
Adjustment: if necessary, use R14/CCD Video Board (Ill.9, Item 24).
Note: Replacement Boards are preset for 625 lines/50 Hz. Adjustment must be redone for 525 lines/60 Hz.
3. Adjust the circular blanking and the ABD window. Refer to RG 002, Chapter 5.2.3.
5.2.4 Video Levels
These are adjusted in the factory. They can be controlled easily from the test signal generator on the
Board.
1. Test Signal Level

a. Unplug the J2/CCD Video Board coaxial cable.
b. Put the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the B position.
c. Check the Test Signal level
Level: A = 100 ±5mV
ILLUSTRATION 3–17
TEST SIGNAL LEVEL
Adjustment: If necessary, use R10/CCD Video Board (Ill. 3–22, Item 23)
18-94

RG 004 5 of 10
2. Preset Gain and Black Level (in Manual Mode)

a. Test the following using the Signal Test (see Ill. 3–18):
Level: B = 250 ±5 mV
C = 50 +5 mV
ILLUSTRATION 3–18
PRESET GAIN AND BLACK LEVEL
Adjustment: If necessary, use R1/CCD Video Board (Ill. 3–22, Item 10) to adjust
Preset Gain B and R3/CCD Video Board (Ill. 3–22, Item 13) to adjust Black Level C.
b. Check the D Synchronization level (non–adjustable).
D = 300 ±20 mV (Ill. 3–18).
3. AGC Gain
a. Run a fluoro sequence in Automatic Mode (with Imageur, the x–rays must be ON for the
AGC ON function to be activated).
b. Check the video level and the test signal.
Level: B = 250 ±5 mV
ILLUSTRATION 3–19
AGC GAIN
18-95

RG 004 6 of 10
4. ABD Offset
a. Connect a voltmeter between TP1 and TP7/CCD Video Board.
b. Do not reconnect the coaxial cable to J2/CCD Video Board.
c. Place the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the A position.
d. No video signal is fed to the CCD Video Board input. Under these conditions, check the offset
of the ABD signal, without running an x–ray:
Test Point: TP1–TP7/CCD Video Board
Level: 0 ±20 mV
5. ABD Gain
a. Put the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the B position.
b. The video signal now re–enters the CCD Video Board. Under these conditions, check the ABD
signal.
Test Point: TP1–TP7/CCD Video Board
Level: 2.1 V ±50 mV
6. Gamma
To check the setting of the gamma corrector, the test signal level must be modified as follows:
Level: A = 1000 ±20 mV
ILLUSTRATION 3–20
GAMMA (INPUT TEST SIGNAL)
Adjustment: If necessary, use R10/CCD Video Board.
18-96

RG 004 7 of 10
Under these conditions, check the video output level.

Level: B = 640 ±10 mV
ILLUSTRATION 3–21
GAMMA (OUTPUT TEST SIGNAL)
– Readjust the level of the test signal with the nominal value.
Level: A = 100 ±5 mV
Adjustment: Use R10/CCD Video Board (Ill. 3–22, Item 23).
7. Checking the ABD Offset

a. Reconnect the J2/CCD Video Board coaxial cable.
b. Put the switch X1 in the A position.
c. Under these conditions, check the ABD Offset (in Manual Mode).
Test Point TP1–TP7/CCD Video Board
Level 0 ±20 mV
8. Black Level Threshold

Refer to sm, Job Card RG 004. This adjustment is mandatory.
5.2.5 X–Ray ON Time Delay
Refer to sm, Job Card RG 003.
18-97

RG 004 8 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 3–22
CCD VIDEO BOARD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1
4
1
5
28 1
6
27 1
7
26 1
8
25 1
9
2
24
0
23 22 21
18-98

RG 004 9 of 10
TABLE 2
CCD INTERFACE
ITEM
A = NORMAL
26 X1 VIDEO INPUT MODE B = CALIBRATION
C = DYNAMIC
18 X2 GAMMA MODE D = NORMAL
E = ON
19 X3 GAMA F = OFF
G = R/F
16 X4 VIDEO OUTPUT MODE H = STENO
I = ON (NORMAL)
Switches 27 X5 ABD CLIPPING MODE J = OFF (CALIBRATION)
L = STENO
28 X6 ABD OUTPUT MODE M = R/F
P = ON
21 X7 X7 GO TO BLACK MODE Q = OFF
R = OFF
19 X8 ABD WINDOW DISPLAY S = ON
T = ENABLED
17 X9 X9AGC U = DISABLED
Leds none
10 R1 Gain Preset (Fluoro)
09 R2 Gain Preset (Rad)
13 R3 Video Setup
14 R4 Video Offset
06 R5 AGC Gain
05 R6 ABD Gain
20 R9 Gamma
Potentiometers
23 R10 Test signal level
12 R11 Black level threshold
02 R12 AGC Delay
03 R13 ABD Offset
24 R14 H Blanking
25 R15 Test Signal
22 R16 Clamp Pulse Width
18-99

RG 004 10 of 10
ITEM
11 TP1 0V
08 TP2 Video IN (low bandwidth)
15 TP3 Video OUT (low bandwith)
TP4 ABD video integrator OUT
TP5 ABD window integrator OUT
TP6 ABD divisor OUT
07 TP7 ABD OUT
TP8 Post AGC video OUT
TP9 Black level threshold ref
04 TP10 AGC VALID
Test points TP11 Video preamp OUT
TP12 Post AGC Video OUT
TP13 Gamma peak detection OUT
TP14 Gamma threshold OUT
TP15 Gamma out
TP16 AGC command OUT
TP17 T/H OUT
TP18 REC OUT
TP19 ABD Video IN
TP20 Video OUT (high bandwith)
TP21 Clamp pulse OUT
18-100
Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE Version No.:

ADJUSTMENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS

D Radcal 2025AC dosimeter.
D II Tube Specifications.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to protect
against electrostatic discharge).
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments must be performed when replacing the II tube.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 EHV Adjustments
1. Perform the adjustments described in RG 001, Section 5.

2. Set the vg1 (LV), vg2 (LV) and vg3 (LV) control voltages to obtain the high voltage values
corresponding to those indicated in the Inspection Acceptance Report for the II tube.
3. Try to optimize focusing on the oscilloscope; EHV settings will be optimized following the optical
focusing adjustment.
18-101

ADJUSTMENT RG 005 2 of 2
5.2 Centering, Orientation and Optical Focusing
Perform the adjustments described in RG 002, Paras 5.2.1 and 5.2.2. Make sure the Iris is open before
starting.
5.3 EHV Setting Optimization
With the Iris still in the open position, optimize the EHV settings, especially the center focusing (vg2).
5.4 Dose
Perform the adjustments described in the SM, Job Card RG 002.
18-102
CHAPTER 4 – TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults in the operation of the Imageur are easily traceable because each Imageur
subassembly has a well defined function.
The following Job Cards describe the typical problems which may occur on the Imageur.
Troubleshooting of the Imageur should always be followed by an adjustment, which may

require the use of specialized equipment as well as highly qualified labor.
Note: In most cases, defective parts can be reconditioned in the factory. It is strongly
recommended not to discard or destroy any defective part.
18-103
REV 1
18-104
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 LA 001 1 of 2
Purpose: IMAGEUR TROUBLESHOOTING Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
SECTION 1
NECESSARY REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
D Test pattern (or phantom).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray equipment.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Place a test pattern (or phantom) in the x–ray path.
Run a fluoro sequence in nominal conditions:
D No image appears on the screen – see LA011.

D The video mask is present, but there is no image during x–ray emission – see LA012.
D There is an image, but it is out of focus – see LA013.
D There is an unstable image – see LA014.
D There is a clear image, but with the wrong brightness – see LA015.
This manual describes the most common faults only. For other faults, the Field Engineer must decide the
course of action according to the complexity of the work to be done.
18-105
IMAGEUR TROUBLESHOOTING
LA 001 2 of 2
Blank page
18-106
Purpose: NO IMAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
D No video mask.
No image. D No fluoroscopy symbol.
Video signal at Yes

monitor(s) input?
No Defective monitor(s).
Yes
Video signal at DSM output?
Defective DSM/Monitor
No video connecting cable
Yes
Video signal at DSM input?
Check DSM or DSM/

No Stenoscop interface.
Remove rear cover from Imageur.
Composite video signal Yes

at TP3/CCD video during
Fluoroscopy?
LA0 16
Defective Imageur/
No Stenoscop interface
cable
1 Check for presence of +24 V on
CCD Power Supply Board (DS1).
18-107
NO IMAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

LA 011 2 of 4
DS1/CCD Power Supply

No
Board lit?
Check Fuse F1 on
Yes CCD Power Supply
Board
Fuse F1
Yes
OK?
– Check Imageur/Stenoscop
No Interface cable.
– Check 24–V Power Supply
Replace F1. on Stenoscop.
Find cause of F1 burn–out – Check Switch S1/CCD
Power Supply Board
Fuse Yes
F1 burn–out
again?
Replace CCD
No Power Supply Board.
DS1/CCD No
Power Supply
lit?
Yes
DS2, DS3, DS4 on No

CCD Power Supply
Board lit?
Yes Disconnect CCD Video and CCD

Interface Boards.
If at least one of the three LEDs stays
Put CCD Video Board extinguished, replace CCD Power
on extension board. Supply Board.
Observe composite
blanking signal on
TP36/CCD Video.
18-108

LA 011 3 of 4
Signal on TP36/ Yes

CCD Video is permanently
at Logical State 1.
(+5V)
Go to Black Signal Yes
on Pin 2 of Switch X7/CCD Video
No is at State 1?
No
Observe CCD Video Board video input Imageur/Stenoscop interface is
signal in TP2/CCD Video during a malfunctioning.
Fluoroscopy exposure. Check Go to Black command
(Pin 18 on the Imageur interface
cable).
This command must not be at
Logical State 0 in Fluoroscopy.
Video signal Yes
present?
Replace CCD
No Video Board.
The Imageur can operate by

disabling the Go to Black
Remove cover from optical system. function, which is not used
(Switch X7 in Q position on
the CCD Video Board).
Observe CCD Module video output signal Check CIRC BLK

signal at A22 No Yes
(TP3/CCD Module), during a Fluoroscopy Image reappears
exposure. on Connector J1.
END
C D
18-109

LA 011 4 of 4
C D
Video Yes
Yes CIRC BLK
signal present? permanently at
Logical State 1?
Replace coaxial
No Turn R16/CCD Interface
cable between
CCD Module and CCD No Board completely clockwise. If
Video Board. no image appears, replace
Disassemble optical Check BLK signal CCD Interface Board.
system/CCD module at TP31/CCD Video.
assembly. Observe
video signal in
TP3/CCD Module.
Yes
BLK at Logical
Yes Video State 1 permanently?
signal present?
Check HD (A28)
No and VD (A 29) signal at
No J1/CCD Video Board
Replace CCD
Video Board.
Yes
Signals OK?
Iris blocked in Yes

closed position? Replace
No CCD Video
No Board.
– Remove power from
Imageur.
– Attempt to unlock Iris
by directly turning gears. Check HD and VD
– Check the smooth operation signals on CCD
Check EHV Power Supply of Iris mechanism. Module.
connections (HV cables and – Restore power to HD = Pin 7/J1
flat cable). Imageur chassis. VD = Pin 6/J1
– Check Iris adjustment
functions (R10/R11 on
No CCD Interface Board).
Redo the Connections
connections OK?
No No
Yes Iris OK? Signal OK? Yes
Yes
Replace
Replace EHV Replace ribbon cable
CCD/optical Replace optical system/
Power Supply. between CCD Module
system CCD Module assembly.
and backpanel.
assembly.
END
18-110
Purpose: VIDEO MASK ONLY VISIBLE ON SCREEN Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
Video Mask Only
Observe CCD Video Board video input

signal in TP2/CCD Video during a
Fluoroscopy exposure.
Yes
Video signal
present?
Replace CCD
No Video Board.
Remove cover from optical system.
Observe CCD Module video output signal

(TP3/CCD Module), during a Fluoroscopy
exposure.
18-111
VIDEO MASK ONLY VISIBLE ON SCREEN LA 012 2 of 2
Video
Yes
signal present?
Replace coaxial
No
cable between
CCD Module and CCD
Video Board. Disassemble optical
system/CCD module
assembly. Observe
video signal in
TP3/CCD Module.
Yes Video
signal present?
No
Iris blocked in Yes

closed position?
No
– Remove power from
Imageur.
– Attempt to unlock Iris
by directly turning gears.
– Check the smooth operation
Check EHV Power Supply of Iris mechanism.
connections. – Restore power to
Imageur chassis.
– Check Iris adjustment
functions (R10/R11 on
No CCD Interface Board).
Redo the Connections
connections OK?
No
Yes Iris OK?
Yes
Replace
Replace EHV CCD/optical
Power Supply. system
assembly.
END
18-112
Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE OUT OF FOCUS Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
Remove rear cover from Imageur.
Place a Funk Type 23 Test Pattern or

equivalent on input window of II. Run
a wide open Fluoroscopy sequence at
Dose 1.
Go to Dose 2. Run a fluoro sequence

under same conditions.
Yes
Image sharper?
Readjust the focus.

See Job Card RG002
Para 5.2.2. No
Yes No
Image OK?
Check value of the +24 V on S1/CCD

Power Supply (+10/–15%).
END
18-113
X–RAY IMAGE OUT OF FOCUS

LA 013 2 of 4
No
24 V OK?
Yes
Check 24 V power
supply on Stenoscop.
Check control voltage of II tube.

To do so use:
a. II tube Job Card,

b. Transformation formulas of Job
Card RG001 Section 5 and if
necessary,
c. Focalisation optimization
adjustments of II tube (see Job
Card RG001 Section 5)
All voltages in No
compliance?
Yes
Readjust voltages in
question.
Yes
OK after adjustments?
No END
Unable
No to readjust the voltage in Yes
question? (It stays at 0
V for example.)
CAUTION:
– On the 22 cm, Vg2 is adjusted
using R4 and R5.
– On the 16 cm, Vg2
is adjusted using R7.
B A
18-114

LA 013 3 of 4
B A
Check ribbon cable

between CCD Interface Disconnect the connector
Board and EHV Power from J2/CCD Interface.
Supply.
No
No
Cable OK? Still unable to
adjust the voltage?
Yes
Yes
Replace cable.
Replace the CCD Interface
Board.
Check II tube high voltage
cable connectors.
No
High voltage cable
connectors OK?
Replace connectors or
redo cabling with the Yes
faulty connectors.
Yes No
OK ?
Disconnect the high voltage

END connectors on the EHV
Power Supply, and measure
the output voltage of the EHV
Power Supply using the High
Voltage Measurement Unit.
No
Voltage OK?
Yes
Replace the EHV Power
Supply.
Replace the II tube.
18-115

LA 013 4 of 4
Blank page
18-116
Purpose: IMAGE IS PRESENT BUT UNSTABLE Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
Open Imageur
rear cover
No Yes
Is DS1 red LED
lit or flashing?
Unstable Blow–up. High voltage arcing.

Check high voltage cable Disconnect high voltage connections
connections of II tube on EHV from II tube.
Power Supply. Red DS1/CCD Interface LED
stays lit or flashes. Noise characteristic
of arcing can be heard.
No
Connections OK?
Correct the connections Replace EHV Power Supply.

Yes
No Yes
OK ?
Reconnect II tube and

END carefully cable the connectors
Check stability of control
voltage of EHV Power Supply
on CCD Interface Board. No Yes
OK ?
Replace END
Voltage stable? II tube.
No Yes
Replace Replace
CCD Interface EHV Power
Board. Supply.
18-117
IMAGE IS PRESENT BUT UNSTABLE

LA 014 2 of 2
Blank page
18-118
Purpose: IMAGE TOO BRIGHT OR TOO DARK Version No.:

Date:
Time: Personnel:
Note: Before starting this

procedure, check that the Open rear cover of Imageur.
problem is not due to aging
of the image intensifier (see
sm, Job Card RG 007).
Yes Generator goes to

maximum stop in
Auto Mode?
No
Check the video
See LA016 adjustments using the
test signal (see Job Card
RG 004, Para 5.2.4).
No
OK? Readjust.
Run a fluoro sequence in

Manual Mode with parameters
which give an acceptable image.
Switch between Dose 1 and Dose 2

to check the operation of Iris.
No Iris switches? Yes

(Video level changing)
Check gain adjustment of CCD

Module (see Job Card RG002,
Put CCD Interface Board on an
Para. 5.2.4).
extension board. Check
Dose 1/ Dose 2 interface signal at Note: To do this adjustment,
B9 of Connector J1. ensure that Iris opening
and parameters used allow
proper saturation of sensor.
A B
18-119
IMAGE TOO BRIGHT OR TOO DARK

LA 015 2 of 4
A B
The signal switches

during Dose 1/Dose 2 Adjustment OK?
change. Yes No
No Yes
Make compliant.
Check operation of
LEDs DS1 and DS2 on
CCD Interface Board:
Check interface
Dose 1 Mode = DS2 lit,
on Stenoscop unit.
Dose 2 Mode = DS3 lit.
Yes
Adjustments OK?
Yes
No Imageur No
No operates correctly?
LEDs operated
OK?
Yes D
Replace Compact
Optics/CCD Module
Replace the CCD assembly.
END
Interface Board. Yes
Check Iris connection cable

and connection at J3/CCD
Interface Board.
Check that Jumper X10/CCD
Interface Board is in W position.
No Jumper,
cable and connections
OK?
Yes
Make the cable compliant.
Yes No
OK?
END C
18-120

LA 015 3 of 4
C D
Disassemble Compact Optics Check dose adjustments

and CCD Module assembly. (see sm, Job Card RG 002
Para 5.2).
Iris locked? No
(with power supply Adjustments OK?
Yes switched off)
Yes
No
Make
Attempt to unlock Iris by compliant.
directly manipulating gears.
Check for sticky areas and
correct operation of Iris.
Check that aging of II
tube is not the prob-
lem (see SM
No
OK ? RG007).
No
OK ?
END Yes Check CCD Video
Board
Check operation of Iris motor. adjustments (see
– Disconnect connector at END Job Card RG004
J3/CCD Interface Board. Para. 5.2).
– Send +5 V to motor terminals
(with both polarities).
No Yes
Adjustments OK?
No
Motor runs?
END
Replace the CCD
Video Board.
Replace Compact
Yes
Optics/CCD Module
assembly.
Replace the CCD
Interface Board.
18-121

LA 015 4 of 4
Blank page
18-122
Purpose: GENERATOR GOES TO MAXIMUM STOP IN Version No.:

AUTOMATIC MODE Date:
Time: Personnel:
Remove rear cover of Imageur.
Place 2 mm of copper at x–ray

tube level. Run a fluoro sequence
in Automatic Mode.
No
Image present?
(glare)
Yes
See LA011
Display the ABD window by putt-
ing
X8/CCD Video Board in S position.
1
No Mask displayed?
(50% of useful
Image.)
A
Yes
Check gain and offset

adjustments of ABD signal
using test signal (see Job
Card RG002, Para 5.2.4).
Yes
OK after
adjusting? Yes
No END
Replace the CCD

Video Board.
18-123
GENERATOR GOES TO MAXIMUM STOP IN

AUTOMATIC MODE LA 016 2 of 4
Image stays black.
Put CCD Video Board on extension

board. Check for presence of AGC WIND
signal from CCD Interface Board at A25
on J1/CCD Video Board.
(5–V amplitude pulses).
Yes
Signal OK?
No
Replace the CCD Video Board.
Check configuration of
Jumper X7 on CCD Interface
Board (X7 must be on E).
No
Configuration
OK?
Put X7 on E
Yes
Yes
OK?
END
No
18-124

B
No
Check for presence of

AGC WIND signal at 2 on
Switch X7.
No Yes
Signal present?
– Loose contact between

Check ABD window
connector(s) and backpanel or,
adjustments
– Defective backpanel board.
on CCD Interface Board.
Ok after Yes
adjustments?
No
END
Replace the CCD
Interface Board.
18-125

Blank page
18-126
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 5-i
CHAPTER 5 – SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATION TITLE PAGE
5–1 IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD 625 L 2123012 WIR – REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5–2 IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD 625L 2111958 WIR – REV. B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5–3 CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 60 HZ 2105603 SCH – REV. A – F 1/1 . . . . . . . 5–5
5–4 CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 50 HZ 2105601 SCH – REV. A – F 1/1 . . . . . . . . 5–7
5–5 CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 2105601 ADW – REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5–6 CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION 36003627 030 – REV. B – F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5–7 CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION 36003627 ADW – REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5–8 CARTE CCD INTERFACE 2120439 – REV. A – F 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5–12 CCD INTERFACE BOARD 2120439 ADW – REV. A – F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23
5–13 CARTE VIDEO CCD 2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
5–14 CARTE VIDEO CCD 2103697–2 SCH –REV. C – F 2/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
5–15 CARTE VIDEO CCD 2103697–2 SCH –REV. C – F 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–29
5–21 CARTE VIDEO CCD 2103697–2 ADW – REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
5–22 CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 SCH – REV. B – F 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
5–23 CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 SCH – REV. B – F 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45
5–24 CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 ADW – REV. B – F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47
18-127
REV 1
18-128
ILLUSTRATION 5–1
IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD 625 L
2123012 WIR – REV. A
18-129
REV 1
18-130
ILLUSTRATION 5–2
IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD 625L
2111958 WIR – REV. B
18-131
ILLUSTRATION 5–5
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD
2105601 ADW – REV. A
18-132
ILLUSTRATION 5–3
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 60 Hz
2105603 SCH – REV. A – F 1/1
18-133
ILLUSTRATION 5–5
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD
2105601 ADW – REV. A
18-134
ILLUSTRATION 5–4
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 50 Hz
2105601 SCH – REV. A – F 1/1
18-135
ILLUSTRATION 5–7
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION
36003627 ADW – REV. A
18-136
ILLUSTRATION 5–6
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION
36003627 030 – REV. B – F 1/1
J 1
5 V T P 2
5 V
1
E D GE 6 2
5 V A1 B1
R 5 L S 1
1
4. 22K T P 5 T MB _ 0 5 A2 B2
1 5
0 V A3 B3 0 V
2 6 8 U2 2
I + B
5 V S l m3 1 1
A4 B4
V + 7
R 6 O
681 V – A5 B5
3
G
I – 4
U3 A6 B6
1
3
L M3 5 D
A7 B7
GND
+ Vs
0 V 0 V 0 V
0 V A8 B8
Vo u t 2
A9 B9
1
5 V 0 V
T P 1 A1 0 B1 0
P T 1
1 A1 1 B1 1
– 1 5 V
1 A1 2 B1 2
P S 1
1 D S 2
24 T5 . 1 5K
C3 $555–2303 A1 3 B1 3
11 S E NS E _ + 5 V GRE E N
2 4 V
2 mm
47uF A1 4 B1 4
2 35V 2
8 L 2
0 V S E NS E _ 0 _ 5 V 0 V A1 5 B1 5 0 V
1
L 1 10
+5V
2
4
+Vi 1 + 1 5 V T P 3 A1 6 B1 6
5 9 1uH
+Vi 2 0_5V 0 V
1uH 1 0 V A1 7 B1 7 2 4 V
1 0 V L 3
1
2 – Vi 1 +15V 14
DS 1 A1 8 B1 8
$555–2303 3 – Vi 2 1 0 V
GRE E N 13 1uH
1 0_15V 0 V D S 3 A1 9 B1 9
2 mm C 5 6
C 1 ON | OF F L 4 $555–2303
1
2 –15V 12 GRE E N
100nF 1 A2 0 B2 0
7 2 mm
50V 220uF CA S E C2
2 50V 1uH
R 2 2 A2 1 B2 1
3. 83K R 1 47uF
4. 75K 2 35V
R 3 A2 2 B2 2
2. 15K 2 4 VI N 2 AT _ 2 5 0 V 1
2
A2 3 B2 3
3
1
F 1 4
A2 4 B2 4
5
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
6
A2 5 B2 5
0 V
A2 6 B2 6 S 1
1 ON / OF F
D S 4 A2 7 B2 7
1 $555–2303 0 V
GRE E N
C4 A2 8 B2 8
2 mm
0 V
47uF 2 A2 9 B2 9
2 35V
R 4 – 1 5 V T P 4 A3 0 B3 0
2. 15K
1 A3 1 B3 1
Ma l e
0 V St r a i g h t 0 V
Ed g e
18-137
ILLUSTRATION 5–12
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW – REV. A – F 1/1
18-138
ILLUSTRATION 5–8
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 – REV. A – F 1/4
18-139
ILLUSTRATION 5–12
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW – REV. A – F 1/1
18-140
ILLUSTRATION 5–9
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 – REV. A – F 2/4
18-141
ILLUSTRATION 5–12
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW – REV. A – F 1/1
18-142
ILLUSTRATION 5–10
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 – REV. A – F 3/4
18-143
ILLUSTRATION 5–12
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW – REV. A – F 1/1
18-144
ILLUSTRATION 5–11
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 – REV. A – F 4/4
18-145
ILLUSTRATION 5–21
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 ADW – REV. A
18-146
ILLUSTRATION 5–13
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 1/8
+ 1 5 V
C6
R2 4 3
+ 1 5 V 0 V R2 2 6
+ 1 5 V 100 +1 5 V
100
1 0 0 n F6 3 V
C1 1 1
C7 L 1 3
0 V
1 2 2 Q1 8
0 V Q1 3
2 100nF 63V
SO3 9 0 4 SS T 4 4 0 Q2 0 R2 2 8
27pF 4. 7uH R2 4 4 C1 2 2
1 SO3 9 0 4 3K T P 1 2
63V 3 G D
33 S T P 1 1 R2 2 5 R3 5 1
1
47nF 22
R2 4 6 63V 1 R2 2 4
2. 7K 1 2K
+ 1 5 V 2. 7K 3
C1 5 4. 7uF 25V R2 2 7 R8 C2 2
R2 6 150 +1 5 V 2. 7K – 1 5 V R3 7
R2 0 3
R2 4 1 1K 2 2K 2 1
0 V 0 V D E T V OL
1 2 R2 2 3 4. 7K
100 1 150
+ 1 5 V – 1 5 V R2 5 – 1 5 V 4. 7uF 25V R3 8
3 7 A R1 4 8
– 1 5 V 1 1K
LT1223 1
220 I + V + R3 2 C1 9 V – 1
6 6 SO3 9 0 6 2 S 5
– 1 5 V L 2 I –
2
Q1 8 O2 O 2 O1
O1 22 Q2 1 33pF O2 O P OS T A GC1
R2 4 0 7 G D 2 I – 5
D SS T 4 4 0 S 4. 7uH 2 63V R3 4 220 6
R2 3 R2 2 3
3 G 4 V – 1 I + V + LT1223
33 33 CL P 1 A S 0 V R3 9
SU 4 8 3 7 A R2
1K 0 V 750
Q1 9 S 5 R2 7 C1 6
C1 1 0 R2 2 9 C2 0
1 1 2
S ST 2 1 1 0 V 100nF 63V 100 + 1 5 V
2 1
1 R2 2 2 – 1 5 V 150 33pF P OS T A GC2
2 C1 0 4. 7uF 25V R3 6 150 C2 1
C1 1 100 63V 4. 7uF 25V
C1 1 3
0 V
1. 5uF 1. 5uF R2 0 0 V 100nF 63V
2 25V 1 220 R3 1 2K
25V
VCC – 1 5 V
B P G1 _ U T 1M
R2 3 2
0 V 0 V R2 3 6
1
– 1 5 V 1K
X 9
1
D
I N
7 R2 3 3 C1 1 4
R2 1 V– MA X GAI N
33 4 1 2
V+
100
1 + 1 5 V
3 1. 5uF 25V 0 V
0 V GN R7
5 2 R2 3 4
200
VL A R1 1 2
S2
S1
7
1 0 V
l t 1012
C9 R2 8 3 R2 3 0 V + I – 1K
U1 6
8
100K OO 2
4. 7uF R2 0 4 4. 7K O1 Q2 2
2 10V DG4 1 9 8 I + 3
S
10 +1 5 V R3 0 G
1 V –
1
T P 2 1. 8K
0 V 5 4
G
C1 1 5 SS T 3 0 9
R2 4 5 51 1
2
3
P RE A GC 2. 2nF
Q3 R2 3 1 63V
R2 4 2 D R1 4 4
3 G R2 3 5
R2 4 8 2K S ST 1 1 2 100 0 V – 1 5 V
CA L GA I N S 100 C1 1 2
C6 6 2
10 C1 4 R2 9 1. 5uF 0 V
1 47K
J 2 33K 0 V N ON
25V
2 5. 6pF CAB L
3
100nF63V R1 4 3
V I DEO 3 1 5 3 3
63V 1 2
I N 2
4 R1 R2 0 V Q1 5 V T E S T C1 C1 1 6
3. 3K CR1 9
S O3 9 0 4
200 200 $ BA R4 3
2 2 C6 7 1 0 V 8. 5–40pF 33pF
R1 4 6 R1 4 5
1 1 3 100V 63V
1 2 – 1 5 V
4. 7K 2. 2K
S COP I E GRA P HI E 10uF 16V
0 V
GA I NC ON T
CL P 2 A
18-147
ILLUSTRATION 5–14
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH –REV. C – F 2/8
18-148
ILLUSTRATION 5–15
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH –REV. C – F 3/8
18-149
ILLUSTRATION 5–21
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 ADW – REV. A
18-150
ILLUSTRATION 5–16
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 4/8
18-151
ILLUSTRATION 5–17
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 5/8
18-152
ILLUSTRATION 5–18
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 6/8
18-153
ILLUSTRATION 5–19
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 7/8
18-154
ILLUSTRATION 5–20
CARTE VIDEO CCD
2103697–2 SCH – REV. C – F 8/8
18-155
ILLUSTRATION 5–24
CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO
2120437 ADW – REV. B – F 1/1
18-156
ILLUSTRATION 5–22
2120437 SCH – REV. B – F 1/2
18-157
ILLUSTRATION 5–23
2120437 SCH – REV. B – F 2/2
18-158
REV 1
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19-1
REV 1
19-2
STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 10.a 1 of 1
Purpose: KV CIRCUIT ( 3A12 – R 216 ) – DIAGRAM 23D Version No.: 00

MEASURE WITH WISCONSIN CASSETTE. Date: May 1993
– The use of Wisconsin test cassette is obligatory.
– This measure device is small, constant and accurate.
– This test cassette is also in current use by field servicemen.
– Ref. WISCONSIN X–ray test cassette. Model 101 or 015
– Manufacturer: RMI – PO BOX 44 MIDDLETON
WISCONSIN 53562
– A densitometer.
2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– De–energize the mobile system.
3 – PROCEDURE
– The specification of the maximum voltage for the HF unit is 110 kV +/– 10% : this corresponds to a VHV
value between 99 and 121 kV.
– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that the
VHV is never higher than 114 kV.
– Verify, with Wisconsin test, cassette that the VHV is between 104 and 114 kV : take into account the measure
ment error (relatively high) introduced by indirect measurement from the quality of the X–ray radiation.
– Use the calibration curve of the test cassette for triphase generator.
Use a densitometer.
If the measurements are not consistent, measure the voltage VD as follows :
– Connect, to the ground (0 V of the PCB), pin 3 of 3A12 Op114.
– Connect a digital voltmeter (10 ME input impedance) between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10.
– Select DC mode.
– Switch ON the unit.
– Select MANUAL–FLUORO.
– Select 110 kV – 0.1 mA.
– Initiate fluoro and note the value VD displayed on the voltmeter.
– Remove the bridge between ground and Op114.3.
– VD value must be between 52,5 and 55,5 volts.
– If the results of the VD measure and Wisconsin test cassette are out of tolerances, the unit is faulty.
– If the PCBs are correct, read just 3A12–R216 in order to obtain 54,2 V. (VD).
– With the Wisconsin test cassette, verify that the kV value is now within the tolerances.
See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance
19-3
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
19-4
STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 10.b 1 of 1
Purpose: KV CIRCUIT ( 3A12 – R 216 ) – DIAGRAM 23D Version No.: 00

MEASURE WITH KEITHLEY 35080 Date: May 1993
– Keithley 35080 kVp Divider, (or equivalent)
– (32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV – 135 kV)
– Note : conversion factor for this pack : +.55V
– Digital multimeter
– Oscilloscope
– De–energize the mobile system
– The specification of the maximum voltage for the H.F. Generator is 110 kV +/– 10%, 99 kV to 121 kV.
– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that 114 kV
is never exceeded! (Use Keithley to verify).
3 – PROCEDURE
– Temporarily place a jumper from 3A12 Op114 pin 3 to com.
– Connect a DVM between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10 (50–60 Vdc).
– Turn unit on.
– Select manual – Fluoro, 110 kV, .1mA.
– Initiate Fluoro and note voltage reading on DVM.
– A value of 54.2 Vdc on the DVM should correspond to 110 kV on the Keithley, with a range of 52.5 Vdc to
55.5 Vdc.
– Adjust 3A12 – R216 to achieve if necessary
– Remove jumper from Op114.
See chapter 4 for CDRH TESTING REQUIREMENTS
19-5
ÇÇÇ
P
L1
ÇÇÇ
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G015 / G025
19-6
Purpose: TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19.R123 – 38B) Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
– Dual channel oscilloscope.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Connect an oscilloscope as follows:
Probe X10
Channel A 3A19.E125
Channel B 3A19.E172
Sweep 5 S/div, single shot
V/div 0.2 µV/div
Trigger channel A, DC external +
– Energize the mobile system.
– Select 40 kV, 0.1 mA, manual fluoro mode.
– Adjust 3A19 R123 to obtain a delay of 30 µS by commanding a fluoro operation.
19-7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19-8
Purpose: FLUORO MA ADJUSTMENT – 3A26.R9 Version No.: 00

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 81E Date: May 1993
– DC milliammeter.
– Extender cart
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the cover of the X–Ray head – see sheet D/R 0
– Remove the bridge at the divider PCB 6A1 and connect a DC milliammeter (10 mA full scale) to the current
measuring circuit.
CAUTION : CHECK CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
– Position circuit 3A26 on the extender.
– Connect the PCB ground to the ground of the card rack.
– Select the fluoro manual mode.
– Display 40 kV and 6 mA.
– Initiate fluoro.
– Adjust 3A26 R 9 so that 6,1 mA is read on the milliammeter (0.1 mA consumed in the HV divider).
– Replace the bridge after adjustment.
– Reinstall the cover of the X–Ray head.
See CHAP. 4 TESTS CDRH for compliance
19-9
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19-10
Purpose: FLUORO PREHEATING – 3A26. R3 Version No.: 00

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 84D Date: May 1993
3 – PROCEDURE
Probe X10 3A26.23A
Sweep 20 ms/div
V/div 20 mV/div
Trigger external DC + to 3A26.24A
Ground rack ground
– Display 40 kV and 0.5 mA.
– Fluoro mode (manual).
– Command short fluoro sequences
– Adjust 3A26.R3 to obtain a minimum rise time of the scope mA current.
The signal is triggered on the leading edge of the 85% kV signal. illustrations A, B and C.
Adjust until the correct signal is obtained (B).
See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-11
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
19-12
Purpose: FLUORO TIMER – DIAGRAM 103A Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
3 – PROCEDURE
– Position the kV–mA PCB 3A12 on the extender.
– Connect the PCB ground to the ground of the board rack.
Probe X10 3A12.E3
Sweep 2 ms/divV/div
V / div 0.5 V/div
Trigger Line
Ground board rack ground
– Apply voltage to the unit.
– Select the Fluoro mode.
– Display 40 kV – 0.1 mA.
– Initiate fluoro
– Adjust 3A12.R217 to obtain a time T = 20 ms.
– Reset Fluoro Timer 5 min.
– Initiate a continuous sequence of Fluoro during 5 minutes and verify with the chronometer that the buzzer is
energised after 4 min 26 sec +/– 12 sec and that the X–Ray emission is stopped after 4 min 56 sec +/– 13
sec.
– Readjust R217 if necessary and verify.
See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-13
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19-14
Purpose: RAD SAFETY – FILAMENT 4 – DIAGRAM 83D. Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
3 – PROCEDURE
A : 7 SECONDS SAFETY
– Remove 5A1.PL2 connector (PB PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE).
– Select the RAD mode.
– Display 40 kV – 160 mAs.
– Adjust 3A26–R7 so that the exposure is stopped after 7 +/– 0,2 seconds.
The adjustment is made by using the fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26.R7 so that
the exposure is stopped as soon as the number 7 appears.
– Switch OFF the mobile
B : 11 SECONDS SAFETY
– Switch 3A3.S133.B on ON position
– Switch ON the unit
– Select RAD mode, 40 kV, 160 mAs
– Adjust 3A26.R8 so that the exposure is stopped after 11 +/– 0,5 seconds
The adjustment is performed by using the Fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26R8 so that
the exposure is stopped as soon as the number ”11” appears.
– Switch 3A3.S133.B on OFF position
– Connect 5A1.PL2 connector
19-15
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19-16
Purpose: RAD MA – RAD PREHEATING – 3A26.R4 Version No.: 00

FILAMENT 4 – DIAGRAM 84B Date: May 1993
Time: 1 H. 30 Manpower: 1
– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
– Check that the ground connections of the PWB are connected to the earth of the board rack.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Position 3A26 on extender boards.
– Connect an oscilloscope to A26.a32
– Vertical sensitivity 1 V/div.
– External trigger – DC – at 3A26.a31 (schematics 81D – PRE signal)
– Time basis – ,20 ms/div.
– Select radiography mode – 100 kV – 5 mAs.
– Make a few exposures and adjust A26–R4 to obtain a current of 20 mA (1V = 10mA) at the beginning
of the exposure. See oscillogram A to D.
NOTE : 20 mA Rad adjustment is performed with only 1 potentiometer and it is normal that tube current is too
low at the beginning of the exposure.
So, for 40 kV and 60 mA, the tube current at the beginning of the exposure is about 15 mA and reaches
60 mA after about 40 msec.
This situation is correct.
In all ways, kV and mA values are correct, only the time of the exposure is a bit longer but without
influence on the quality of the exposure.
19-17
PRECHAUFFAGE - PREHEATING
19-18
VERIFICATION OF TUBE CURRENT IN RAD MODE

– Remove upper cover of X–Ray Head : see sheet D/R 03
– Remove mA jumper on 6A1 and connect a milliamperemeter DC in current measure circuit : see RG 12
Caution : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
kV Current
40 kV 60 +/– 3 mA
50 kV 54,5 +/– 2,8 mA
60 kV 47,2 +/– 2,4 mA
70 kV 40,9 +/– 2,1 mA
80 kV 32,2 +/– 1,7 mA
100 kV 29,2 +/– 1,3 mA
NOTE : mA will be measured after tube current stabilisation
For US model :
. Switch 3A3 Sm133.B on ON position
. Perform the following measures : 40 kV 35,3 +/– 1,8 mA
100 kV 17,2 +/– 0,9 mA
. Switch 3A3.Sm133 A on OFF position

– Remove 3A26 PB from the extender cart and reinstall it.
– Remove the milliamperemetre DC and reinstall the jumper on 6A1.Tb24
See CHAP. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-19
19-20
Purpose: RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK. Version No.: 00

Date: May 1993
– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
– Rad Preheating adjustment must be correct (see sheet RG 16)
3 – PROCEDURE
– The fluoroscopy/radiography switch must take place within a maximum of 1 second.
– Check: connect an oscilloscope in differential mode to the terminals of 5A1–CR5 (see diagram 90D) .
External trigger DC + at A26–36A
Sweep – 0.5 sec/div
V/div – 50 Vdc/div
– Check that switches occur correctly in the X–ray housing
– Remove the cover and examine the focal spots.
Looking at the apparatus from in front of the control panel, fluoroscopy focal spot is on the left.
– In fluoroscopy or radiography, only one focal spot must exist in stabilized conditions.
19-21
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
19-22
Purpose: MAS INTEGRATORS 3A26.R5 – 3A26. R6 Version No.: 00

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 82C Date: May 1993
– mAs meter.
– Wire grip.
3 – PROCEDURE
– Remove the X–ray head upper cover. See sheet D/R 03.
– Remove the bridge of divider circuit 6A1.
– Insert an mAs meter into the current measuring circuit (adjustment of Fluoro output) on the divider PWB
6A1.
– CAUTION : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
– Energize the unit.

– Select RAD mode.
– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R5 (diagram 82C) to obtain a reading of 4 +/– 0,05 mAs
at the con trol mAs meter.
– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R6 to obtain a reading of 80 +/– 0,05 mAs on the control
mAs meter.
– Check the other positions of the mAs.
The tolerance on the mAs is 10% +/– 0.1 mAs over the entire range.
– Disconnect the mAs meter from the measurement circuit and install the bridge on divider circuit 6A1 divi-
seur.
– Replace the X–ray head upper cover.
See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance
19-23
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
BA
P
L
1
BA
P
L
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ 2
19-24
REV 1
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20-1
REV 1
20-2
REV 1 Source: om 826 931 P735 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 and Series CCD, Rev. F, Page 1-1
1 – DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
1–1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1–1–1 Mobile
Illustration 1 –
17 7 5
10
9 2
15
1
14
12 11
13
20-3
See Illustration 1 and Illustration 2 for reference.
1 X–ray tube head with X–ray tube and collimator.
2 Image receiver with image intensifier and CCD camera.
3 Patient protection (according to local regulations).
4 Locking for C–arm orbital movement.
5 Locking for C–arm rotation.
6 Locking for C–arm longitudinal movement.
7 Locking for transverse movement (wig–wag) of C–arm support.
8 C–arm maneuvering handle (removable, the handles are fitted and removed by pressing on the center of the
handle).
9 Steering handle.
10 Maneuvering handles.
11 Front castor.
12 Rear castors.
13 Brake pedal for mobile C–arm support.
14 X–ray control pedal with support and cable storage.
15 X–ray control handle.
16 Control panel for mobile.
17 Infrared remote control support.
20-4
Illustration 2 –
20
6 16
10
8
4
18
19
18 Connection cable between mobile and monitor support, cable holder.
19 Connector for IEC additional earth wire.

(Depending on local regulations).
20 Cassette holder (Option).

Fastened at the level of the input face of the image intensifier.
20-5
1–1–2 Monitor Support
6
7
14
13
8 3
2
9
10
1
11
11
12
Illustration 3 –
See Illustration 3 for reference.
1 Line power cord.
2 Accessory connector (Stand alone Option).
3 On/Off switch
Located on the rear face of the monitor support.
20-6
Having stopped the system, wait about 10 seconds before restarting to allow the
CAUTION electronic circuits to stabilize.
4 X–ray emission indicator.
5 Display monitor (1 or 2 depending on the configuration).
6 Infrared sensor for remote control.
7 Touch screen or alphanumeric keyboard (according to configuration).
8 Videocassette recorder S–VHS (Option).
9 Film reprograph (Option).
10 Paper reprograph (Option).
11 Brakes.
12 Semi–directional castor.
13 Connector with C–arm support.
14 External video connector (Only with DSM digital option).
15 Computer diskette drive (with the MDA digital option only).
20-7
1–2 DESCRIPTION OF C-ARM SUPPORT MOBILE COMMANDS
1–2–1 Positioning the Mobile

Check that the movements of the mobile can be carried out safely and that nothing
CAUTION obstructs the required movements.
Direction lever for rear casters. (9, Illustration 1).

Illustration 4 – DIRECTION LEVER
1 2
20-8
D Position 1: Forward/backward displacement.

D Position 2: Lateral displacement—traveling.
D Intermediate position 3: Diagonal displacement.
C–arm support mobile brake pedal.

(13, Illustration 1).
Illustration 5 – BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION A
POSITION B
D Position A, pedal to the rear: In this position the brakes are locked.
D Position B, pedal horizontal: In this position the brakes are released.
20-9
1–2–2 Positioning the C-Arm

See Illustration 1, Illustration 2 and Illustration 6 for reference.
Check that the movements of the C–arm support can be carried out safely and that
CAUTION nothing obstructs the required movements.
Note: All the brakes are locked by pushing the levers forward (towards the C–arm) and unlock by
pulling the levers backwards (towards the control panel).
Orbital Movement
D Unlock the orbital movement brake (4, Illustration 1).
D Slide the C–arm to the required position. The removable handles can be used (8, Illustration 1).
D Lock the orbital movement brake (4, Illustration 1).
Rotating the C-Arm

D Unlock the C–arm rotation brake (5, Illustration 1).
D Turn the C–arm to the required position.
If the C-Arm Support is in the low position, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the
CAUTION Stenoscop during this movement.
D Lock the C–arm rotation brake (5, Illustration 1).
Vertical Movement
The motorized vertical movement is controlled from the control panel
D To raise the C–arm, press one of the keys (3, Illustration 6).
D To lower the C–arm, press one of the keys (4, Illustration 6).
20-10
If the Imageur is in the low position and the C-Arm is brought close to the Stenoscop
CAUTION Console, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the Stenoscop during the movement.
Longitudinal Movement
D Unlock the longitudinal movement brake (6, Illustration 2).
D Move the C–arm to the required position.
D Lock the longitudinal movement brake (6, Illustration 2).
If the Imageur is in the low position, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the
CAUTION Stenoscop during this movement.
Transverse Movement (Wig-wag)
D Unlock the transverse movement brake (7, Illustration 1).

D Move the C–arm to the required position.
D Lock the transverse movement brake (7, Illustration 1).
20-11
1–2–3 Console
Illustration 6 – CONSOLE
Stenoscop
1 3 6 6 3 1
2 4 5 5 4 2
8
7 9 22
15 23
10 20 24
11 16 21 25
17
12
13 19
14 18
1 Triggering X–rays.
Note: The X–rays can also be triggered using the hand–held remote control (15, Illustration 1) or the
foot–switch
D Starts fluoroscopy or radiography depending on the mode chosen.

D During X–ray emission the buttons light up.
D During X–ray emission, the indicator lamp (4, Illustration 3) lights up.
2 Thermal overload Indicator.

Does not automatically interrupt X–ray emission.
20-12
3 Raise C–arm command.
4 Lower C–arm command.
5 Power–up indicator lamp.

The machine is on when the lamp is lit.
6 Stop mobile.
Can be used as an emergency stop.
7 Resets timer to 5 minutes.

D The key flashes (with intermittent buzzer) after 4 min 30 sec fluoroscopy.
D The timer stops the fluoroscopy after 5 minutes.
8 X–ray exposure timer.

Counts the real X–ray emission time in minutes and seconds up to 99 minutes.
9 Resets the counter.
Note: When the machine is switched on, the counter is automatically reset.
10 Standard radiography – film radiography.
11 Electronic radiography, single pulse fluoroscopy.
12 High resolution fluoroscopy.
13 Pulsed fluoroscopy.
14 Standard fluoroscopy.
15 kV display.
16 kV selection.
17 Fluoro mA display or rad mAs display.
18 mA or mAs selection.
20-13
19 Manual adjustment of mA and kV in fluoroscopy.
20 Image rotation on Monitor A.
21 Image rotation on Monitor B.
22 Choice of image intensifier field.

Select 16–cm field on 22–cm image intensifier
(On Stenoscop 9000 Series only).
23 Collimation by opaque shutters.
24 Collimation by semi–transparent shutters.
25 Rotation of collimation shutters.
20-14
1–3 DESCRIPTION OF MONITOR SUPPORT COMMANDS

These commands depend on the digital option of the machine.
Note:
The MDA module with disk option can be used to store 200 to 5000 images, according to the options
installed.
The MD10 module without disk option can be used to store ten images.
The DR4 module can be used to store four images.
1–3–1 Cables and Connections

D Line power cord (1).
The cable can be stored around its support at the back of the trolley when not used.
D Stand alone connector (Option) (2).
Allows the monitor support trolley to be used on its own, without the mobile, to review the images in combination
with an archiving or videocassette recorder option (Only possible with MDA option).
D On/Off switch (3).
Located on the rear face of the monitor support.
D Connector to the C–arm support (13).
20-15
1–3–2 Mechanical Movement Command

D Brakes (11).
To lock the monitor support trolley, lock the brakes on the two front castors.
Note: The brakes lock each castor independently.
D Semi–directional castor (12).

For easy movement through the corridors, the rear left castor of the monitor support trolley is semi–directional.
It locks to facilitate straight–line movement.
To unlock it, rotate the monitor support trolley.
D Monitors (5)
They can be turned to suit the operator.
20-16
1–4 MDA DESCRIPTION

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS
DANGER SUFFICIENT TO RECORD THE NUMBER OF IMAGES REQUIRED FOR THE
APPLICATION.
1–4–1 Display Screens
1–4–1–1 Monitor A
Displays the x-ray image or stored images. Displays patient information, system parameters, and measurements.
Illustration 7 –
20-17
1–4–1–2 Monitor B
Display of stored images and mini-images.
Illustration 8 –
Note: The left-hand mini–image column corresponds to Monitor A. The right-hand column
corresponds to Monitor B.
The large image displayed on the monitors is the same as the small image displayed in the
mini–image locating square.
20-18
1–4–2 Control Screen

Allows control of acquisition and image processing parameters, management of patient files, printing, and system
configuration.
1–4–2–1 User interface after Power–on: viewer function

Appears when power is applied, after initialization.
Illustration 9 –
11.10.1995 Patient Patient Info System

Viewer Help Zone 1
18 : 30 Data Base Setup
Message Window
A B Zone 2
MANIPULATION IMAGE FHR Edge Window Level
Geometry Mesure Reset Inverse Annota Video

Video tions Aux.
IMAGE STORAGE
Zone 3
Image Image Auto A –> B Screen VCR
Number Number Save Transfer Compo.
SEQUENCE VASCULAIRE
Acq/ Sub– Opacif. Road Print 1 Print 2

Review traction Maximum Map
Note: Screen Appearance:
Screen appearance changes according to system status, current function, options present, and
user interface appearance selections. The screens described here cover all the options
available with the MDA digital option.
20-19
1–4–2–2 Control Screen Description

D Zone 1: Selection of Main Functions
– Display Date and Time
Timer. (See para. 2–4–2).
– Viewer
Image acquisition and handling. (See para. 2–4–3).
– Patient Data Base
Management of patient and image database, and image transfer.
(See para. 2–4–4).
– Patient Information
Entry of patient information. (See para. 2–4–5).
– Help
Calls up the Help function. (See para. 2–4–6).
– System Setup
Configuration of the system. (See para. 2–4–7).
Note: Access a function by pressing the corresponding key.
To exit a function, press the function key again.

The system switches to the Viewer function.
You can return to the basic screen (Viewer) at any time by pressing <Viewer>.
If x-ray emission is triggered during a function, the system interrupts the function and switches
to Viewer.
Appearance of Keys:
Ready to be activated: black with white markings.
Activated: white with black markings (except the Viewer key).
Deactivated: gray with white markings.
20-20
D Zone 2: Selection of Active Monitor, and Help Message Display

– The monitor selection keys are identical in appearance to the Zone 3 keys.
D Zone 3: Action Keys of Functions
Appearance of Keys:
Ready to be activated: white with black markings.
Activated: gray with black markings.
Deactivated: black with white markings.
Note: A key that calls up a control window contain a small triangle in the bottom right corner.
20-21
1–4–3 Viewer Control Screen

Note: The system switches to this screen during x-ray emission.
Note: Not all functions are active during x-ray emission.
1. Monitor A
If this key is selected, any action affects the image displayed on this screen.
2. Monitor B
If this key is selected, any actions affect the image displayed on this screen.
3. Geometry
Calls up Geometry submenu. (See para. 2–4–3–1).
Note: This is opened automatically during x-ray emission.
4. Measurements (Option)
Calls up Measurements submenu. (See para. 2–4–3–2).
Note: This is closed automatically during x-ray emission.
5. Reset
Returns image parameters (Contour, Inverse video, Orientation, Zoom, Rotation) to the values they had when
the image was saved. Returns the Light and Contrast values to an average value, and removes magnification
and borders.
6. Recursive Filter
Increases or decreases the recursive filtering value during x-ray emission.
Note: Operates on dynamic images during x-ray emission only.
Note: The higher the filter value, the greater the image noise reduction. On the other hand, motion
blurring increases.
Motion blurring can be reduced by adjusting the automatic movement detection parameter.
(See System Set–up, para. 2–4–7).
20-22
7. Contour
Increases or decreases the edge enhancement value.
8. Light
Adjusts image brightness. Operates on stored images only.
Note: To change the image during emission, adjust the kV and mA.
9. Contrast
Changes image contrast. Operates on stored images only.
Note: To change the image during emission, adjust the kV and mA.
10. Inverse video

Inverts the image Black and White levels.
Note: In this Mode, the light variation operates as follows:

When the light value displayed increases, the image darkens on the screen.
When the light value displayed decreases, the image brightens on the screen.
11. Annotations
Calls up the Annotations submenu. (See para. 2–4–3–3).
12. Next/Prior Image
Displays the next or previous image.
Note: The mini-image corresponding to the displayed image is displayed in the mini-image locating
square.
13. Finding an Image by Number

Displays a numeric keypad on which you can enter the number of the desired image. When you press the <OK>
key, the image appears on the monitor selected.
Note: To cancel the numeric keypad, press the Image Number key again.
20-23
14. Manual Recording of an Image

Stores the image displayed on Monitor A.
Note: This function is active during x-ray emission.
15. Automatic Recording of Images

If this function is activated, the image frozen on Monitor A at the end of x-ray emission is automatically stored.
16. Automatic Image Transfer from Monitor A to Monitor B
Copies the image from Monitor A to Monitor B.
If this function is activated, the image frozen on Monitor A is automatically transferred to Monitor B before new
dynamic images are displayed during x-ray emission.
To inhibit this transfer, press the key again.
17. Dynamic Sequence Acquisition and Review (Option)
Calls up the sequence-control subwindow. (See para. 2–4–3–4).
18. Selection of Next Sequence/Prior Sequence (Option)
Displays the first image of the previous or next sequence.
Displays the first mini-images of the sequence on Monitor B in the column corresponding to the selected monitor.
The first image of the sequence appears in the locating square.
19. Subtraction (Option) (See para. 2–4–3–5).
20. Maximum Opacification (Option) (See para. 2–4–3–6).
21. Road Mapping (Option) (See para. 2–4–3–7).
22. Videocassette Recorder (Option) (See para. 2–4–3–9).
23. Selection of Auxiliary Video Input
This function switches the system to the Auxiliary Video Input. If a video signal is present on this input, the resulting
image is displayed on Monitor B.
This image can be recorded using the videocassette recorder, or printed.
Note: If the input signal has a color component, this component is transmitted to the videocassette
recorder to be recorded in color.
Image manipulations can be performed and saved.
20-24
24. Screen Composition (See para. 2–4–3–8).

25. Printing an Image on Printer 1
Prints a copy of the selected screen on the reprograph connected to the Printer 1 output.
26. Printing an Image on Printer 2
Prints a copy of the selected screen on the reprograph connected to the Printer 2 output.
20-25
1–4–4 MDA Remote Control

Illustration 10 – MDA MEMORY REMOTE CONTROL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
13 18 14
19 15 20
16 21 17
1–4–4–1 Precautions for Use

D Do not use the remote control if several Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
D If the remote control is out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
20-26
D Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the MDA system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
Signals emitted by the remote control can interfere with the operation of other devices
CAUTION which use an infrared remote control. In case of doubt, stop using the MDA system
remote control.
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with MDA
CAUTION system operation.
D In case of doubt, deactivate the remote control unit.
1–4–4–2 Description (see Illustration 10)

Note: The active function of the remote control unit is displayed on Monitor A, to the left of the image
in the bottom third of the screen.
1 Subtraction
Calls up the Subtraction submenu
D The Up/Right and Down/Left arrows are used to vary the Landscape function coefficient.
D The Right arrow is used to activate and deactivate the subtraction function.
2 Max Op
Function equivalent to that of the Maximum Opacification key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
3 Road Map
Function equivalent to that of the Road Mapping key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
4 Image Inversion: Up/Down

Function equivalent to that of the key in the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
20-27
5 A –> B Transfer
Function equivalent to that of the <A –> B> Transfer key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9),
6 Image Inversion: Right/Left

Function equivalent to that of the key in the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
7 Rotation: Left
Function equivalent to that of the key of the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
8 A/B
Selects Monitors A and B in turn.
Note: The monitor selected is indicated by a vertical broken white line on either side of the displayed
image.
9 Rotation: Right
Function equivalent to that of the key of the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
10 Edge
Allows you to adjust the edge enhancement.
D Use the Up/Right and Down/Left arrows of the remote control after pressing this key.
11 Print
Function equivalent to that of the <Print 1> key in the Viewer menu
(see Illustration 9).
12 Recursive Filter
Allows you to adjust the level of noise reduction.
20-28
13 Image Selection
Displays the previous or next image.
14 Sequence Selection
Displays the previous or next sequence.
D The right arrow key starts the review and speeds it up.
The left arrow key slows down the review speed.
15 Zoom
Allows you to change the enlargement factor and move the image on the screen.
D Press the key once to change image size.
Press a second time to move the image on the screen.
Use the Up/Right and Down/Left arrows.
16 M Man
Function equivalent to that of the <Manual Recording> key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
17 Sequence Function
Calls up the Sequence submenu
D The Up and Down arrows change the sequence acquisition or review speed.
D The Right arrow key starts the review and increases its speed.
The Left arrow key slows down the review.
18 19 20 21 Direction Arrows
Allow you to change the parameters defined in the selected function.
20-29
1–5 MD10 DIGITAL

This digital option allows ten images to be stored in RAM.
Note: The images are lost when the machine is switched off.
This digital option operates with an infrared remote control and/or a keyboard option.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS
APPLICATION.
1–5–1 Display Screen
1–5–1–1 Screen A or B
Illustration 11 –
Tuesday May 28 1996 14 : 25 : 45
Hospital Patient
Note: The annotations displayed can be changed using the remote control or keyboard option.
20-30
AB20–31
1–5–2 MD10 Remote Control Functions

Illustration 12 – MD10 memory remote control
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 12 11
13 16 15
14
17 18

D Do not use the remote control if several Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
D If the remote control is out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
D Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the MD10 system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
CAUTION which use an infrared remote control.
20-31
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with M10
1 Edge Enhancement
D Active on Monitor A or B depending on whether Key 10 or 11 is selected.
2 Recursive filter
D Used to modify the recursive filter value: use the Up/Down arrow keys.
Note: The active noise coefficient is displayed on the monitor.
Note: The higher the weighting coefficient, the greater the noise reduction. On the other hand, the
motion blurring increases.
Note: If noise reduction is modified without x-ray emission, the effect of the new value will not be seen
until the next x-ray emission sequence.
3 Reprography
Transfers the image from Monitor A to the reprograph.
D Throughout the reprography sequence, the other functions are deactivated.
Note: With the MD10 option, the print key on the reprograph cannot be used (a black image would be
printed).
4 Erase Memory Key

D Press this key briefly to return the memory to the first stored image.
D Press and hold this key to erase all the images memorized. The key must be pressed for two seconds to
confirm erasure. A double BEEP is emitted at the start and end of this action.
20-32
5 Locking
Locks a memorized image to prevent its accidental erasure.
D A number is assigned to the locked image to help locate it.
6 Unlocking
Unlocks a previously locked memorized image.
7 Two-Image Mode
Displays two images on one monitor. The left part of the image corresponds to Monitor A, and the right part
to Monitor B. Each image can be handled individually when selected using Keys 10 and 11.
D The images displayed are half–images, i.e., half of the image centered horizontally.
D Not active during x-ray emission.
8 Used to display or delete the image information.

D Functions independently on Monitors A and B.
9 An image is stored in memory during x-ray emission.
Note: A double “BEEP” is emitted when the image is saved.
10 Selection of Monitor A
Once selected, it is possible to change the image displayed using Keys 12 through 15, to modify the image
orientation using Keys 17 and 18, to zoom using Key 16, and to carry out edge enhancement using Key 1.
11 Selection of Monitor B.
Once selected, it is possible to change the image displayed using Keys 12 through 15, to modify the image
orientation using Keys 17 and 18, to zoom using Key 16 , and to carry out edge enhancement using Key 1.
20-33
12 13 14 15 Arrow Keys
D According to the key previously pressed, they are used to select the image to display on Monitor A or Monitor
B, to change the noise reduction coefficient, or to move the zoom window over the image.
16 Zoom
This function zooms the central area of the image by a factor of two. The zoomed image can be moved in the
screen by using the arrow keys (Keys 12 through 15).
D Zoom cannot be used during x-ray emission.
D Zoom is compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
D The zoomed image can be reprographed and remains active for the current image until deselected.
D To change the image displayed on screen during a zoom, press Key 10 or 11, then one of the arrow keys
(12 through 15).
17 Image Inversion: Up/Down

D Compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
18 Image inversion: Right/Left.

D Compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
20-34
1–5–3 Keyboard Option

Illustration 13 – MD10 MEMORY KEYBOARD
PAGE PAGE
ESC F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 UP DOWN
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
‘ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – = DEL
{ }
Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] ENTER
CAPS A S D F G H J K L : “ |
LOCK ; ’ \
< > ?
SHIFT Z X C V B N M , . / INS
CTRL ALT
The following keys on the Keyboard have the same functions as the corresponding keys on the Remote Control:
PF1: Edge Enhancement (Key 1)
PF2: Noise Reduction (Key 2)
PF3 : Locking (Key 5)
PF4: Unlocking (Key 6)
PF5: Two-Image Mode (Key 7)
PF6: Image Save (Key 9)
PF7: Image Annotations (Key 8)
PF8: Selection of Monitor A (Key 10)
PF9: Selection of Monitor B (Key 11)
PF10: Zoom (Key 16)
PF11: Image Inversion: Up/Down (Key 17)
PF12: Image Inversion: Right/Left (Key 18)
PAGE UP: Reprography (Key 3)
Arrow keys: (Keys 12, 13, 14, 15)
20-35
1–6 DR4 DIGITAL

This digital option allows four images to be stored in RAM.
Note: The images are lost when the machine is switched off.
This digital option operates with an infrared remote control.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION, CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS

APPLICATION.
1–6–1 Display Monitor

1. Screen A or B
Note: Monitor A displays three memory locations plus the temporary memory.
Monitor B displays the three memory locations only.
Illustration 14 –
20-36
Note: An empty memory location is represented by a small square.

An occupied memory location is represented by a large square.
1–6–2 DR4 Remote Control Function

Illustration 15 – DR4 MEMORY REMOTE CONTROL
1 2 3
4 5
7 7A
8 8A
9 11
10 12

D Do not use the remote control if two or more Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
D If the remote control will be out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
D Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the DR4 system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
CAUTION which use an infrared remote control.
20-37
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with DR4
1 Edge Enhancement
Operates on a stored image only.
Note: This function applies a permanent change to the stored image. (Represented by a large white
square in the upper left-hand part of the screen.)
Pressing the key a second time applies the change to all images displayed.
(Represented by a large white square with a small dark square at its center in the upper left-hand
part of the screen.)
If the displayed image has not been processed in this way, the square in the upper left-hand part
of the screen is dark.
2 Recursive filter
Pressing this key changes the recursive filter value.
Note: The higher the noise reduction coefficient, the greater the noise reduction. However, motion
blurring increases.
There are four possible values of this coefficient.
The selected coefficient is displayed briefly, and is indicated by four squares arranged in a
vertical line. The selected value is represented by a large square.
The minimum coefficient corresponds to the top square, and the maximum corresponds to the
lowest square.
If the noise reduction is changed without x-ray emission, the effect of the new value will not be
seen until the following x-ray emission.
20-38
3 Reprography
Transfers the image from Monitor A to the reprograph.
Throughout the reprography sequence, the other functions are deactivated.
With the DR4 option, the print key on the reprograph cannot be used (a black image would be printed).
4 Lock a Stored Image

Represented by a white square.
Note: Pressing this key a second time for a previously locked image will cause this image to be
displayed at the end of x-ray emission (represented by a dark square at the center of a white
square).
5 Unlock a Locked Stored Image

Authorizes the replacement of this image if necessary at the end of x-ray emission.
6 Storage of Image in Memory during X-Ray Emission
Note: A double BEEP indicates that the image has been saved.
7 and 7A: Stored Image Search and Display on Monitor A

This function finds a previously stored image and displays it on Monitor A.
8 and 8A: Stored Image Search and Display on Monitor B

This function finds a previously stored image and displays it on Monitor B.
9 Image Inversion: Up/Down on Monitor A.
10 Image Inversion: Right/Left on Monitor A.
11 Image Inversion: Up/Down on Monitor B.
12 Image Inversion: Right/Left on Monitor B.
20-39
1–7 PRINTER AND VIDEO
1–7–1 Film Printer (Option)

The reprograph is available in Full Format, 2-Image, or 4-Image versions, and uses 8” x 10” monolayer films. The
reprograph is used to obtain a hard copy of screen A on film.
The reprography command can be carried out from the memory keyboard (on MDA and MD10 only), the printer
keyboard (not active with DR4 or MD10), or from the infrared remote control.
D I/O: On/Off.
The film reprograph must be warmed up for about one minute.

CAUTION
D EXP: Film exposure.
The system automatically prevents double exposure.
Note: This key must not be used with the digital options DR4 and MD10, since a black image will be
obtained.
D POS/NEG: The picture can be made on black (POS) or white background (NEG).
D 1/2/3/4: Pre–adjustment.
Allows four different users to have customized photographic settings.
D RESET: Calibration.
This procedure is automatic after introducing a new cassette
D PROGRAM: Used to see the selected menus.

The display window indicates FMT and a cursor is placed in the display window, beside the function to be modified.
Note: Refer to the reprograph instruction manual for more information.
D FORMAT: Choice of print format.

Depends on the type of reprograph purchased.
This function is used to choose between modes 1 and 4 images for the 4/1 reprograph.
20-40
D Display window.
This window displays the operator choices and the error messages.
1–7–2 Loading and removing a cassette

D Insert the cassette gently into the slot until a click is heard.
D Remove the protection plate which is the furthest inside, and put it back after exposure.
D To remove the cassette, push it slightly to the left and pull.
1–7–3 Paper Printer (Option)

This option is used to obtain a copy of the image displayed on Monitor A.
Note: The print key on the reprograph must not be used with the digital options DR4 and MD10 since
it will print a black image.
20-41
1–7–4 Videocassette Recorder (Option)

It is recommended to use only type S–VHS cassettes.
Note: This option can only be used with the digital MDA option.
Recording is automatically triggered during x-ray emission by default. To prevent

CAUTION recording during the x-ray emission, eject the cassette or switch off the videocassette
recorder (VCR), or disable the Auto Record option. (See para. 2–4–3–9).
If the recording begins at the start of x-ray emission but does not stop afterwards, the
videocassette recorder is probably badly programmed.
Refer to the videocassette recorder instructions.
If the fault remains, consult After–Sales Service.
20-42
REV 1
SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21-1
REV 1
21-2
2 – PRACTICAL USE
2–1 TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION
2–1–1 Transport
The mobile unit weighs about 250 kg, and the monitor support about 190 kg. Not
CAUTION respecting the precautions during displacement could cause the apparatus to strange
out of control and cause injury to the operator and other persons.
Always:
D Check for obstacles in your path.
D Move the apparatus slowly.
D Use at least two people when moving over sloping floors.
To move the mobile from one place to another, proceed as follows:
1. Put the C-arm in its lowest position (do this before switching off the mobile).
2. Switch off (before unplugging the cables).
3. Unplug the monitor support ac supply cable and wind it around its support (1, Illustration 3).
4. Unplug the mobile from the monitor support and store the connecting cable on the cable support (18, Illustration
2).
5. Store the x-ray control pedal and its cable
6. Store the hand–held x-ray command (15, Illustration 1).
7. Put the X axis vertical, intensifier up, and lock the orbital movement brake and the C–arm rotation brake.
8. Center the “wig–wag” movement and lock the brake.
9. Bring the C–arm as far as possible towards the console and lock the brake.
21-3
2–1–2 Connections and Switching On
2–1–2–1 Connections
Note: Warming–up time.
D When the system is switched on, a minimum of 12 seconds is required for the machine to self–test and become
operational. During this period, x-ray emission is not possible.
D The monitors also require a warm–up period of about 1 minute before the image is fully stabilized.
D The film reprograph (Option) requires warming–up for about 1 minute, during which reprography is prohibited. A
BEEP is emitted when the device is ready.
Generally, a warming–up period of 15 minutes is recommended for optimum system performance. If possible,
therefore, switch on 15 minutes before taking the first image.
1. Insert the rectangular connector of the connection cable (18, Illustration 2) in the socket located on the rear face
of the monitor support (13, Illustration 3).
D The cable output must be directed towards the ground.
D IMPORTANT: Screw the red wheel clockwise as far as possible (about 7 turns). The connector could suffer
excessive wear if the wheel is not fully turned home.
The monitor support trolleys for Stenoscop series 6000 and 9000 are not
CAUTION interchangeable with other Stenoscop models. If, however, two monitor supports
should be accidentally exchanged (on a site where there are one or more machines of
the same type), no damage would result; it would simply be impossible to use the
equipment.
2. Plug the power cable for the monitor support into the mains (1, Illustration 3).
21-4
Check that the socket is compatible with the current required to power the Stenoscop.
CAUTION Respect the voltage and the frequency that the unit is intended for. If in doubt, contact
the After–Sales Service.
3. Power up the unit on with the switch (3, Illustration 3).

D If green indicator lamp is on (5, Illustration 6) the device is powered.
4. Extra ground wire (IEC) (19, Illustration 2).
D This conductor must be connected between the system’s additional protective ground terminal and an
external protective system.
2–1–2–2 Positioning the C–arm

DANGER: AVOID ALL CONTACT BETWEEN A PATIENT AND THE X-RAY TUBE HEAD.
DANGER THE TUBE HEAD TEMPERATURE CAN REACH ALMOST 60°C IN SOME PLACES.
Once the mobile is in position, it is recommended to lock the brakes if later movement is unlikely during the
examination.
1. Position the mobile close to the operating table according to needs using the steering handle (9, Illustration 1)
and the maneuvering handles
2. Raise the C–arm to the required position.
3. Pivot the C–arm to the required position.
2–1–2–3 Sterile drapes

The internal part of the C–arm, the x-ray tube head and the image intensifier can be covered with sterile drapes which
are attached using spring clips.
2–1–2–4 Cassette holder (Option)

If during the examination a radiography is planned, fasten the cassette holder beforehand on the intensifier (20,
Illustration 2).
Note: The cassette holder can be attached directly onto the intensifier beforehand, or onto the sterile
drapes.
21-5
2–2 IMAGE GENERATION: X-RAY EMISSION

During the examination, the operators must wear lead protective gloves and aprons
CAUTION and keep as much as possible behind a lead glass protective screen.
2–2–1 Overview
2–2–1–1 Triggering X-Rays

Triggering x-rays can be done in three different ways:
D By pressing on the x-ray control pedal (14, Illustration 1).
D By pressing on the x-ray hand switch (15, Illustration 1).

D By pressing one of the two x-ray control buttons on the mobile panel (1, Illustration 6).
– Release of the x-ray control immediately interrupts x-ray emission in continuous fluoro when the equipment
is configured to comply with CDRH (USA) requirements.
– Release of the x-ray control does not immediately interrupt x-ray emission in continuous fluoro when the
equipment is not configured to comply with CDRH (USA) requirements. X-ray emission is maintained for the
period of time necessary to obtain a good quality image.
– In Pulsed Fluoro and Electronic Rad Modes, x-ray emission is maintained after release for the period of time
necessary to obtain a good quality image.
– The lamp above the monitors comes on to indicate x-ray emission and an audible signal is emitted during the
radiography.
During the x-ray emission command, image display returns to nominal mode (direct
CAUTION image and full field).
21-6
x-ray emission is prohibited:

CAUTION
During the system initialization phase.
During a reprography.
Since image acquisition is a priority task, some keys will be inactive.

CAUTION
However, if the system is in the process of saving images when x–ray emission is
commanded, the command will not be carried out until the image save is complete.
2–2–1–2 Emergency stop

D If there is a problem, or to stop the apparatus, press on the emergency stop button (6, Illustration 6) to cut the
power.
D The On/Off switch on the monitor support trolley can also be used as an emergency stop (3, Illustration 3).
21-7
2–2–1–3 Dose Control

D General principle.
Since x-rays are a form of ionizing radiation it is recommended to try to limit their emission as much as possible,
and to reduce as much as possible their power during use. The Stenoscop is fitted with a regulation system that,
in automatic mode, permanently controls the x-ray dose emitted and limits it to 5 Roentgen per minute in normal
fluoroscopy and to 10 Roentgen per minute in high resolution fluoroscopy.
In order to further reduce the emitted dose it is recommended to follow the advice given below:
– Use the collimation shutters to limit the zone of interest and reduce the x-ray flux as much as possible.
– Work in pulsed fluoroscopy as much as possible.
– During pediatrics examinations, use manual mode and reduce the mA to minimum (0.1 mA) and control the
image quality with the kV (85 kV for example).
– Work in manual at kV values greater than 60 kV so as to reduce x-ray absorption by the patient and reduce
the diffused X–radiation.
D Dose measurement (Option).

This option is used to measure in mGy x cm2 the X–radiation emitted during an examination. Some regulations
require this value to be recorded with the patient’s file. For further information about this option, refer to Chapter 5.
21-8
2–2–1–4 Control Timer

The Stenoscop is fitted with an x-ray emission control timer to provide a permanent check on the elapsed x-ray
emission time.
D Fluoroscopy counter to 5 minutes.

– The timer incorporated in the Stenoscop counts the total x-ray emission time.
– Reset the timer to zero after a fluoroscopy of 5 minutes
(Key 7, Illustration 6).
– An indicator lamp flashes and a buzzer sounds to warn you about 30 seconds before the end of this period.
– Fluoroscopy is interrupted after 5 minutes if the counter has not been reset.
D Total emission time.
– The total radiation duration is permanently displayed (8, Illustration 6).
– It can be reset to zero (Key 9, Illustration 6).
2–2–1–5 Thermal Security

A red indicator lamp (2, Illustration 6) symbolizing a thermometer flashes when the maximum thermal capacity of the
source is about to be reached.
Fluoroscopy in “reduced dose” is still allowed until the x-ray tube head maximum dilatation safety device is activated.
At this point x-ray emission is no longer possible and the tube must be allowed to cool sufficiently before restarting
x-ray emission.
21-9
2–2–1–6 Beam Limiter

Two pairs of shutters, separately controlled, are fitted to the collimator.
One pair is semi–transparent.
The shutters can be used in radiography and in fluoroscopy.
D In fluoroscopy mode.
The field covered is limited to match the image intensifier format.
D In radiography mode.
The field covered is limited to a circle of 30 cm or 9.5” (depending on local regulations).
CAUTION On 16–cm field.
On passing from fluoroscopy to radiography, the field size covered in fluoroscopy is maintained
and the keys “open diaphragms” flash to warn the operator.
By pressing these controls the shutters open immediately to full cassette format and the “open
diaphragms” keys light up permanently.
On 22–cm field.
On passing from fluoroscopy to radiography, the field size covered in fluoroscopy is maintained
and the keys “open diaphragms” flash to warn the operator.
To obtain full cassette format keep pressing on the “open diaphragm” controls until maximum
opening, intermediate positions being authorized.
Maximum opening is indicated by the 2 “open diaphragm” keys lighting up permanently.
2–2–1–7 Image Quality: Distortion
The technology used in the image intensifier tubes makes them sensitive to the earth’s
CAUTION magnetic field. It is therefore possible that in some positions a rectangular object
appears slightly curved.
21-10
2–2–1–8 Monitors
The Stenoscop uses high resolution “Flicker Free” monitors to give the operator optimal visual comfort. An ambient
lightning sensor automatically adjusts image brightness according to the lighting of the work environment.
The monitors can be oriented towards the operator.
D Image rotation.
Image rotation is done from the C–arm support mobile panel
(20 and 21 Illustration 6).
Rotation is ± 170° with respect to the middle position with the DR4 and MD10 options, and continuous with the
MDA option.
Note: To assist positioning, rotation stops temporarily at the middle position during rotation with the
DR4 and MD10 options.
D Image orientation.
Image orientation can vary depending on the position of the C–arm around the patient and on the position of the
image amplifier.
The reference position was defined on the Stenoscop as being: “C–arm support on the left of the patient and image
amplifier tube under the table”.
In this position, the image appears oriented normally on the monitor.
If another position of the C–arm or of the tube is used, the image appears inverted or reversed. It can then be
re–oriented using the image orientation inversion keys.
21-11
2–2–2 Radiography Mode
2–2–2–1 Overview
The Stenoscop can record an x-ray image on radiographic film. To do this, the system requires the cassette holder
option.
WHENEVER THE MACHINE IS USED IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE, THE OPERATOR MUST

DANGER CHECK THAT:
D The cassette holder is correctly attached.

D A film suitable for the application is in the cassette.
D The cassette is suitable for the application and is placed in the cassette holder before taking the x-ray.
2–2–2–2 Preparation for Taking an Image
1. Place the cassette holder on the front face of the image intensifier (with or without grid).
2. Put the cassette with film into the cassette holder, making sure it is correctly oriented (20, Illustration 2).
3. Choose the radiography mode on the control panel (Key 10, Illustration 6).
The mAs indicator lights up.
D Choose the kV with keys 16 on the control panel (Illustration 6).
D Choose the mAs with keys 18 on the control panel (Illustration 6).
D Open the collimator fully by keeping buttons 23 and 24 pressed until the flashing stops (Illustration 6).
Note: If required, the radiography can be carried out with reduced open field.
Lack of collimator opening does not prevent taking an image.

CAUTION
21-12
2–2–2–3 Taking an Image
1. Press on an x-ray command (control panel keys, pedal, handle).

2. Keep pressing until the end of the exposure is signaled with the indicator lamp 1 going out.
Note: If pressure is released before the end of the exposure, exposure is immediately stopped.
21-13
2–2–3 Single Image Mode: Electronic Radiography

This mode is used to record a single image.
2–2–3–2 Automatic Mode

Choose the electronic radiography mode on the control panel (key 11), kV and mA adjustment is done automatically if
key 19 is unlit.
In automatic mode keys 16 and 18 of the control panel are inactive.
D Standard resolution.
This mode is selected by default on power up.
D High Resolution.
Select this mode by pressing key 12 on the control panel.
2–2–3–3 Manual Mode

D To select manual mode, press key 19 on the control panel.
Key 19 lit: Manual choice of kV/mA.
Key 19 unlit: Automatic choice of kV/mA.
Note: The last kV and mA of automatic fluoroscopy are kept in manual fluoroscopy when changing
from automatic mode to manual mode.
D Adjust the mA and kV according to the type of examination by using keys 16 and 18 on the control panel.
21-14
2–2–4 Continuous fluoroscopy

If necessary:
D Diaphragm the image with the collimation shutters (keys 23 and 24).
D Press the image inversion keys.
D Turn the monitors (keys 20 and 21).
Note: Rotation can be made on either monitor.
2–2–4–2 Automatic Mode

The system is in automatic mode if key 19 is unlit.
In automatic mode keys 16 and 18 of the control panel are inactive.
The kV and mA are automatically chosen to provide optimum image quality. The selected values are permanently
displayed and the last parameters used are memorized and stay displayed when x-ray emission stops.
When x-ray emission stops the last image is frozen on screen A.
D Standard Resolution.
D High Resolution.
WHILE USING CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PERFORM
DANGER PULSED–LIKE ACQUISITION BY DOING REPEATED SHORT PULSES WITH THE
FLUORO CONTROL.
AS THIS COULD OVER STRESS THE UNIT, THE SYSTEM MAY STOP AND IT WILL BE
NECESSARY TO RESTART IT.
PULSED IMAGES SHALL ONLY BE ACQUIRED BY USING APPROPRIATE MODE :
ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY OR PULSED FLUOROSCOPY.
21-15
2–2–4–3 Manual Mode
In manual mode the camera’s automatic gain control is not active. Manual mode can
CAUTION therefore not be used for examination of a region offering high x-ray attenuation.
D To select manual mode, press key 19 of the control panel.

Key 19 lit: Manual choice of kV/mA.
Key 19 unlit: Automatic choice of kV/mA.
Note: The last kV and mA of automatic fluoroscopy are kept in manual fluoroscopy when changing
from automatic mode to manual mode.
D Adjust the mA and kV according to the type of examination by using keys 16 and 18 of the control panel.
D Trigger the x-rays and adjust the mA and kV if necessary.
Note: To return to automatic intensity control, press again on the manual selection button (19).
21-16
2–2–5 Pulsed Fluoroscopy

Operation in this mode is identical to that of continuous fluoroscopy mode.
The difference with this mode is that the x-ray emission is pulsed, which reduces the emitted x-ray dose and permits
prolonged use since tube heating is reduced.
D Select the pulsed fluoroscopy mode by pressing on key 13.
Note: Pulsed fluoroscopy can be used in standard or high resolution mode, and in automatic or
manual mode.
Operation is identical to that of continuous fluoroscopy mode.
21-17
2–3 STORAGE AND IMAGE MANIPULATION
2–3–1 Overview
Memorization and manipulation of images depends on the system’s digital option. The table at the end of Chapter
4 shows the available functions with these different options.
2–4 PRACTICAL USE OF MDA
2–4–1 Switch-On, Starting up the System

The MDA option has been designed to display, in emergency, x-ray images from start-up even if system boot is not
completed.
D Operating Mode.
Following system switch-on, the following pattern is displayed on Monitors A and B.
Illustration 16 –
21-18
You can now display x-ray images by using the x-ray exposure controls. If exposure is stopped, the image is frozen
on Monitor A.
Note: This image can be reprographed by using the Print button located on the front panel of the
desired printer.
This image cannot be saved in the system memory before the memory boot has
CAUTION completed.
2–4–2 Timer Function

Calling up the Timer
Press the key displaying the date and time in the viewer menu.
(See Illustration 9)
To display the control window.
1. Control Window
Illustration 17 –
TIMER
12:45:23
CLEAR Start/
Stop
2. Method of Operation
D To start the timer, press <Start/Stop>.
D To stop the timer, press <Start/Stop> again.
D To reset the display, press <Clear>.
Closing the timer

To close the timer window, press the key displaying the date and time again.
Note: This action automatically stops the timer function.
21-19
2–4–3 Imaging Function
2–4–3–1 Geometry
D Geometry Window
Press the Geometry key in the Viewer Menu to display the control window (see Illustration 9).
Illustration 18 –
Enlarge Black Image

Borders Move
Rotation Zoom Orient.
D Overview
Handles dynamic or stored images.
– Image Belonging to a Sequence
Changes performed on this image are automatically applied to all images in the sequence.
Note: If an image of the same sequence is displayed on the other monitor, it is changed accordingly,
except concerning the zoom function.
D Image Rotation
Rotates the displayed image to the right or left.
Note: This function remains in effect for the image concerned, and images in the same sequence,
even if the sequence is no longer displayed.
21-20
D Image Orientation
Displays the image according to the displayed anatomy.
Note: This function remains in effect for the image concerned, and images in the same sequence,
even if the sequence is no longer displayed.
D Zoom
Enlarges the image.
Note: Zoom is not active during x-ray emission. However, if the last acquired image was zoomed, the
zoom factor will be reapplied to the displayed x–ray image when x–ray emission stops. To
suppress this zoom, press <Reset> on the Viewer screen (Illustration 9).
– Enlargement
Varies from 1 through 8.
Note: The resulting image is interpolated.
Zoom remains active for the image concerned as long as it is displayed, and the images in the
same sequence, even if that sequence is not displayed.
The enlarged image can be printed.
D Enlarge
Enlarges a position of the displayed image by a factor of 2.
Press this key to display the enlarge positioning window.
21-21
Illustration 19 –
CLEAR
OK
– Press on the region corresponding to the part of the image you wish to enlarge.
Note: The enlarged portion of the image in not displayed interpolated.
– To deactivate magnification, press <Clear>.

– To exit this function, press <OK>.
Note: This function is not active during x-ray emission.
The image can be printed as it appears on the screen.
D Black Borders
Surrounds the visible region of the image with black borders.
Note: This function is not active during x-ray emission.

Use the collimator blades to limit the field visible during x-ray emission.
21-22
– Use of Black Borders

G A control window appears, allowing borders to be opened or closed.
Note: This function is active on Monitor A only.
Illustration 20 –
CLEAR
OK
G Borders close or open two by two (Up/Down, Right/Left). To close Black Borders, use the Up/Right
arrows. To open, use the Down/Left arrows.
G When the desired result has been obtained, press <OK>.
Note: The Black Borders remain active for all the images of the same patient.
<Clear> deletes the black borders.
Note: Black borders are deleted when the measurement functions are called up.
21-23
D Moving the Image

A control window appears, allowing the image to be moved.
Illustration 21 –
CLEAR
OK
– Moving the Image

Use the direction arrows, and press <OK>.
– Use the direction arrows, and press <OK>.
Note: This function is not active during x-ray emission. However, if the last acquired image was
moved, this displacement will be reapplied to the displayed x–ray image when x–ray emission
stops. To suppress displacement, press <Reset> on the Viewer screen (Illustration 9).
<Clear> positions the center of the image at the center of the screen.
The change of position remains active for the image concerned and for all images in the same
sequence even if that sequence is not displayed.
21-24
2–4–3–2 Measurement
D Measurement Window
Press <Measure> on the Viewer Menu to display this window
(see Illustration 9 for reference).
Illustration 22 –
Stenosis Angle Ellipse
Calibration Distance Erase
D Overview:
Measurements performed using MDA must not be used in diagnosis, but for research
CAUTION purposes only.
The accuracy of measurements performed on x-ray images may be subject to error by

CAUTION as much as 50% or more, because an x-ray image is a two-
dimensional representation of a three-dimensional volume, and not an anatomical
section.
D Calibration
Allows the image to be calibrated with respect to a displayed object of known dimensions.
– Definition of calibration segment:
G Place the first X at one end of the reference object by moving a finger on the positioning block, then press
<SET>.
G Place the second X at the other end of the reference object.
The value of this segment in pixels appears in the message window.
21-25
G To confirm this calibration segment, press <OK>.
Note: The first point can be changed before pressing <OK>, by pressing <SET>.
Pressing <SET> allows each end of the measured segment to be changed in turn.
– Definition of Calibration Value

When both ends of the calibration segment have been confirmed, an alphanumeric keyboard appears on the
user interface screen.
G Enter the actual value of the calibration segment in mm.
G Press <OK>. The calibration takes effect.
Note: The calibration applies to the displayed image and to all images in the same sequence.
– Recalibration
Calibration can be repeated.
Note: The last calibration performed becomes the active calibration.
D Distance Measurement
Note: Two different segments can be measured.
Results appear in Fields D1 and D2 on Monitor A.
If more than two measurements are performed, the oldest measurement is deleted.
– Place the first X at one end of the segment to be measured, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
– Place the second X at the other end.
– Press <OK>. If calibration has been performed, the measurement result appears in mm or, if not, in pixels.
Note: The first point can be changed before pressing <OK>, by pressing <SET>.
Pressing <SET> allows each end of the measured segment to be changed in turn.
21-26
D Percentage, Stenosis Measurement

Measures a ratio between two distances.
– Perform two distance measurements.
Note: Calibration is not required before a percentage measurement.
– Press <Stenosis>.
G The resulting ratio between the smaller and larger distance appears on Monitor A, expressed in %.
D Angle Measurement
Measures an angle on the image. The result is given in degrees.
Note: Calibration is not required before an angle measurement.
Note: Two different angles can be measured. The results appear in Fields A1 and A2 on Monitor A.
If more than two measurements are performed, the oldest measurement is deleted.
– Place the X on the screen at one end of the angle, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
– Place the second X at the vertex of the angle, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
– Place the third X at the other end of the angle, and press <OK>.
Note: The points of the angle can be changed by pressing <SET> before pressing <OK>.
21-27
D Marker
Used to display on the screen a flag line that remains displayed for the duration of x-ray emission.
– Place the first X at one end of the flag, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
– Place the second X at the other end of the flag, and confirm by pressing <OK>.
Note: The first point can be changed by pressing <SET> before pressing <OK>.
– To remove the flag, open the Flag subwindow and press <CLEAR>.
D Erase
Erases the measurements and all results.
Note: This action does not erase the marker.
21-28
2–4–3–3 Annotations
D Annotation Window
Press <Annotations> in the Viewer Menu to display this window
(see Illustration 9 for reference).
Illustration 23 –
Library 1 Library 2 Library 3 Library 4 Library 5 Keyboard CLEAR
Word
Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments
Delete
Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments Add
Comments Library
Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments
Name
Valid
SEQ.
Valid
IMAGE
D Overview
Creates annotations on the image.
D Creating Annotations
You can use words already stored in libraries, or enter text.
– Libraries
Five dictionaries of 30 medical terms are available. To open the desired dictionary, press the corresponding
key.
Note: All terms can be changed by the user.
G Use of a Pre-Programmed Text

Press the corresponding key.
G Corrections
<Word Delete> deletes the last word.
21-29
– Alphanumeric Keyboard
Allows free text to be entered.
Illustration 24 –
Comment
Library 1 Library 2 Library 3 Library 4 Library 5 Keyboard
Delete.
Æ ! ” # Ç $ b & % ( ) Word
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Delete
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P ” ’ Add
^ ‘
: ~ Library
LOCK A S D F G H J K L ; O Name
Ø < > Valid

SHIFT Z X C V B N M , .
SHIFT SEQ.
+ Valid
= IMAGE
G Lowercase Characters
To enter a lowercase character or lower character shown on a key, press the corresponding key.
G Uppercase Characters
To enter an uppercase character or upper character shown on a key, press <Shift> and the corresponding
key.
To enter a string of uppercase characters, press <Lock>.
To deactivate this function, press <Lock> again.
Note: The keyboard is locked in uppercase characters by default.
G Accented Characters
To create an accented character, press the desired accent followed by the character. If the accented
character is known to the system, it will be displayed.
21-30
G Corrections
” ” deletes the last character.
<Word Delete> deletes the last word.
– Confirm Annotations
G <Valid IMAGE> confirms the annotation for the displayed image. The annotation appears on the display
screen.
G <Valid SEQ.> confirms the annotation for all images in a sequence. The comment appears on the display
screen.
D Positioning of Annotations on Screen
The text appears on the image. A control window allows it to be moved.
– Positioning of Annotations
Place the annotation at the desired location on the screen by sliding your finger on the positioning block.
The MDA system uses an automatic contrast process that ensures the annotation text
CAUTION is visible whatever the background color of the image. In some exceptional cases,
however, annotation text may be difficult to read in areas of the screen. We recommend
that you move such text to more suitable areas of the screen.
G Press <OK> to confirm this position.
– Placing an Annotation with addition of an arrow.

1. Create the text, and confirm.
2. Place the text in the desired location.
3. Press <SET>.
This draws an arrow from the text to the center of the image.
4. Move the tip of the arrow using the positioning block.
5. Press <OK>.
21-31
Note: The text and arrow can be moved before <OK> is pressed by pressing <SET> again.
– Pressing <SET> allows the text and the arrow to be moved in turn.
D Erasure of Annotations
Open the Annotations screen, and press the <Clear> key twice.
Note: If the comments were applied to a sequence, they are erased from all the images concerned.
D User Library
Annotations can be created and stored in each of the libraries.
– Creating an Annotation
1. Call up the Annotations Menu.
2. Select the desired dictionary.
3. Call up the alphanumeric keyboard.
4. Enter the desired text.
5. Press <Add>.
Note: If the user library is full, an error message appears.
– Deleting an Annotation
1. Open a library.
2. Press <Clear>.
3. Press on the annotation to be deleted.
21-32
2–4–3–4 Sequence
D Sequence Window
Pressing <Acq/Review> in the Viewer Menu (See Illustration 9) opens the Function subwindow if this selection
was enabled in the system configuration. (See System Parameters para. 2–4–7).
Illustration 25 –
4 I/S = V
Loop Start/Stop
First Last
2546
128
33
Note: The appearance of this window depends on the current mode, and on system configuration.
(See System Parameters para. 2–4–7).
D Overview
– If <Acq/Review> is pressed during x-ray emission and while the Sequence window is closed, images are
recorded at the displayed speed.
Note: The default speed is that of the last acquisition performed.

If the Sequence window is not displayed, the images are recorded at a speed of four images per
second.
– When there is no x-ray emission, press <Acq/Review> to open the window.
21-33
D Recording of Sequences
– Pressing <Acq/Review> automatically starts x-ray image recording..
– Pressing the Stop/Start key during x-ray emission starts the recording if the Sequence window is open.
– The storage speed is displayed. The speed can be changed before x-ray emission begins.
Note: Maximum acquisition speed depends on system configuration.
Storage capacity depends on system configuration, acquisition speed, and the number of
images already stored.
G The number of images and time remaining are displayed on Monitor A.
Note: When x-ray emission stops, image storage is automatically interrupted.
Pressing <Acq/Review> or <Start/Stop> also interrupts acquisition and closes the Sequence
window.
Before beginning an acquisition, ensure that there is enough available memory space
CAUTION for the application concerned.
G When there is no space remaining, the system displays an error message.
Note: This action does not interrupt x-ray emission.
G Some data must be erased from the memory before creating a new recording (see Patient Database
Function para. 2–4–4).
21-34
D Image Numbering
Images are numbered sequentially for a given patient for a given date.
– Image are numbered in the following format: I: xxx. This information is displayed on the monitors.
– Images within a sequence.
The screen indicates the sequence number and the total number of sequences for the patient, along with
the number of the image within the sequence and the total number of images within the sequence.
The format is as follows: S: zz/kk
I: vvv/ttt
D Dynamic Sequence Review

When there is no x-ray emission, press <Acq/Review> to open the sequence control window.
Note: If the displayed image is not part of a sequence, the Sequence window keys are disabled.
– To display another sequence, press the sequence selection arrows.

– To begin the review, press <Start/Stop>.
To end the review, press <Start/Stop> again.
Note: A review cannot be started if Monitor B is selected.
– Display speed can be changed by pressing the Up/Down speed control arrows.
Note: The display speed is also expressed as a factor of the acquisition speed.
The maximum display speed depends on system configuration.
– If <Loop> is enabled, the records are displayed continuously.

– The first and last images of the dynamic review can be selected using the corresponding arrows.
– If the review is stopped, the image selection arrows can be used to display another image.
21-35
2–4–3–5 Subtraction
D Subtraction Window
Press <Subtraction> in the Viewer Menu (see Illustration 9) to open this window if this selection was enabled in
the system configuration.
(See System Parameters para. 2–4–7).
Illustration 26 –
SUBTRACTION
Pixel Sub
Shift Disable
Subtraction = 90%
Mask
Select
D Overview
– Controls subtraction during acquisition or post-acquisition processing.
D Acquisition of Subtracted Images
– Mask Acquisition
G Trigger x-ray emission.
G When the acquired image can be used as a mask, the system displays the message Ready for Subtraction
on Screen A.
G Stop x-ray emission.
Note: The recursive filtering value can be changed during mask acquisition.
D Acquisition of Subtracted Images

– Restart x-ray emission. The mask is transferred to Monitor B, if the A –> B Transfer is selected and the
subtracted images appear on A.
Note: If x-ray emission is interrupted, a new subtraction mask must be acquired.
21-36
D Recording of Subtracted Images

– Saving an Image
Save the displayed image on disk by pressing <Manual Save>. The corresponding subtraction mask is also
stored in memory to allow post-processing of the image.
Note: Two images are created on the disk.

The last subtraction image is also saved if the Auto Save key is activated.
– Saving an Image Sequence
G Calls up the Sequence function after the beginning of subtraction.
Pressing <Acq/Review> during x-ray emission automatically starts the saving of subtracted images. The
mask is stored as the first image in the sequence.
Recording can be interrupted by closing the Sequence window.
Note: The recording of images stops when x-ray acquisition stops.
G Call up the Sequence function before the beginning of subtraction.

– If the Sequence window is open when mask acquisition takes place, press <Start/Stop> after re–starting x–ray
to acquire subtracted images. This will start saving the images. The mask is saved as the first image of the
sequence.
G Recording can be interrupted by closing the Sequence window.
Note: Stopping the x-ray emission automatically stops the recording of images.
D Processing of Subtracted Images during X-Ray Emission

– End of Subtraction
Return instantaneously to the non-subtracted x-ray image by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.
G To display the subtracted image again, press the key again.
– Landscape
Display the anatomy as a background to the subtracted image.
G Press the arrows to see the anatomy more or less in the background.
21-37
D Post-Acquisition Processing of Subtracted Images
Note: An image or sequence of images acquired as subtracted images is displayed subtracted by

default.
The image processing functions available in real time are accessible for post-acquisition processing. In addition, the
following processing functions are available:
– Change of Mask
By default, the mask is the first image in the sequence. Another subtraction mask can be defined.
G Disable subtraction by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.
G Display the desired image using the image search keys.
G Press <Select. Mask>. The image becomes the mask.
G Reactivate subtraction by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.
It is automatically disabled when you exit the Subtraction function.
– Moving the Mask
If the patient has moved between mask acquisition and subtraction, the image can be adjusted using the
Pixel–shift function.
1. Press <Pixel–shift>.
2. Move the mask with respect to the image using the direction arrows.
3. Press <OK>.
4. To return to the original position, press <Clear>.
D Sequential Review of Subtracted Images in Sequence
– A series of subtracted images acquired in sequence can be reviewed in sequence.
To do this, open the Sequence window, and start the review.
21-38
Note: Only the following processing functions are active during the sequential review of subtracted
images.
G Landscape Function,
G Deactivated Subtraction Function,
G Brightness/Contrast,
G Inverse video,
G Edge enhancement.
2–4–3–6 Maximum (or Peak) Opacification (See Illustration 9)

D Overview
Allows a network to be displayed at maximum opacification.
D Real-Time Maximum Opacification Acquisition

1. Press <Max. Op.>.
2. Begin fluoroscopy.
3. Inject the contrast medium when the INJECT message appears on the monitor.
4. Stop fluoroscopy when the desired mapping is completed.
Note: Subtraction Mode can be selected at the same time as Maximum Opacification.
5. Begin x-ray emission after pressing <Max. Op.> and <Subtraction>.
This allows mask acquisition.

6. Stop x-ray emission when the mask is satisfactory.
7. Restart x-ray emission.
The Maximum Opacification function is applied in Subtraction Mode.
In this case, only the contrast medium is visible.
D Real-Time Recording of Maximum Opacification Images
– The entire Maximum Opacification sequence can be recorded using the Sequence function.
– The result of a Maximum Opacification can also be recorded using the <Manual Save> key when x-ray
emission is complete.
21-39
D Creation of Maximum Opacification during Post-Acquisition Processing

A Maximum Opacification image can be created based on a previously recorded sequence of images.
1. Open the Sequence Menu, and select the desired sequence.
Change the first and last image if necessary.
2. Press <Max. Op.>.
3. Press <Start/Stop>.
The system calculates the Maximum Opacification on all selected images, and displays the result on the
screen.
Note: When the Sequence review is stopped, the resulting image is automatically saved at the end
of the images already saved for the patient.
2–4–3–7 Road Mapping (See Illustration 9)

D Overview
Performs a subtraction on a Maximum Opacification.
D Road Mapping Acquisition
1. Press <Road Map>.
2. Start the fluoro, and inject the contrast medium to carry out a Maximum Opacification image acquisition.
3. Stop fluoroscopy when Maximum Opacification is reached.
The screen displays the message: Ready for Road Mapping.
4. Restart Fluoroscopy.
The Maximum Opacification image is transferred to Monitor B, and the real-time road mapping image appears
on Monitor A.
Note: If fluoroscopy is interrupted and restarted without exiting the Road Mapping function, Road
Mapping remains active with the acquired mask.
To exit the Road Mapping function, press <Road Map> again.

D Real-Time Processing of Road Map Images
If the Subtraction Menu was active during the road mapping x-ray exposures, all processing functions available
in subtraction are also available during road mapping.
21-40
2–4–3–8 Screen Composer

D Screen Composer Window
Press the <Screen Composer> in the Viewer Menu to display this window (see Illustration 9).
Illustration 27 –
SCREEN COMPOSER
D Overview
Generates sophisticated screen formats.
Due to restrictions of size and format, image annotations and borders are not displayed
CAUTION in Screen Composer.
D Mode of Operation
– Press <Screen Composer>.
The last screen format used is selected by default, and the Monitor B display changes according to this format.
G The first image displayed in this format is the image displayed on Monitor A when the function was called
up. The other images are the subsequent images in the database.
G Select another screen format if necessary.
– Select Images to be Displayed
The active region (surrounded by a white square) can be changed using the direction arrows in the Screen
Composer window.
G Use the image selection keys or the sequence selection keys to select an image. The selected image
is displayed in the active region.
21-41
Note: You can change the appearance of this image using the functions in the Geometry Menu, or the
Edge key.
G Change the active region using the direction arrows, and select another image.
G Repeat this operation as many times as necessary to display the desired images.
– To exit from Screen Composer, press <Screen Composer> again.
Note: When you exit the Screen Composer function, the image of the active zone is displayed on
Monitor A, and Monitor A is selected.
– Printing the Screen Format
You can print the screen format as it appears.
2–4–3–9 Videocassette Recorder (See Illustration 9)

D Overview
Allows access to the main VCR functions.
Note: The other functions are accessible via the VCR control panel when the VCR window is not
displayed.
D VCR Control Window

Press the VCR key in the Viewer Menu to display this window.
Illustration 28 –
VCR
Stop Pause Rewind Play Fast

Forward
Auto Record
Record
21-42
D Mode of Operation
– Auto Record
The interface between the VCR and MDA was designed to allow x-ray images to be saved automatically if
this key is selected when the VCR is powered and a cassette has been inserted.
Note: Auto Record is selected by default when power is applied to the machine.
To disable this mode, press <Auto Record>.
– Play
Plays the video tape. The image is displayed on Monitor B.
– Pause
Stops the tape temporarily.
Press this key again, or press <Play> to continue play.
– Fast Forward
Winds the tape forward at high speed.
G Pressing this key during play makes the tape advance at high speed with image display.
– Fast Rewind
Rewinds the tape at high speed.
G Pressing this key during play makes the tape rewind at high speed with image display.
– Stop
Stops the tape.
– Record
Records images as they are displayed on Monitor A.
Note: This function is independent of x-ray emission.
21-43
2–4–4 Patient Database Function
Allows database display and selection of images to be displayed.
Check that the data recorded in the system are compatible with local regulations
CAUTION concerning the management of patient files and the confidentiality of medical
information.
If necessary, access to patient information can be protected by creating a password to
limit access to the Patient Database function.
Note: Monitor selection is not active in the Patient Database function.
D Displaying Images from Two Different Patients

Images from two different patients can be displayed on the two monitors.
21-44
2–4–4–2 Control Screen

Illustration 29 –

Viewer Help
18 : 30 Database Setup
Message Window
A B
PATIENT NAME ID NUMBER DATE DOCTOR PROCEDURE DOSE
PATIENT
DELETE
DATE TIME REFERENCE FORMAT TYPE

OK
IMAGE Floppy
ERASE Disk
2–4–4–3 Mode of Operation

D Patient Database
The upper window displays the information concerning four patients. The highlited patient is the one whose
information is displayed on the selected monitor.
– Patient Selection
Press the line containing information on the patient you want to select.
G To display the next or previous patient files, press the Up/Down arrows.
G Patient Sorting
Press the heading of the column corresponding to the desired sorting criterion.
Note: Dates are sorted in reverse chronological order.
21-45
– Deleting a Patient
G To delete all information concerning a patient from the Database, select the line corresponding to the
patient, and press <Patient Delete>. You are asked to confirm. To do this, press <OK>.
When patient information and images have been deleted, they cannot be recovered.
CAUTION
– Patient Information
Displayed in the upper window. Information can be entered and changed using the Patient Information
function. (See para. 2–4–5).
G Patient Name
As entered, or the default name generated by the system.
G ID Number
Patient identification number.
G Date
Generated automatically by the system. Contains the date on which the first image for the patient was
acquired.
G Doctor
Name of practitioner who carried out the procedure.
G Procedure
Contains the type of procedure performed on the patient.
G Dose
Contains the cumulative x-ray dose received by the patient, as measured by the dose measurement
option if present in the system.
D Image Database
– Selection of Images for a Patient
The lower window displays the information corresponding to three images or series of images (dynamic
sequences) for the selected patient.
G To display information relating to the previous or following images, press the Up/Down arrows.
– Deletion of Images for a Patient
G To delete an image or a series of images for a patient from the database, select the corresponding line,
and press <Image Erase>. You are asked to confirm. To do this, press <OK>.
21-46
When patient images have been deleted, they cannot be recovered.

CAUTION
– Image Information
The following information is displayed in the lower window.

G Date
Image acquisition date.
G Time
Image acquisition time.
G References
Recorded item type: image (I), or sequence (S), and number of images in sequence.
G Format
Indicates image format.
G Type
This field indicates image type.
D Displaying Images from Two Different Patients
– Mode of Operation
G Select Monitor A in the Viewer function.
G Enter the Patient Database function.
G Select a patient.
G Return to the Viewer function.
G Select Monitor B.
G Enter the Patient Database function
G Select another patient.
G Return to the Viewer function.
Note: If x-ray emission is resumed after this operation, and more images are recorded, the new images
are associated with the patient displayed on Monitor A.
G This allows new images to be added to the record of an existing patient in the Database.
21-47
Apply extreme caution when using this function, to avoid associating images from two
CAUTION different patients under one name.
D Image Transfer
Note: Images are transferred to diskette in BMP format.
– Sending an Image
G Select the image to be sent on the patient file management control screen.
The selected image appears on the selected monitor.
G Press <Floppy Disk> followed by <OK>.
The image is sent.
Note: For reasons of privacy, only the image is transferred (i.e., patient data and annotations are not
transferred).
21-48
2–4–5 Patient Information Function

D Overview
Allows entry of patient information in the database.
Note: The system offers to change the information for the patient whose images are displayed on
Monitor A.
Note: Monitor A is selected automatically when you enter this function.
– Patient Numbering by Default

For direct access to viewer functions when the machine is powered up, without the need to enter patient
information beforehand, the system generates a default patient name on powering up.
This code has the following structure: –Def JJ/MM-HH:MM.
Note: This default name can be replaced.
21-49
D Control Screen
Illustration 30 –
Patient Name ID Number Doctor Procedure Comments
! ” # Ç $ b & % ( )
Æ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P ” ’ OK
^ ‘
: ~
LOCK A S D F G H J K L ; O
< > NEW

SHIFT Ø Z X C V B N M , .
SHIFT PATIENT
+ RESET
= DOSE
D Operating Mode
– New Patient
Creates a new patient using the automatic numbering method.
Note: This action resets the dose counter.
– Reset Dose
Resets the dose counter.
G This may be necessary if x-ray emissions were performed before the patient was placed in the x-ray field,
to ensure that only the dose actually emitted to the patient is recorded in the patient file.
21-50
– Patient Name
Allows the name of the patient to be entered in place of the system-generated default name.
G The name in the memory is inserted on the second line of the message window.
Enter the new name via the alphanumeric keyboard. The text entered appears on the third line. To correct
any keystroke errors, use the <– key.
Once the name is entered correctly, press <OK>. The patient name appears on the monitors.
G Also allows you to change the patient name entry if a typing error has occurred previously.
Apply extreme caution when using this function, to avoid assigning an incorrect
CAUTION patient name to a series of images.
– Identification Number
Allows an identification number to be entered.
– Doctor
Allows a name to be entered for the doctor carrying out the procedure.
– Procedure
Allows a name to be entered for the procedure performed.
– Comments
Allows the entry of text as comments.
21-51
2–4–6 Help Function

D Overview
The MDA system generates messages to inform the use of current actions and possible problems.
In addition, the Help function allows the user to obtain detailed help messages concerning MDA system operation.
D Control Screen
Illustration 31 –

Viewer Database Help
18 : 30 Setup
Explanatory notes
D Mode of Operation
– Automatic Help
The MDA system automatically displays an information document according to the system status when
<Help> is pressed.
Note: Help text can be scrolled paragraph-by-paragraph or page-by-page via the scrolling arrows.
– Help on MDA Functions

Press the key corresponding to the function in the Help subwindow.
Note: Help text can be scrolled paragraph-by-paragraph or page-by-page via the scrolling arrows.
21-52
2–4–7 System Parameters Function

D Overview
Used to modify the presentation of the user interface, permanent data and user preferences of the MDA system.
D Control Screen
Illustration 32 –
PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5
SHUTDOWN
Setup Permanent DAP Full Audio Remote

Preset Data Test Annotation Feedback Control
D Operating Mode
– Selection of Preferred User Interface
The MDA system allows to configure the user interface and presentation of the control screens. Certain
groups of keys are can be suppressed if they are not required for the medical application, or certain
subwindows can be suppressed if the user wishes to work in Automatic Mode (for example, advanced
functions for controlling dynamic sequences or subtraction).
The MDA system can define five different operating modes.

G Press the key of your choice to select the user interface operating mode. The system returns to Viewer,
and the operating mode of the screen is adapted to the configuration selected.
21-53
– Modification of User Interface Preferences.

You can modify the operating modes of the user interface preadjustments.
G Press <Set–up Preset>. The active and inactive functions for preadjustment appear on the screen.
Illustration 33 –
PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 PRESET 5
Sequence Vascular Screen

VCR Annotations
Function Function Composer
Measure Sequence Subtraction Help

Video Aux. OK
Function Menu Menu Menu
Geometry Review Road Map FNR PRESET

Print 2
SubMenu Submenu Menu Type 1 NAME
Setup Permanent Dose Full Audio Remote

Preset Data Measurement Annotation Feedback Control
Test
G Select the preadjustment to be modified.

G Select the functions that you wish to appear in this operating mode by pressing the corresponding keys.
If one function is present, it will appear in Gray.
If a function is absent, it appears in White.
If no function can be selected because it depends on an inactive function, it appears in Black.
21-54
– Modification of the movement automatic detection level value.

Automatic detection prevents the effects of motion blurring when displaying the structures in movement.
G Press the key to modify the value. At each key press, the value is incremented. Values are 1 through
3, where 1 is the lowest level and 3 the highest level. You can adjust this parameter as a function of the
medical application. The default value is 1.
Note: If motion blurring is disturbing in the type of examination being made, increase the value.
– Confirmation of the parameters of this preadjustment.

Press <OK> to confirm your selection.
– Changing the preadjustment name.
Your can change the name that appears on the key.
G Press <PRESET NAME>.
G Enter the desired name and press <OK>
– Modification of permanent data.
G Control Window.
To display this window, press <Permanent Data>.
Illustration 34 –
Hospital PREVIOUS
Date Time Language
Name MENU
Æ ! ” # Ç $ b & % ( )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
OK
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P ” ’
^ ‘
: ~ SERVICE
LOCK A S D F G H J K L ; O MENU
< > Database

SHIFT Ø Z X C V B N M , .
SHIFT Password
+
=
21-55
G Name of Hospital
Used to enter the name of the Hospital.
G Date
Used to change the date in the system clock.
G Time
Used to change the time in the system clock.
G Language
Call up a subwindow used to select the language in which the MDA user interface operates.
G Access to Service Menu
Access to this menu is reserved to Field Engineers of GE Medical Systems and is password-protected.
G Database Password
Note: This function is available only if it has been enabled at system installation.
Used to enter a password that is requested at access to the Patient File function. This ensures the
confidentiality of the information contained in the Patient Database.
Without the password, you can create images for a new patient, store and display the images. However,
you cannot access the Patient Database to display the images of another patient.
After the creation of a new patient, the data of the previous patient are no longer accessible without
accessing the Patient File (i.e., without entering the password for this function).
– If a password is already active, the system requests you to enter it before allowing you to enter a new
password.
G Enter the new password once. You can remove access by password by pressing <OK> at this stage.
G The system requests you to enter the new password a second time as confirmation.
Note: Forgotten your password? Because you cannot access the MDA system without your
password, you must call the local Service Office of GE Medical Systems to have the system
reinitialized.
G Dose Measurement Test
Used to activate the dose measurement test. The value sent by this option for the test is displayed.
21-56
– Choice of annotation level on Monitor A screen

You can reduce the number of annotation that appear on the the Monitor A screen.
G If <Full Annotation> is activated, all the annotations are displayed. To limit the number of annotations,
disable the key. Only the annotations for Date and Time, Patient Name, Patient ID, and Image Numbers
will remain continually on-screen. The other annotations will be displayed only when they are modified.
G Return to the Viewer screen to work on the reduced number of annotations.
G Press <Full Annotation> again to display all the annotations continually.
Note: The system memorizes your choice at system shutdown.
– Audio Feedback
The system can give a short beep each time a key is pressed.
G If this key is activated, a beep will occur at each action on the control screen. To cancel the beep, disable
the key.
G Press the key to hear the beep again.
– Remote control
You can deactivate the infrared remote control of the MDA system. This may be necessary in the event of
a defect in the remote control, or if you suspect interference with other remote control units used in the
Examination Room.
G If <Remote Control> is activated, commands sent via the remote control will be carried out by the MDA
system. To deactivate the remote control, disable <Remote Control>.
G Press <Remote Control> again to return the key to service.
Note: The system automatically return the remote control to service at startup.
21-57
– Stopping the MDA system

Because the MDA system is controlled by a microcomputer and contains databases, it is strongly
recommended not to stop the system abruptly by removing power—important information may be lost.
G Pressing this key checks the integrity of the data in the system memory and stops the MDA system. Once
the system is correctly stopped, a message informs the user when he/she can remove power from the
Stenoscop.
2–4–7–1 Using the monitor support without the mobile

This is only possible with a disk or VCR (VideoCassette Recorder) option.
D In the housing of the rear face of the monitor support trolley insert the plug (2, Illustration 3) in place of the mobile
plug (13, Illustration 3).
D Switch on the monitor support.

The monitor support can now operate autonomously without the mobile, so that images previously recorded on
disk or VCR can be examined and reprographed.
21-58
2–4–8 MD10
2–4–8–1 Storing images

See Illustration 12 and Illustration 13.
Memorization is made according to the available space in the image memory:
D Automatically after x-ray emission.
D By pressing on <M MAN> during x-ray emission.

When available memory is full, the system deletes the oldest image, unless it has been locked, to make space for
the new image.
2–4–8–2 Locking an image

Display the desired image. Press the Image Lock key (5, Illustration 12).
2–4–8–3 Deleting an image

Unlock key (6): Authorizes replacement of the image displayed on the monitor.
2–4–8–4 Real–time image processing

The following processes are carried out in real time during x-ray emission
(see the key descriptions).
D Recursive filter.
D Image inversion.
D Edge enhancement.
2–4–8–5 Processing a memorized image

The following processes are carried out on memorized images
D Image inversion.
D Zoom.
D 2-Image mode.
D Edge enhancement.
21-59
2–4–8–6 Entry and modification of image annotations

To access the menu, press quickly the <Reset> key (4, Illustration 12) and then the <Annotations> key (8,
Illustration 12).
D To select a parameter to be modified, use the Up/Down arrows.
D To access a desired field, press the Right arrow.

D You can modify the content of the selected field as follows:
– Using the keyboard option:
G Enter the desired text and correct the last character entered by pressing the <Backspace> key.
Note: <Home> places the cursor at beginning of field.

<End> places the cursor at end of field.
<Ins> inserts a space.
<Del> deletes the character at the cursor.
<Enter> confirms the entry.
<Esc> is used to exit from this function.
– Using the remote control:
G Select the character to be modified using the Left/Right arrows.
G Modify the character selected using the Up/Down arrows.
D To exit from the field, press <A/B>.
D To exit from the Modification Menu, press the <Clear> key.
Note: The parameters entered are saved at system shutdown except for Field No. 1, Patient Name.
Note: To change the language of the help messages in this menu, select the desired language in the
last field.
21-60
2–4–9 DR4
2–4–9–1 Storing images
See Illustration 15.
Memorization is made according to the available space in the image memory:
D Automatically after x-ray emission.
D By pressing on <M MAN> during x-ray emission.

When available memory is full, the system deletes the oldest image, unless it has been locked, to make space for
the new image.
2–4–9–2 Deleting an image

Unlock key (5): authorizes replacement of the image displayed on the monitor.
2–4–9–3 Real–time image processing

The following processes are carried out in real time during x-ray emission
D Recursive filter.
2–4–9–4 Processing a memorized image
The following processes are carried out on memorized images
D Image inversion.
D Edge enhancement.
21-61
REV 1
21-62
REV 1
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22-1
REV 1
22-2
3 – MAINTENANCE
3–1 SERVICING
To ensure the machine continues to operate perfectly, a program of preventive maintenance must be carried out.
It is the operator’s responsibility to provide this maintenance.
3–2 CLEANING
3–2–1 Cleaning the Mobile

D This unit needs frequent cleaning, particularly after corrosive chemical products have been used.
D Monthly cleaning of the bearings should be carried out to remove accumulated dirt.
D Use a soft cloth and soapy water to clean the control panel, dry with a cloth moistened with a little clean water.
D Other parts of the unit are cleaned with a clean damp cloth, with a product that does not attack enameled metal
surfaces.
Do not use cleaner or solvent which could damage the finish or erase the notices.
CAUTION
Do not use a wax containing solvents.
Do not use wax on the display windows.
22-3
3–2–2 Cleaning the Anti-Glare Screens on the Monitor

The screen is cleaned with a special product designed for anti–glare screens and special optical paper.
High quality products for cleaning photographic lenses may be suitable. Carry out a test on a small area in the corner
of the screen. Use only a small amount of the product.
Avoid touching the screen.

CAUTION Fingers leave greasy marks that are difficult to remove.
The anti–glare comes from an extremely thin, fragile metallic coating on the monitor
screen.
The use of abrasive products or ones containing solvents could permanently destroy
the anti–glare layer.
3–2–3 Cleaning the Sterilizable Drapes

D When the drapes are new, they cannot be treated at high temperature.
D For the first cleaning, proceed as follows:
– Soak for two hours in cold water.
– Wash at medium temperature (30 to 40°C).
– Wash at 100°C.
D For later cleaning, wash and sterilize normally (134°C).
D The drapes can be treated at the same time as surgical clothes (the same cloth is used), once the first cleaning
has been done as described above.
22-4
3–3 MAINTENANCE
3–3–1 Overview
D The unit is delivered new in condition guaranteeing maximum safety for operator and patient.
D This safety is guaranteed by respecting the most stringent safety standards, that the unit is certified to be in
conformity with.
D Nevertheless, incorrect use is likely to reduce the level of safety.
D Whenever the unit is used, the operator must check that the unit is in good condition, particularly:
– That the surface condition of the mobile parts is undamaged and that there are no sharp parts or projections.
– That the transport components, particularly the castors, are in good condition and that their attachments offer
no danger, and that there is no wear.
D If in doubt, the operator must inform immediately the appropriate technical department and only use the unit with
the greatest care before any repairs required are carried out.
3–3–2 Checks
D Check the condition of the cables and connections at least once a week.
They must be replaced if worn or damaged.
D The vertical movement assembly, castor operation and C–arm movement must be checked annually, as regards
components such as gears, chains, pinions, bearings, mechanical stops, switches and locks.
D Suitable lubricants must be applied or added yearly.

This servicing must be carried out by a qualified Field Engineer.
CAUTION
3–3–3 Periodic Maintenance
D The maintenance schedule must be strictly respected.
– See chart at the end of this chapter.
D Operator checks:
The operator can perform these checks and keep a record; any repairs will be done by qualified personnel.
22-5
3–4 CORRECT OPERATION TESTS
3–4–1 Preliminaries
These straightforward tests require no tools.
They can be performed by the operator or by the Field Engineer.
D By the operator:
During acceptance of the mobile or in case of breakdown to establish possible causes to assist the Field Engineer.
D By the Field Engineer:
To check after repairs that the mobile is in good working order.
D The correct operation tests are the last stage in the preventive maintenance.
3–4–2 Mobile Unit
3–4–2–1 Checking the brakes

D Lock the floor brake of the mobile then pull on the mobile: it should not move.
D Unlock and lock the brake again.
3–4–2–2 Checking the movements of the C–arm

D Check the locking and unlocking of the various C–arm movements:
– Orbital movement.
– Rotation movement around the horizontal axis.
– Forward/backward movement.
– Lateral movement (wig–wag).
D Switch on the mobile and check the up and down movements of the C–arm.
22-6
3–4–3 X-Ray Generation
3–4–3–1 Checking the collimator
Always wear suitable protective clothing (lead apron and gloves).

CAUTION
Check that no–one is in the diffused radiation area.
D Select manual fluoroscopy, minimum kV and minimum mA.

D Close, then half open the semi–transparent shutters.
D Close, then half open the opaque shutters.

D Give a rotate collimator command.
D Choose radiography type (without x-rays).

Check that the open collimator shutters pushbuttons flash.
D Open fully the collimator shutters.

Check that the flashing stops
22-7
3–4–3–2 Checking the X-Ray Modes

Switch on the mobile and check that the choice of mode operates correctly, and that the mobile does not trip the
contact breaker when x-ray command is given.
Close the collimator to carry out the above tests.

CAUTION
Use the smallest radiation field that allows operation to be checked.
Always wear suitable protective clothing (lead apron and gloves).
Check that nobody is in the diffused radiation area.
D Carry out the fluoroscopy in manual mode at different kV and mA values.

D Carry out a radiography above 50 kV.
D Carry out a pulsed fluoroscopy.
D Carry out single pulse fluoroscopy (electronic radiography).
22-8
3–4–3–3 Checking the various displays

D Select manual fluoroscopy.
D Change the kV and mA values, check that the display changes every time the keys are pressed.
Check that the display changes if the keys are kept pressed.
D Check that pushbuttons light up correctly.

D In radiography mode, check that the buzzer works.
D In manual mode, do a continuous fluoroscopy.

Check that x-ray indicator lamp on the monitor support lights up.
D Check at the timer that the indicated value is correct.

Reset the timer.
3–4–4 Image commands

3–4–4–1 kV, mA
D In manual mode, carry out a fluoroscopy with test pattern and change the kV and mA parameters.
Check that they affect the image contrast and brightness.
D In automatic mode, carry out a fluoroscopy with test pattern.
3–4–4–2 Inversions and rotations
D Give image inversion and rotation commands.
Check that these commands affect the image displayed on the screen.
3–4–5 Image processor
D Place a test pattern in the x-ray field.
D Select automatic fluoroscopy.
D Carry out successively several fluoroscopies and memorize several images.

D Check all the functionalities of the image processor by pressing the keys on the keyboard and/or the remote
control.
For a description of the image processor functions, see Chapter 2, Practical Use.
CAUTION
22-9
3–5 HANDLING ERRORS

3–5–1 Overview
The Stenoscop is protected against possible handling errors, particularly with respect to power and overload, due to
automated controls and alarms. The few cases of non–operation due to operator error are described below.
3–5–2 Handling Errors

3–5–2–1 Unit does not Power Up
If the unit does not power up when the ON switch (on the monitor support) is pressed, check that the wall outlet is
correctly supplied and that the power cable is correctly plugged in at the back of the monitor support trolley.
3–5–2–2 No Image
Check that the collimator is not completely closed.
3–5–2–3 No X-Rays with Intermittent Buzzer

The intermittent buzzer (with timer button flashing) indicates that a period of 5 minutes’ fluoroscopy has elapsed. The
x-ray controls are now inactivated.
Reset the timer (Press on the 0–5 minutes pushbutton, 7, Illustration 6) to allow further x-ray operation.
3–5–2–4 Thermal Overload Indicator On

The limiting temperature of the X-ray housing has been reached; wait for a few minutes to allow the temperature to
drop.
3–5–2–5 Remote Control does not Operate

Put in a new battery.
Check that the remote control being used is actually the one supplied with the unit.
3–5–2–6 Problem with Videocassette Recorder (Sony SVO9500)
Recording starts with x-ray emission, but does not stop afterward.
The videocassette recorder is probably badly programmed.

Read the VCR instructions.
If the fault persists, consult the After-Sales Service.
22-10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
BI–
MONTH- ANNU-
ACTION ANNU- REALIZATION
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
LY ALLY
ALLY
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Oper- Tech-
ator nical
– Check the numbers and that the X X
labels are in place.
– MECHANICAL.
– Monitor support sheet: wear control, X X

screw condition and lubricate the axle.
– Paint – Screws – Condition of cables– X X
Outlets.
– Clean the control console. X X
– Column drive axle (clean). X X
– Bearings (clean). X X
– Adjust brakes and locking of X X
movements.
– Replace brake pads (if necessary). X X
– Replace leveling castors X X
(if necessary).
– Check the up/down movement belt. X X
– Check the C–arm up/down X X
movement gas spring.
– Check the condition of the castors on X X
the mobile and monitor support trolley
(wear, play, brakes).
– Check the cable glands (replace if
necessary).
– Clean the mobile. X X
22-11
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
BI–
MONTH- ANNU-
ACTION ANNU- REALIZATION
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
LY ALLY
ALLY
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Oper- Tech-
ator nical
– Limit and align the x-ray field and X X
cassette holder.
– Limit and align the x-ray field and X X
image system.
– Check the bearings. X X
– ELECTRICAL.
– Check the skin dose and x-ray X X

emission quality.
– Displays, pushbuttons, buzzer. X X X
– Fluoroscopy mA precision. X X
– kVp precision. X X
– mAs precision. X X
– Fluoroscopy timer precision. X X
– Fluoroscopy kV/mA range. X X
– Check correct operation before each X
surgical intervention
(correct operation tests para. 3–4).
– Fluoroscopy footswitch – cleaning. X X
– Check that the x-ray emission X
indicator lamp above the monitors
comes on.
– Film repro: Replace memory protection battery (every 3 years). X
22-12
REV 1
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23-1
REV 1
23-2
4 – TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
4–1 OVERVIEW
4–1–1 Classification
Type B device with suitable degree of protection against electric shock, particularly with respect to
D Admissible current leaks (<2 mA)
D Reliability of protective ground connection
4–1–2 Precautions Before Use

See warning at the start of this manual
The C–arm, X–ray tube head and imager are certified “AP”.
This means that only these items of equipment can be used between 5 and 25 cm from a closed gas chamber
intended for medical use.
4–1–3 Protective Ground
23-3
4–1–4 Identification Labels
E
B
C–G
A X-ray tube head assembly.

B Image intensifier.
C X–ray control assembly.
D Cassette holder.
E Warning.
F Warning.
G CE Marking Label.
23-4
4–1–5 English–French Translations of Identification Plates
4–1–5–1 Product identification plates

MANUFACTURED DATE DE FABRICATION
LOCATION LIEU DE FABRICATION
TYPE TYPE
S.N MATRICULE
4–1–5–2 Housing insert specification plate

HOUSING GAINE
NOM. VOLTAGE TENSION NOM.
INH. FILTR. FILTR. INHERENTE
ADD. FILTR. FILTR. ADDITION
INSERT TUBE
FOCAL SPOT FOYERS
4–1–5–3 Generator specification plate

AMP MOMENTARY AMP INSTANTANE
AMP LONG TERM AMP NOMINAL
4–2 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

STENOSCOP 828490 CEI 601–2–7/1986
Complies with DHHS radiation performance standards 21 CFR subchapter J (North American)
UL – CSA (North American)
NF 74–100–102–111 CEI 601–2–7
Standards concerning electromagnetic compatibility.
4–2–1 Ground Current Leak

Complies with standards IEC 601–2–7 (Class 1 – Type B) and NFPA (US)
23-5
4–3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
4–3–1 Overview
The unit is supplied with a power cable of suitable length.
CAUTION Replacing this cable by a longer cable could cause non-respect of certain standards
and change the ground leak current.
Using an extension cable is not recommended: if one must be used temporarily, it must
have wires of minimum 2.5 mm2 and a ground connection.
The impedance of the line specified applies to the end of the extension cable (female
socket side).
4–3–2 Voltage Supply

The Mobile is compatible with one of the following voltage supplies:
100V, 108V, 120V, 200V, 208V, 228V, 240V
selected at installation.
D Tolerance : ±10%
Line voltage variation: automatic compensation.
D Current: 50/60 Hz single phase.
4–3–3 Maximum Line Impedance

100 108 120 200 208 220 228 240 Volts
0.14 0.16 0.20 0.33 0.36 0.40 0.44 0.48 Ohms.
23-6
4–3–4 Line Current

The consumptions below apply to a mobile fitted with two TV monitors and a reprograph (the tolerances lie within a
range of ± 20%.
Note: Fuses of values greater than those recommended could be required in certain countries.
A For 208V AC, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.36 Ohms.
D Line regulation 6%, 20A fuses type T.T. (Slow blow).

– Fluoroscopy 90 kV – 5,5 mA I line = 8 A max.
– Radiography 49 kV – 60 mA I line = 38 A max.
– Radiography 110 kV – 30 mA I line = 38 A max.
B For 120V AC, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.20 Ohms

(Reduced power).
D Line regulation 6 o/o, 15A fuses type T.T. (Slow blow).

– Fluoroscopy 90 kV – 5,5 mA I line = 12 A. max.
– Radiography 49 kV – 24 mA Iline = 30 A max.
– Radiography 110 kV – 12 mA Iline = 30 A max.
4–3–5 Protective Fuses

All the protective fuses are internal and can be accessed only by the Field Engineer
23-7
4–3–6 Environment
Complete equipment, all options included.
D Operating temperature:
10°C to 40°C without condensation.
D Variation in operating temperature:
up to 10°C/hour
D Storage temperature:
–10°C to 70°C without condensation.
D Transport temperature:
–10°C to 70°C without condensation.
D Pressures during operation:

700 to 1060 mbar.
D Storage and transport pressures:

500 to 1060 mbar.
D Humidity:
During storage and transport: 10 to 100% relative humidity.
In operation: 30 to 75% relative humidity.
4–3–7 Dissipation
Maximum heat dissipation in ambient air.
Surgical mobile with 2 TV monitors and a reprograph.
D At idle: 475 W
D In fluoroscopy (110 kV – 4.5 mA): 1250 W

D In radiography: 5800 W
23-8
4–4 MOBILE UNIT

4–4–1 Overview
4–4–1–1 Dimensions and movements
See Illustration 35, Illustration 36, Illustration 37.
4–4–1–2 Mass
D With 16–cm imager: 243 kg
D With 22–cm imager: 244 kg
4–4–1–3 Stability
Displacement on inclined surface:
in the worst conditions, the mobile becomes unstable on a slope of more than 5°.
4–4–2 X-Ray Tube Head and Collimator
4–4–2–1 Overview on measurements and accuracy

D Maximum differences.
Note: The maximum differences given in this paragraph are supplied in compliance with the
standards of the North American market.
Factor Range Deviation Measurement principle
kVp rad 40–55 kVp ±20% Direct measurement

55–110 kVp ±10% of kVp is not possible
mAs rad 0.16–160mAs ±(10% +0.2mAs) mAs meter
kVp fluoro 40–55 kVp ±20% Direct measurement

55–110 kVp ±10% of kVp is not possible
mA fluoro 0.1–6 mA ±(10%+0.2mA) mA meter
Fluoro time 4min.30 ±15% Chronometer
23-9
Illustration 35 – STENOSCOP 6000

Outline Dimensions of C-Arm Support
Note: Dimensions are for the Stenoscop 6000 without laser option and dose measurement unit.
23-10
Illustration 36 – STENOSCOP 9000

Outline Dimensions of C-Arm Support
Note: Dimensions are for the Stenoscop 6000 without laser option and dose measurement unit.
23-11
Illustration 37 – STENOSCOP 6000 AND STENOSCOP 9000

C-Arm Lateral Movement
23-12
Note: In radiography mode, all the mA values are typical values.
Note: The tolerance is ±20% after a transition period of less than 0.2 sec.
D Conditions of application for the given values.

1. Machine switched on for 30 minutes.
2. Line voltage: (see para. 4–3).
3. Machine installed and adjusted according to instructions in the technical manual.
4. Preventive maintenance carried out by the operator as specified.
D Measurement bases.
– Kilovolts (kVp): measured with a kVp meter based on the X–radiation spectral measurement (see technical
manual).
– X–ray tube current (mA): obtained by direct measurement in the secondary coil of the high tension transformer
located in the X–ray tube head (see technical manual).
In fluoroscopy, the set current is displayed on the control panel. In fluoroscopy and in radiography, this current
is used in a regulation loop which controls the filament heater current. The calibration is checked with an
external device. The measurements must be corrected according to the procedure in the technical manual.
– Product of exposure time by current (mAs): the product is measured using an mAs meter connected to the
secondary coil in the high tension circuit.
Correction must be made to take account of the high tension capacitor charge (see procedure in the technical
manual).
– Fluoroscopy time: the continuous fluoroscopy time between a timer reset and the buzzer sounding.
23-13
4–4–2–2 X-Ray Tube Head

D Characteristics
The HD–281 X–ray tube is mounted in a Sténix housing with the following characteristics:
Specifications Characteristics.
Width 16.5–cm (6.5”)
Height 42.5–cm (16.7”)
with 22–cm shield
52.5 cm (20.7”)
with 32–cm shield
(USA and Canada)
Length 39.8 cm (15.7”)
Anode type Fixed
Focus 0.5 x 0.5 mm
1.8 x 1.8 mm
Focal mark Red spot on the X–ray tube head
Technical leak factor 110 kVp – 1 mA
Filtering CDA = 2.65 mm Al minimum at 71kV
(equivalent to 3 mm Al minimum)
D Performance and Charge Rate.
In fluoroscopy, 500W maximum up to triggering of the temperature warning, 150W up to thermal cutoff by the
dilatation compensator.
Maximum permitted in continuous radiography fluoroscopy regime: 3.600 mAs to 110 kV in 1 hour.
Rest time between X–rays: 30 seconds. At this rate, and depending on the ambient temperature, the position of
the X–ray block and the sterile drapes, the thermal cutoff might trigger.
23-14
4–4–2–3 X-Ray Emission

D Radiography.
– Radiography mAs values selectable.
0.16, 0.20, 0.25, 0.32, 0.40, 0.50, 0.63, 0.80, 1.0,
1.3, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0,
10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,
80, 100, 130, 160 mAs.
– Radiography kVp and mA values selectable.
G Maximum power
Nominal electrical power 3 kW
(100 kV – 30 mA – 0.1 s).
mA linked to kVp (1 kVp step) as below:
40 to 49 kVp 60 mA
50 to 59 kVp 55 mA
60 to 69 kVp 47 mA
70 to 79 kVp 41 mA
80 to 99 kVp 33 mA
100 to 110 kVp 30 mA
G Reduced power
Nominal electrical power.
mA linked to kVp (1 kVp step) as below:
40 to 49 kVp 24 mA
50 to 59 kVp 22 mA
60 to 69 kVp 19 mA
70 to 79 kVp 16 mA
80 to 99 kVp 13 mA
100 to 110 kVp 12 mA
23-15
– Products of current x reference time (mAs).
4 mAs 70 kV 41 mA 0.0975 s
3.2 mAs 100 kV 30 mA 0.1067 s
3.2 mAs 110 kV 30 mA 0.1067 s
Note: The charge time results from integration of the mAs product.
D The main circuit breaker may trip if operating parameters greater than those below are selected in radiography
mode:
110 kV 80 mAs
88 kV 100 mAs
70 kV 125 mAs
50 kV 160 mAs
For operation with larger parameters, the mobile must be used with mains of about 120V (reduced power) or about
200, 220, 240 V (nominal power).
D Fluoroscopy.
– kVp fluoroscopy.
G Manual adjustment from 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp
G Automatic adjustment from 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 0.5 kVp.
G The kVp are linked to the mA according to the graphs on Illustration 38, and are adjusted initially with the
amplitude of the TV camera video signal.
The video signal is measured in a circular window of factory–calibrated diameter.
Two mA levels can be selected, one for normal fluoroscopy, the other allowing high–quality fluoroscopy.
G Ripple:
The X–ray generator generates constant voltage with ripple lower than 4% at 110 kVp in fluoroscopy and
nominal mains voltage.
23-16
– Fluoroscopy mA.
G Manual Adjustment:
In manual mode, the full ranges of kV and mA values can be selected independently, and are limited by
Graph 3 on Illustration 38.
At high kVp, the mA are automatically adapted to keep the maximum dose rate less than 0.087 Gy/min
(10R/min), and the power to a value below 500W.
Selecting the “Normal Fluoroscopy” or “High quality” mode affects only the compromise between the
imager input dose and the background noise. When “High quality” mode is selected or deselected,
the kV and mA must be readjusted.
G Automatic Adjustment.
The mA values are connected to the kVp values according to Graphs 1 or 2 on Illustration 38.
Selecting “High quality” or “Normal dose” has a double effect: the imager input dose is selected, and
the rates go from Curve 1 to Curve 2.
Table of typical dose rates in automatic fluoroscopy measured at the input of the image intensifier for
the widest field depending on the type of intensifier and the choice “High Quality” or “Normal dose”.
Normal dose High Quality
0.39 Gy/s 0.78 Gy/s

6000
(45 R/s) (90 R/s)
0.195 Gy/s 0.39 Gy/s

9000
(22,5 R/s) (45 R/s)
In automatic and manual modes, the parameters are limited by Graph 4 when the temperature limit
in the tube housing is reached.
G Fluoroscopy Timer.
The unit is fitted with a 0–5 minute electronic timer, with buzzer at end of cycle and reset button.
23-17
Illustration 38 – kV/mA GRAPH

Stenoscop 6000 and Stenoscop 9000
kV/mA GRAPHS
mA
7.0
6. 3 3
0 2 /3
5.0
2
2 /3
4.0 3.9
3.85 4 2
3.0
2.7
4 1 1
2.0 2.3
2 1 4
1.4
1.0
1
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
kV
Illustration 39 – Key to kV/mA GRAPH
Note: In Normal Mode, Graphs 3 and 4 are envelopes. The other graphs show the relations between
kV and mA.
CURVE MODE FOR POWER
1 Normal Mode Auto Fluoro 6000 + 9000 253 W
2 High Quality Mode Auto Fluoro 6000 + 9000 500 W
3 Manual Mode Fluoro 6000 + 9000 500 W
4 Thermal Safety Fluoro 6000 + 9000 154 W
23-18
Illustration 40 – HEATING GRAPHS

K Joules ANODE HEATING AND COOLING GRAPHS
56
48
40
32
24
16
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time in minutes
Illustration 41 – HEATING AND COOLING
Joules HV TANK HEATING/COOLING
800 000
640 000
480 000
320 000
160 000
0
0 25 50 75 100 Time in minutes
23-19
4–4–3 Image Intensifier

Image intensifier.
High stability solid state power supply.
Characteristics.
Specifications II 16 cm II 22 cm
No. of fields 1 field 2 fields

Field value 16 cm 22 cm Loop 16 cm
Magnifier Conversion factor 150 180
Contrast ratio 20/1 21/1 21/1
Input field diameter 15 cm 22 cm 16 cm
Typical central resolution 44 pL/cm 52 pL/cm 58 pL/cm
Grid incorporated 90L/inch 90L/inch 90L/inch
8:1 10:1 10:1
Anode voltage 30 kV 30 kV 30 kV
Radiation safety screened Fully
4–4–3–1 CCD Camera
Characteristics Specifications.
Type “Interline Transfer” type CCD sensor.
Sensor matrix 752 x 582 pixels.
Scanning 525/625 lines (50/60 Hz).
Interlace 2:1.
Bandwidth 11 MHz ±3dB.
Mask Circular.
Video output 1 Volt peak–to–peak, 75 Ohms.
23-20
4–4–4 Radiography Cassette Holder and Grid

Four grid types are available for all combinations of image intensifier (16 cm or 22 cm) and cassette holder (24 cm x 30
cm or 9.5”x 9.5”).
A radiography grid can be supplied on option:
Ratio 8:1, 70 Lpi for cassettes 24 cm x 30 cm.
Ratio 10:1, 112 Lpi for cassettes 9.5” x 9.5”.
Note: The cassette holders are compatible with cassettes complying with standard CEI 406.
Note: For the USA market, CDRH compliance means that 9.5”x9.5” cassettes must be used.
23-21
4–5 MONITOR SUPPORT

4–5–1 Dimensions
4–5–2 Mass
The mass is measured without reprography option.
D With 1 monitor and MD10 or DR4 digital: 156 kg.
D With 2 monitors and MDA digital: 194 kg.
CAUTION The output connectors of the mobile are not for customer use.
4–5–3 Monitors
Technical characteristics.
Specifications Characteristics.
Horizontal scanning 525/625 lines (50/60 Hz)

Vertical scanning 100/120 Hz (50/60 Hz)
Interlace 2:1
Screen diagonal 48 cm
Adjustment to ambient lighting Automatic
Dimensions l = 47.5 cm h = 36.8 cm
p = 37.6 cm
Mass 20 kg
4–5–4 External Video Output (With MDA Option only)

Video standards:
D CCIR 625 lines /50Hz*.
D EIA–RS170 525 lines /60Hz*.

– Output impedance: 75 Ohms
* According to country.
23-22
Illustration 42 – STENOSCOP 6000 AND STENOSCOP 9000

Dimensions of Monitor Support with Two Monitors
23-23
Image Intensifier
16 cm or 22 cm
System 6000 or 9000
Digital Option DR4 MD10 MDA

DISPLAY
Monitor 1: TV, 51 cm (100Hz/120Hz) • • •
Monitor 2: TV, 51 cm (100Hz/120Hz) Option Option •
IMAGE PROCESSING
Adjustable noise reduction • • •
Edge enhancement • • •
DR4: On stored image
MD10/MDA: In real time and on stored
image
Subtraction Option
Maximum opacification Option
Road mapping Option
Pixel shift Option
Landscape Option
Mask selection Option
Contrast and brightness adjustment •
Inverse video •
Image inversion: up/down, left/right • • •
Image transfer from Monitor A to B • • •
Multiple images on one monitor 2 2 thru 16
Image rotation • • •
Zoom (Maximum) with movement x2 x8
Image annotation •
Measurement Option
23-24
Image Intensifier
16 cm or 22 cm
System 6000 or 9000
Digital Option DR4 MD10 MDA

ACQUISITION MODES
A/D Converter 8 bits 8 bits 10 bits
Image Matrix 576 x 576
Last Image Hold (LIH) • • •
Image sequence Option
IMAGE REVIEW MODES

Image Selection • • •
Sequential Review Option
Maximum sequence speed (Option) 8 Fps
Maximum storage capacity 4 10 5000
PATIENT DATABASE
Entry of patient name • •
Selective erasure of data • • •
Image storage on diskette •
Saving images when power is removed •
from the machine
CONNECTIVITY
VCR recording and review Option
Auxiliary video input •
23-25
REV 1
23-26
REV 1
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
24-1
REV 1
24-2
5 – OPTIONS
5–1 DOSE MEASUREMENT
5–1–1 Overview
Dose measurement is an integrated option that is located under the X–ray housing cover.
This option is used to record the dose emitted during an examination in mGy x cm2 (milligray x centimeters squared)
at the x-ray tube output.
5–1–2 Practical Use with MDA Memory

Note: A warming–up period of about 8 to 10 minutes after power up is required to reach nominal
accuracy and stability.
1. Reset the dose measurement.
2. Perform the examination.
3. The cumulative dose is displayed on Monitor A and recorded in the patient file.
Record the dose at the end of the examination in the patient file.
4. Reset the dose measurement for the next patient.
Note: The dose is automatically reset when <New Patient> is pressed.
24-3
5–1–3 Description (DR4 and MD10 Memories)

Illustration 43 – DOSE MEASUREMENT WITH DR4
AND MD10 MEMORIES
1 2 3
1 Digital display.
2 Reset button.
3 Test button.
5–1–4 Practical Use with DR4 and MD10 Memory

Note: A warming-up period of about 8 to 10 minutes after power up is required to reach nominal
accuracy and stability.
1. Reset the chamber display for every new patient by pressing button 2.
2. Perform the examination.
3. After the examination read the value on display 2 and record it in the patient file.
4. Reset the display ready for the next patient.
Note: The display is automatically reset when the unit is switched off.
24-4
5–1–5 Maintenance
Respect the same precautions as when cleaning Stenoscop.
The ionization chamber and the display are protected against liquid infiltration with
CAUTION leakproof gaskets. It is, however, not recommended to use a large amount of liquid
when cleaning.
24-5
5–2 LASER CENTERING UNIT
5–2–1 Laser Centering Unit Built-In Option

LASER RADIATION.
DANGER AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE LASER, MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY’S EYES,
INCLUDING THOSE OF THE PATIENT, WILL BE EXPOSED TO THE LASER BEAM.
LASER LIGHT
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
670 +/– 10 mm WAVELENGTH
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
5–2–2 Overview
The built-in laser option provides a laser beam showing the central axis of the x-ray beam.
5–2–3 Description
The built-in laser option is placed under the cover of the x-ray tank.
A transparent window in the cover allows the laser beam to pass through.
24-6
5–2–4 Practical Use

1. Activate the laser using the control button located on the side of the x-ray control handle.
Illustration 44 –
X-ray control
Laser control
2. A laser dot appears, allowing the central x-ray beam to be located. An X which is opaque to x-rays is shown on
the image in real-time to allow perfect alignment for any C-arm position.
3. To switch off the laser, press the control button again.
24-7
5–3 ORTHOTRAC EXTERNAL LASER OPTION

LASER RADIATION.
DANGER AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE LASER, MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY’S EYES,
INCLUDING THOSE OF THE PATIENT, WILL BE EXPOSED TO THE LASER BEAM.
LASER LIGHT
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
670 +/– 10 mm WAVELENGTH
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
5–3–1 Overview
The Orthotrac laser delivers a laser beam showing the central axis of the X–ray beam.
24-8
5–3–2 Description
Illustration 45 – LASER CENTERING UNIT
6 5
2
1
1 Orthotrac  Laser.
2 Supporting bracket for assembly on the image intensifier.
3 Locking system for supporting bracket.
4 Orthotrac laser adjustment screw.
5 On/Off switch.
6 Battery compartment.
24-9
5–3–3 Installation
PAY CAREFUL ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE BEFORE USING THE
DANGER ORTHOTRAC  LASER.
Note: This procedure must be carried out during the first installation of the Orthotrac laser.
1. Position the mobile and the C–arm in the position that will be used during the procedure, and lock the brakes.
2. Find the central emission point of the X–ray beam from the focal point on the side of the tube chamber.
This operation must be done by a Maintenance Field Engineer or a Field Engineer on the
CAUTION operating site.
3. Locate the central point on the image intensifier, to establish the central axis of the X–ray beam.
4. Attach the target reticule at the center of the X–ray beam on the tube side. This reticule gives a permanent
indication of the center of emission for future laser alignment.
5. Attach the laser support on the input face of the image intensifier.
6. Switch on the laser.
Find the laser point on the reticule.
7. Adjust the position of the laser point by turning the adjustment screw so that the laser point is perfectly centered
on the reticule.
8. To allow fast repositioning during later installation, place on the laser support and on the imager the marking
stickers supplied with the option. See Illustration 45.
9. After use, switch off the laser, remove the laser support and the laser from the image intensifier.
24-10
5–3–4 Positioning
1. Attach the laser support and the laser on the input face of the image intensifier so that the two marks coincide.
2. Put the C–arm in the position that will be used during the examination.
3. Switch on the laser.
4. If needed adjust the position of the laser point by turning the adjustment screw so that the laser point is perfectly
centered on the reticule.
If the position of the C–arm is changed during the examination, the position of the laser
CAUTION point must be re–adjusted.
5–3–5 Maintenance
The Orthotrac laser uses a standard 9 volt battery. It can be replaced by sliding back the plastic cover of the battery
compartment.
Do not sterilize the Orthotrac laser.

CAUTION
24-11
REV 1
24-12
REV 1
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
25-1
REV 1
25-2
REV 1 Source: om 826 931 P735 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 and Series CCD, Rev. F
ILLUSTRATIONS REMPLACEES PAR DES PHOTOS NUMERISEES

ILLUSTRATION 7
Patient Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . / GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS—STENOSCOP

Patient ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . / Hospital Name . . . . . . . . . . /
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . / Doctor . . . . . . . /
Comments . . . / dd/mm/yyyy
I: i i i i i hh/mm
S:nnn/yyy D: yyyyyyyymGyxcm2
I:iiiii/jjjjj
Sub
M: i i i
Filter: x
Filter: x
Zoom: x
Edge: xx
Win: xxx
Lev: yyy
C : XXXX pix
D1 : yyymm
D2 : xxxmm
S : xxo/o
REMOTE FUNCTION
A1 : xxxo
USER MESSAGE A2 : yyyo
E : xx.x cm yy.y cm
E : xxxx cm2 yyyyy cm3
????????? Max time Neg Ret Inv
xxxx xxxx s
ILLUSTRATION 8
Patient Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . / hh/mm Mon. A Mon. B

Patient ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . / dd/mm/yy
I:iiiii/jjjjj yy
S:nnn/yyy
I:iiiii/jjjjj
Sub
M:iiiii
Zoom : x
Win.: xxx Edge: xx
Lev.: yyy Neg Ret Inv
25-3
REV 1
25-4
REV 1
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION

INTERCONNECTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
26-1
REV 1
26-2
REV 1 Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page 3.1
3 – INSTALLATION
2.
3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT
3–1–1 INTRODUCTION
The STENOSCOP 2 is supplied ENTIRELY FACTORY MOUNTED AND CALIBRATED, so it needs NO

ADJUSTMENT ON PUTTING INTO SERVICE.
The procedure given below makes it possible to check the reception of the various components and set the
system going.
3–1–2 RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2
See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION to check both the conformity of the site for installation and the
composition of the equipment to be received.
3–1–2–1 DETERIORATION DUE TO TRANSPORT
On the delivery of the equipment, all the packages will be examined to make sure that they have not been
damaged during transport.
If damage is observed, immediately notify the transport service and the transport insurance service of the
factory.
The same will apply for non–apparent damage due to transport discovered when unpacking the material or
during installation, UP TO 15 DAYS MAXIMUM AFTER DELIVERY.
A transport service will generally not pay a bill for non apparent damage unless an inspection has been
demanded within 15 days after delivery.
If damage is discovered, immediately contact the services concerned, specifying the type of apparatus, the
serial number and the order number if possible, and describe the nature of the damage.
3–1–2–2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION for checking the conformity of the delivery and of the equipment
ordered.
The unpacking of the components of the apparatus before it is transported into the room will be made only if
necessary for checking damage occurring during transport.
The packages will be minutely examined during installation, in order not to overlook parts of small dimensions
or envelopes containing screws, washers, etc.
3–1–3 IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY
The STENOSCOP 2 is identified by labels giving the following information :

. Date and place of manufacture
. Serial number
. Model type and number
. Type approval and compliance with standards.
In addition, to meet HHS requirements (USA) concerning RX radiation, mAs accuracy, filtration and
source–skin distance, the different components concerned carry a label ”COMPLIES WITH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J”.
Other labels are also supplied separately for specific compliance with prevailing local regulations.
26-3
E
E
D
C
26-4
ITEM DESCRIPTION REFERENCE MODELE

(USA)
A FRAME – CONTROL CONSOLE 828 490 G055 ZF0XCST2

B X R HEAD 828 520 G015 ZH0HTST2
C COLLIMATOR for IMAGER
16 cm (6”) 828 751 G 025 Z0A16ST2
22 cm (9”) 828 752 G 025 Z0A22ST2
D CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 16 cm (6”)
24 x 30 cm 830 534 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 535 G 015 Z0L16ST2
CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 22 cm (9”)
24 x 30 cm 830 536 G 015
9,5” x 9,5” 830 537 G 015 Z0L22ST2
E IMAGER 16 cm (6”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 075 ZCCD16ST
22 cm (9”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 095 ZCCD22ST
16cm (6”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 085 ZCCD16ST
22cm (9”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 105 ZCCD22ST
F MONITORS CART
3–1–4 Travel conditions
To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
– vertical ”C–Arm” – imager upwards
– ”wigwag” movement centered
– C–Arm retracted as far as possible toward the console
– column low position
– movements locked
– ratchet the direction handle in order to have the back wheels parallel to the chassis
– foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.
FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND
THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.
26-5
26-6
3–2 CONNECTION THE SUPPLY
The mobile is factory wired for :

228V/50Hz single – phase networks (Europe)
OR 120V/60Hz single – phase networks (U.S.A.)
A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitor
For the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.
3–2–1 NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE
ATTENTION : The Imager frequency is not adaptable on site. The complete CCD Camera must be changed
if the frequency has to be modified.
3–2–1–1 9TR1 TRANSFORMER
The network adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 1–10)

Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to the
mains voltage and frequency.
MAINS SUPPLY
FREQ
240V 228 V 220 V 208 V 200 V
* * *
120V 108 V 100V
Marqued wire
9TR1 TERMINALS
Frequency 50Hz 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Adaptation A
60Hz 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Voltage B 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 3
Adaptation
Jumper C 4–5 4–6 4–7 4–6 4–7 4–8 4–8 4–8
Jumper D 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 2–2 1–5 2–6 3–7
*For the networks 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.
The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B (2–7)
(diagram 117F)
S133.B OFF Normal power
S133.B ON Reduced power
*For the networks 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additional
resistor 9R2, see diagram 1–10b–2A
Connect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.
220V to 240V Mains 100V to 120V Mains
1 9R1 2 1 9R1 2
Jumper Jumper
1 9R2 2 1 9R2 2
26-7
Locking rood
Transportation
lock bar (rod)
9Sm1
ON / OFF
9PL1
26-8
3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE
For the mobile units wired for 120V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.
For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.
According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :
blue wire : 228V
brown wire : 228V
yellow/green wire : earth
3–3 INTERCONNECTION
– Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.
Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.
– Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).
– Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.
3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.
3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN
For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheath
situated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.
The bar must be removed to allow the column to move.
To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.
This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.
ATTENTION!
It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported.
To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).
26-9
REV 1 Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page 3.8/3.9 (blank)
3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION
The unit is completely assembled and tested for CDRH compliance in the plant except for video imager, which
for certain markets, is associated in the field.
In order to make sure that the installed unit complies, the following tests have to be made :
1. Check that all mounting bolts for the X–Ray head and image intensifier are tightened.
If a loose bolt is found, perform the beam alignement in Rad and Fluoro.
2. Check operator display, operation of pushbutton and of buzzers.
See chap 6 RG 40 PWB swiches position.
3. Verify Fluoro mA
4. Verify Rad mAs
5. Verify Fluoro mA kVp range in manual and automatic mode
6. Make a quick test of the Fluoro ABC loop.
With 2 mm copper on the X–ray head, in normal fluoro automatic mode, the kVp–mA normally stabilize
for the 6” II
for the 9” II, large field :
9” Low Dose High Dose

KV 65/67 65/67
mA 1.7/1.9 3.2/3.4
6” Low Dose High Dose

KV 68/70 68/70
mA 1.9/2.0 3.6/3.9
If this test fails, make a complete kVp test.
26-10
3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
DR4 / MD10 DR4 / MD10

FRONT PANEL REAR PANEL
R.X. CONTROL R.X. CONTROL HARD COPY SCREEN A SCREEN B CAMERA HARD COPY
POWER I.R. REMOTE
DSM DR VIDEO OUT OUT IN CONTROL
DB 15 Male DB 15 Female BNC BNC BNC BNC DB 9 Male BNC DB 9 Male
Only in DR4 Monitors
A or B C or D
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ MD10 Option
C A B D
or
26-11
3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
26-12
3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.
9A1 TRANSPANEL
PL4
+12V
8
K37
10
26-13
3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting
This procedure is a summary of this one available in the camera documentation (furnished with the unit).
3–9–1 Brightness, contrast and density adjustment.
Values to be set:
Positive Negative 50 Hz 60Hz
BRT 020 025 Density 056 064

CRT 250 200
a Switch ON the Video Imager.

b The message windows indicates the warm – up cycle time (60 sec.)
WARMUP 60
WARMUP 59
WARMUP 58
WARMUP 00
c At the end of warm – up, you will hear a short beep, followed by the messages here after.
SELF TEST
CALIBRATING
IMG 1/1 USR1 POS
d Hit the ”PROGRAM” button and check the displayed message.
>FMT4 USR1 POS
cursor
26-14
POS. or NEG. Selection.
Hit the buttons to set the cursor on the left side of ” POS ”. POS 1
NEG 3
Then hit the buttons to select ” POS ” or ” NEG ”
2 RESET
4
1
3
Press once the key in order to diplay >B00 C00 D00
2 RESET
Adjust the BRIGHTNESS with the keys 4
>B020 C00 D00
Hit once the key to select the CONTRAST with the keys 1
3
Then adjust the contrast with the keys

>B020 C250 D00
1
Press the button 3
2 RESET
4
and set the appropriate DENSITY ( 50 or 60 Hz ) >B020 C250 D050
Store these new values with the ” PROGRAM ” button.
Refer to the CCM 620 manual for more details over these
adjustments.
26-15
REV 1
26-16
REV 1
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
27-1
REV 1
27-2
REV 1 Source: sm 826 921 P615, Rev. 1, Page 6.3
6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
6–2–1–1 X–RAY PROTECTION
During an operation involving X–ray emission, put a lead apron between the X–ray head and the image
intensifier of the mobile system.
6–2–1–2 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must
be taken with the oscilloscope in differential mode.
Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.
6–2–1–3 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 ”COMMANDE SCR”
Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized.

The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 is
disconnected.
6–2–1–4 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS
Don’t forget to ground the boards (with an extension wire with FASTON terminals).
6–2–1–5 BOARD REPLACEMENT
De–energize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY
6–2–2–1 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards.
The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:
1) Non–interchangeable boards.
2) Readily interchangeable boards.
Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.
3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.
NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.
In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it.
All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...
6–2–2–2 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
– DIVIDER 6A1 PWB

In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the X–ray head, on which it is mounted.
This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.
After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar
characteristics. This can be done in the factory only.
27-3
6–2–2–3 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (C–arm motor)
2A1 MODULE G2 (control console) PWB

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213
2A3 MODULE D2 (control console) PWB
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWB

3A7 AD/kV PWB

Check the presence of bridge W10 (See sch 53A)
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWB

Check the presence of W245 bridge (See sch 092D)
CAUTION : EPROM
Check agreement: name, position, revision
3A12 kV/mA PWB

Adjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 201 or RG 202)
Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 206)
Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.
3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWB

Check bridge presence W16
4A1 SCR No1 PWB
4A2 SCR No 2 PWB
5A1 PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)
7A1 FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)
7A2 DISQUE PWB (Disk) – Complete adjustment of collimator
9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)
9A4 PRISE PWB
27-4
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 – STENOSCOP 2

This board is also used for DR4 and DR7 memories.
This board is fully factory calibrated.
If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG212.
6–2–2–4 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS
3A5 Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)

–Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 211).
3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)

–Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 204)
–Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 205)
–Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 208)
6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT
The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.

During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL
OF FUSE.
A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R 1 sheet for access.
This bag countains :
2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V code 854 352 P 025
1 Fuse ABC 3A 250V code 854 352 P 045
1 Fuse ABC 5A 250V code 854 352 P 055
1 Fuse ABC 8A 250V code 854 352 P 075
1 Fuse MDA 3A 250V code 854 352 P 425
1 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V code 854 362 P 315
It is possible to order this ”Maintenance bag” with the code number 828 731 G 015.
6–2–3–1 FUSES LIST
NAME MODEL LOCALIZATION ACCES

1A1F5 MDA 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
1A1F8 ABC 3A 250V MODULE 1 D/R 2
5F2 ABC 3A 250V UNIT see sheet
9F1 ABC 1A 250V MONITOR CART see sheet
9F2 ABC 1A 250V
9F4 FNQ 1A 500V
27-5
6–2–3–2 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT
Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuse

MODEL MDA 3A 250V
When 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system
– Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.
– Check cleanliness of the roller plates
– Verify that the motor current is lower than 2.5A when column is on mechanical stop.
6–3 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
6–3–1 GENERAL
– Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassembly
and reassembly procedure.
– The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.
27-6
REV 1
INSERT STENOSCOP MDA ADVANCED SERVICE MANUAL HERE
27-7
REV 1
27-8
REV 1
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
28-1
REV 1
28-2
1
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card D/R 90 1 of 2

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITOR Version No.: 00
CART COVERS. Date: April 1995
Touch screen
front panel Cover B
1
Cover A
Cover C
28-3
Job Card D/R 90 2 of 2
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
– Cross tip screwdriver
2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
– Remove Mains plug from the outlet
3. COVERS REMOVAL
– Remove 9PL1 plug (item 1)
COVER A
– Remove the 10 screws CTFH M4x8.
– Remove the cover
COVER B
– Unscrew the 3 screws.
– Remove the cover (for more detail see Job Card D/R 50 – SM DSM).
COVER C
– Unscrew the 2 screws.
– Remove the cover pulling it out.
4. REASSEMBLY PRODEDURE
– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order
28-4

Purpose: MIDAS BOARD. Version No.: 0
Date:
Time: Manpower:
28-5

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION
1. Turn the power OFF.

2. All the precautions for electrostatic discharges have to be taken.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90 page 6.190)
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 page 6.190)
3. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the PC brackets to the cart.
4. Remove the PC.
5. Remove the top cover from the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
7. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board (item 2).
8. Replace the defective board by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
CAUTION MIDAS takes place on the PCI bus.
28-6

Purpose: AVIAS BOARD. Version No.: 0
Date:
Time: Manpower:
28-7

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
CAUTION AVIAS takes place on the ISA bus.
28-8

Purpose: RS 232 BOARD. Version No.: 0
Date:
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart cover. (see D/R 90 ).

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 ).
4. Remove the PC.
7. Check the board configuration following the table here after.
8. Jumper JP9 – 5 / JP10 – 10 / JP11 – 5 / JP12 – 5.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SW5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
SW1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW2 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW4 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
28-9
9. Replace the defective board (item 1) by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
28-10

Purpose: VGA BOARD. Version No.: 0
Date:
Time: Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board.
7. Check the board configuration with the drawing (see Ill. 1).
28-11
ILLUSTRATION 1
28-12

Purpose: TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLY Version No.: 00
Date: October 1996
Time: Manpower: 1
VGA display
Grounding plug J2
J1
Touch screen interface

Take care of the position of this connector
28-13
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)

2. Disconnect the cables from the display and the touch screen interface.
3. Unscrew the four screws holding the touch screen assembly.
4. Replace the defective touch screen assembly by the new one taking care of the position.
(Connector : back side)
5. Carry these operations in reverse order.
6. Switch the unit On and check the functionnalities of the unit.
7. For touch screen calibration, see Advanced Service Manual.
28-14

Purpose: HARD DISK Version No.: 00
Date: October 1996
Time: Manpower: 1
28-15
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED

SECTION 2

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90)

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the two screws holding the hard disk assembly located on the back side of the PC frame.
( See item 1 on opposite page )
7. Remove the power supply cable ( item 2 ) and the ribbon cable ( item 3 ) from the disk.
8. Remove the disk assembly.
9. Unscrew the four screws holding the disk on its frame.
10. Replace the disk by the new one carrying these operations in reverse order.
11. Switch the unit On and verify the fuctionnalities of the unit.
Note: Hard disk is loaded with low tier configuration

Insert the floppy containing the customer configuration : this one is located
inside an envelopped on the PC cover.
Switch the memory ON.
The touch screen displays a key “Restore”; by hitting this key, the customer
configuration is automatically loaded on the hard disk.
See ASM for customer option configuration if customer configuration

floppy is missing.
28-16
REV 1
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
NOTE: THE SCHEMATICS INCLUDED ARE NEW/UPDATED VERSIONS FOR THE

STENOSCOP MDA
29-1
REV 1
29-2
REV 1 Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page A-1
SYNOPTIC MODULE 8
IMAGER
D.A.P.
TV MONITOR Electronic Module MODULE 7 MODULE 6
COLLIMATOR
Memory 9A1
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
System Transpanel
IMAGE
ÇÇÇ
TV CAMERA INTENSIFIER X Ray Head
REPROGRAPH
(Option) Ion
Chamber
3A19 Minuterie
mA
Hysteresis ABC
Measure mA
KV
Analogic / Digital G90
Conversion
Magnitude comparator
ADC 3A9 CONSIGNE KV / mA
FC 110 Digital / Analogic
Lim. 110 Conversion 3A12 3A19 Converter
G20 G68
KV / mA SCR
G21 Reference voltage KV / 20 CONTROL MODULE 4
4585 DAC
2A1
FC 40
Lim. 40 BCD to 7 Segments Decoder MODULE G
G18 U
G138
A G19 EPROM G172 Stop Sec. GR
A>B G108 Magnitude comparator D
G126 4585 G67 7447
mAs
A<B
4585 B Dis. KV
BCD to Decimal Decoder mA 3A26 5A1
C KV Measure
mA Filaments Heating
G22
Counter 2 x 4 Bit latch Heating Power
Reference voltage mA
G69 4028
G4
Logic BP 4508
8
+ KV G3 Digital / Analogic G94 Reference voltage mA
14516 Conversion
– Clock
SC
DAC
Counter
G97
2A1
UP / Down G138
G125 4508
BUS KV/20 Code C0 – C7
EPROM MODULE G
4516 G120
G137
HOLD KV G136
SC
7447
2 x 4 Bit latch EPROM mA / mAs
G66 Counter BCD to 7 Segments
G89 EPROM Decoder MODULE 5 MODULE 9
3A7 AD / KV G90
G121 mA – mAs
4516
F KV/mA
FC0
Alimentation
FC1 Interface Mains
ER HLC TH
Bin. Dec. FCGR
Power supply
FC0 FC1 FCGR
5TR1 9TR1
mA(S) UP
+ Logic BP
A= B EPROM
– mA–mAs 2 x 4 Bit latch 2 x 4 Bit latch G132
G118 G119 G133
EPROM
G65 DAC
4508 4508 Reference voltage mAs
2A1 G87
G88
MODULE G 5R SC SC
Cons. mAs
500W B 4585 A
mA(S) UP G134
Magnitude comparator G135
ER HLC TH
Clock 4516
Counter mA – mAs
29-3
MODULE 5
9PL1
MODULE 9 MALE FEMELLE – FEMALE
1PS1
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
PL1
D.A.P.
Interface
F2 C1
F4 F3
LV SUPPLY
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ o
TR1 Tb3
29-4
MAINS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES

MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
9R2 9PL1
Only for 100, 1E 25W
108, 120 Mains 1
9R1 33
2E2 25W 9F2 32
A 9Sm1
2 1 1A 2 MODULE 4 – CONVERTER
9Tb3
1 9TR1 58 20
13 14 9Tb1.6 4E10
8 12 59 21 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
43 44 60 22
2 LINE1 LOAD 7 275 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
1 V Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
C1 A 6 11
5 155 A 15/07/96 .
0MF47 C 4CR7
MAINS V 275 011B 0 10/10/96
4
228V 10 V 1 09/01/97
JumĆ
3 2
per 55V 4Tb1.
2 7 8
LINE2 D 53 17 c
a a
LOAD B 1 9 54 18 b
3
2 0V 9Tb1.5 55 19 d
2 K1
M 1
d
AUX. COIL A1 A2
9Tb1. 9F3 1
2 1 5A
4 2 9F4 4Tb1.5 1–5
3C 1A
21 22 Monitor 1 3 2
2 120V 220V MODULE 3 – CARDS RACK
3B 541A K1 61 4Tb1.6
33 34 9
23
031B
33 34
3PL1.H 017A
B Monitor 2
541A
10
11 3PL5.B
3PL3.X
121B
1A1.PL1.1 3A1.a3 3A7.b35 3PL1.B 016D
8
9E3 48 24
1E8 DALLE 1 004C
Gnd 1 49 25
50 26 LOW VOLTAGE PS 122A 3PL3 201B
1
5Tb1. J 3A5 3A9 3A12 3A26
0V 7 OUT 2 X 902 +12 V
DR4 7 1 3A3. a1 3A7 a1 3A19a1 a1
12 12,1V/2A + 12,1V a1 a1 a1
DR7 1–1 b1 b1 b1 b1
13
27V SENSE +
3 3PL1.M
0V
017A
5TR1 SENSE – W
7 8 3PL1.S 0V
1 4 + 12V 3PL5 2 0V 9PL1–24
PL4 E2 004C
PL11 27 40 B +12V 230V 1E2 1E1 5 3A1.a35
1 007B
3 X 901 201B
K27 D24 3 3PL1.F
26 39 A 3A3. 275V 9
E2 7
114F
5 + 12V
2 1 OUT 3 L 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
a36 1E1 1 12V/1A 10 1–4 4 0V
5F2 0V
9Tb1.7 24 37 119D 3A
3A3. a3 a3 a3 a3 a3 a3 a3
5Tb1.3 6 b3
0V b3 b3 b3
R29
PL4
007B
MODULE 3 1 2 1A1.PL1.2
C R28
100E 15K4 D25
9Tb1.1229 36
OUT 1
122A
3A1.a13
27V 10 5,05V/10A 1 1–2 2
R30 F31 5 + 5,05V
K26 + 2 1–2 M 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
C32 1A K1 4
5E20 + 5,05V
15 –12 V
470MF 1K5
5 SENSE 3A3. a4 a4 a4 a4 a4 a4 a4
2 16
21 22 6 16 127 SENSE b4 b4 b4 b4
5
9A1 TRANSPANEL 002B V 0V E2 1E2
CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS
FILAMENTS HEATING 12 E2
K 3A3. 3A5 3A7 3A9 3A12 3A19 3A26
0V 2 +5 V
090D OUT 4 11 1A1.Tb3
17 24V/2 + 24V 1 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2 a2
A 3–1 122C
21 27V b2 b2 b2
1 ALIM. 90W
220V 22 861371P015
240V 228V 208V 200V 120V 108V 100V Tb2.
122C CARD RACK GROUND
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
23 5E202–2
2
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1A1 1E5
50Hz
A 50Hz 6 A 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 A 50Hz 6 MOTEUR
19 21V
60Hz 560Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 60Hz 5 1 ARCEAU
C 121/130
D C C C C C C D C D D
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Tb3.
20
3 3 3 B 3 B 3 3 3 B 3 2 MODULE 5
2 2 D 2 D 2 D 2 2 B 2 2
D D
B 1 B 1 B 1 1 1 B 1 1 1
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 / 010
29-5
ÇÇÇÇÇ
PANELS 1 – 3 – 4 – 5
MODULE 1
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13
ALIM.
B.T.
A PL1 L.V.
PL2 P. SUP
A
A PL3
A PL4
A PL5
A PL6
MODULE 3
1
R1
1
R2 C3 C4
1C1
Tb1
1 MODULE 4 1
R3 R4 R5
R6
R8 R10
R9 R11
C3 C4
MODULE 5
R5
R6
R7
R8
29-6
3PL1
PL1 PL3
Y 1
3A19 3PL3 LASER P.B. 3PL3 7A2

X +12V H 2
a17 C LASER
036B 008B
1R3 a16 B
X RAY CONTROL
1 2 Hand Switch
A 4K7 031B
2A4 +12V 0V M
50W
007B 007C
1 2 4Tb1
MODULE 4 6PL1 MODULE 6
ONDULEUR – CONVERTER 1C1 0MF47 CUVE RX – X RAY HEAD
1 L
4TR2 3 A
5 C
2
4DS1 4A1 4CR1
2 x 22K 7 E CR1
4C1 G
5MF
PL1 C365N
5Tb2– 9 C35 1K 3A12
4C2 5 4x 11R4 6PL1 E5 E3 kV/mA
2MF 6 470E VA C28 2K2
VA
4R2 4CR2 7W 2500pF 2x100M IN
237K 1 1R2 PL1 C16 OUT PL2 PL1
005A
4CR3
L1 4A1 1R1 2 B 2500pF
P IN 130–450pF
OUT
4E10 4TR1 FA R18
3x 4 D R 2
4C6 ~ + mesure kv
4C7 1 + E1 0E68
6 F CR2 R15 10K AA
220K 220 4CR7 4C5 3/5 50W 3 100 E1 R14
9 7 VA
K 4000MF 4CR4 K
4 8 H 7 C19 200
3 8
2~
– 2200p K
4Tb1–8 8 F 4 9 021D
L3 C11
005B 4R4 CR3 2200p R13
B 470
K 4C3
4CR5 PL1
1
CR7
SKT12 7
5 F
R12 E4
R17K
200
AC
8 10
VC
4C4
2MF
2 F10DS 4A2 4CR6 4x S 4 100
K
5MF
4R3 PL2 470E FC 10K
4E7 C365N 7W 2500pF
C9
PL2 R10 R11 50 1
W 2x100M
6 5 22E 22E 2 2 x 22K 130–450pF
4A2 6
2500pF
VC VC
4A2 IN C27 2K2 OUT
CR4 Tb24 E6 E2
2
4A1 C34 1K
W33
N 1 1 4 6
1 0
R4 R7 R8 R10 mesure
PL1 3K6
5
3K6
5
3K6
5
3K6
5
6 mA SC
1 R5 C6 021E
SELECT. CAPA 100
100E0 5
AUX. 2 M 6 K 7 4
3
16 mesure
6A1 5 1 mA Gr
CAPA PREPO 15 PL2 1 3X
K 30S6 CI DIVISEUR 021F
1.8 9 2 2
C 7 5A1
0.5 10 1 5
MAIN SCR 6 PUISSANCE
11 CHAUFFAGE HD281
MAIN SCR 10 081–090 2 J
3PL1–S 3PL3–W
3A19 035B–E
COMMANDE SCR
3PL1 3A19
3 A a22 SEC. BELLOWS 031C
6Sa1
1E4
2 B + 12 V 008B
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 6SaTh2
3A9.b7 b15 R507 R509 3
G166.B
R504 b16 3A7.a16
11 V 4
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 47K 2K2 470E 054F
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod TH 071A C508 C505 TH a29 a28
.
R506 10K 832 502 G015 10K
A 15/07/96 100K
0 10/10/96
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
1 09/01/97 3A26.a1
D 2
MODULE 8
+ 12 V a11 a12 a22 a23 b17 b18 a21 a22
008C
IMAGEUR IMAGER 3A3 3A5 3A7 3A9
031F
a32 a20 a19
12 V CI
SECURITE PRESENCE CI 3A19 3A26
PB PRESENT SAFETY
011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019
/ 020
29-7
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4011 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4040 VCC
Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Q12 Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2
40106 VCC GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
29-8
3A19.a18 a14 G33.D

SEXP
12 103B 3A3.b12
11 a13 PRX
035B R15 13
220K E1
+12V 116C
A a1 R60 2 LF356
R63 R14
6K8 G32.A 10K
+12V +12V R62 R64
100K 6 1 2
C177 C176 C56 C130 C204 C501 +12V A55 +12V +12V
a3 E6 10MF 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 3 4K7 4K7
0V R59 R61 D65 R52 D53
Card rack C179 C178 C57 C129 C205 C500 42K2
a4 10MF 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 1M 100K C54 a5 3A19.a25
–12V –12V TROU CLQ
R58 R44 R51 470K +12V 031D
1K87 5K62 47K
2 G32.F G32.E 16 G32.D
D49 a9 3A19.a26
6 R47 R50 13 12 11 10 Q3 6 9 8
INT 4 CLQ
6 R45 A46 G31
3
40K2 33K 2K2
G30.A 10 4040 031C
7
CONSIGNE kV/20 LF356 C R3
3A19.b5 a12 R11 R12 A152.B 1 2 3K3
5 –12V D48
CONSIGNE kV/20 025D 028E B
2K2 2K2 8 11
098A R10 C13 C42 R40 G32.B D4
B 100K 10K
4K7
G30.C
8
10 3 4 5082
H
10K D43 5 6 9
G30.B R41
33K G33.C
3A19.a5 a6 R6 R7 4
3
OX a15
10K 2K2
031A R5 C8 +12V RX REQ
220K 10K
+12V
R76
10E G33.B
R81 6
12K
8
C77 4 3A12 CI kV / mA – 2
+12V 1 10MF 5
+12V +12V R80 7 3 829 825 G025
D224
R86 220E Q79
100 D83 6 555 2 All unmarked diodes are 1N6263
R9 G32.C K 4 3
3A19.a29 220K C85 C82
a11 5 6 R84 1K 2 1
C PRI
040B 1 2K2 1 5 C78
R89
71K5 G33.A
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
K
10K G34.D 2Q92.A
R87 D88
3A19.a34 a35 R140 D139
2K2
9 8
1 3 R91 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
CLOCK 22K Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
4K7
031E R141 E5 4 A 15/07/96 .
R133 R93 C95
220K R101
6A1 2 71K5 0 10/10/96
PL1 E8 R181
6K8
6 R103 301K Q92.B 7 1K 1 09/01/97
PL2 R304 10K 2
6
D134 R135 R136 3
A138
2
6 R100 R98 6 8 R96 2 2
R189 R302 2 121K0
R216 A132 LF356
15K4 A102
9 7 2K 3 1K 2K2 3 6
Va 6 LF356 LF356 30K1 31K6 2K2 A97
46K4 953K0 A315 R309 C137 R104 5 3
C303 3 4K7
G34.F LF356
3 8 100pF R308 15K4 D99
LF356 2 10K0 R131 R105 12 13
4K87
Mesure kV Gnd 4 R305 10K0
6
CONSIGNE kV/20 301K
9 1M R310 A312 R113 R117
3
C301 R184 kV COMPOSITE
022B R110
95K3 R115
D R186
100pF
R185 121K0
10K0
R311
LF356 R232
4M7
027E
9 11K0
8
R116 6 10K0
+12V
Vc 8 10 2 10K0 A114.C R127
6 10K R111 10 7 R123 2 6K8 G34.A G34.B
46K4 953K0 10K0 A114.B
A180 121K LM32 R126 R128 2 4 3A19.a19
018B 3
4 R118 5 100K A122
6 1 3 DEM X
LF356 100K LM32
E7 R112 4
3 4K7 2K2
a18 031D
R300 D119 2 R120
+12V 20K5 D125
1M 1 10K
R307 2 LF356 A114.A
D324 3 R121
R316 6 –12V
23K7 10K A313 LM32 E2
3 +12V 4
10K R124
R320 C322 E4 100K +12V
R318 R171
023B CONSIGNE kV/20
11K0 R162 R16
1M 1K
R170 6K8 R155 47K 10K
R500 024D kV COMPOSITE 2 G34.C
R319 R173 100K R161 R163 6 a16 A26.a24
11K0 LF356
4K7 10K 13 10K R156 A160 6 5 kV 85 o/o
2 3
D325 D507 15K 2K2 081D
6 R508 R172 14
R317 A314 A114.D 5K36
R158 D159
E 23K7
R306 3 1K 2K2 12
LM32
D164
10K R321 C323 4
10K0
D174 R157
–12V 1M 1K 30K1
10 6 R197 R96 R195
9
95K3 95K3 2 187K0 8 a27 3A19.a28
C198 D194 D193 A152.C 120 kV
Mesure mA Sc 100K 6 10
A192 LM32 031C
018D C199 3
100K R200 LF356 4
7 4 R202 R201 187K0
3A19.a23
a8
95K3 95K3 Mesure mA Sc
081E
6 3 R210 R209 R208
13
95K3 95K3 2 187K0 3A26.a32
C211 D207 D206 A152.D
14 a7 Mesure mA Gr
Mesure mA Gr 4K7 6 12
A203 LM32
R153 081C
C212
F 018D R215
4K7
R214
R213
187K0
3
LF356
4 R151 2 10K0
5 1 a10
10K0 1
95K3 95K3 A152.A (Mesure mA Gr)
3
LM32
4
021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030
29-9
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
PL1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Dual MONOSTABLE 1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
29-10
+12V
R25 +12V
a13
100 R24 R21
K 3A3.b18
R49 116C
47K C22 22K 100
3A12.a26 a30 2K2 K R48
4’ 57’’ 13 G119.C SYX SC
106B 12 10K 10 R27 a15 3A26.a28
G113.F 12
11 G113.B RAD
A OX 3A1.a15 3A7.a7 3A12.a6 a5
1
R4 R61
13 3 4
C60 R56 R58 13 1
2
2 G114.A
3 038A
11
+12V +12V
470
E
C28
10K
081F
220
201E 051A 021B S76.A 1K 2K2 G112.D 10K
R55E
2K2
1
+12V
R3 C59 D57
OX 3A1.a17 3A3.b28 a6 8 220 10K 10K R159 D158
K C147 C160 330
PRE
201C 116F SX 9
D143 10K K R71 a10 3A26.a31
10 R144
R62 032F +12V
13 1 2MF2 2
3A7.b8 +12V D156 470 C19 081D
1K +12V 11 T T 6
R78 12
220
G115. 3 1 2 Q E 10K
066A D8 D10 D9 100K R34 G117.B E
R145 R146 G118.B +TR
10K 5 C 6 G155.A
038A 5 4 1 G112.A R35 R88
5
4 5 4538 G114.D SEXP 032D 021A SEXP 116A
220 2K2 G114.C 13
RAD R5 S76.D 3 –TR 7 R84 a18 3A12.a14 3A3.a17
3A7.a34 a7 R7 K RAD 6 Q 8 11
BPCL 2 4K7 2K2 G118.A G113.A R 10 12
1 330 C85 3A5.b8
+12V C86 2
102C 47K
C6
2K2 10K D87 3 1 2 G115.B 038A 8 4 D157 9 E 10K D31
007B +12V R64 100K R77 2 3
1 3 4
041D
10K
PL1 PL3 3PL3 100K R37 R90 4
038A +12V R70
X 6 3 8 G118.C 1 G116.A R79
5
G117.A 47K
RAD 10 9
4K7 2K2 C213
S76. 2 G112.C
R11 R69 C89 1K G113.C
B V a12
47K 2K2
C
+12V
9 8 1K
R36
100
K
10K R212 R214 5 6
9
10 R17 a11
SYX GR
C74 R40 R91 R38 2K2 8
X RAY R65 C66 4K7 470 C18
2A4 10K 100K R80 10K E 10K
Hand 100K 4K7 2K2 220
switch 038A +12V(A)
7 2 6 G112.B R39 C93 K
RAD 4 100 10K R95 PREPOSITIONNEMENT
A R16 R15 S76.B E239 C344
007C a9 K R236 CAPA
PEDALE DE SCOPIE
+12V
5 R43 R96 220 D174 Q238 R237 1K5 100N
FLUORO FOOT SWITCH
R63
47K
C14
2K2
4K7 2K2
K
C176 R242 R241
2N2222 Q235
BD140
F PL1
5Tb1 10K 100K C94 R101 220
R42 E
–1 100 10K
220 1K 4K7 Q324
3PL6–L 22K R175 R243 TR248
a20 K K R240 2N506
–8 +12V R47 R100 6K8 15E IT235 R251 3
4 1 16
E124 3K3 D246
PL1–A 016E a22 2K2 2K2 BZX85C12
4
D249
SEC BELLOWS 10E 2
C99 – 12 V R245 C244 1N506 R252
5E21 3A26.a21 085D a23 R46 100 10K 1 C255
STOP mAs 100 10K R130 E D323 220 22K 4CR7
K
10K D247 C253 BZX83C6V E
C INT 4 CLQ
3A12.a9 030B a26 031E 032C Clock
3A19 CI COMMANDE SCR2
1N506
1
220
K
D2502
BZX83C3V
R325
220
15
012C
3A12.a27 030E G161.B C322 3 E
a28 828 982 G035 –12V(C) 100N
120 kV 032D 033D Clock 4 3 F
E304 +12V(A)
a35 +12V
Q1 +12V +12V
033E R301 C339 SELECTION CAPA
R111 R307
a36
Q1 033E 032D 10K D54 +12V R127 038A G122.B 10K Q303 R302
1K5 100N AUXILIAIRE
+12V C109 R110 R53 10E
RAD 5 G161.
R306
2N2222 Q300 F
Clock 4 5C 6 BD140
R32 2K2 1K 2K2
R219 C126 220
G120.A 2K0 6 4K7 E
100K 8 10MF
R33
1 G119.B R221
5
R218 R308 Q320
3A12.a18 a19 3 3 E166 7 3 +12V R305 TR313 2N506
DEM X DEM X 4 6 3K3 15E IT235 R316 2
10K 2 3K6 619E G128 D311 4 3
4 1
030D +12V 032E 5 R163 5 0D220
555
D314 2
W165 2 5 R154 BZX85C12 R310 C309 10E R317
TROU CLQ
470 C153 1N506
220 C321
R41 K 6 100 100 10K 1
100K G119.A C129 +12V K D312 E D341 E 22K 4CR4
032D 033D 2 E164 C162 10K C319 BZX83C6V R318
3A12.a5 a25 R92 9 G120. 035A 6 10K 4 100
14
1N506 220 D315 2 R343 220
D TROU CLQ
030B 3K3
1
8
12
D 11 SEXP 8
G120.
C 10 5
4 5
13 T1B
K
T 2B
Q
1
C340
K BZX83C3V
3
220
E
E
1
012C
13 G114. 100N
R184 9 G120.B 5 G113.D G155.B –12V(C)
PRI TROU CLQ B 4 R140 8 4538 C198 R188 R261 F
G118.D G115.E 9 031D 11
Q
9 +12V(A)
10K 13
039B 031D 11 11 10 6 10K +12V 1K5
Clock TROU CLQ 10K 4K7
+12V 12 R187 R257 C327
033C 12 033C 14 MAIN SCR
+12V
R206 3 1
6K8 D186 Q259 R258
1K5 100N
46K4
Clock C Q 2N222 Q256 F
R44 –12V 2 BD140
6K8 LF356 2 R205 R207 G121.A E260 220
G122.C 5 D 2 031E E
a27 R45 R98 6
22K 220E R208 8 Q Q330
f max A204 C209 10 Q1 R263 R264 TR269 2N506
3 G161.F R S 10K 15E R272 11
2K2 4K7
+12V 100 9 13 G122.D G161.E IT235 4
3 1
D97 R201 K 4K7 DEM X 12 R262 D267 4
Q210 032D
13 4 6 7 11 11 10
BZX85C12 R266 C265
D270 10E 2 R273
R199 2N2222 12 1N506 220
2M2 10K0
4K7 100 10K 1 E C277
+12V E D329 22K 4CR6
D268 BZX83C6V R274
1N506 C275
D2712 R331 220
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 R200 9
8 1 220
220 E 10 012C
E C.C.D. – M.D.A.
21K5 R183
4K7 Q185
D S Q
13
–12V(C)
C328
100N
K BZX83C3V
3 E
2N2907 G121.B
C196 C193 11 E282 F
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 10MF 10MF
D180 C Q
12 +12V(A)
R179
A 15/07/96 . D182 R D107
BZX83C6V2 1K BZX83C6V2 10 R279 C333
0 10/10/96 R285 1K5 MAIN SCR
R181 R177
G122.A 10K Q281 R280
100N
1 09/01/97
D191
R192
10K
2K26 4K7 2
R105 R106
G161.D
R284
2N222 Q278 F
3 9 8 2 BD140
2 220
1 10K 1K 4K7 E
D139 Q298
Q1 C108 R283 R286 TR291 2N506
G161.A 100pF 3K3 15E IT235 R294 4
3 1 7
3A12.a35 a34 R52 2 1 Clock 031E D289 4
G216.A BZX85C12 D292 10E 2 R295
Clock 032A R288 C287 1N506
021C C104 330E 033C R68 R72 R194 R195 2 R217 220 C299
1K SX
1 G216.B G216.C G216.F Q178 100
E
10K 1
D335 E 22K 4CR1
47E 47E 220K 47E 4K7 4 5 6 1 2N2222 D290 C297 BZX83C6V R296
3 13 1N506
C67 C197 2 220 D2932 R337 220
012C
G216.D G216. 4K7 10MF 1 BZX83C3V 220 E 6
R215 K
a21 8 9 10 E 11 C328 3
F C211 470E G113.E
–12V(C) 10034
E
10K
3A26.a20 a32 R51 R102 1 R190
11
12 V CI 0
018D R50 10K 10K 4K7
220K C103
10K
Q189
2N2222
031 032 033 034 035
29-11
PL1
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035
29-12
3
+12V
R20
G115.A
A 3A7.a29 a14
100
K R73 R26 1 2 R12 a8 3A26.a36
GR RAD
3K3 1K 470E 081E
C75 C13
066C 10K
10K
RAD 032B 033C
034B 3A12.a32 3A3.a8 3A1.a22
103D 111D D
G115.F
13 12
RAD 032B 032A
+12V
DETECTION I
013A +12V R167
4Tb1 PL3 10K0
4L1 4TR1 R168 +12V

E172
1b B a16 4
D29
+12V 10K0
R123
4A1 50K R169
1 2 R81 R83 R150 E125 6K8
6K8
R131 2
B 10K 10K 2 LF356

G115.D
10K0 6 R171 R173 a29 3A12.a11
E1 2b C a17 R30 6 R149 R152 D133 A137 PRI
D82 9 8 3
4K7
1E A135 2K2
3 2W 3 4K7 2K26 021C
D170
4L3 – 12 V R148 D151 R132 R138 C136
R141 2K15 PRI
10K0 1M C134 10K0 22pF
031D
1K
R142
237K0
W350 +12V
–12V
+12V
W351
+ 12 V
a1 R226
+12V(A)
10E
C231 C229 C202 C224 C222
100K 10MF 100K 10M 100K
F
W354
a3 E233 E234
0V C342
100K
C326
100K
C332
100K
C338
100K
C232 C230 C203 C225 C223

100K 10MF 100K 10MF 100K
W352 L227
R228
– 12 V a4 –12V(C)
W353
C –12V
10E 100H
3A 19 COMMANDE SCR2
MASSE CARD RACK 828982G035
–12V All unmarked diodes are 1N6263

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod
A 15/07/96 .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
D 2
036 037 038 039 040
29-13
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2 828 980 G025 / G035
PIN
MAN 71A
1 Cathode a
1 14 2 Cathode f
a 3 Commun Anode
2 13
B A
6 NC
3 f 7 Cathode e
b DIS kV
g 8 Cathode d
11 828229 P305
e c 9 Cathode DP
10 10 Cathode c PL1
11 Cathode g
6 d 9
DP 13 Cathode b
7 8 14 Commun Anode
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator

INPUTS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OUTPUTS
4585 COMPARING CASCADING
A3 B3 A > B A B AB
Cascading Inputs A3>B3 X X X X X 1 0 0 1
B2 A2 A = B A > B A B2 X X X X 1 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1 X X X 1 0 0 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 A B C D a b c d e f g
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0 X X 1 0 0 1
7447 VCC 0 L L L L L L L L L L H
g f a b c d e
BI/ 1 H L L L H L L H H H H
B C LT RBI D A
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 0 1 0 0 1 RBO
2 L H L L L L H L L H L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 0 1 1 0 1 0 GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 H H L L L L L L H H L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0 1 0 X 1 0 0
4 L L H L H L L H H L L
5 H L H L L H L L H L L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0 X X X 1 0 0
6 L H H L H H L L L L L
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1 X X X X 1 0 0
7 H H H L L L L L H H H
A3=B3 A2<B2 X X X X X 1 0 0 8 L L L H L L L L L L L
A3<B3 X X X X X X 1 0 0 9 H L L H L L L H H L L
29-14
072A R105
2K87
R82
5K62 3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 828980G035 b5
3A1 021B
R81 C92 2 a12 CONSIGNE kV / 20
10K0 100K
2 G36.B 3A2
6 3 4 R32 a16 6 30 mA 100 / 110 kV 081A
A G94
3
A69 +5 V
1K C33 a10
a10
R80 G36.A 10K a6 60 mA 40 / 49 kV
10K0 C70 D26 1 2 R37 a14 55 mA 50 / 59 kV
D23 a5
C0 C7 100K 1K C50
a12
C93 D25 G36.F 10K a8 47 mA 60 / 69 kV 081B
100K D24 R35
G84.E 13 12 a8 41 mA 70 / 79 kV
FC40 3A7.b6 a23 10 C34
a9
11
1K b36 33 mA 80 / 99 kV
058E +5 V G36.D 10K a7
9 8 R31
C7 D28 C72
+5
V G18
G22
D27 G36.E
10
1K
R30
10K 2A1 MODULE G2
11
C73 DISPLAY kV +5 V
1K
G36.C 10K PL1 PL3
B 5 6 R29
+5 V a1 +5V DS25
+5 V R205 1K C74 b2
10K
10K
R225
a20
G19
a21 100
+5 V R206 +5 V R226
10K 2 x 150E +5 V
Q241
Q240 2N2222 R185
C0 R204 2N2222
G138
R220
a18 DS24
10K R221
a13
G84.F
G67 R203 a14
3A7.b5 a24 12 DIS 10K
R219
a12
FC110 13 R224
a19
C 058D +5 V C7 kV R222
a15
+5 V C7
R223
a17 010
7 x 150E
+5V +5 V
G21
G172 R214 a11
R216 DS23
a6
R215 a5
+5 V C0 R212 a2
+5 V R217 a7
R193 R213 a3
110kV E3 G121
10K
Q233
R218 a10 001
W245 2N2222 7 x 150E
Q232
E4 R192 2N2222 +5 V
105K +5 V G20 074C 10K
D E5 R191
10K R189
DISPLAY mA / mAs
R196 R45
C0 10K
b24 R46 DS41
2 x 22E
Q235 R44
a21 Q234 2N2222 b25 R47
R195 2N2222 R190
R42
C7 10K
R194 R43
018D PWB Presence 10K 6x
R199
BUS kV / 10K 100E
R187
20 071C Q237
a22 Q236 2N2222 b18 +5 V
R198 2N2222
+5 V 22E
10K
C0 R197 R184
a/b2 10K G137 b15 DS40
R183 b14
+5 V +5 V
E R181
R180
b12
a/b1 C159 C160 b11
R209 b16
+ 12 V + 12 V 100K 10MF R188 b23
C162 R186 b17
C161
a/b3 10MF 100K 7 x 150E
0 V G120 R202
R182
10K b13
C158 C157 Q239 22E
a/b4 10MF 100K Q238 2N2222 +5 V
R201 2N2222
+5 V
– 12 V – 12 V
074B 10K
R200 R177
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 10K G136 b8 DS39
R176 b7
C.C.D. – M.D.A. R174 b3
F Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod R173
R179
b1
b10
A 15/07/96 No .
R175 b5
0 10/10/96 R178
1 09/01/97 b9
7 x 150E
2
091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098099 / 100
29-15
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC 40106 VCC
GND GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Dual MONOSTABLE
4023 VCC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND C R/C CD +TR –TR Q Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4040 VCC
Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter
Q12 Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
29-16
+12V
R17 R18
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 +12V
R66 1M C19 1M
10e G35 G35 470K
A G35 CLIGN
C.C.D. – M.D.A. R143 2 13 12 3 4 a 23
Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod 46K4 + +12V
8 C67 1
A 15/07/96 No . 3A7 - a19 3A3 - a10
10MF
0 10/10/96 R72 054F 111C
R217 10K
1 09/01/97 100K 7 3 9 G36
2 10
G69 13
R71 R73 11
100K0 6 555 10K CR25 CR26 R24 1
100K 2
C70 2 5
E3
100K
C68 +12V +12V
4 1 100K
16 16
G37 15 G37
4040 Q11 4040
2A1 MODULE G 10 10 9
3A7 AD kV CLK Q12 1 CLK Q1
Q10 14 Q2
7
+12V +12V R R 2 G36
PL1 11 8 11 8 3
a 26
4’57”
RAZ MINUTERIE SCOPIE CR20 4
1
Sm14 PL1 FLUORO TIMER RESET R21
100K G35 5 3A19 - a30
a 33 a 21 5 6 031A
B 045A b 15
+12V R22
2K2 PRX.CP (50Hz)
a4 a 30
R130 Q141 R131 C23
150E 2N2222 G35 3A5 - a5
4K7 470K
a 26 a 19 10 11 041A
045A
+5 V Sm7 PL1 BP COMMANDE CLICHE R154 4’26”
150E
R132
X RAY CONTROL BP 10K
a3 G35 +12V
051C +12V 8 9
PRX 3A12 kV mA – 2
C29 R28
b 16 026A 470K 470K 829825G025
Q140 R153 G74 5
2N2222 4K7 a 26 +12V
a 33 4
6
3A5 a 34 1 2 16
R152
CI MINUTERIE 10K C R/C
Sm26 R155 4 6 1 G74
131A +5 V PL5 PL2 +TR Q
150E 3
a36 b33
a13 2
G39.A
C 042B +12V 4538 +12V
a29 5 7
b1 -TR Q
+12V +12V
R108
220K
BP Cl 3A19 - a7 CD
R222
031B 100K 3 8
2A3 MODULE D + W109
+12V
C223 CR221
10MF
9PL1 RAD R106 G75
+12V
PL4 a 32 8 G74 220K 11
29 9Tb1.12 10 12 10
9 3A19 - a8
27 VAC R27
9
13
003C C39 040A 220K W107
PL11 9PL1 Q142
10 220K G74 2N2222
15 14 12
R38 11
X–RAY ON +12V
C R/C DS175
100E 13
7 1 +12V
12
D42 27 003C +TR Q 10
D W220
R623 R503 G39.B G75
10K W230 3
9Tb1.7 K37 a 36
22E R627 4538
24 8 3 4K7
+12V
13 6 4
0 VAC -TR Q 9
22 Y 5
003C
D624 W231
9A1 TRANSPANEL 1N5359 Q625 CD
R504
832 782 G055 2N2222 10K
13
3PL6
101 102 103 104 105 106
107 108109
/ 110
29-17
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q 3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
GND X X 1 0 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4016 VCC In
Contr. Out
Contr. 4 Out
In 1 3 In
Out 2 Contr.
Out Contr.
In
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
BA
PL 1 40106 VCC
M 1.1
PL1
GND
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E3
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7A1 FROTTEURS 4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3A5 MINUTERIE BA
832 501 G015
PL2
29-18
b31 b30
PL5 PL12 BPF1
R39 D89 3PL1 PL1 ROTATION
3A3 CI DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015

BP01
+12V
100
E
BZX83
C2V7 D 10 M.1.2 +
7M1
–
Sm11 8 G159.A C92 D90
A R245 b31 FC Sc1 2 9 R219
100
K
BZX83
C2V7
R16
b9 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 1 4K7
R220
154
E
47E FC Sc1 G169.A 112E Z G159.C Q218 M.1.1
Sm12
7W
C.C.D. – M.D.A. RAD
1
2 9 5
G168.B 3 G159.B
12
11 10
R221 4K7
2N2907
R8 C246 Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 8 4 5 6 13 Q222 R217 115F

b5 100 4K7 2N222
K A 15/07/96 . 6 4
2 680 a21 – +
47E BP01 E J 7 6 3
7M3
7W 0 10/10/96 G168.A R214
a4 +12V 1 09/01/97 BPF1 8 G157.C 3 2 G160.A 2 R223
R215 10K D225
XX 4 6 8 9 11 G160.C 3 Q216 R210 100 BZX83
300
E VOLETS SUPE-
b6 –12V 2 9 Z 12 10 2N290 680 E C2V7
FC GR1 5 1 1
33K 7 R213 E C224 RIEURS
121A G160. 13 D226 UPPER BLADES
100
3 G169.B
+12V BZX83
+12V BPF1 RAD B FC GR1 4K7 K C2V7
Sm15 5 6
R212 Q211
R7 G156.E G156.D RAD 4 2N2222
b33 a7 100 R8 R56 11 10 9 8 D 5 G157.B 1K
a8 BPF1 112B G168.D BP01
11 G169.C
K 1 4 +12V
4K7 FC Sc1 –12V
+12V
2K2 G164.E 2 1 6 10 FC Sc1
131A C55 BP01 RAD 12 G158.A G156.E R6
B +5V
Sm16
R3
R4
10K
G166.E G158.B Z 11 10 1
3
1
FC Sc1
13
FC Sc1
2 1 2 1 R54 R5 100
K
a6 T 1 12 9
7Sa1
b35 a5 100 R52 11 10 3 4 112E 4K7
a1 K BP01 RAD + Z 2K2 NO
C53 +12V
4K7 2K2 FC GR1 10 FC GR1
C51 R35 G158.E G156.C R12 7Sa3
a35 a22 10K R60
K
R11 a9 9 6
a14 G161.B G164.E 10 11 6 5 100 U 4
6 FC GR1 RAD 5 G157.B FC GR1 K
150
E
Q140 R144 XX 4 11 10 2K2 4K7 NO
3A5 2N2222 FC Sc2 C59 +12V
4K7 5 6
MINUTERIE 112E Z 10K FC Sc2
G156.F G156.B R24 7Sa2
+12V BPF2 4 R72 R23 100 a16 8 5
FC Sc2 12 13 3 W 5
Sm13 K
R17 G164.A G164.F +12V 2K2 4K7 NO
b36 a13 100 R18 R66 1 2 13 12 FC GR2 C71 +12V
b7 K BPF2 R86 W85 G157.A 10 FC GR2
2 G162.B G162.A
4K7 2K2 100 RAD K R30 a18 7Sa4
+12V C65 BP02 K
3 4 3 2 1 R80 R29 100 X 3 1 7
Sm14 10K 1 FC GR2 K 0
R19 G166.F G158.F CLIGN 2K2 4K7 NO
b34 a14 R20 R68 BPF2
100 C78
C a3 K
4K7 2K2
13 1
2
13 12
BP02 +12V
10K
C67 BP02 8 G179.A

10K
FC Sc2
2 9 R248
a33 a28 R36 1 4K7 7A1 CI 7A2 CI
a16 G163. Q249
9 FC Sc2 112E Z R250 FROTTEURS DISQUE
+12V
150
E
Q141 R138 10C
8 G180.A 12 G179.C 2N2907
2N222 9 G163.B G179.B 10 R252 4K7
4K7 8 2 5 4 11
2 FC GR2 RAD
3A12–a23 a10 R13
100 R14 R62 1 4 3 6 13
4K7
Q251 R247
CLIGN 6 2 +12V 2N222 680
CLIGN K
BP02 2 a20 5 2 – +
4K7 2K2 E Z 8
106A +12V R244 7M2
C61 RAD 112B 112E RAD G181.A
10K 5 8 8 G168. 20K R253 D255 300
R9 G164.C G164.B 118E G180.C R245 Q246 R240 100
3A19–a8 a8 R10 R58 BPF2 2 4 6 2 9 11 C 10 5 BZX83 E VOLETS INFERIEURS
100 5 6 3 4 Z 2N290 680 E C2V7
RAD K RAD 3 3 1 12 1 9 E C254 LOWERS BLADES
4K7 112E 13 0
33K 7 R243 D256
040A 2K2 FC GR2 1 G180.B 100 BZX83
C57 G163.A FC GR2 3 G181.B 4K7 K C2V7
10K
RAD + Z
4 6
R242 Q241
5 2N2222
D BP02
12 G181.C
1K
2A3 PUPITRE Z1 119C

a21 b27 RAD 11 10 –12V
MODULE D 2 R135 G172.B
13 R203 R201
R137 FC Sc2 3 4
150
E Q142 +12V +12V
828 970 G015 2N222 13K 10K +12V
4K7 R106
2 3
+12V R502 220 D50 G176.A
1K 3 C109
K 1N5061 2 R196
S501.B G167.C
C109
3
G176.C
47E Q189
Sm17 S501.A R500 MONO OFF 5 6 10MF 1 8 BD139 CHAMP/FIELD
MONO OFF 2 R204 LM324
+5V +12V 4 1 47K
10K T1A T2A G176.B 10 2
a23
16– +
+12V 11 8
78F R33 6 14
R108
100
D110
1N91
+TR QA 6
4
9 40K A175.A
1 E 2
7M5
2 R202
a2 100 G167 112D G178.C K 4
G155.A 5 20K
3
Q190 R198
a30 b26 K R34 R84 G165.A 1 G167.D BD14
b2 1 2 3
C Q RAD
9
9 8
+12V +12V 4538 +12V
–12V
5
0 100 UNIQUEMENT EN
828 970 G015
4K7 2K2
5 4013 2 9 8
10
5
G178.B R112 D111 -TR QA G172.E
R231 D193 R195
E
C199 BICHAMPS
C83 D Q
8
828 777 G015 10K 4
C113 100 1N91 CD 11 10 47E 100 ONLY WITH 2
E 4 7
G164
112B 113A
Z 6 10K
K 4
4K7
–12V
K FIELDS II
113D
G172.C R205
+12V +12V 6
R207
5 10K
1N5061 RAD +12V
+12V +12V G167.E R105 D49 13K
220 3 CHAMP/FIELD 16
11 10 C104
K 2 G177.A R227
R121 G172.A 3 47E Q191 1 FIELD II
100 D125 C116 G177.B
1N914 G167.F +12V 1 2 10MF 1 5 BD139 CHAMP/FIELD 22
K
RAD R208 LM324
R122 R123 1 12
C128 10K T1A T2A G177.C
4 6
a24
2 FIELDS II
– +
C 6 7 4
4K7 2K2
3
220 G167.B R115
100
D117
1N91
+TR QA 8
10
6 40K A175.B
7
7M4
R126 KR127 K 4
2 R206 5 Q192
C124 3 4 G155.B 9 20K M.1.1 115A
4MF7 +12V +12V BD140
+12V 100 1K +12V 4538 RAD 5 R229
–12V F 9 4 1
R114
8 K
2 G178.A R119 D118 -TR QA G172.D D194 R228
100
E
R232
10K G165.B
C Q 3
C120 100 1N91 CD 9 8 47E C230
F 4013
13
RAD
1 10K
K 4
4K7
–12V
100
K
0V(12V)
9 12 G178.D 007C
D Q 1 G172.F
2 11 13
R76 T b19 3A1.a19
12
10 1 C74
470
3
E 1K C
111 112 113 114 115
29-19
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
29-20
R26 R75
3A19.a18 4K7 2K2
a17
SEXP J6 423
R25 C73 G171 5V POWER SUPPLY R95 R43 3PL2
A
035B
100K 10K G161.D R139 *
G171.B * +12V 1K 1K a32 M 1. 16
12 11 10K 5 4 1 5 CLTV_
9
+12V
13 6
D237 Q145 C147
R143 H11A5100 2 220K
R31 R32 R82 6K8 1N6263 4 a33 0V (24V)
3A7.a10 4K7 2K2 G161.A R94
a19 100K 1
3K3 126D
3 R239
SC
051D +12V
C81 2
G171.A * R236
10K
200K R238
10K
R42 8
S133.A
10K 1
3 4K7
R37 R38 R88 G162.F
2
+
1
CAG CCD
3A7.b31 4K7 2K2 C235 Interconnect board
b29 100K 13 12 ER Q148
ER 10MF 2N2222
C87 117F
065B
10K R70
R22 2K2
3A7.a8 4K7
a15
B AUTO
051A R21 C69
+12V R513
100K 10K +12V R514
R40 R41 R93 1K 1K a27 V 1.18 18
3A7.b5 4K7 2K2 R503 G166.C R511
a31 100K GOTO BLACK GO TO BLACK
100K 2K2 1 5
FC110 5 6
Q512 C515
C91 5 4
H11A5100 220K
058D +12V
10K S133.D 2 4
R28 R77 R134 G166.C G158.C G158.D R129

3A19.a15 4K7 2K2 BEAM 1K R130 R27
b18 100K 5 6 5 6 9 8
100E 100E 15
SYX Sc 3 b20 S BEAM MAX
C79 6 X – RAY ON_
035A S133.C R532 1 5
1.15
10K 100K Q132 C131
SYX Sc H11A5100 2 4
220K
+12V
117F
C R16 R64 b32 + 24V
3A12.a13 R15 R151
b12 100K 4K7 2K2 1
Q209 126C
PRX
13
100K Q149
C63 4016 2N2907
030A 2
R150
10K + 5v
1 5 10K R96
Q145 1K R44
H11A5100 4 1K b33 L 1.7 ZOOM 10
2 MODE 1
+12V Z1 C98
112D R136 220K
R45 R46 R99 4K7
a34 100K 4K7 2K2
C97 G163.D R154
+12V
10K
13
11 10K
Sm 21 R48 R101
12
D PL5 PL2
R47 R153 3A5.b9
3PL2
1
a32 a35 100K 4K7 2K2 Q152 W 1.11
b15 2K2 2N2222 Cde RX –ABD
C100 041D
a6 10K
PRESENCE
CI
a11 3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2/CCD 3PL5
016D a12 9A1 (K27)
+12V a36 A Transpanel
a/b1 G155.16 832 502 G015
a9 +12V 004C
a/3
E188 C184
+
C185 C200 C103
+
C102 MODULE 8
3A5 0V 100K 10MF 100K 100K 10MF Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 R173
Auxiliary coil
2A3 PUPITRE (12V)
a/b4
C186
+
C187 C197
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 100K IMAGER
MODULE D MINUT. –12V 100K 10MF 100K
Rev. Date Serial No Avt. Mod 301 to 440
–12V -
A 15/07/96 .
E Sm 4 PL1 3A7 a/b2 +5V 0 10/10/96 +
A175.D
+5V 1 09/01/97
PL1 C182
+
C183
b4 a35
100K 10MF 2 R174 3A5.b10
PL2 100K a25
b17
AD / kV 3A26. 041C
RAD
a1 b17 -
PL1 112D
a17 7 7 ON = POWER DERATING SYX Sc
081A
R520 +
a1 b13 S133.B ER 117C G177.D G162.E A175.C 3A9.b6
3
2
12
11 14 12 1K a29
a16 +12V 117B G176.D 13
13 11 C521 077C OX HLC
b16 3A5 R516 R517 R518 G161.C 12
10K
3A19.a6 47K 2K2
9
MINUT. b28 100K 8
10
F OX
031A C519
100K
2A1 PUPITRE
MODULE G
116 117 118 119 120
29-21
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
32 22 12 32 22 12
TB2 F5 24 24
34 14 34 14
11 11
31 21 31 21
K34 K44
a b a b
PL1
W62 W62
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC
TB3 F18 832 359 G015
29-22
PUPITRE MOD. D MINUTERIE PL1

1 +24V
111B 2A3 3A5 +12V +12V 1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC
PL5 PL2 006B 7
C36 C37
+12V Sm23
006D 2 10MF 100K R27 D35 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
A 1K5 Q28 832 359 G015
b3 a31 0V 0V +12V R26 2N2907 1N5061 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Sm22 (12V) Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod
3PL3 G16.A G16.B 1 5 10K K34
b4 b32 E 9 R10 R11 1 2 3 4 5
G17.B Q25 A 15/07/96 No .
4 R24 b a 0V (24V)
47K 2K2 2 4 H11A5100 0 10/10/96
R9 C8 6 1K 0V (24V) +24V 1 09/01/97
100K 10K
2
PL1 PL1 007B R32 D45
b35 1K5 Q33
b6 +12V +12V R31 2N2907 1N5061
Sm5 1 5 10K K44
b11 a32 G17.A Q30
1
Sm9 G16.F G16.E 3 R29 2 4 H11A5100 b a
F 8 R14 R15 1 12 11 1 0V (24V)
b7 b36 3 0
2 1K 0V (24V)
47K 2K2
2A1 3A7 R13
100K
C12
10K
PL1 MODULE 8 IMAGER
PUPITRE MOD. G AD kV 14
B D7 1N5061 11
12 14 301 to 440
D3 6
K6 11
D4 1 2
24 12
21 R50 R49
0V 22 24 46E4 46E4 C ARM
2x 21
1M1
1N5061 (12V) UP / DOWN
Tb2– F5
22
C48 MOTION MOTOR
21 1 5 34 34 4MF7
3 4 31 31 10
A
3 D23 D22 32 32 3PL6.c
22
27VAC 124E
R51
5E20 3PL4 3PL2 J6 423
23 2 D21 D20
4 x MR752 +24V
6E8–7W
4Tb1–
b Y Y 1–24 7
C 5TR1 Tb3– F18
005D 19 3–1 1 4 +24V 4a c Z Z 1–25 8
3
W42
+24V
X902 11 A
3 d a a 1–26 9
Not 006C 18VAC 5 0V (24V) 3A3.b32 119C

connected 3A9.b32 080B
20 E2–3–2 2 b b b 1–27 4
W41
X902 12 0V (24V) 3a c c c 1–28 5
3PL6.W 0V
124E
d d d 1–29 6
3PL3.T CCD
3A9.b35 INTERCONNECT
D MODULE 9 – INTERFACE 9PL1 080B 3A3.a33
BOARD
BNC/BNC 119A
To Monitor : 30 2
VIDEO Board Video
J2-1 523B 31 1
DR4/MD10 memories only

0V +24V
mGycm2 J4
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
9A1 2 1
427E
MDA TRANSPANEL
MEMORY
PL1 PL13 PL11
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ Blue White
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
DAP 3PL6
INTERFACE BOARD BNC/BNC Plug
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SGNL
E Sub-D Sub-D 2 3 21 42 c
SK1 +24V
Nr 1 125C ION
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
COM 3 ( 3PL4-Y ) H.T.
2
CHAMBER
3 4 2 20 37
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
W 0V (24V) 125D
3 2 ( 3PL4-c )
5 5 ELECTRONIC
DAP
MODULE 7 COLLIMATOR MODULE
3PL2 SG.DAP
1 5 23 57 b D Test White 1
F
5 4 22 47 Z K Pulses Red 2
129
121 122 123 124 125 126 / 130
127128
29-23
BA
PL1
S32
3A5 MINUTERIE BA
832 501 G015
PL2
Dual D Flip Flop CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 0 0 0 1
4013 1 0 0 1 0
Vcc
Q Q C R D S
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S X X 1 0 0 1
GND X X 0 1 1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X X 1 1 1 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC 4023 VCC
GND GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
29-24
+5V
051F 101C 111B 046B 111E
PL5 PL2
H / V SWEEP INVERSIONS
3A5 MINUTERIE :
a7 +5V R248
150E G140.A R25 R24
H/V Sweep Inversions – TV Monitors Coil Rotation
a11 +5V 100E 100E a25
2 1
Q195 Not connected
1 3
A 2N2907 C27
470K
Sm10 +5V G140.D R101 2 4
+5V 470E
9 8
Q55 Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
R256 4N32
S32–2 100K
R255 R203 G140.B C.C.D. – M.D.A.
4K7 2K2 3 4 Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod
b16 R29 R28
C202 G106 +5V A 15/07/96 No .
100E 100E a26
+5V 10K 4013 Not connected 0 10/10/96
1 3
C31 a27 1 09/01/97
470K Not connected 2
R257 R258 R205 G140.C G140.E R105
S32–1 100K 2 4
Not connected
4K7 2K2 5 6 11 10 470E
b17 Q57 a28
C204 4N32
10K
B
Sm9
R24
7 G140.F
a10 150 12 13
E
+5V +5V Q194 PL5
2N2907
+ 6
R167 D164 G163.A 12V
R156
100K 2K2 1N6263
1 2
R41 D46 K36
1K
+ C165
5
+5V 10MF
C TV MONITORS COIL ROTATION MONITOR 1
Sm8 R148 3PL 9PL PL1
R251 R252 R199 G163.B R149 22E a24 R43
100K 5 M 3–5 1 38 2 4 D44 K35
4K7 2K2 3 4 470E 1K
b14 47
8
C198 Q151 D152
10K R150 2N2222 1N5359B
+5V 10K
R153
Sm7 R265
R262 R266 G163.C R154 22E b25 K 3–1 34 5
2K2 100K 2K2 470E
b12
C26 D263
5 6
D157
43 9A1 TRANSPANEL
Q156
1N6263 R155 1N5359B B 27 1
+5V 1 10K
2N2222
+ 12V
10K PL6
R168
D Sm6 R249 R25 R197 G163.D R169 22E b24 S 3–3 36 6 + 6
100K 0 2K2 470E 12V
9 8
b8 4K7 45
C196 Q171 D172 R47
R170 D48 K34
10K +5V 2N2222 1N5359B 1K
10K
5
R173 MONITOR 2
Sm5 D210 R21
R21
R20 2 G163.E R174 22E b26 U 3–8 41 7
9 1N6263 3 470E
100 11 10 R45 D40 K33
a5 2K2 2K2 50
K 1K
C208 Q176 D177
10K D211 D264 R175 2N2222 1N5359B 8
1N6263 1N6263 10K
RAZ R33
b23 ROTATION 2K2 Q59
2N2222
Not connected
E C58 + R34
1MF 1K5 MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
a17
b11
b13
042C R193 3A5 MINUTERIE
b10 150E
832 501 G015
a2
2A3 MODULE D2
F a21
131 132 133 134 135 136 137138139

/ 140
29-25
v. 29–26
With MDA Memory With DR4 & MD10 Memories
2 172 555 2 172 563
29-26
MONITOR CART INTERFACE 3PL5 3PL6 9PL1 PL12 PL11

A 26 2 9A1 TRANSPANEL :
A B 27 1
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 2 172 555 : MDA PL11
Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod
A 15/07/96 No . K 34 5 2 172 563 : DR4 & MD10 PL12
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97 S 36 6
2
M 38 4 PL10
MODULE 3 – CARD RACK U 41 7 7805
5
3A1 – a8
H 11 8 16 0F47 0F47
X PERM
3A1 – a9 IR
+ C 9 7 4
N.U. RECEIVER
3A1 – a14 3
D 16 14
N.U.
3A1 – a24
K 2 9 14
MG
+ 3A1 – a25
E 14 3 13
VISU +
B 3A1 – a26
MEMO +
F 17 10 12 PL7
3A1 – a28 3
B 18 11
MDA
3A1 – a30 4 COM1
J 1 1 18
Common
3A1 – a20
L 10 15 17
X PERM
3A1 – a27
M 7 2 15
MF +
3A1 – a35
N.U. N 8 12
Video camera 30 To Monitor :

from module 8 Imager Video OUT VIDEO Board
126D 31 J2-1 523B
C
48 MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
49 9E3
1E8
50
9Tb1 3
24
5Tb1–3 7 RX LAMP and DR4 / DR7
29 POWER SUPPLY
5F2 1
2
c 53
b 54 5
4Tb1.7
d 55
9TR1
58
D
59
4E10 6
60
61
4Tb1.6
141 142 143 144 145 146

147
/ 150
148149
29-27
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4023 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4093 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
40106 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dual D Flip Flop

CL D R S Q Q
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4013 0 0 0 0 1
Vcc
Q Q C R D S 1 0 0 1 0
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
29-28
+12V
3A1 INTERFACE DSM T1 R151
+12V 200K +12V
+12V +12V +12V 209D
R150 R107 X PERM T4 R152
100K +12V
C141
4MF7
R142
100K D143 +12V +12V
A 200K 100E
+12V 12
G82.B
C138 R140 D139
G119.A C147 R148 +12V
R132
C108
R114
10
9
13
4MF7 68K D149 +12V 4MF7 187K0
10MF G116.D 11
150K 100K 8 OX*R1
9 C144 R146 D145
G106.C E12
R111 Q110
555
E12
5
5 6
4MF7 187K0 204D +12V G117.B
3 T2
470E E12 4 E12 +12V G117.A E12
+12V G622.A
202D SP C112
1
C109
G81.B 6 T5 T1 4
G82.A G105.A 4MF7 E12 201B
3 R113 100K 6 5 +12V G622.A
204D OX*R1 5 11 1 2
100E T4 7
201F T2
2 205C
4
201B 205C
204B T1 G104.A G105.E
208C
208A
1 208B T5 208B 209A
203B T4 +12V +12V 202E STOP HYST 3 11 10 9 G643.C 208B
2 10 209C
C619 R620 D621
B C613
10K 10K 220K 203B ON RESET + MCH 13
G104.D G105.B
8
12
11 3 4 2 G601.A
S 3
11
203F R614 D615 208D STOP DSM 12 13
N G104.A G105.E
1 12
G600.A G600.D
100K 1N914 1 11 1
STOP HYST 3 11 10 2 G500.A 13 3
G622.A 202E 2 3 G500.D 2
+12V +12V 1
R617 D618 G600.C G105.D OX* 5 G500.B
100K 1n914 9 G104.D G105.B G601.C
10 9 8 204C 13 4 9
4 G81.D
SP +12V +12V 8
11 3 6 12
11
10
202D C616 12 8
10K 1 G80.C STOP DSM 9 G81.C 13
12
11
C630 R631 D632 208D 10
C624 +12V 3 5 6
13
10K 10K 220K 2 ON RESET + MCH 8 5
C29 40 G601.D
C E 10MF R28
G106.B
4
G643.A
202B 202C
+12V G116.B
6
R
202E R625 D626 3
ON RESET R501 3 4 G600.B
100K 1N914 G80.D S
1K 201C 100E
R27 D26 8 203F
G622.A 100K
203D 9 N
+12V +12V 1N914
1
R628 D629 S502.A ON RESET + MCH 1 4
100K 1N914 4 S602.A C603
202E SP 203B
RAD 10K
202D C627 +12V OX OUT
10K 206C G103.A
ON RESET R13 R44 G79.E G77.A G78.A G79.B Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000
3A19–b19 a19 202C 100K R12 2K2 11 10 5
1
3 1 2 R54 R56 3 4 C.C.D. – M.D.A.
40 2
114F 4K7 6 2K2 2K2
Rev. Date Serial Avt Mod
R42 G78.F G78.E C45 No . .
3A19–a6 10K +12V OX* 203B 205C A 15/07/96
D OX a17 R10 2K2 13 12 11 10
OX 203D 207C
G77.B C57
10K G103.B D33 0 10/10/96
R11 4K7 OX OUT G116.F 1N914 1 09/01/97
031A C43
100K 10K
202D OX 3
4 13 12 G105.F G106.A 2
RAD 201C 202E 202F 203D G79.D 5 12 R34 R35 2
R50 G78.B G78.D 2 11 13 1
3A19–a8 a22 R17 2K2 4 8
9 8 202D RAD OX*R1 201A 204A
3 9 G101.A 2K2 2K2 208A
RAD RAD 207C
209D X PERM
040A R18 4K7 C74
C51
100K 10K
10K D83
R36 G100.D G105.C SP 201B 202F 208C
1N914
3A7–b30 a6 R3 2K2 9 8 5 6 202C
ON RESET
12
9 13
G100.C G100.F
SP SP 201A 201F 202C 11 5 6 R92 R84 13 12
066B R4 209B 10
100K
4K7 C37 202D OX OX*R2 209B 209C
10K G101.B 2K2 2K2 +12V +12V
204E ACP C91
+12V +12V 10K G116.C C633 C135 R136 D137
E R31 R71 G106.F G106.D E 202F 209C 5 6 10K 1MF 61K9
R604 OX*
3A7–b31 100K R14 2K2 12 8 R 200K +12V
E
a31 100K
13 9
E 201C 203E 204C R634
100K
D635
1N914 T3
R 066B C72 R C607 R606
+12V 10K 10MF 100K D605
G115.A E12
T1 + T2 +12V +12V 2
R20 R52 G80.F C70 G80.E 208C G99.C R637 D638
3A5–a13 100K R19 2K2 13 12 1K 11 10
9
205B 5
100K 1n914
HYST STOP HYST R611 R610
10 T2 40 T3
045C a23 4K7 C53 R69 D68 ER
8 ACP 201F 6 207C
100 1N914 202B 203B
+12V G115.B 204B T1 C636
100K 202E 47K 2K2 G601.B
R641 G116.E 10K
470E
K C612 ACP 203D +12V
AC
a18 10 11
ACP 204E
100K
G642.D
G119.B
3
C640 E60
P S602.B 208D 9 8
1K
G81.A 202D RAD SN 207B 208C 2
8 STOP DSM
F 3A5–a13 a33 3 1 SP 202D 8
G116.A G118.A 209B
9 2 R609
HOLD kV 202D SP
1 1
SN 201B 204C
041D C73 R32 2 T1 204B 2
208C 209A
100K
1K 470E 206C OX OUT C67
202E ER R66 D65
10K 100K 1N914
201 202 203 204 205
29-29
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
4012 VCC
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
4023 VCC
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND
7
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
4093 VCC
GND
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
40106 VCC
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
GND
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Dual D Flip Flop
CL D R S Q Q
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
4013
14 13
Vcc
Q
12
Q
11
C
10
R
9
D
8
S
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X 0 0 Q Q
Q Q C R D S
X X 1 0 0 1
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X X 0 1 1 0
X X 1 1 1 1
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035
4538 Vcc
T =RX X CX
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
29-30
G642.E MODULE 9 – INTERFACE

9PL1
3A1 INTERFACE “DSM” 204D OX*R1
11 10
828 988 G 035

4
9A1 TRANSPANEL
A 205B T2
5
G643.B G118.C
3PL6
13 E59
11 10
204B T1 PL12 PL11
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 12
R24
C.C.D. – M.D.A. 203F S
6
4 1K a26 F 17 10 12
Rev. Date Serial Avt. Mod N 5 MEMO +
A 15/07/96 No . G102.B C60
203E 13 10K
0 10/10/96 S 11
1 09/01/97 N 12
2 8
G102.D
205B T2 10
9
203B T5 G102.C
E58
B
G100.A
9
10 13 1 2 13
R23
12
11 11 1K a25 E 14 3 13
12 VISU +
G75.B
G77.D C22
202D 5 10K
SP 4
204D 6
OX*R2
G76.B
S 203E
N T5 203B
G99.B D95
G99.A G106.E R21
4 6
11 10 1K a24 K 2 9 14
3 2
R86 1N914 R94
202E E MG +
C 5
1
T4 203B R C55
2K2 2K2 10K
C93
10K
5
R25
+ 12 V 202E E 4 1K a27 M 7 2 15
D650
202D R 6 MF +
R639 SP C61
G104.B
G79.C
G75.A G500.C R652 1N914 R651 100K 10K
3
6 5 2 10 9 SN
OX OUT 11
4
5
2K2 2K2
S502.B 203E a30 J 1 1 18
202C 205D 8 C653 COMMON
100K
G76.D T3 205C
11 13
OX OUT D89
12
D 202D
G76.A X PERM 209D R90 1N914 R98
3A9.a5 a15 3 2 T1 204B
OX OUT 2K2 2K2
C41 R9 1 C97
031A 470E G77.C
1K G99.D 2K2
10 8 OX 202D
11 13
RAD 202D T1 + T2
9
12 D87
203E
R88 1N914 R96

T2 205B
2K2 2K2 + 12 V
C95
10K
G76.C
a3 OX*R2 204D R38
+ 12 V + 12 V
E 007C C128 C129 C130
10 9
202A 203D
G116.E
220
E
a8 H 11 8 16
10MF 100K 100K 8 S 203F 207C
0V a35 N X PERM
10 11 C5 C6 X PERM.
007C
E49 10MF 100K
E13 X PERM. +
Card rack 1 G79.A C62 G79.F R46
12 1
10K 12 13 2K2 R14 a20 L 10 15 17
STOP DSM
202B 203B D64 R63 C43 4K7 R15
1N914 100 10K 4K7
205C
K
a9 C 9 7
RAZ ROTATION A/B+

G80.B G80.A R39
F 3A5–b23 a21 4 3 2 1 2K2 R7 a14 D 16 14
Not used C48 R16 C40 4K7 R8 A/B
1K 470E 10K 4K7
206 207 208 209 210
29-31
REV 1
29-32
REV 1
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
30-1
REV 1
30-2

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDS Version No.: 0
FROM THE MONITOR Date: January 1997
Time: Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR WITH
CARDS LOCATION
1 : B.T. Power supply

2 : Deflection board
3 : A.T. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
6 : Light sensor board
7 : Yoke
8 : CRT
ILLUSTRATION 2
SIDE VIEW
30-3

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
POWER REMAINS ON THE MONITOR FOR 2 - 3 SECONDS

WARNING AFTER SWITHING THE TERMINALS PS OFF .
VERY HIGH VOLTAGES ARE GENERATED IN THE MONITOR

( FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOCUS ELECTRODE IS IN THE REGION
OF 8 KV AND THE EHT IN THE REGION OF 23 KV ).
Capacitance discharge.
Note: The screwdriver handle must be insulated.
When disconnecting the EHT cap (final anode) or performing a task requiring the CRT to be handled,
the CRT buld capacitance.
A safe method to do this follows :
D Disconnect the monitor from its power source.

D Connect one end of a wire to the shaft of a screwdriver (handle insulated) and connect
the other end of the wire to the CRT conductive braiding.
D Hold the screwdriver by its insulated handle, then insert the tip under the EHT insulation
cal so the tip shorts the final anode to ground.
Take care not touch the screwdriver’s metal shaft and not scratch the tube glass.
Phisical handling.
In addition to the safety precautions due to the presence of high voltage, the following guidelines
must also be observed :
D Never attempt to remove or straighten the mounting lugs or reposition the outer rimband of the tube.
D When it is necessary to remove the CRT from the monitor, never apply leverage to the glass bottle
or support handle or carry it by the neck (Wear safety glasses at all times when handling).
30-4
SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
For the removal of boards from the monitor follow these instructions :.
1. Remove the plastic cabinet.
2. Remove the upper part of the metal cabinet.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D LV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 1 ).

– Remove the screw supporting the plastic guide.
– Remove the connection with the input AC connector.
– Remove connector J2.
– Remove connector J1 from the video board.
– Remove the screw of the ground connection.
– Remove the board from its position and replace it.
– Carefully insert the new board in exactly the same position as the one removed.
– Install the screw of the ground connection without tightening it.
– Reinstall the plastic guide and tighten the appropriate screw.
– Replace all connectors in the right position.
– Reinsert the input AC connector.
– Tighten the ground screw.
D Deflection board ( illustration 1 : item 2 ).

– Unscrew the metal support and remove it from the cabinet.
– Unplug all the following connectors : J1 – J2 – J4 – J5 – J6 – J7 – W2.
– Unplug connector J2 from the BT power supply board.
– After removing the screws, remove the board from the metal support, then replace it.
– Secure the new board on the metal support with the screws.
– Plug the connectors on the deflection board and on the BT power supply board.
– Screw the board support to the side panel of the metal cabinet.
30-5

D HV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 3 ).
– Remove the connector of the anode voltage from the CRT and the TB2
of the video board.
– Remove connector J6 from the deflection board.
– Remove the screw placed to the left of the container and then carefully remove
the HV power supply.
– Repace the HV power supply mounting it in the appropriate holding hole.
– Reinstall the screw placed on the left.
– Plug the power supply, anode voltage and TB2 connectors.
D Video board ( illustration 1 : item 4 ).

– Remove connectors J1 – J2 – J3 and TB2.
– Remove connector J5 and W2 from the deflection board.
– Remove the board from the CRT socket.
– Replace the board.
– Plug all connectors previously removed.
– Connect the central socket to the CRT.
D Selection board ( illustration 1 : item 5 ).

– Remove the rear metal part with the adjustment potentiometers.
– Remove connector J1.
– Remove the light sensor connector.
– Remove the two screws and replace the board.
– Install the new board paying attention to the position of the led and of the trimmers.
– Secure the metal plate to the frame.
D Light sensor board ( illustration 1 : item 6 ).

– Remove the connector placed along the wiring.
– Remove the mounting screw of the board from the plastic frame.
– Replace the board carefully placing the light sensor in the appropriate hole.
– Secure the board with screws and insert the connector.
30-6
D CRT and deflection Yoke ( illustration 1 : item 7 & 8 ).

– Remove the plastic rear part.
– Remove the upper part of the metal chassis.
– Remove the light sensor connector.
– Remove the plastic front frame.
– Disconnect the clip of the anode voltage from the CRT.
– Remove the video board.
– Remove the two yoke connectors from the deflection board.
– Remove the CRT from the metal chassis by unscrewing the four mounting nuts
placed in the corners.
– Remove the yoke from the CRT.
– Replace the CRT and reinstall the yoke previously removed.
– Execute all mounting procedures in the opposite order.
30-7
REV 1
30-8
6–4 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS
6–4–1 GENERAL
The adjustment sheets given in this chapter comprise all possible preventive or corrective maintenance adjustments.
The first group consists of mechanical adjustments. The second group consists of electronic adjustments.
Before making any electronic adjustments, read the following instructions carefully.
CAUTION :
1) It is forbidden to remove or to replace a PWB when the unit is ON.

2) When a PWB is placed on an extender board, check the continuity of the earth connection with the extension
wire supplied. The omission of this earth connection causes malfunction of the unit.
NOTE : With the exception of the adjustments which are part of the replacement of the X–ray head, of the
filament heating PWB 3A26, or of the timer PWB 3A5, all potentiometers have been calibrated in the factory
and do not have to be readjusted. A recalibration might be necessary in the case of the replacement of a
component on site. Before adjusting a potentiometer, check that the corresponding procedure is at hand.
In this case, follow the procedure described below for the respective adjustment.
THIS SIGN INDICATES THAT TO PERFORM ADJUSTMENTS, X–RAY ARE

TO BE PRODUCED AND THEREFORE CARES AGAINST RADIATION HAZARDS
ARE TO BE TAKEN.
30-9
REV 1
30-10
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card RG 290 1 of 6

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ. Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
30-11

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
Oscilloscope – Multimeter.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS



Phisical handling.
30-12
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
30-13
SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Turn the unit off before removing the cover.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
D Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
D Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 3 for
the adjustment.
D Use a cross–hatch image.
D Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 100 Hz. (See ill.2)
D Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
D Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
D Switch on the monitor.
D Drive the monitor with a 100 Hz signal.
30-14
DEFLECTION BOARD
Location of regulations, Connectors and Test points
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Description of the regulations
L4 : Horizontal linearity
R24 : C Vertical linearity 100Hz
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R42 : Vertical frequency 100Hz
R43 : Vertical linearity 100Hz
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R62 : Vertical amplitude 100Hz
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
R156 : Horizontal blank
30-15
1.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust trimmer R42

to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
1.2 Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a multimeter betwen TP19 and TP20 of the

integrated circuit U2 on the deflection board and adjust
R60 to measure 0mV +/-5 mV.
1.3 Vertical Size Adjustment 100 Hz.
Adjust trimmer R62 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.
1.4 Horizontal Size Adjustment.
Adjust R59 on the Power Supply Board so that the horizontal size measures 337 mm +/–1.5 mm.
1.5 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (100Hz).
Adjust R43 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).
Adjust R24 so that the size of the rectangles in the center equals the size of the rectangles
in the top and bottom parts of the image.
If necessary set the vertical size to 270 mm with trimmer R62.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R42.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
1.6 HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
With a non–magnetic tool adjust L4 so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of the left
half of the image ( +/– 2 mm); if necessary set the horizontal size to 337 mm with R59 on the B.T.
power supply board.
1.7 VERTICAL CENTERING
Adjust R36 so that the image is centered vertically inside the monitor bezel.
1.8 HORIZONTAL CENTERING
Adjust R81 so that the image is centered horizontally inside the monitor bezel.
30-16

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ. Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION
Position and cards description

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
30-17

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS



Phisical handling.
30-18
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
30-19
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
D Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
D Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
D Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 2
for the adjustment.
D Use a cross–hatch image.
D Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 120 Hz. (See ill.3)
D Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
D Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
D Switch on the monitor.
D Drive the monitor with a 120 Hz signal.
30-20
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Description of the regulations
L4 : Horizontal linearity
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
30-21
2.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.
Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust R167 to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
2.2 Vertical Size Adjustment.
Adjust trimmer R82 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.
2.3 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (120 Hz).
Adjust R64 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).
If necessary, use R82 to adjust the vertical size to 270 mm.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R167.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
30-22

Purpose: MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINK Version No.: 00
ADJUSTMENT. Date: June 1996
TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW
1 : B.T. Power supply 4 : Video board

2 : Deflection board 5 : Selection board
3 : A.T. Power supply 6 : Light sensor board
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
30-23
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
None.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
3.1 BLANKING
Use a cross–hatch image and make sure that the light sensor is not active. Connect a probe to TP109
of the video board and adjust R54 to obtain a square wave with an ON time of about 30 s.
Adjust R156 on the Deflection Board to obtain the correct blanking on the left side of the monitor.
Use R54 to adjust blanking on the right side if necessary.
R19 : Clamp
VIDEO BOARD R29 : Cont.
Ç
Ç ÇÇ
ÇÇ
30-24
DEFLECTION BOARD
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇ Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
VIDEO BOARD
R19 : Clamp
R29 : Cont.
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
30-25

3.2 BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST
The BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls are located under a door, on the back of the Monitor.
The controls have been preset when the monitor was installed and should not need to be changed : a light
sensor located on the front of the monitor adjusts the brightness and contrast of the image automatically,
according to the ambient light.
Use a white image with an input level of 250 mV of video signal.

Connect a probe to TP107 of the video board and adjust R19 so that the clamp pulse is 50 mV as the black
level of the video signal.
Connect a probe to TP102 and use R19 to adjust the signal variation to 30 V.
Verify that, when adjusting contrast, the black level does not change, otherwise use R19.
Eliminate the white image and leave only the black level.
Adjust R72 on the deflection board to obtain 9Cd/sqm in darkroom conditions with maximum external
adjustments.
3.3 FOCUS
Display an alphanumeric image with a video signal of 0.7 V and adjust the black part of the image to 0.3 Cd
with the external brightness adjustment; use the contrast control to adjust the white part of the image to about
120 Cd/sqm.
Use R76 to adjust the focus in the center of the image, R41 to adjust the vertical focus and R73 to adjust the
horizontal focus.
Use these three adjustment controls to obtain the best possible focus.
30-26
6–5 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT.
NOTE : The hereunder given list is only for information.

Measurement devices with equivalent caracteristics can be used.
6–5–1 RADIATION MEASUREMENTS
Manufacturer: Capintec Model 192

Type: Dosimeter
Ionization chamber: PM 30
Perform calibration before each measurement, by using the standard provided with the instrument.
6–5–2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Type: milliamperemeter
Mfr: Glossen
Mod: PQM3
Scale: 10 mA
Precision: 1.5%
Annual calibration in comparison with a DVM.
Type: Digital voltmeter

Mfr: Norma
Mod: D1216
Scale: 1 kV and 20 V
Precision: 0.2% + 1 digit
Oscilloscope
Mfr: Tektronix
Mod: 564
Precision: 3%
Chronometer
Mfr: Huer
Scale: 30 min.
Precision: 0.2 s
mAs meter
Mfr: Fluke
Mod: 8000A
Scale: 2 – 20 – 200 mAs
Precision: 1%
Annual calibration by the supplier.
Multimeter
Mfr: AVO
Mod: 9 MK11
Scale: 1 mA and 10 mA
Precision: 1%
30-27
REV 1
30-28
REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page A-67
SCHEMATICS : MONITOR
BLOCK DIAGRAM
H. YOKE
LIGHT FR
SENSOR W3 W2
BOARD
BRIG. 220K SELECTION W4

100 / 120 Hz W1 BOARD W2
W6
CONT 12V
W7 120/100 Hz NC BR 0V NC
W8 GND
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6
NC
1 2 3 4
1
1 2 3 4 5 J4 C VID
2
J1 H. COIL GND 3 W4 W2
V. INP 4 1 VIDEO IN
W3 W1
J7 OUT IN 2 GND
1 J2
V. COIL 1
2 2
J2 CONT. F1 8
3
10K
4 K 7 CRT
J5 J1
FOCUS 4
DEFLECTION BLK 6 W11 G2 3
YOKE
HS 5 W5 G1
BOARD G1 4 W6 F2
2
1
0V 3 W7
0V 2
5V 1 W9 VIDEO GND
J6
W2
BOARD TB1
0V 27V 62V 12V 95V

4 3 2 1 W8 W7 W6 W5 W3
J3
W8
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB2
FOCUS
G2
2 3 4 5 6 7
27V
HPV 0V J2
95V W5
0V W6
H.V.
L.V. 6.3V W8
POWER +12V W7
POWER
SUPPLY NC W9
SUPPLY
W2 W1 GP1
VAC
ANODIC V
30-29
DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
1 : L.V. Power supply

3 : H.V. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-30
From L.V. Power supply
549A
545E
Brightness control
A 549B
549C
549B
508 DEFLECTION BOARD

( 1/2 )
509
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 No .
F 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510
30-31
DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-32
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000 DEFLECTION BOARD

Rev. Date
C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Serial Avt. Mod
( 2/2 )
A 15/07/96 No .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2
511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520
30-33
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
VIDEO BOARD
ÍÍÍÍÍ

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-34
B
122D
or
144C
VIDEO BOARD
E Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 No .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2
521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530
30-35
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-36
A Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD C.C.D. – M.D.A.
A 15/07/96 No .
0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
30-37
L. V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

TOP VIEW OF MONITOR
WITH CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-38
MODULE 9 – INTERFACE
9Tb1.
A 4
or
220 VAC 11
from
9TR1
002B
2
or
9
1
or
8
L.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

C.C.D. – M.D.A.
Rev. Date Serial Avt Mod
A 15/07/96 No . .
F 0 10/10/96
1 09/01/97
2
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550
30-39
REV 1
30-40

Manual Arco en C Traumato

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual Arco en C Traumato

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Arco en C Traumato

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e Medical Systems

Stenoscop Technical Supplement

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 6 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SECTION 7 - THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

This page intentionally left blank.

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL

SECTION TITLE PAGE

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

This page intentionally left blank.

1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION

I,_________________________________________, hereby acknowledge the following with respect to my

Student Signature _______________________________________________ Date _____________

(SSAN where appropriate) (Employee Number) (Pouch Mail Code)

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION

PLEASE FILL IN ALL APPLICABLE BLANKS

Please print name as you wish it to appear on your certificate.

CLASS IN WHICH YOU ARE ENROLLED:

This page intentionally left blank.

1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES

SEXUAL HARASSMENT DEFINED

EXAMPLES OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT

INTENT vs. IMPACT"

OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT WILL NOT BE TOLERATED

EXAMPLES OF OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT

S Telling Your Manager or Any Member of Management.

Student Signature ___________________________________ Date _

INTENT vs. IMPACT"

S Locations of Right to Know" holders.